385: 7 Daily Habits That Changed My Relationship With My Podcast (And Made It Sustainable)Written By Melvin Varghese PhD ,Podcasting can be an incredible way to grow your impact beyond the therapy room and is an excellent bridge to things like writing a book, course creation, or speaking at conferences. But without the right systems in place, it can also lead to burnout. After nearly a decade of podcasting, I've discovered seven key habits that helped me create a sustainable, long-term podcasting rhythm.
The key shift? I began designing my podcast around my life, not the other way around. Now, I release episodes for two months, then take a month off to recharge while replays run. Summers and late winters also align with my daughter's school breaks.
Takeaway: Plan your podcast schedule to fit your lifestyle, not just for growth.
Check out my free podcasting workshop for more tips.
I gather ideas from listener emails, conversations with colleagues, and insights from books and podcasts during daily hikes. Regular idea capture ensures I always have fresh content.
Takeaway: Don't wait for inspiration—build a system to capture ideas daily.
Follow a Repeatable Episode OutlineWinging it made my episodes disorganized and stressful to record. Now, I use a simple structure:
Introduction: Pose a question or share a story.
Takeaway: Use a consistent format to simplify production and improve clarity. This is an excellent article that has some podcasting scripts. If you want to take it to the next level, copy/paste a few of the script examples into Chat GPT and ask it to store it to memory. Then share a topic and three points you're thinking about and ask it to create a transcript based on the template you just provided.
Takeaway: Batch recording reduces stress and allows guilt-free breaks.
Warm Up Your Voice and EnergyLow energy made some early episodes fall flat. Now, I:
Drink warm tea or water with lemon.
Takeaway: Treat podcasting like public speaking—warm up before you record.
Now, I prioritize promoting my own resources, like my free Course Creator Starter Kit, before adding sponsor messages.
Takeaway: Be your own sponsor first. Our free How To Start A Podcast Guide For Therapists also has some great tips on monetization.
This engagement helps me understand what resonates, stay motivated, and build genuine connections.
Takeaway: Treat podcasting as a two-way conversation.
Final ThoughtsPodcasting sustainably isn't about doing more—it's about doing the right things consistently. By designing for longevity, capturing ideas, following a structure, batching content, warming up, promoting your own offers, and engaging with your audience, you can build a podcast that lasts.
Ready to start your own podcast? Join my free Podcasting Workshop and learn the exact steps I've followed to grow a podcast to 1.8M+ downloads.
STC ELITE MASTERMINDLast Week to Join Our Online Course Mastermind. We’re in the final week of our STC Elite Online Course Mastermind launch!
This is a small group of thoughtful, purpose-driven therapists supporting each other as we launch an online course in 2025.
If you’ve been thinking about:
❇️ Creating an online course
❇️ Generating income that's not tied to client sessions
❇️ Getting your message out in a bigger way
Now's the time!
👉 Learn more: sellingthecouch.com/mastermind
👉 Book a 1:1 chat with me: sellingthecouch.com/mastermindcall
📌Not sure yet? Sign up for our free 7-day email course to validate your online course idea.
Transcript (AI-Generated)Melvin Varghese:
Hey there, it's Melvin. I hope you're doing well. Before we jump into today's session, just wanted to let you know that STC Elite, our mastermind for therapists creating their first online courses open for enrollment. If you've been thinking about creating an online course and have been a fan of the STC podcast and are looking to launch your online course in a community of other therapists, you can check out the mastermind over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash mastermind. or you can download our free online course starter kit. It's a seven day email course that'll help validate your course idea. That's over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash course kit. We'll jump into today's session. Hello, hello, welcome to today's session, Selling the Couch. I hope you're doing well, having an awesome day. So today's podcast is titled Seven Daily Habits That Changed My Podcasting Journey and Made It Sustainable.
If you've been thinking about creating a podcast this coming year, then I hope that today's podcast session is incredibly helpful for you. I, this is also something if you are already a podcaster and you've thought about whether, man, like I want to keep this podcast going, but I'm not sure if I can keep it going. I think that today's session will be helpful for you. More than anything, trust me, I've been there. Podcasting is one of the best ways to grow your impact beyond the clinical room, but it can also be overwhelming, especially if you don't set it up for the long game. Everything from editing to uploads to actually releasing content and all of that stuff. I have been podcasting for a decade now. Well, it will be 10 years next month. And I remember when I first launched the STC podcast in March of 2015, I just remember one of the things I kept thinking was, oh my gosh, am I going to get stuck on the content creation hamster wheel?
That's the last thing that I wanted to do. But now we're over 380 episodes of the podcast. We are just about to hit 1.82 million downloads. And recently I learned the podcast is now in the top 0.5% of all podcasts in the entire world. And as I was creating this, I think the most important thing is I don't podcast like every week of the year. In fact, it's actually just the opposite. I've really tried to build this podcast around the life that I want to live. versus just releasing episodes for the sake of it. Now, having done that for the first year and quickly realizing how this was a formula to burnout. So if you want a sustainable podcasting rhythm that doesn't burn you out, I think this podcast will be helpful for you. So just in terms of the actual habits. So habit one is designed for longevity and not for growth. Designed for longevity and not growth. In my first year, I literally tried to release a podcast episode every single week. I had some podcasting coaches. I was in the podcasting space. And they all kept saying, the more episodes that you release, the bigger your download numbers are going to be, the faster your podcast is going to grow. All of those things. And those things are actually absolutely true. What they often fail to mention is that Trying to release a podcast episode on a weekly basis for all of the year is a quick formula for burnout.
And now one of the things that I have shifted in my mind is I really try to design my podcast and the STZ podcast for consistency over decades, not just months. So my general rhythm with this podcast is I do two months on, which is where I basically release new episodes. and then I take one month off where we run replays of older episodes some of the most popular episodes from the archives. The summers and late winters I also take off and this is just aligned with our daughter's school schedule because again I wanted to design my podcasting workflow around my life and versus it becoming another thing that was you know, that I had to deal with. This schedule, what I have found, and again, I would say you don't have to necessarily follow my schedule, but really look at your life and mark off and block off the months that you actually don't want to podcast. I think it will set you up for long-term sustainability.
What I found for me is this schedule really keeps me energized and it prevents podcast fatigue. It also lets me come up with new content for the podcast that I am genuinely inspired by. I also get to do like some nerdy keyword research and figure out okay, is this actually stuff that folks are wanting versus this pool to just release episodes because I've got to get an episode out next week or something like that. So the big takeaway with this first point is put your podcasting schedule around the life that you want and don't, not the other way around. So don't end up podcasting, you know, on a unsustainable pace and then you either burn out or it compromises and gets into other domains of your life, i.e. your personal life, your relationships, your hobbies, those kinds of things.
Habit two is capture ideas daily. So, is a little bit embarrassing. But the very first months of the podcast, I would literally sit in front of a computer. And I would just stare and I would go, Okay, what am I gonna come up with? What am I going to talk about? And the truth is, that is really, really hard to generate content off of. So instead I do is I have a private Slack channel that's just for myself and within the Slack channel I have a little section that just says podcast episode ideas. And where do I get these ideas from? So the ideas are basically when listeners or SGC newsletter subscribers email me back with content we usually try to check in once or twice a year with regard to you know what episodes would be helpful for you. There are also just conversations I have with colleagues that I'm like oh this would be a really interesting episode because you know it just would be beneficial for for others. The other ones that I see are you know I'll look on like things like Reddit or when I post on LinkedIn the posts that tend to do well or have a lot of engagement and well is not always like number of likes, it's actually more looking at comments and engagement and as sort of a way to inspire me of whether it's a potential podcast episode. Other things I look at are, you know, I try to do daily hikes, so seven days a week. I'm usually at that point, if I'm not talking to someone on the hike, I'm usually listening to either a podcast or a book on Audible and or some sort of YouTube video. And that also allows me to just find new inspiration. Biggest thing I wanted to just share with you is never rely on inspiration in the moment. Capture ideas constantly so that you can have a constant pipeline when it comes to podcast content. So the big takeaway is a steady idea bank means that you're never scrambling for an episode topic. Habit three is to follow a repeatable episode outline. So I used to wing it when it came to podcast episodes. And part of this is I feel like every podcaster goes through this journey in the initial stages. You're just trying to figure out your own bearings and what makes the most sense for you. But now what I do is especially when they are, if so, you have probably noticed on the interview based episodes, I always come in, I do an intro, then we actually do the interview, and then I do an outro episode where I reflect and share some of the insights that I picked up on the podcast conversation. So that's what those interviews look like. On the solo episodes, what I generally do is I follow a framework, which is basically I introduce the episode by posing a question of what the episode is going to be about. I usually then share a little bit of a story, and then I do either 3 points, 5 points, or 7. In most scenarios I like to default to 3 because I'm trying to get in 5 and 7. That's just a lot of content. Like this episode has 7 points and I know that I always like try to balance that because I know that it's a lot of information to consume. But after that, I usually then just have a call to action. So what I really try to do is down, not all the time, I you know, I try to really rely on inspiration. But a lot of the solo episodes I tend to do tend to be focused on either podcasting or online courses. And those are things that I live and breathe, lived and breathe here over the past decade. It's also things that we have products and services related to. So it's just something to think about when you create your own solo episodes, think about products and services that you offer, and create episodes around that, and then have an invitation to, to join that product or a service. So the biggest takeaway is a structured outline means that you just get clear episodes and sort of a faster production time. So even as I am listening to content or looking on Slack, I'm like taking the idea and I will take the idea and I'll be okay, what's the story I can come up with? What are three talking points and what's the call to action that I can implement as a result of that? So habit number four is batch record on my off months. So instead of recording week to week, I actually batch record multiple episodes in advance. I found the most I can do is three episodes in one sitting, but usually two is a nice sweet spot for me. And so for example, for me is I'll record January and February episodes in November and December. This lets me take like real breaks in even in January and February while my podcast still runs. January, February also tends to be the months where our online course Mastermind launch is happening. So the thought of both recording solo episodes or interviews of the podcast while trying to do a launch, I learned that the hard way four years ago and I was like, I got to figure out something a little bit more sustainable. Hey, it's Melvin. I hope that you're enjoying today's podcast session. Just wanted to also let you know that STC Elite, our mastermind for therapist course creators, is now open for enrollment. If you've been thinking about creating an online course, and specifically if 2025 is the year that you want to create your online course, definitely encourage you to check out our mastermind. It's over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash mastermind. We launched this back in 2021 and since then over 60 of our colleagues have gone through our mastermind. It includes a ton of support all the way from live teaching, live feedback from colleagues and from our team to build out and structure your online course all the way to mindset coaching, all the way to access to our video editing and graphic design team so that you don't have to hire everything separately. We made it really super comprehensive and I think you're really going to enjoy it. Again, the link is over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash mastermind. Enrollment does wrap up at the end of August. So definitely encourage you to check it out and consider joining us. And again, we have a free email course. It's seven days. It'll help validate your course idea. I know that's the biggest struggle many of us are navigating of whether the course is actually going to make money. And we put all of this into a simple to understand email course that you can check out over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash course kit, sellingthecouch.com forward slash course kit. We'll jump right back into today's session. So why does this batching method work? Basically, it reduces stress. It kind of keeps my energy high. It also creates a little bit of a buffer for emergencies. Just a side note, one thing that colleagues will often ask me is, like, how many episodes, Mel, should I have in the bank so that it feels good? I find that the sweet spot is somewhere between three and six episodes in the bank. Six if you're, like, more, like, conservative and just want to be, like, extra cautious. three, I think three to four, I think is a really nice sweet spot. And I think beyond that, I find that there's usually things just in the world of news and things like that that are changing. And so if you get too far ahead, it's really hard to then go back. I suppose you can always create an episode and just plug one in, but it just makes it gives you enough flexibility to be like, hey, I'm far enough ahead, but I have some flexibility if I want to release an episode because something is inspiring me in that moment. Now, so the big takeaway is record ahead so that you can take guilt free breaks. And I feel that that's going to be just a lot more sustainable. Habit five is warm up my voice and energy before recording. So if you've ever listened to a there were some episodes in the past where I would just kind of my energy would be really low when it comes to recording the podcast episode. Now, I'm not a quote, unquote, like high energy in your face voice at all. But what I noticed is a lot of time there were times previously where I would just be fatigued and then I would try to record a podcast. What was happening behind the scenes is I was not doing any sort of a warm up. So I would just sit down, turn on my audio or now like turn on my video and then start to record without ever actually warming up. So I do a couple of things now. So I will usually drink warm tea or warm water with lemon. That's good for vocal cords. I usually do that before I even record and I usually will even have like a tea with me while I am recording just in case I have my, you know, I get a frog in my throat or something like that. Then I do a couple of minutes, usually about two minutes of deep breathing where I'm just centering myself. What I really try to focus on is not just the thoughts that are going through my mind, but just really focusing on gratitude, just the opportunity to record a podcast, to be able to share my thoughts, all of those things. And then, then what I will usually do is I will do some sort of a, you know, tongue twister, Sally sells seashells by the seashore, something like that, just to just to warm up my vocals a little bit. And something I've done in the past, which I don't do as much now, because just because my setup kind of limits me to have more of a sit down setup, I could do it into more stand up, but then it would just be more moving stuff around. but I have in the previous times when I've just recorded an audio only actually stood up to record a podcast episode. This is where a standing desk and then comes in really handy and also if you have one of these like mic clamps that you can just clamp to your desk as your desk moves up the you know the mic will move up with you so you don't have to then go and adjust like multiple things and all of those things. The biggest thing takeaway from this is treat podcasting like public speaking. Your voice just needs that warm up time. And I think doing that just can be incredibly helpful. Habit six is promote my own offers first and not just sponsors. Early on with the STC podcast, I relied on sponsors and we're always so grateful for sponsorships. I try to be super discretionary in terms of even the sponsors that we get on. But if I'm just being completely honest, and I think by and large, we did a good job. But in the early days of STC, because most of the revenue that STC was generating was coming from sponsorship income, I felt more pressure to accept sponsors because I wanted to keep the podcast going. And then I also wanted to pull back from clinical work over time, and I needed to replace that income. But over time, what I came to realize is we've worked with some amazing sponsors, and we continue to work with some. Of course, I try to, again, do my best to filter and sort, because I know how much trust that you have in me. But by the same token, I don't want my income tied to the marketing budget of a company, no matter how great the sponsor is. I did that for the first couple of years and income that I was expecting for to come in, didn't come in. And it just left me scrambling and stressed out and all of that stuff. And I just realized, yeah, that's not the game that I want to play. And I also realized that, I've mentioned this study a couple of times, but there was a study done in 2023-2024 by ACAS Media, and they studied all media personalities, both traditional media as well as digital media, and they found that podcasters are the most trusted media personalities. YouTubers are the second most. And so what I realized is there's The nature of podcasting is there's a level of trust that gets built. And so I just thought, why not start to just share my our own products and services on episodes. Now, here's kind of a next level. Now, we use captivate to do this as our podcast host. If you go to selling the couch calm for captivate for selling the couch calm forward slash captivate. There's a discount code there in like a free seven or 14 day trial. But basically, our podcast host allows us to run dynamic ads across all the episodes. So for example, if we have a, you know, even as you're maybe listening to this currently, we are mastermind launches happening, right? So I can run those ads across all our episodes versus just this one episode. So it doesn't matter if someone is listening to this episode or another episode, they'll still hear the ads for the podcast on the podcast. So generally what I have found, and I'll maybe do another episode on this, but we have found that not just like inviting to the paid product, but inviting to something that's even more valuable. So for example, any time that I do an online course-related episode, I'll share an invite to sign up for our free seven-day email course. This helps therapists validate their course idea. And it's an action-packed course. I spent almost $10,000 creating it. And it's just a high-value course. There's graphics and all this stuff that comes over email. That's just it's not like a typical email course. And so the big takeaway from this is be your own sponsor. Don't wait for external ads to make money. Finally, the seventh habit that I would share with you is engage with listeners on some sort of a regular cadence. It doesn't have to be every day. but really try to aim for it on a weekly basis. So what for personally for me is I try to set aside about 10 to 15 minutes every week to respond to listener DMs that come to me on LinkedIn or emails. And a little thing on this, I usually send like loom videos back. So I'll send a video response back. One, I just feel like in this world of, you know, social media and where the human connection, it's so easy to get lost, I think getting a personalized video from somebody, especially someone that's taken the time to write to me, I think it's a nice touch. I try to do that as much as possible. And then at a practical level, I find that the videos just take a little much less time for me to create than actually sitting down and like writing an email out. The other things that you can ask your listeners are what topics they want covered. You can also like check, you know, we have, I think, almost over 300 reviews of the podcast and 250, let's just say 250. I'm pretty sure it's over 300, but let's say 250. And so sometimes when I'll look on Apple podcast and see what the reviews are and what's like resonating for folks. So when I look at those reviews also, like it keeps me motivated, ensures my content is relevant to serving our field well. So the big takeaway is podcast isn't a one-way street. So engage your listeners on some sort of a cadence, whether it's daily or weekly like I do. So the seven habits again to sustain your podcast for the long term is design for longevity, not just for growth. Two is capture ideas daily. Third is follow a repeatable episode outline. Four is batch record on my off months. Five is warm up my voice and energy before recording. Six is promote my own offers first, not just relying on sponsors. and seven is engage with listeners on some sort of a regular cadence. If you enjoyed this episode and you are like Mel, I am wanting to start a podcast. I've been sitting with this for a long time. We actually have a free podcasting workshop. This takes a lot of lessons I've learned over the past 10 years, puts it into a 90 minute presentation. When I do these presentations, I believe in like high quality teaching. And so you can actually learn a lot of the tools and tips and how to record and all of that stuff in this free podcasting workshop. You can sign up for a day and time that works for you. It's an evergreen workshop, so it's got a bunch of times and slots available. It's over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash podcasting workshop. Have a great rest of your day and I will see you next time. Bye.
Narrator: Thanks for listening to the Selling the Couch podcast. For more great content and to stay up to date, visit www.sellingthecouch.com.
Melvin Varghese: Hey there, thank you so much for tuning in to today's session. Just wanted to also let you know that we have a free email newsletter that goes out every week. You can download it over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash newsletter. Basically that newsletter contains some of the stuff that's happening behind the scenes with STC and also with my life and how I'm balancing and trying to balance being both an entrepreneur as well as building a life around my family and my health as well. And it also contains the latest podcast episode and some of the stuff that I'm doing on LinkedIn, some of the strategies and things that are working for me. And then finally, a brand new section called On Mel's Mind, where I take a video or a book or a blog post or something like that that's inspiring me for that week, and I share how I'm implementing it both in my life and in my business. Again, you can download that over at signthecouch.com forward slash newsletter. And if you are one of the 3700 colleagues that have been a part of the email newsletter is so appreciate you and I'm grateful for your support. We genuinely try to make these helpful and and just based on the data and based on the feedback we're getting, it seems like we're doing a really good job. So appreciate you and I hope they have a great day.
timestamps00:00:00 – Introduction to Sustainable Podcasting
00:01:57 – Habit 1: Design for Longevity, Not Just Growth
00:05:06 – Habit 2: Capture Ideas Daily
00:07:17 – Habit 3: Follow a Repeatable Episode Outline
00:09:49 – Habit 4: Batch Record on Off Months
00:12:50 – Habit 5: Warm Up Voice and Energy Before Recording
00:15:30 – Habit 6: Promote Your Own Offers First
00:19:22 – Habit 7: Engage with Listeners Regularly
00:21:41 – Conclusion and Free Podcasting Workshop Invitation
selling the couch podcast with melvin varghese phdWeekly interviews, strategy, and advice for building your private practice in and beyond the therapy room.
Apple podcastsYou TubeSpotify ready to launch your podcast?Please check out our FREE podcasting workshop for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This workshop is pre-recorded so you can watch it on a day and time that works for your schedule.
It contains a lot of practical tips that we've learned as STC has reached 1.81 million+ downloads and become a 6-figure business with podcasting as the backbone.
sign up for podcasting workshopMelvin varghese phdPsychologist and Founder @ Selling The Couch
Melvin Varghese, PhD is a licensed psychologist in Philadelphia, PA. In 2015, Dr. Varghese founded Selling The Couch, a podcast to help therapists move from clinical to online income.
On the podcast, he interviews successful practitioners about how they've built their practices, social media/marketing experts, and shares lessons as he uses our clinical skills to create an online business powered by podcasting + online courses.
The podcast is one of the top Career podcasts in Apple Podcasts, has been downloaded over 1.8 million times, and is heard in over 125 countries. Mel is a successful course creator with 240+ students and $300k+ in course sales.
More PostsUncomfortable Truths About Private Practice Finances (with James Childress)by Melvin Varghese | Jan 24, 2025 | Blog, Private Practice, STC Podcast
Melvin Varghese with James Childress on Uncomfortable Private Practice Finance Truths
When Should You Hire An Intake Coordinator? (Uriah Guilford)by Melvin Varghese | Feb 6, 2025 | Blog, Growing Your Practice, Private Practice, Productivity, STC Podcast
Uriah Guildford joins us to talk about hiring an intake coordinator.
5 Signs You're Ready To Launch Your Online Courses (with Melvin Varghese))by Melvin Varghese | Jan 31, 2025 | Blog, Online Courses, Passive Income for Therapists, Private Practice, STC Podcast
Melvin Varghese giving an overview of launching successful online courses and how you know you are ready.
« Older Entries The post 7 Daily Habits That Changed My Podcasting Journey (and Made It Sustainable) appeared first on Selling The Couch | Melvin Varghese PhD.
384: Should I Hire An Intake Coordinator For My Private Practice?Written By Melvin Varghese PhD Should You Hire an Intake Coordinator for Your Private Practice?Is it time to hire an intake coordinator? Many private practice owners find themselves overwhelmed by client inquiries, scheduling, and administrative tasks. As a solo or group practice owner, you may be wondering if bringing in an intake coordinator is the right move for your business.
Recently I had the chance to sit down and record a podcast (you can listen or watch above as it dives deeper into things), but in this post, we’ll cover:
✅ What an intake coordinator does
✅ When solo and group practitioners should consider hiring one
✅ How an intake coordinator can improve client conversion rates
✅ The biggest mistakes therapists make when hiring an intake coordinator
Let’s dive in.
What is an Intake Coordinator?An intake coordinator (sometimes called a client care coordinator) is the first point of contact for potential clients. Their primary job is to create a smooth, welcoming experience from the first inquiry to the first session.
Their responsibilities typically include:
✅ Managing initial client inquiries (calls, emails, website forms)
✅ Scheduling first appointments
✅ Handling administrative tasks like rescheduling, processing super bills, and updating client records
For many practices, an intake coordinator is the bridge between a potential client in need and a clinician who can help. When done right, they ensure that clients feel supported and guided—not lost in an overwhelming process.
When Should You Hire an Intake Coordinator?For Solo Practitioners
Most solo practitioners don’t need an intake coordinator. With the right electronic health record (EHR) system, automation tools, and online scheduling, solo clinicians can efficiently manage client inquiries.
However, you might benefit from hiring an intake coordinator if:
✔️ You’re seeing 20+ clients per week and feel overwhelmed
✔️ You run additional businesses, coaching programs, or speaking engagements
✔️ You need help managing calls, emails, and administrative tasks
A virtual assistant trained in mental health intakes could be a great alternative. Many solo practitioners hire part-time intake support before fully committing to a dedicated role.
For Group Practices
If you own a growing group practice, an intake coordinator is one of the most valuable hires you can make. Many group practice owners wait too long to delegate this role, leading to missed calls, delayed responses, and lost potential clients.
Signs you need an intake coordinator:
✔️ Your practice has 5+ clinicians and is actively growing
✔️ You’re personally handling intake calls but don’t have time to respond quickly
✔️ Your conversion rate (inquiries → scheduled clients) is lower than expected
According to industry benchmarks, private pay practices typically convert 20-40% of inquiries into paying clients, while insurance-based practices see 40-80% conversion rates. A well-trained intake coordinator can significantly increase these numbers.
Common Mistakes When Hiring an Intake CoordinatorMany therapists struggle with delegating client intake because they feel no one can handle it as well as they do. But as Uriah Guilford, founder of Productive Therapist, explains:
“I thought hiring an intake coordinator would result in lower conversion rates. Instead, they performed better than me!”
Here are some of the biggest hiring mistakes therapists make:
🚫 Waiting too long to hire: By the time many practice owners realize they need help, they’re already overwhelmed. Hiring proactively prevents bottlenecks.
🚫 Not providing enough training: Intake coordinators need guidance. Set up a structured training plan, conduct mock calls, and offer regular feedback.
🚫 Giving too many contact options: Many therapists overload their websites with choices—call, text, email, online form, fax, mailing address. Too many options create decision fatigue. Instead, choose one primary contact method and guide clients toward it.
How to Retain a Great Intake CoordinatorOnce you find an amazing intake coordinator, you want to keep them. Here’s how:
✔️ Pay them well: Competitive pay prevents turnover (here's a helpful Reddit chat on what it's like to be an intake coordinator).
✔️ Offer benefits: Even part-time staff appreciate perks like flexible schedules or professional development stipends.
✔️ Foster a positive work environment: Avoid high-stress bottlenecks and support them with clear workflows.
A happy, well-trained intake coordinator will not only increase conversions but also free up your time so you can focus on your strengths as a clinician and business owner.
Final Thoughts: Is It Time to Hire an Intake Coordinator?If your private practice is growing, overwhelmed with inquiries, or struggling to convert potential clients into booked sessions, hiring an intake coordinator might be the next best step.
For solo practitioners, automation and online scheduling might be enough. But for busy solo clinicians and group practices, a skilled intake coordinator can save time, increase revenue, and improve client experiences.
Want help hiring the right intake coordinator? Check out Productive Therapist’s Intake Hiring Starter Pack (Use code STC for 25% off).
What’s your biggest struggle with intake coordination? Let me know in the comments!
Transcript (AI-Generated)Melvin Varghese:
Hey there, it's Melvin. I hope you're doing well. Before we jump into today's session, just wanted to let you know that STC Elite, our mastermind for therapists creating their first online courses open for enrollment. If you've been thinking about creating an online course and have been a fan of the STC podcast and are looking to launch your online course in a community of other therapists, you can check out the mastermind over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash mastermind. or you can download our free online course starter kit. It's a seven day email course that'll help validate your course idea. That's over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash course kit. We'll jump into today's session. Hello, hello, welcome to today's session of Selling the Couch. I hope you're doing well, having an incredible day. So today's podcast is asking this question of, should I hire an intake coordinator for my private practice? Whether you are a solo practitioner or a group practitioner, I think this episode will be incredibly helpful for you and more than anything I think will give you some barometers in order to think about whether an intake coordinator does make sense for you.
I'm joined by Uriah Guilford at ProductiveTherapist.com. Uriah is based in Northern California. He's a group practice owner and also owns Productive Therapist which is a company that hire that has virtual assistants and intake coordinators and Uriah has definitely been through the fire has been a group practice owner since 2015 and has learned a lot about the intake coordinator journey hired many intake coordinators and has learned kind of what works and what doesn't work, what questions to ask, how to train, and all of these different things. We start our conversation with a really basic question of what in the world is an intake coordinator, just to make sure we're all on the same page. Then we dive into the more nitty-gritty, how would you know as a solo practitioner whether an intake coordinator makes sense for you? and how would you know as a group practice owner of when it would make sense for you. And then we dive into some of these responsibilities of an intake coordinator, how hiring the right intake coordinator can really help you get some of those hours back in the day, but also you can leverage that position into helping your practice in multiple ways. And then we get into data privacy. How do you think about and how do you handle data privacy? Because the intake coordinator presumably is going to be the first person that a potential client is talking to. And how do you sort of handle all of that kind of stuff? And I think Uriah's answer is pretty interesting, because it really does depend on the situation. And then we dive into a couple of different logistical things. What happens if an intake coordinator gets sick or goes on vacation? How do you sort of triage and handle calls that are coming in? What's a top mistake that Uriah sees clinicians making in hiring an intake coordinator? And then we wrap up with what are the metrics that Uriah thinks about when trying to determine whether an intake coordinator makes sense for both the solo and a group practitioner? I think you're going to really enjoy this conversation. Even if you have no plans right now to hire an intake coordinator, I think conversations like this are incredibly helpful because I think they help us to think about how we can design our practices in a way that is sustainable for us so that we're not trying to juggle all of the things that when it comes to private practice ownership. So here's my conversation with Uriah Guilford from ProductiveTherapist.com. Hey Uriah, welcome to Selling the Couch.
Uriah Guilford:
Thanks Melvin. I'm excited to be on your podcast.
Melvin Varghese:
I know we were just talking right before, man, I can't believe we touched base in 2018 and it's a little ridiculous. Like I have to like publicly apologize that it's taken this long for you to come on the podcast. You are doing some amazing things for our field, sharing some just like incredibly helpful things. And I'm thankful for you. Thankful that we get to have a conversation on intake coordinators and just the whole process of that.
Uriah Guilford:
Yeah, absolutely. It's one of my absolute favorite things to do to go out and collect resources and find cool things, whether it's software or podcasts or all kinds of resources for therapists and share them. That's like my favorite thing to do.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, that's so awesome. And I'm like looking at your background and I'm like, man, Mario, and we have like so many that's like back. What is that Mario like the Super Mario?
Uriah Guilford:
So look what's behind me is my original Super Nintendo with a tube TV. Yes, so I can turn around and play some Super Mario Brothers anytime.
Melvin Varghese:
How awesome is that? That like brings back good memories like original like Mario Duck Hunt, all that stuff.
Uriah Guilford:
So much fun.
Melvin Varghese:
So much fun. So you know, I had a bunch of questions for you. But I wanted to start here. I know that most of us probably know the answer on this, but I don't want to like make any assumptions. So what exactly is an intake coordinator particularly related to private practice?
Uriah Guilford:
Sure. An intake coordinator, sometimes referred to as a client care coordinator, is the person who's in charge and manages that initial contact between the client and the clinician. And they're really in charge of the whole intake process. And it's their job to create a smooth and welcoming experience for new clients. I like to say it's their role to kind of smooth the pathway from that first contact to the first session. And it's such a valuable and important role for the client experience and for the start of therapy.
Melvin Varghese:
I love the fact that you talked about it as a smooth path because I can imagine for many people to make that decision to call and seek out therapy is a hard one and then just making it a smooth and joyful process even from that call. And then also I know that I'm sure all of us have heard these stories where someone reaches out to a therapist and they never hear back, right? So there's that other side of it, of the courage it took and then not hearing back. And then the other side of it, right? As clinicians, like, you know, clinicians maybe are perhaps slammed or whatever it is, right? And they're just not able to recall. So there's just, there's so many layers to it. And I love the fact that you use the word smooth.
Uriah Guilford:
Yeah, there are so many challenges on both sides. And interestingly enough, in the last two weeks or so, I've been doing a handful of intake audits where I'm actually sort of reviewing people's intake process and pretending to be a client from landing on their website to reaching out, filling out their form, even going so far as to get added to their EHR as a client and go through the consent form process. It's super interesting to see it from the client perspective. And one of my conclusions is that it's still too hard to find a good therapist and actually start and complete the process to get in to see a good therapist. Even with all the resources that we have now, it's still very, very difficult.
Melvin Varghese:
When you were doing that whole like audits like that, where did you see like the common hiccup? Is it just the amount of steps that we're taking or what was that?
Uriah Guilford:
Yeah, there's a number of things. The first thing that comes to mind is the challenge of actually finding a therapist and then reaching out and getting a quick response. So almost no one picks up their phone. That hasn't changed in years. Some larger group practices maybe have an intake coordinator that can answer the phone line, which is really helpful. But the majority of the time someone is calling or even reaching out by text to a therapy practice, there's a delay of hours to days to actually get things started. So it's just really slow.
Melvin Varghese:
The other thing you mentioned is you went through websites and like filled out forms. Have you found anything like that where majority of clients are like filling out online forms versus like calling phones? Like, is there any like broader trends that you've noticed?
Uriah Guilford:
There's usually a number of contact options that people have on their website. It's usually a form, a phone number, and maybe there's some other options there. My favorite is online scheduling so that the potential client can actually schedule a call with the therapist or with the intake coordinator to talk about their needs and talk about what kind of therapist they're looking for. So those are usually the options that most people put out there. And people preference of potential clients depends on so many different factors. Some younger people would prefer to text or just schedule online. And then a lot of people we've noticed in my practice still want to call. So it kind of it's across the spectrum. Yeah.
Melvin Varghese:
So I guess broadly, it probably is wise to offer different options until you've kind of gotten clarity of like, oh, this is where are like disproportionately these calls are coming from.
Uriah Guilford:
Yeah, my advice to practice owners, whether they're solo or group, is to choose the most ideal contact method for them and then highlight that. One of the mistakes I've seen on a lot of people's websites is that they give people too many options. So they're like, call us, text us, fill out this form, fax us. Here's our mailing address. Send us a mail. There's too many options. And I always like to, you know, when we're training our intake coordinator team at Productive Therapist, I always point out that when people are reaching out for therapy, they're in crisis, some level of crisis. It might be mild to moderate, but it might be severe. So they're not exactly in the best place to make difficult decisions. So choose one main option and guide them easily and tell them what to do so that they don't have to work too hard to figure it out.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. Right. And especially if someone, whatever level of crisis they're in, usually their mind is of like single focus, right? They're not able to sort of process like multiple things. And I would imagine like too many options would often lead to more overwhelm and then actually not making a call or going is clicking on somewhere else or, you know, trying to find some other options or something like that.
Uriah Guilford: Absolutely.
Yeah.
Melvin Varghese:
How would a solo practitioner know when it's time to consider hiring an intake coordinator?
Uriah Guilford:
Yeah, great question. So I actually created a quiz a little while ago for people to figure out if they're ready for an intake coordinator. So if folks want to go to ProductiveTherapist.com slash quiz, they can take that quiz. It's a good one. I would say, though, for most solo practices, they won't ever need an intake coordinator. That's my honest answer. even though that's one of our main services. If you're a solar practitioner, most likely you can use technology to automate or streamline most of that initial contact and the process of getting a client into your practice. EHRs, modern EHRs are fantastic. And online scheduling platforms are excellent. So if I was going to start a solo practice again today, I know you did that not too long ago. I have some very specific ideas about how I would do that. I would just go ahead and use simple practice and use the scheduling option in the client portal for people to schedule a 15 minute phone call. That's how I've always done it. And then I would talk to them and then if it was a good fit, set them up in my in my EHR and we'd be off to the races. And I would put that widget on my website so people could just click, see my availability and schedule. So that's what I would do if I was a solo practice at this point. No need for an intake coordinator.
Melvin Varghese:
I guess. Is there ever a scenario where a solo practitioner would need an intake coordinator?
Uriah Guilford:
Yes, actually. So my initial answer is no, you don't need an intake coordinator. But my follow up would be there are some solar practice owners that are incredibly busy, right? I'm sure you know some of these folks. They see 20, 30, 35 plus clients and or maybe they're a professor at a university and maybe they are doing coaching or they have a side business of some sort and they really do need somebody to kind of run point and manage their entire schedule. Maybe even do some sort of executive assistant kind of functions. So at Productive Therapist, we do provide virtual assistance for some solo practices and it tends to be those folks that have a very busy caseload or they have other things going on and they just need to hand off that part of their practice.
Melvin Varghese:
Turning to the other side, how would a group practitioner know when it's time?
Uriah Guilford:
Take my quiz. No. That's right. Yeah. So it's a difficult thing to figure out because when you're starting a group practice, when you're growing a group practice, you don't necessarily have a lot of free time or money. In the beginning, you might have a little bit more time than money. Most group practice owners wait too long to hire an intake coordinator. And what they usually end up doing is they hold that role for themselves. And I totally understand this because this was my story back in 2015. That's when I started my group practice, same year you started STC, I think, right? So I remember vividly, right next door to the office where I am right now, many nights a week, 9pm, kind of slouched in my chair, just finished a bunch of sessions with teenage boys and their families. I was exhausted, checking my email and seeing that new calls had come in and wanting desperately to connect those people with our services, but also being drained of my energy and realizing I just didn't, it was too late and I didn't have the time to do it. And then the next day I'd have to try to get back to them. Meanwhile, I was writing all the blog posts, doing the networking, managing our QuickBooks, you know, all of the things, yeah, that a group practice owner does. So my short answer is hire an intake coordinator as soon as you can. As soon as you can afford it, it's a good idea. It will help you grow so much.
Melvin Varghese:
It seems like any intake coordinators, in addition to like perhaps like a clinical coordinator, those seem like important like first hires for a group practitioner.
Uriah Guilford:
I would say intake coordinator first, most likely because the practice owner is likely going to be potentially the first clinical supervisor or the actual acting clinical director for a while until they grow enough to hire someone else into that role. And in my opinion, the intake coordinator is like the MVP, like they're one of the most important people in the practice. And so besides hiring clinicians for a group practice, obviously you can't have a group without another therapist. Intake coordinator is the way to go. Interestingly enough, I started working with virtual assistants back in 2012. So it was back in my days of solo practice. And I was very, very fortunate to work with an amazing woman named Gina and, uh, worked with her for five years and her role kind of developed over time. But eventually she was my intake coordinator. She was responding to new inquiries, setting them up in the HR, et cetera. And it was such a wonderful experience. And then unfortunately, she passed away from cancer. And it was really sad because we had worked together for so long. And this was pre, obviously way pre-pandemic. We never saw each other on video. We did everything over, basically over email. Yeah, it was amazing. So that was so sad. And then I was in the position of, you know, growing this group practice, and I just lost one of my most important support staff. And so that actually prompted me to start Productive Therapist to solve my problem of needing part-time administrative support and the rest is history.
Melvin Varghese:
That's amazing. Yeah. How did you, like Uriah, like make the shift in your mind of, I can handle these calls, I can respond to these calls too, I need to delegate this because long term, this is going to be the smart and strategic move, because I feel like a lot of clinicians struggle with this, which is, I mean, it's like the e-myth revisited, right? Most private practitioners are, are technicians, right? And so our natural tendency then is to try to do everything.
Uriah Guilford:
Yeah, it's really hard. It's, it's a very difficult thing to let go of. I mean, delegating in general is hard for any small business owner, but the intake coordinator role is so important. And when you're a solo practice or a new group practice owner, like it's really, it feels like you're so close to it. And it feels like you need to be that person talking to each and every client, making sure you guide them to the right therapist, to the right services. And if I bring in somebody else to do that, what if they do a really poor job? And what if people don't get the care that they need? And what if I don't know what's going on? There's so many what ifs. It's very difficult to let go of that. It was for me, certainly, because I thought, I thought to myself, I'm actually really good at this and I actually love doing it. I love talking to, you know, parents of teenagers and they're struggling, their family's struggling. Like this is why I do the work. Right. And so connecting them with the best therapist is like such a good feeling. So to let go of that was very, very hard, but I found somebody and hired them and I thought to myself, this is going to work out okay, but it's not going to be as good as it was when I was doing it. Right. The numbers wouldn't be as good. And, uh, I don't know if you know what I'm going to say here. You probably don't, but the results were better. my intake coordinator did better than me. And I was, I was, I was kind of shocked. So I never went back from there.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. It requires such a, I don't know, it's such a practical decision, but it's such a mental decision as well to like transition away and then like let go of these roles, you know, trusting that Yeah, in some situations it ends up better, but then like other situations it doesn't, but then the freedom, right? Like the freedom that you gain could be really beneficial to the mental bandwidth, right? I could imagine like, right, like that Uriah who's got like a full day of clients and then realizes how to return all these calls and then like how present or, you know, would it be like the next day where you're like, I got to return those calls. Wait, I have a full day. It's heavy. It is heavy. Yeah. What are like the top three responsibilities that you see for an intake coordinator?
Uriah Guilford:
Yeah, so mainly they're handling the initial client contact. They're scheduling the first appointment, setting that client up in the EHR. And then broadly they're handling general admin and client requests. Maybe the clients reach out and they need a super bill or they need to reschedule or other sorts of back office things, updating credit cards. So the role is primarily, um, you know, client facing for that initial contact and walking those people through the process. But then generally intake coordinators do a handful of other things that are very helpful to the practice, sort of on the administrative assistant side.
Melvin Varghese:
I love that you broke that down. So three things, handling the initial call, scheduling that initial appointment, and then general sort of catch all admin things to reschedule. I love particularly that you included that last one, because I could imagine that could be another way you could get like sucked right back in, into like coordinating all these things if you're having to handle reschedules, or even like provide super bills, all that kind of gets to be a lot.
Uriah Guilford:
Yeah, it really does. And then, I mean, depending on the practice, usually the person in that role, unless the practice is larger and they're truly just doing intake coordination, they're probably handling other tasks too. Like our virtual assistants will schedule social media posts. They will handle some of the basic billing tasks and other things like that. So if you hire a really good person, they likely can help you with other things too. So it can be a little bit broader or narrower as needed.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, so what I'm hearing is there may be times where it's like those three roles, like one is more highlighted than other times. And that's like really normal. And then I guess the other thing I hear is, there's probably going to be a little bit of a time where the person gets into a flow with your practice. So don't like be disheartened if it's like, not smooth sailing in the first like week or two or something like that.
Uriah Guilford:
It takes some time to get into a rhythm and a routine. And depending on whether or not the person you hire has done the intake coordinator job before, or if they just have some, you know, maybe they have a psychology background or something, or maybe an administrative assistant background, but they need to be trained on how to provide these services in a mental health setting. So you really have to spend time obviously hiring the right person and then giving them enough training so that they're really solid, they're ready to go before they even answer an email or respond to a phone call.
Melvin Varghese:
Speaking of which, what things should you have in place since client data is potentially being shared even at that onset? There may be situations where you've never even touched base with a client but they're talking to your intake coordinator and getting information.
Uriah Guilford:
Yeah, good question. Digital security and privacy obviously is very important. It always has been. It used to be so simple back in the day because we just had paper forms and we had voicemail. Like that was it, right? Yeah. My half thing, things have changed. So in less than a decade, right? Truly, truly. Like if you think 2015 to 2025 vastly different landscape for what we do with private practice. Yeah. So interesting. In any case, if the intake coordinator is a W-2 employee, you're basically covered by your employee handbook, and you should have things in there that relate to how sensitive data PHI is handled, and you should be covered by that. Obviously, you have to keep up with that and make sure that they're following those procedures. And then if you are working with a freelance virtual assistant or an agency, such as Productive Therapist, you just want to make sure that there's a business associates agreement in place, often called a BAA. And that just details exactly what the responsibilities are of that virtual assistant or the agency and how they will handle any sort of privacy breaches. So those are the two ways to go about that, whether it's an employee or essentially a contractor.
Melvin Varghese:
And then the other side of this, right? Like intake coordinators obviously aren't robots, right? So how do you handle things? Not yet. I know I hesitated on that question. I was like, cause you know, now being on LinkedIn, like there's somebody I followed, they're like, what do they call it? Humanoids, right? Like really? Yeah. And it's like fast. I'm like, so he'll like make a video and then there's like a robot walking in the background. I'm like, Yeah, but how do you handle things like if the intake coordinator is like sick or goes on vacation or something like that? I mean, is it just like looping somebody in or is it you take like, I don't know, I would love to hear how you think about that.
Uriah Guilford:
Yeah, a couple different solutions for that for a small to medium sized practice. likely the owner's gonna step in and just take over. That usually works out fine, unless there's some vacations that are overlapping. But in a larger practice, there's generally an intake team. So there might be multiple intake coordinators. And if that's not the case, one other solution, like a third solution, would be cross-training one of the clinicians in the practice to be able to step in and sort of cover for that vacation or that illness. Those are usually the things that most people do.
Melvin Varghese:
What are you defining? It's like a small to medium sized practice versus a large one?
Uriah Guilford:
It depends on, people can define that differently. I think five to 15 clinicians is small to medium and then large would be 20 plus.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. It's so interesting. I was thinking like the transition from like an agency to solo practitioner, there's like that transition from a solo practitioner to like a group practitioner. There's that transition. But then even within group practices, like there's transitions. There's step ups.
Uriah Guilford:
Yes.
Melvin Varghese:
As you add employees and different things. And even I was thinking, like if you are a group practice owner or like if you're a solo practitioner that's starting a group, but you're imagining at some point having like 25, 30 clinicians, there's wisdom in like thinking like, yeah, I'm going to eventually have an intake team. So how do I both simultaneously build this in the moment while potentially even cross training and working through like how a team can emerge as we concurrently get bigger versus like, oh gosh, now we need a team because we're so overwhelmed.
Uriah Guilford:
It can growth can happen fast at times. Right. And so this is one of the pain points that I see most often is kind of scaling the support staff with the group practice growing is a challenge. And I think that's where productive therapist honestly comes in clutch because we have a team of mental health trained, you know, HIPAA certified virtual assistants that can step in. And the practice owners don't need to do very much at all to get going with those services. So I think like if I was starting over again, I would absolutely do myself in the beginning. And then I would hire a mental health virtual assistant. And then the next sort of graduation, we've done this with many of our practices is going from a mental health virtual assistant to an in-house intake coordinator. Because once the practice gets to a certain size, it just makes sense to go ahead and pay a W-2 employee. But that's kind of the stepwise way to do it. I will say that there's a lot of like finding the right person to hire and then training them, like I mentioned before. it's actually really difficult. And then keeping them and retaining them for months and years to come and having that stability in the practice, it's hard. If anyone has ever done this, um, if you, even if you just put out a job application on or not application, but a posting on indeed for, you know, mental health virtual or mental health intake coordinator, you'll get hundreds of applications. And it's like, how do you pick the best one? It's So it's, it's not easy, but once you do find that person, you train them and you get them solidly in that position. It's an absolute game changer for the practice owner. It's huge.
Melvin Varghese:
Speaking of which, like what are some, again, I ask a lot of really basic questions, but like, what are some like best practices to like retain these intake coordinators? Cause I, I would think like the demand is quite high and especially for like well-trained ones. I mean, just like what are the, you've seen.
Uriah Guilford:
That's a good question. So I told you that I worked with Gina for five years and that was amazing, right? And then between Gina and Tiffany, I had a couple other intake coordinators that didn't stay super long. And then I worked with Tiffany for six years. So the last six years, Tiffany was providing those services to my practice. And I can't even tell you how much peace of mind and stability that brought to my practice. Now, how did I retain her? Well, I obviously treat her really, really well, pay her as well as I can, provide benefits, create not only a culture, but a practice where the systems are working smoothly so that there's not daily tension and frustration. So I think those are some of the things that come to mind. And yeah, if you give people a great place to work with meaningful things to do and people that they like talking to, they're likely going to stay.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. I'm glad you said that. I forgot exactly where, but literally this morning I read some government report saying that people's satisfaction with job places are at their lowest in a very long time. So I think it speaks to that desire to really create an environment where people want to stay and are valued. I have two questions for you. What do you think is the top mistake that you see therapists making when trying to hire an intake coordinator?
Uriah Guilford:
Ooh, the top mistake? Like the number one?
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, like if I could only say one.
Uriah Guilford:
Not doing it soon enough. Yeah, I would go back to that. Not doing it soon enough. But if that was, let's say that's off the table, right? The biggest mistake that they make is not giving them enough training. Honestly, that would be the one because a busy practice owner, whether they're solo or group, they don't have a lot of time or bandwidth. So once they do the work, the heavy lift of finding that person and hiring them, it's so easy to just want to say, okay, uh, good luck. I hope it goes well. But most support staff in a mental health practice need a lot more training and support and coaching and mentorship than they get. So I would say providing enough training and support until they're really, really solid, and then you can step back.
Melvin Varghese:
Is there sort of a, I guess, a phased approach to that sort of training? So I eat like, you know, in the initial stages, like running through some mock scenarios and then having them do like a call where like you're looking over there, you're with them. Like, how do you sort of think about it and approach it?
Uriah Guilford:
Yeah, there's a couple of different things that you can do. So when I was training my first intake coordinator, they were actually in this office that I'm in right now in this space, we actually recorded some calls. and with permission from the person on the phone, obviously. We recorded some calls so that then I could listen to them and give him feedback. That's incredibly valuable. It's a little bit harder to do because it's sensitive and people don't necessarily want to consent to that. That's like the absolute best way to do it. The secondary was sometimes I would come in and I would listen to him on the phone while he was talking to a potential client. And then I would, then we would talk afterwards and I would give him some feedback. If it's virtual, you would have to record the call or just, you know, have a meeting after one or two intake calls and then kind of talk through it. And of course you can do role plays and those kinds of things as well.
Melvin Varghese:
Awesome. Uriah, the final question I have for you is, are there any metrics that either a solo or group practitioner should look at to determine like whether an intake coordinator is worth it? So for example, you know, we've noticed like the number of folks calling to actually scheduling is increased by 25% or whatever it is.
Uriah Guilford:
Yeah. Two metrics I would highlight. The first one is owner freedom, and that's a little bit harder to categorize. One of our sayings is that we help therapists get more done so they can have more fun. And when I was getting my first virtual assistant, my business coach at the time said, well, what are you going to do with the time that you save, whether it's five or 10 hours a week? And if you're going to use that time either for enjoying your family, your hobbies, or growing your business, then great. So owner freedom is number one, but the second one really is your conversion rates. And that's just like terminology that means how many clients reach out and then how many become new clients. So your intake coordinator should do as well as you or hopefully better over time. So you want that. And that's going to happen with more availability and a quicker response time. Um, and of course the right person. So you want to keep a track, keep a track on that.
Melvin Varghese:
That's awesome. Uh, is there any sort of, I guess this could really vary by niches and populations, but is there sort of a standard number? Like, you know, you're doing really well if you know, 50% or 60% of your calls are converting or anything like that at all.
Uriah Guilford:
It's a little bit hard to get anything solid on that, but it seems like private pay practices tend to be a little bit lower, because insurance practices, it's easier for those people to say yes, because if I call and you take my insurance, easy, and you have availability, easy. So insurance-based practices usually are between 40 to 60, sometimes higher, 80 or higher, and then private pay practices are usually in the range of 20 to 40%. I think my private pay practice got up to about 45, 50%, sometimes a little bit higher. Yeah, I don't know if that's helpful, but those are kind of the ranges.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, it's so interesting. I feel like we almost need to do another episode on conversion of a private pay practice for an intake coordinator. It'd be so interesting. You're doing so much awesome stuff in the world. You've got a course as well to support therapists if they want to get their feet wet and think through this. Please do take a moment to tell us about the course and also how we can learn more about the awesome stuff you're doing in the world.
Uriah Guilford:
Definitely. Thanks. I appreciate that. So everything, all of our resources are at ProductiveTherapist.com and we do have a course called the Intake Hiring Starter Pack. And essentially we just took all of our best practices from hiring over a hundred intake coordinators which is a lot. And we put them into a course to kind of walk people through sort of a do-it-yourself process of, you know, recruiting and hiring an intake coordinator. So I'm really proud of that course. And my team, I'm not involved in hiring anymore. My team does all the hiring. And so I brought them in to help create that course. And so these are best practices on how to do all the things you need to do.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, that's awesome. And, uh, you are so kind to give the STC community a little discount as well.
Uriah Guilford:
Absolutely.
Melvin Varghese:
On the course. And so, uh, I believe the discount code is STC. Right.
Uriah Guilford:
Keep it simple. STC will give you 25% off that course. Yeah.
Melvin Varghese:
Perfect. You're right. Thank you again. I really am just so grateful for you. I'm glad that, you know, LinkedIn has enabled us to reconnect and grateful for all the work that you're doing in the world.
Uriah Guilford:
Thanks Melvin, appreciate it.
Melvin Varghese:
All right. Have a great rest of your day. Hey everyone. I hope you enjoyed my conversation with Uriah and especially if you are in a season where you considering an intake coordinator, or if you have an intake coordinator and you've just been struggling with how to best maximize their potential. I hope that today's podcast session has just been incredibly helpful for you and yeah has just given you some new ideas in terms of how to approach it. As I was talking with Uriah and I was just reflecting on this idea of how an intake coordinator is really like the symbolism of like working in our business versus on our business. and how it's this transition of when we realize that we can't do all of the things in order for our private practice to succeed and then even like a hard realization that we may be the handicap or the roadblock that's holding our practice from where it should be. The STC equivalent of this has been for me is like hiring an executive assistant because, you know, Mel left to his own devices. We'll try to do everything possible with STC and do all of the things because who else can do it better than Mel, right? But, you know, wiser Mel has coming to realize that there is something in letting things go and hiring out and hiring and asking for help. because at the end of the day, people can often do this better than I can. And then more importantly, or at least equally importantly, it frees up time to be able for us to do the work that we're the most gifted at. And so I think in terms of private practice, it's often serving your clients well, learning and getting versed in theoretical orientations and getting to be a better clinician. Uriah mentioned that they have an Intake Hiring Starter Pack. So if you go through sellingthecouch.com forward slash intakehiring sellingthecouch.com forward slash intakehiring and enter the promo code STC, you get 25% off of that course if that's something that would be helpful for you on your private practice journey. Have a great rest of your day and I will see you next time. Bye!
Narrator:
Thanks for listening to the Selling the Couch podcast. For more great content and to stay up to date, visit www.sellingthecouch.com.
Melvin Varghese:
Hey, it's Melvin. I hope that you're enjoying today's podcast session. Just wanted to also let you know that STC Elite, our mastermind for therapist course creators, is now open for enrollment. If you've been thinking about creating an online course, and specifically if 2025 is the year that you want to create your online course, definitely encourage you to check out our mastermind. It's over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash mastermind. We launched this back in 2021 and since then over 60 of our colleagues have gone through our mastermind. It includes a ton of support all the way from live teaching, live feedback from colleagues and from our team to build out and structure your online course all the way to mindset coaching, all the way to access to our video editing and graphic design team so that you don't have to hire everything separately. We've made it really super comprehensive and I think you're really going to enjoy it. Again, the link is over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash mastermind. Enrollment does wrap up at the end of August. So definitely encourage you to check it out and consider joining us. And again, we have a free email course. It's seven days. It'll help validate your course idea. I know that's the biggest struggle many of us are navigating of whether the course is actually going to make money. And we put all of this into a simple to understand email course that you can check out over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash course kit, sellingthecouch.com forward slash course kit. We'll jump right back into today's session. Hey there, thank you so much for tuning in to today's session. Just wanted to also let you know that we have a free email newsletter that goes out every week. You can download it over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash newsletter. Basically that newsletter contains some of the stuff that's happening behind the scenes with STC and also with my life and how I'm balancing and trying to balance being both an entrepreneur as well as building a life around my family and my health as well. And it also contains the latest podcast episode and some of the stuff that I'm doing on LinkedIn, some of the strategies and things that are working for me. And then finally, a brand new section called On Mel's Mind, where I take a video or a book or a blog post or something like that, that's inspiring me for that week. And I share how I'm implementing it both in my life and in my business. Again, you can download that over at signthecouch.com forward slash newsletter. And if you are one of the 3,700 colleagues that have been a part of the email newsletter, I so appreciate you and I'm grateful for your support. We genuinely try to make these helpful and just based on the data and based on the feedback we're getting, it seems like we're doing a really good job. So appreciate you and I hope that you have a great day.
timestamps00:03:36 – Introduction to the Episode and Guest
00:05:23 – Defining an Intake Coordinator
00:06:40 – Challenges in the Client Intake Process
00:10:27 – When to Consider Hiring an Intake Coordinator (Solo Practitioners)
00:12:34 – When Group Practitioners Should Hire an Intake Coordinator
00:19:10 – Key Responsibilities of an Intake Coordinator
00:27:14 – Best Practices for Retaining Intake Coordinators
00:31:03 – Metrics to Evaluate the Effectiveness of an Intake Coordinator
00:33:05 – Introduction to the Intake Hiring Starter Pack Course
00:34:11 – Conclusion and Reflection on the Episode
selling the couch podcast with melvin varghese phdWeekly interviews, strategy, and advice for building your private practice in and beyond the therapy room.
Apple podcastsYou TubeSpotify ready to launch your podcast?Please check out our FREE podcasting workshop for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This workshop is pre-recorded so you can watch it on a day and time that works for your schedule.
It contains a lot of practical tips that we've learned as STC has reached 1.81 million+ downloads and become a 6-figure business with podcasting as the backbone.
sign up for podcasting workshopuriah guilfordPractice Owner
Uriah Guilford is a group practice owner based in northern California. He also owns Productive Therapist, which provides virtual assistants and intake coordinators for therapy practices. Uriah has been a group practice owner since 2015 and has a lot of wisdom to share about the journey to hire and train an intake coordinator.
Melvin varghese phdPsychologist and Founder @ Selling The Couch
Melvin Varghese, PhD is a licensed psychologist in Philadelphia, PA. In 2015, Dr. Varghese founded Selling The Couch, a podcast to help therapists move from clinical to online income.
On the podcast, he interviews successful practitioners about how they've built their practices, social media/marketing experts, and shares lessons as he uses our clinical skills to create an online business powered by podcasting + online courses.
The podcast is one of the top Career podcasts in Apple Podcasts, has been downloaded over 1.8 million times, and is heard in over 125 countries. Mel is a successful course creator with 240+ students and $300k+ in course sales.
More PostsUncomfortable Truths About Private Practice Finances (with James Childress)by Melvin Varghese | Jan 24, 2025 | Blog, Private Practice, STC Podcast
Melvin Varghese with James Childress on Uncomfortable Private Practice Finance Truths
When Should You Hire An Intake Coordinator? (Uriah Guilford)by Melvin Varghese | Feb 6, 2025 | Blog, Growing Your Practice, Private Practice, Productivity, STC Podcast
Uriah Guildford joins us to talk about hiring an intake coordinator.
5 Signs You're Ready To Launch Your Online Courses (with Melvin Varghese))by Melvin Varghese | Jan 31, 2025 | Blog, Online Courses, Passive Income for Therapists, Private Practice, STC Podcast
Melvin Varghese giving an overview of launching successful online courses and how you know you are ready.
« Older Entries The post When Should You Hire An Intake Coordinator? (Uriah Guilford) appeared first on Selling The Couch | Melvin Varghese PhD.
383: 5 Signs You're Ready To Launch Your Online CourseWritten By Melvin Varghese PhD5 Clear Signs You’re Ready to Launch an Online Course as a TherapistHave you ever thought about creating an online course but felt unsure if now is the right time? Maybe you’ve been stuck wondering:
• Do I really know enough to teach?
• Will anyone even buy my course?
• What if I spend all this time and it flops?
If any of this sounds familiar, you’re not alone. I had the same thoughts back in 2015 when I was still deep in clinical work. I had just launched my podcast, and colleagues started asking me for podcasting advice. The more questions I got, the more I realized—I could put this knowledge into a course instead of answering the same things over and over.
That course became Healthcasters, which has helped 244+ therapists start their own podcasts. And guess what? I didn’t feel 100% “ready” when I started either. But readiness isn’t about having it all figured out. It’s about taking the first step and figuring it out along the way.
So how do you know if you’re ready to launch your first online course? Here are 5 key signs to look for.
1️⃣ You Want to Make a Bigger Impact
Therapy is meaningful, but it has limits—you can only see so many clients in a day. If you’ve ever thought, I wish I could help more people without adding more hours to my schedule, then a course could be the perfect next step. It's a completely different model because most therapists (including me) are taught that the only way to make income is to “trade dollars for hours.”
But a well-structured online course allows you to:
✅ Teach once, impact many
✅ Serve people beyond your local area
✅ Create a scalable income stream that doesn’t depend on 1:1 sessions
2️⃣ You’ve Mastered a Specific Skill (and People Ask You About It)
If clients (or even colleagues) regularly seek your expertise in a particular area, that’s a great indicator that your knowledge is valuable.
Think about what you’re already known for in private practice:
• Do you specialize in DBT for teens?
• Are you the go-to therapist for high-achieving professionals with anxiety?
• Have you found a unique way to blend IFS and EMDR?
If people are paying you for your expertise in therapy, they’ll pay to learn from you in a course too. Btw, this is a helpful video on finding a niche as a therapist and why it's important.
3️⃣ You Have a Passion for Teaching
If you love explaining concepts to clients, supervising interns, or leading workshops, then creating an online course might feel like a natural fit.
And no, you don’t need to be a “traditional” teacher. Your unique voice and approach will resonate with the right people. Some learners will prefer your teaching style over someone else’s—and that’s why there’s room for your course in the market.
4️⃣ You’re Open to Learning New Skills
Creating an online course isn’t just about teaching—it’s also about learning. You’ll need to pick up a few skills, like:
🎥 Basic video recording & editing
📢 Marketing your course (without feeling salesy)
🖥️ Choosing a course platform (we like, use, and recommend Kartra; free trial through this link for STC fans)
The good news? You don’t need to know everything before you start.
I had zero experience in online business when I launched my first course. But I took small, steady steps—and you can too.
5️⃣ You’re Willing to Validate Your Idea Before Building
The #1 mistake I see therapists make? Spending months building a course before testing demand.
You don’t need a polished course to get started—you just need proof that people want what you’re offering. That’s why we created the Course Creator Starter Kit—a free 7-day email course that walks you through how to validate your idea before you build.
✅ Get real feedback before you spend months creating
✅ Avoid launching a course no one buys
✅ Save time, energy, and money
💡 Sign up here → CourseCreatorStarterKit.com
Final Thoughts: Are You Ready?
If you checked YES to even one of these signs, you’re likely more ready than you think. The key is to start small and let quiet compounding happen.
You don’t need to build an 8-module, high-production course overnight. Just validate your idea, create a minimum viable version, and refine as you go.
Ready to take the first step? Sign up for our free 7-day email course to validate your course idea before you build. It’s the same process I used to grow Healthcasters into a $328,000+ course.
🎯 Join the Course Creator Starter Kit now
If you’re a solo therapist considering taking some (to hedge) or full insurance but want to skip the headaches of dealing with insurance companies, Alma is worth checking out.
With Alma, you’ll benefit from:
• A 45-day credentialing process (no more months of waiting!)
• A HIPAA-compliant telehealth platform to keep your sessions secure
• Guaranteed payouts every two weeks
• Access to CEUs included with membership
Alma makes it easier than ever to build a thriving practice.
👉 Learn more and get 2 months FREE—an exclusive offer for STC listeners
Transcript (AI-Generated) Melvin Varghese:
Hey it's Melvin. Before we jump into today's podcast session just wanted to take a moment to thank the team over at Alma for supporting today's podcast session. Alma is an all-in-one platform that works with solo practitioners particularly who want to take insurance but don't want to deal with all of the headaches of taking insurance. We know that as clinicians doing private practice, that managing all of the different facets of private practice is absolutely overwhelming. everything from managing clients to the admin to the billing. It's not just seeing the clients, right? It's all the other stuff. And so Alma is an all-in-one platform that really makes this process a lot easier. Their core thing is that they let you get credentialed with a majority of insurance providers. They do a 45-day credentialing process. They offer higher reimbursement rates than if you were to go through just solo and apply for insurance. And they also do guaranteed payback within two weeks. So basically your income stays steady. You get paid within 14 days of actually seeing the client. Now, where Alma really shines is actually beyond all of this, the other stuff that they do. So they offer everything from peer supervision groups to resource sharing groups, where clinicians can exchange worksheets and all sorts of stuff, as well as live CEUs and on-demand CEUs, so you can get your CEU hours. They also provide a HIPAA compliant telehealth platform so you can see clients and do telehealth sessions without worrying about safety and security and all of those things. The team at Alma hooked Selling the Couch listeners with a special code two months absolutely free. This is not even advertised online, but if you go to sellingthecouch.com forward slash Alma, Alma is spelled A-L-M-A, you get two months absolutely free. Again, that's sellingthecouch.com forward slash Alma.
We'll jump right into today's session. Hello, hello. Welcome to today's session of Selling the Couch. If you have been thinking about creating an online course, but you are struggling with whether you are ready to create an online course, then today's session is for you. We're exploring five areas and five questions or five indicators that can let you know whether you are ready to launch an online course. I remember when I first started or had the idea for a podcasting course. This was around June of 2015. The kind of interesting thing was I had just launched the STC podcast in March of 2015. So it wasn't like, and I had been learning about podcasting maybe since like September of that previous year. So I very much did not feel like I was an expert on podcasting.
At a practical level for me, I was deeply rooted on the clinical side at that time as well, so I was still at a group practice where I was doing individual and couples therapy, I was doing bariatric surgery psych evals, and then I was also working at a community mental health agency doing biopsychosocial evals. And when I launched the STC podcast in 2015, what started happening is colleagues started emailing me or they would DM me on Facebook and ask if they could console with me on doing this podcasting thing. I didn't know how much to charge, so I was like, let me just charge as much as I'm making on one of these biopsychosocial evals, which was a paltry $200 for several hours of work. But I was like, I just want to replace that income and then see if I can have some options there. As more and more colleagues started reaching out to do these consults, I was like, I wonder if we can present this information in an online course format.
But the idea of honestly launching an online course and teaching, especially in an online medium, at that point I was honestly about three years licensed as a psychologist, so I was still in my early 30s, and I very much felt like I didn't want to step on anyone's toes. I felt like, who am I to be teaching when I myself have done podcasting for less than a year? And then I also worried about, what if nobody signs up? And those fears really crippled me. But here's what I learned. Readiness isn't about having it all figured out. It's about taking that first step with intention, knowing that the dots will connect at some point. You just have to take those first steps. So how do you know if you are ready to create an online course? So the first sign is you're looking for scalable impact. Therapy is meaningful. I love the work of therapy. We do amazing work in the therapy room. It serves others really well. But the model in private practice is the therapy model in itself is about trading time for income, right?
So you see a client for a clinical hour, you get paid. If you don't see a clinical hour, you don't get paid. Now, if you've ever thought, I want to help more people without sacrificing all my time, creating an online course could be for you. It basically allows you to share your message on a bigger scale beyond and grow your impact and your income beyond the therapy room. The second sign that you are ready to launch an online course is you've mastered a specific skill or you have a very specific niche that you are known for. So think about what you are getting known for and think about the niches and specialties that you are getting known for. If you have a certain area and folks are coming to you, they're paying for you for therapy, then it's usually a pretty good indicator that there's some potential beyond the geographic area that you are serving clients in, in order to be able to serve them. And so it seems like a very basic and kind of common sense thing, but what I notice is there's a segment of colleagues who usually start private practices and have not quite found a niche and they then jump into creating an online course thinking that somehow the online course will help them to expand or clarify what their niche is.
Personally for me, I actually feel that is backwards. So I actually feel like you should be in private practice for several years. I like to use roughly like five years of doing clinical work and getting known in a certain area. That way you already know also like the nuances of their pains and struggles. And that is when I would say then really consider creating an online course. You know, as therapists, we manage so many roles in private practice, from being a clinician to a business owner, to doing all the things that we need to do to market our practice. It's really easy for all of us to feel overwhelmed, especially when we are juggling so many things.
That's where the team at Alma comes in. This is a platform that I would consider if you are a solo practitioner that is either wants to take insurance or that is private pay but just wants to hedge a little bit especially to account for periods of economic uncertainty or weird things like hyperinflation like we've been dealing with in more recent times. Alma makes it easier than ever to build a thriving private practice. They include a bunch of different cool stuff. So one is they have a members-only platform where you can exchange resources with other clinicians, exchange referrals, and just find support. They have consultation groups as well. And they also offer CEUs as part of your membership at no additional cost. These are both live and on demand. Now in order to get credentialed with Alma, typically to get credentialed with insurance it takes months and months, but Alma actually has a 45-day credentialing process and you actually get increased reimbursement rates. So they're often higher than if you were to go just through the insurance carrier and if you were just apply as a solo practitioner. And the really cool thing is they guarantee payback within two weeks of when you see the client so that you can ensure your income stays steady. You can see as few as like one client or two clients just to hedge a little bit. And Alma also has a HIPAA compliant telehealth platform so that everything is safe and secure. Alma also has a bunch of different stuff to support clinicians, all the way from workshops and all sorts of things, as well as an online directory, so that you can continue to get referrals coming your way. The best part, the team at Alma was able to hook the Selling the Couch family and listeners with a unique code, which is over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash Alma. That's actually for two months absolutely free on Alma's platform. This is a non-advertised, like non-publicly advertised discount. So definitely encourage you to check it out over at sellingthecouch.com/Alma for a 60 day free trial just to see if it makes sense for you.
The third thing is you just have a passion for teaching. And because at the core of it, an online course is about sharing information. But I think of it as you are both, I call it an infotainer. So you're providing information, but you're also doing it in an entertaining sort of way. I tell our colleagues all the time when I say the word entertainer, it sounds like you're like juggling balls in the air while teaching a lesson or anything like that. It's more, can you, does the topic that you are creating a course on, does it light you up in a way that you are like, hey, I want to be able to teach it in this way or in this unique and interesting way. If that's something that you're like, oh yeah, no, I can definitely see that, then I think it's definitely usually an indicator that you're ready. There's also another kind of nuance. If you've ever enjoyed mentoring supervisees or leading workshops or explaining concepts, if you ever did any adjunct teaching or if you were in grad school, if you were a TA or anything like that, I think an online course is a natural extension of what you may love to do. To be honest, I never actually considered myself a teacher, even though I knew my grandparents were teachers, my parents were teachers at one point in their lives, and I knew that I had the skill sets and I knew that maybe there was something that I had been modeled as well. but I didn't really consider myself like a teacher and I think part of it was I just felt like, I don't know, I think I struggled a lot to be honest with like feeling like an imposter and feeling like even thinking like oh there's like I've had some really amazing teachers like how can I measure up to them but the reality is Each of us have our own giftings, our own ways of presenting. Even stuff, you know, that I share on the podcast, the reality is it resonates with a segment of our colleagues and it's not going to resonate with a segment of our colleagues. And that's okay. Your teaching and your approach as a course creator is not going to resonate with everyone. But the most important thing is that it resonates with a specific type of person. The fourth thing that I would say is you're open to learning new skills. So creating an online course isn't just about teaching, it's about embracing a bunch of different things like learning course platforms or learning how to grow an audience online, or learning some basic tech. Not like when you first create an online course you don't have to have some crazy fancy DSLR and lighting like I do now. Like a webcam with a halfway decent mic is more than enough. But as long as you have a openness and a heart to learn those tools and to say like, hey, you know, these are things that I think I could see myself developing over time is the key. You know, the reality is you don't have have to be an expert right when you're starting with all of this stuff, like building an audience and all of this. But you just have to have, I think what I've learned is just a willingness and a heart to learn. I personally, on my end, I didn't take like business or marketing classes in undergrad or grad school. I had zero experience in online business. But what I learned is just along the way, just taking these like small iterative steps is kind of the key and the most important thing. The fifth and final point is you are willing to validate your idea. Now this seems like a very basic but it's an important step because I personally feel like every therapist has an online course within them because if you think about it, we are building private practices or coaching or consulting and we're getting known for something. And so because we're getting known for something, inevitably that also means that we have expertise in an area and we can teach that to other people. Now, the most important thing, though, is just because you are passionate about a course topic doesn't mean that people will actually buy it. So you don't need to have a polished course to start. You just need to know that there's an audience for your idea. We created a free 7-day email course that's specifically built for therapists who want to create an online course to help them validate and test their course idea. You can learn more about it at sellingthecouch.com forward slash coursekit sellingthecouch.com forward slash coursekit or you can go to coursecreatorstarterkit.com But just taking the time to validate your idea, because often what I learned is it's not just about the online course, right, like the digital course, it's about all of these other opportunities that can springboard from the course. So for example, and again, this all depends on what you want to do and how you want to do it, but Let's say that you also want to do live trainings for the course. You just want to take the time on the front end to make sure that there's income potential and there's audience potential for your course. Otherwise what's going to happen is you will end up spending a lot of time and energy trying to get into a course idea that may not actually have demand. So I know this is a little bit shorter episode than usual, but I wanted to stick, you know, get straight to the point. But the five points basically are how do you know you're ready to create an online course? You're looking for scalable impact. So in your heart, you have felt like you have a bigger mission to share. And that mission, you love the therapy room, but there's somehow just the therapy room feels confining in some sort of way. The second thing is you've mastered a specific skill or a knowledge area or a specific niche, and that you're becoming a known expert in that niche. The third one, you have a passion for teaching, sharing what you have learned along the way to a new generation. And this is the other nuance of it, is you're not trying to often create a course for everybody, even for somebody that may be on the same level as you, or even more advanced from you. You're actually trying to often create a course for somebody that's two to three steps behind you. The fourth point is you're open to learning new skills and so often an online course is not just about creating the course. It's about things like learning to build an audience and knowing what course platforms to pick or learning some of this gear when it comes to recording an online course. It's a lot of fun trying to figure it out and you definitely don't need to put all this pressure on yourself to try to have it all figured out in year one. It's just about being willing to stay for many years and saying, hey, I think I would really enjoy this and I want to get better and better at it. And the fifth point is again, you're willing to validate your idea. Again, I just wanted to like double click and emphasize that because I've seen so many colleagues who have wonderful course ideas, but there is an actual market demand for them and I would never want you to create an online course if it actually wasn't going to be, if we can't reasonably say it's going to be successful. Again, our course creator starter kit is over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash course kit or you can go to course creator starter kit dot com. Have a great rest of your day and I will see you next time. Bye.
Narrator: Thanks for listening to the Selling the Couch podcast. For more great content and to stay up to date, visit www.sellingthecouch.com.
Melvin Varghese: Hey there, thank you so much for tuning in to today's session. Just wanted to also let you know that we have a free email newsletter that goes out every week. You can download it over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash newsletter. Basically that newsletter contains some of the stuff that's happening behind the scenes with STC and also with my life and how I'm balancing and trying to balance being both an entrepreneur as well as building a life around my family and my health as well. And it also contains the latest podcast episode and some of the stuff that I'm doing on LinkedIn, some of the strategies and things that are working for me. And then finally, a brand new section called On Mel's Mind, where I take a video or a book or a blog post or something like that that's inspiring me for that week, and I share how I'm implementing it both in my life and in my business. Again, you can download that over at signthecouch.com forward slash newsletter. And if you are one of the thirty seven hundred colleagues that have been a part of the email newsletter is so appreciate you and I'm grateful for your support. We genuinely try to make these helpful and and just based on the data and based on the feedback we're getting, it seems like we're doing a really good job. So appreciate you. And I hope they have a great day.
timestamps00:00:00 – Introduction to Online Courses
00:02:40 – Sign 1: Looking for Scalable Impact
00:03:43 – Sign 2: Mastering a Specific Skill or Niche
00:05:09 – Sign 3: Passion for Teaching
00:07:23 – Sign 4: Openness to Learning New Skills
00:09:23 – Sign 5: Willingness to Validate Your Idea
00:12:54 – Recap of Key Points
00:14:29 – Closing Remarks and Resources
selling the couch podcast with melvin varghese phdWeekly interviews, strategy, and advice for building your private practice in and beyond the therapy room.
Apple podcastsYou TubeSpotify Melvin varghese phdPsychologist and Founder @ Selling The Couch
Melvin Varghese, PhD is a licensed psychologist in Philadelphia, PA. In 2015, Dr. Varghese founded Selling The Couch, a podcast to help therapists move from clinical to online income.
On the podcast, he interviews successful practitioners about how they've built their practices, social media/marketing experts, and shares lessons as he uses our clinical skills to create an online business powered by podcasting + online courses.
The podcast is one of the top Career podcasts in Apple Podcasts, has been downloaded over 1.8 million times, and is heard in over 125 countries. Mel is a successful course creator with 240+ students and $300k+ in course sales.
More PostsUncomfortable Truths About Private Practice Finances (with James Childress)by Melvin Varghese | Jan 24, 2025 | Blog, Private Practice, STC Podcast
Melvin Varghese with James Childress on Uncomfortable Private Practice Finance Truths
When Should You Hire An Intake Coordinator? (Uriah Guilford)by Melvin Varghese | Feb 6, 2025 | Blog, Growing Your Practice, Private Practice, Productivity, STC Podcast
Uriah Guildford joins us to talk about hiring an intake coordinator.
5 Signs You're Ready To Launch Your Online Courses (with Melvin Varghese))by Melvin Varghese | Jan 31, 2025 | Blog, Online Courses, Passive Income for Therapists, Private Practice, STC Podcast
Melvin Varghese giving an overview of launching successful online courses and how you know you are ready.
« Older Entries The post 5 Signs You’re Ready To Launch Your Online Courses (with Melvin Varghese)) appeared first on Selling The Couch | Melvin Varghese PhD.
382: Uncomfortable Truths About Private Practice FinancesWritten By Melvin Varghese PhDThe Uncomfortable Truths About Private Practice Finances (And How to Fix Them)
Private practice can feel like the golden ticket for therapists looking for more freedom and flexibility. But the reality? It comes with challenges—especially when it comes to money.
Many clinicians assume that once they launch, clients will roll in, and everything will run smoothly. But as I’ve learned over the past 10 years of entrepreneurship, that’s not always the case.
I recently sat down with James Childress, a CPA who works primarily with therapists, to talk about the biggest financial mistakes private practice owners make—and how to build a practice that lasts.
Let’s dive into three uncomfortable truths about private practice finances (and how you can avoid these pitfalls).
1️⃣ There’s a “Danger Zone” for Group Practices
If you own (or are thinking about starting) a group practice, this one’s for you.
James pointed out something fascinating: there’s a size of group practice that’s inherently unstable.
🔹 What does that mean?
At this stage, a practice has too many clinicians to function like a solo practice but not enough revenue to fully support administrative staff. The result? Everyone feels stretched thin.
🔹 What happens when a practice stays in this stage?
• The owner gets overwhelmed trying to do everything.
• Clinicians struggle because the practice lacks strong leadership and support.
• Clients leave because things feel disorganized.
🔹 How do you fix this?
If you’re growing, grow with intention. Before hiring more admin staff, ask:
• Do we have enough revenue to support this role?
• Can we streamline operations before adding another hire?
• Are we balancing clinician needs with financial sustainability?
James sees many practices overstaffing on the admin side, which eats into profits. Instead of adding new hires, look into automation tools and outsourcing options to increase efficiency.
2️⃣ Seasonality Can Make or Break Your Practice
Most therapists don’t realize how seasonal private practice is until they experience their first slow season.
🔹 Here’s what you need to know:
• January–May → High demand as people start the year fresh.
• Summer (June–August) → Many clients pause therapy for vacations.
• Fall (September–November) → Another spike in new clients.
• December → Can be slow due to holiday travel.
If you launch at the wrong time, it can be tough to build momentum.
🔹 How do you protect yourself?
✅ If you’re starting out, time your launch when demand is highest (January–May or September).
✅ If you’re established, build a financial cushion for slower months.
✅ If you want to scale, consider launching a digital product that generates income year-round.
📌 Want a way to create income that’s not tied to client sessions? Sign up for our free 7-day email course to validate your online course idea.
3️⃣ Therapists Must Think Like Business Owners
James brought up a truth that many therapists don’t like to hear:
🔹 Private practice isn’t just about helping people—it’s a business.
If you don’t have a clear plan for growth, financial stability, and work-life balance, your practice can quickly feel like it owns you instead of the other way around.
🔹 How do you build a practice that lasts?
✅ Know your numbers. Track your expenses, revenue, and profit margins.
✅ Think long-term. Have a plan for growth that doesn’t lead to burnout.
✅ Make sure your business model works. Are you relying only on client sessions, or do you have other income streams?
Therapists who succeed long-term are the ones who embrace the business side of private practice. If you want to have more freedom and flexibility, you need to think beyond 1:1 work.
💡 Check out James’s firm to get expert guidance on your private practice finances.
Final Thoughts
Building a financially healthy private practice takes strategy and patience. The key takeaways?
✅ Avoid the “danger zone” in group practice growth—don’t scale too fast without financial stability.
✅ Plan for seasonality so you’re not caught off guard by slow months.
✅ Think like a business owner—your income depends on the decisions you make today.
If you’re a solo therapist considering taking some (to hedge) or full insurance but want to skip the headaches of dealing with insurance companies, Alma is worth checking out.
With Alma, you’ll benefit from:
• A 45-day credentialing process (no more months of waiting!)
• A HIPAA-compliant telehealth platform to keep your sessions secure
• Guaranteed payouts every two weeks
• Access to CEUs included with membership
Alma makes it easier than ever to build a thriving practice.
👉 Learn more and get 2 months FREE—an exclusive offer for STC listeners
Transcript (AI-Generated)Melvin Varghese:
Hey it's Melvin. Before we jump into today's podcast session just wanted to take a moment to thank the team over at Alma for supporting today's podcast session. Alma is an all-in-one platform that works with solo practitioners particularly who want to take insurance but don't want to deal with all of the headaches of taking insurance. We know that as clinicians doing private practice, that managing all of the different facets of private practice is absolutely overwhelming. Everything from managing clients to the admin to the billing, it's not just seeing the clients, right? It's all the other stuff. And so Alma is an all-in-one platform that really makes this process a lot easier. Their core thing is that they let you get credentialed with a majority of insurance providers. They do a 45-day credentialing process. They offer higher reimbursement rates than if you were to go through just solo and apply for insurance. And they also do guaranteed payback within two weeks. So basically your income stays steady. You get paid within 14 days of actually seeing the client. Now where Alma really shines is actually beyond all of this, the other stuff that they do. So they offer everything from peer supervision groups to resource sharing groups where clinicians can exchange worksheets and all sorts of stuff, as well as live CEUs and on-demand CEUs so you can get your CU hours. They also provide a HIPAA compliant telehealth platform so you can see clients and do telehealth sessions without worrying about safety and security and all of those things. The team at Alma hooked Selling the Couch listeners with a special code two months absolutely free. This is not even advertised online, but if you go to sellingthecouch.com forward slash Alma, Alma is spelled A-L-M-A, you get two months absolutely free. Again, that's sellingthecouch.com forward slash Alma. We'll jump right into today's session. Hello, hello, welcome to today's session of Selling the Couch. I hope you're doing well, having an incredible day. I'm recording this in mid-December 2024, so we're getting ready for the holiday season and I'm going to be taking, you know, a couple of weeks off actually from STC. We've got some travel planned, mainly just kind of focusing on self-care and rest and got our online course mastermind launch that's happening from mid-January to mid-February. So our next cohort of colleagues who will be creating their online courses. So if you're interested in that definitely keep a eye out whether it's connect with me on LinkedIn or joining our newsletter which is over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash newsletter. But today's podcast is the topic is uncomfortable truths about private practice finances This is an episode that I've been wanting to do for a long time and it's mainly because I feel like sometimes in the private practice space private practice is often seen as this like golden goose that if you just get into private practice it's going to be great everything's going to be great like everything's going to be nice and smooth and with stc so one of the things that i have now learned that doing this for nine years which is crazy 10 years when it'll be year 10 when this episode releases and uh i just realized man there's a There's a lot more nuances there than that. Everything is not always like amazing, that businesses don't always just keep going up, that there are things that are like legit stressful. And I'm joined today by James Childers. James and I actually connected this year at the Mental Health Marketing Conference. And James is a CPA by profession. His website is cacadvisors.com. Most, if not all of his practice is focused on working with therapists. And so James has such an interesting perspective on private practice, but from a numbers perspective, and that's what we're talking about. And so we cover a range of things, but like kind of a bookend to it is I asked James to kind of share the top three emerging trends or the uncomfortable aspects of private practice. So, for example, one of them, I'll just share one of them, which is making sure that the external environment of your private practice matches the internal environment. So, this is both in terms of like how your practice is getting built out but also the internal of what structures are there internally for you like emotionally but also internally within your private practice to be able to accommodate that growth. Often I think what happens is for clinicians is they have this unexpected growth and they realize they don't have the infrastructure or the systems to be able to handle that growth and that inevitably then leads to burnout or resentment or just not doing as good work or if you're in a group practice like high turnover among clinicians. If you're in a solo practice maybe more clients like don't show up or they discontinue with you. I think you're going to really enjoy this conversation. I think it's going to open your eyes to to some of the realities of business ownership and private practice. So here's my conversation with James Childress from cacadvisors.com. Hey James, welcome to Selling the Couch.
James Childress:
Oh, thanks Melvin for having me. Appreciate it.
Melvin Varghese:
First of all, I'm so glad like we finally got to meet at Mental Health Marketing Conference and this year I like thoroughly enjoyed our lunch. That was some good tacos.
James Childress:
No doubt.
Melvin Varghese:
Puffy taco, which I've never actually heard of.
James Childress:
Yeah, that place was awesome. That venue for the conference was exceptional. Because I mean, there was food everywhere. But then good food. Yeah. So that taco place was awesome.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, if y'all listening, it's the factory in Franklin, Tennessee, shout out to them. And I liked it because it's almost like a conference venue, a coffee shop and like a restaurant scene or like a we work like combined together, basically. And it was such a cool vibe. And I loved it, because you could like totally go to the session, but you could step out and just like, grab coffee or grab a meal with somebody. And we got to do that. I'm so thankful for that. We're talking about something I had told you all night. I was like, I think I want to do something called Uncomfortable Truths About Private Practice Finances. And I thought, just based on our conversation, you're a CPA by training and you work with a lot of private practices, solo practices, group practices. And I feel like we've never done an episode where it's just like talking about the numbers, but not like in a, this is going to be a horrible episode. What are like profit margins in private practice? What are things that therapists don't talk about that kind of stuff? So I'm really looking forward to like our conversation and, uh, yeah, I appreciate you.
James Childress:
Yeah. I'm excited. Yeah. Let's dig in.
Melvin Varghese:
I don't know, when I was thinking about this, like, I told you, like, hey, let's maybe think about like, kind of top three interesting things that therapists don't talk about. But even before we jump too much into that, I feel like broadly, I feel like a lot of many therapists go from a traditional employer. And there's like some sort of like, discontentment or misalignment with that employer and that kind of has them jumping into private practice, right?
James Childress:
Yeah, yeah.
Melvin Varghese:
Right. Is that broadly like pattern that you've seen as well?
James Childress:
It's true. And so I guess there's a couple of things I typically see operating, you know, one they're working for an employer and they just feel like, you know, this vibe is not working for me. They don't align with the mission, you know, so to speak, like some of them, and it can be like in a positive light or a negative light. They, maybe they're like, I don't think the practices here are the types of things I want to support. Or it could just be, Hey, I want to focus in a certain niche. or I really want to pursue the independence of having my own practice or sort of the adventure of being an entrepreneur. And especially if you haven't done it before, it can sometimes look maybe a little bit more appealing than those who've been through the experience. But certainly at the start, there's like, hey, I really this is something I want to tackle. I want to do this on my own. I want to have my own thing. And that is kind of the American dream, so to speak, is to sort of carve something out for yourself and make it happen. And so, yeah, I think there's a lot of things that can be attractive, you know, from every side of it, you know, whether it's a positive thing that sends them, you know, zooming off in a different direction or something that they are actually displeased with. I think both can exist. So, yeah.
Melvin Varghese:
Thank you for saying all of that. And I think even broadly, I've noticed another pattern, which is, I feel like some therapists, when they decide to go into private practice, they're like burn the ships down. I'm going all in, like quitting my job, like going in next week, doing all the, you know, set up LLC, like bank accounts, like set up my, you know, online directory profile, whatever. Right. And then there's like other therapists that will, be like a lot more like, okay, I think I want to do this maybe in the next year. Let me build out like an income, like a backlog of income, say, set aside some savings broadly, again, like what are you sort of seeing like pattern wise among therapists?
James Childress:
Yeah. In terms of what they're doing and how they approach that.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. Like how they jump in.
James Childress:
Yeah. I see like a lot of the solos that we've worked with who are starting, they're often supported by, you know, a spouse income, you know, so they're not sort of the lone ranger as you might sort of imagine it all the time. But the ones who aren't or the ones who are a little bit more prudent and kind of conscientious or careful, they're going to sort of bank things up a little bit. They want to sort of see that flywheel start to move a little bit before they sort of commit. And I think that's appropriate. You know, it's like they say in project management, everything takes longer than you expect. And it really, really does. It takes more time. It takes more money. It takes more attention. You just don't know until you're in it, you know, sometimes. And so I really recommend getting a good strong foundation and really sort of reassessing that foundation before you sort of make any big changes, because that's that's really important. You don't know until you're in it what some of the pitfalls are. And there's a list on that front.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, we'll definitely talk about some of those pitfalls. This is a really silly question, but broadly, do you have a recommendation of how much income to have in a backlog as somebody starts a private practice? For example, if you're working in an agency like a three month cushion or something like that. Because I would imagine for most people, you're not going to have a full caseload within like one or two months, you know.
James Childress:
You won't. Yeah. And that is one of the things that I think is most important to figure out is actually that caseload growth and sort of what it takes to get that caseload growing, because that is what gives you that number, right? So if you get a sense that you can create a certain amount of increase over a certain period of time with a certain amount of either hustle or cash, you sort of get that sense, okay, this is predictable. I can do sort of a conservative view of this. But if I were to kind of answer that in terms of like a number, it would depend on the time of year, right? Because we are in a somewhat seasonal profession, a seasonal service industry. It varies depending on the state. It varies depending on the demographic they're serving, the diagnoses they tend to work with more and the modalities. But there tends to be kind of a drop in December. Well, it's not retail. Retail goes up in December. We tend to go down as everyone's out shopping or, you know, visiting the family or whatever. And then the summer is often kind of a reliable slow point. So I would say stage things based on, you know, learning from your peers in your local area. What are the areas where things are growing? And then make sure you have on hand the amount of cash that can support things through any sort of slump. that you might experience and then have at least enough on hand for like that slow time. So let's say it's summer. That is typically the slowest time before you kick things off. I would try to kick that private practice off during a time when things are going to grow, which typically is January through May is when we see a big rally. Sometimes, you know, there's a good section in the fall where it rallies as well. But then also have the cash on hand to support a slow season in case you don't really see. So, you know, in case you're just kind of maintaining through that first kind of busy period and sort of getting your bearings. So if we had to throw out a number, it might be like three months of, you know, personal expenses. But, you know, the better your foundation, you have the less risk you have. And so it's mostly kind of gauging that and some of the some of the challenge we find in being an entrepreneur is taking our enthusiastic foot from the gas to the brake, slowing things down a little bit. That can be kind of the hard part is taking your time when you really, really don't want to.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, absolutely. And then also, thank you for normalizing the time, when to start. I think I broadly understood that, but I've never heard someone put it into those words. So thank you for that. The underlying thing is, it's not just about starting a private practice, right? There's some business strategy that you've got to really think about. And also, like, I don't know, for whatever reason, let's say, for example, you are locked into starting your private practice in the summer, like not being so hard on yourself, realizing like broadly, private practices do have a summer slump.
James Childress:
Yeah. And when we're savvy business owners and entrepreneurs, let me back this up by someone authoritative. So I'm a big fan of William Edwards Deming. I use his principles in a lot of the things I do, and he's largely credited with being responsible or at least a main instigator for the Japanese economic miracle, which is basically where Japan in 20 or 30 years went from total destruction after World War II to being the third largest economic superpower. So anyway, I talk about Deming all the time. My team members really get tired of it. One of the things he advocated was data-based decisions. And he famously said, without data, you're just another person with an opinion. And that cuts through the noise for a lot of entrepreneurs and business owners. Going with your gut is when it comes to business, it can often be somewhat overrated. There's some value to that in certain instances, but you want to pair that with as much data as possible. And often when we think about data, we sort of lump it in this category of like huge spreadsheets of statistics and stuff. But it's just sort of what you see and what you know. And so when you think about launching a private practice or a business of any type, you really want this thing to succeed. And think about that in the big picture. Don't think about necessarily, you want to think about the potential, but don't bank on the potential. Fight for the potential and go with what you can expect. which is what you can expect is there will be some surprises, some things you don't expect. And there will be some challenges that you didn't expect. And you want to have as strong a foundation as possible. You want to eliminate as much risk in that endeavor as possible. So you can have the highest likelihood of success, not just, you know, success in a timeframe, but success, period. And so that's where those things come in. Like what's going on in your local area? Is it under-saturated? Is there a specific, you know, segment that you feel like you could serve better where you might have a better likelihood of success? Like just what are all the things you can kind of extrapolate and pull from what you know and what you see? Use it, you know, don't ignore it, but use it. And that will create a stronger foundation. That foundation can be cash. It can be resources. It can be skills, but it also can be, you know, that data. Like, what do I see in the market? What is going on around me? And how can I pursue this endeavor with the highest likelihood of success? Not necessarily speed, but highest likelihood of success.
Melvin Varghese:
How do you find like local data like that? Like, is it just broadly like looking on like an online directory? I guess what are trends that are happening in your local area? Is it just how would a therapist go about finding that information or water somewhere?
James Childress:
Yeah, you can join, you know, local associations like counseling associations, psychology associations are typically governed by state. You can develop your own peer group by finding people on LinkedIn that you sort of mesh with asking questions and sort of. just navigating that space, finding a mentor. Maybe there's a real sort of competitive pairing. Like let's say their focus is really like anxiety and depression and your focus is ADHD or you know, this is just they're in an area that you're not in. Buddy up, create sort of a peer group of the two of you, share your notes and see if you can support each other. Right. So all those things can be, you know, research. I'm using air quotes for the people who are listening, but that can be research. Right. And data. You know, it sounds like we're just having a chat and we're having a conversation, which, of course, we are. But you're learning great things about your market. You're building a network, you're gaining resources. And, you know, it's amazing the way just having someone you can sort of tap into a small group that you're connected with, the level of support you can get from that, because you can avoid a complete disaster by someone just sharing something, one minute conversation saying, oh, no, no, go left instead of right. It can be immensely valuable. And that's another thing. And again, you know, I'm trying to, for someone who's starting a private practice like that, that's something you can do that doesn't cost a lot of money, right? It just sort of takes some time and sort of takes some, you know, some networking and sort of building some relationships, creating some trust with some people that are in your area. It doesn't cost you much money, maybe a cup of coffee, like we were talking about at that conference, you know, but it can really be invaluable when you find yourself sort of in a pickle facing a surprise or a challenge you didn't expect.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, I mean, it's that thing of like private practice is both about the ambition side of it, but it's also like the humility side of it. And this, like you said, the image was fantastic, like knowing when to push the gas and knowing when to press the brake when most of you in their initial stages, most of us like want to just pedal to the metal, like, you know, and go, go, go. And there can be so much wisdom in learning like, oh, that would have been a really not good path, like it may have been okay for now, but I didn't think about that, the repercussions of that like three, five years from now.
James Childress:
Yeah, it's amazing someone who's been and done the things they can share that we don't necessarily see at the start.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, absolutely. You know, as therapists, we manage so many roles in private practice, from being a clinician to a business owner, to doing all the things that we need to do to market our practice. It's really easy for all of us to feel overwhelmed, especially when we are juggling so many things. That's where the team at Alma comes in. This is a platform that I would consider if you are a solo practitioner that is either wants to take insurance or that is private pay but just wants to hedge a little bit especially to account for periods of economic uncertainty or weird things like hyperinflation like we've been dealing with in more recent times. Alma makes it easier than ever to build a thriving private practice. They include a bunch of different cool stuff. So one is they have a members-only platform where you can exchange resources with other clinicians, exchange referrals, and just find support. They have consultation groups as well. And they also offer CEUs as part of your membership at no additional cost. These are both live and on demand. Now, in order to get credentialed with Alma, typically to get credentialed with insurance, it takes months and months, but Alma actually has a 45-day credentialing process and you actually get increased reimbursement rates. So they're often higher than if you were to go just through the insurance carrier and if you were just apply as a solo practitioner. And the really cool thing is they guarantee payback within two weeks of when you see the client so that you can ensure your income stays steady. You can see as few as like one client or two clients just to hedge a little bit. And Hama also has a HIPAA compliant telehealth platform so that everything is safe and secure. Alma also has a bunch of different stuff to support clinicians, all the way from workshops and all sorts of things, as well as an online directory, so that you can continue to get referrals coming your way. The best part, the team at Alma was able to hook the Selling the Couch family and listeners with a unique code, which is over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash Alma. That's actually for two months absolutely free on Alma's platform. This is a non-advertised, like non-publicly advertised discount. So definitely encourage you to check it out over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash Alma for a 60 day free trial just to see if it makes sense for you. James, I wanted to shift over to kind of the crux of our conversation. Again, we titled this Uncomfortable Truths About Private Practice Finances. And let's even start like one at a time. What would be like, and broadly, it's like the top kind of three emerging trends that you're seeing when it comes to private practice finances. So this isn't even when somebody just starting, but even somebody that's like an established solo practitioner or practitioner as well. Let's just start wherever you want to start and we can dive deep in.
James Childress: though.
The biggest trends in private practice finance.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. Biggest trends are like uncomfortable truths, whatever, however you want to.
James Childress:
Sure. Yeah. I also like to kind of share, you know, before I share uncomfortable truths or potentially get into the side of things that's somewhat critical, I think it's important to share, you know, I come to this from my own personal experience in therapy and I found it transformative and I admire therapists immensely because I was able to find answers I wasn't able to find anywhere else. And so I'm definitely an advocate for therapists. And so I'd like to start that as a preference before I say anything that could verge on the area of being critical is because I want private practice to succeed. But that being said, one of the biggest things I see is especially when group practices start, there's a size, there's a size of group practice that is inherently unstable. And what I mean by that is that most clinicians are going to go to a group practice because they don't want to do all the things. And so there's going to be a demand for the admin side, the billing side, marketing side, et cetera, et cetera, et cetera, to be handled by the practice itself. And there's a stage and this is kind of the stressor, like a lot of people talk about quotas and having to hit session counts and all these other types of things. Sort of the nucleus of that is that sort of operator, it's sort of that mechanism. And I'm always a big fan of like, let's get to the thing that's sort of black and white inside of it all that makes it clear. What's going on there is the clinicians want all those things to be off their plate so they can just practice and they can just serve their patients. Well, in turn, if the practice is not sizable enough to support all of those things, then basically what happens is everyone inside that practice is like bootstrapping, right? The resources are kind of slim and the ability to provide that thing that the clinicians are wanting and needing is less and less. And then also the owner is now doing a group practice. They're trying to get this thing off the ground. Sort of everyone is feeling kind of this scarcity and sort of stringent operation of things. It's important to know that that's a phase that we need to pass through. And that's the uncomfortable truth. The uncomfortable truth is there's sort of a set point where the juice is kind of worth the squeeze, so to speak, you know, where there's enough going on. And like, I saw this pretty clear that I was presenting at APA. in Seattle and I was talking about, you know, net income percentages and the average in the industry is 14%. And I mentioned that to someone and they said, Oh man, that's not enough. I don't know why I would do this for 14%. And I was like, well, what does that 14% applied to? Is it applied to 100,000? Is it applied to 2 million? And the question is, like, if all we have left is a small number, it's not going to be incentivizing. And so what we have to advocate then is we have to advocate getting past the stage where there's just not enough to go around and just not enough to make it worthwhile. And that's that sort of bootstrapping phase where every other business out there is going to try to get past it. Or they're in that spot where they're in this role where they're wearing every single hat and they're, you know, doing all of the different things. And now that practice owner feels like they're not owning a practice. The practice is owning them. And and it gets very, very laborious and tedious. And the real problem that happens then is they start to resent that practice. They start to feel like, oh, man, why did I do this? And that's a real shame. You know, so like that, I'm a real advocate for that. They have to get past those stages. where it's really scarce, really stringent, really, really tight. They have to fight to get past those stages and make as many really, really good decisions along that track. And if possible, make it as short a journey as possible by really acknowledging what they're after. And so that's that first one is sort of the bootstrapping practice thing. It's, it's, it's a little bit hard to think about there being this stage where everyone's sort of in the same boat and it's no one's exactly at that point getting what they're really wanting out of this.
Melvin Varghese:
What's a common thing that like a group practice at that stage is doing that kind of keeps them stuck at that stage?
James Childress:
Yeah. So what I'll often see is the practice owner will hire admin staff and they're often overstaffed on the admin side because they're trying to meet a demand that they see in the rest of the practice. Right. And so that creates sort of this imbalance. And this is where we talk about balancing and benchmarking all this type of stuff. People think it's just a bunch of. you know, numbers and things, but really there's a balance. There's a balance between the amount we can invest in sort of the admin team, however size that is, and we want to keep them highly accountable and productive to all the results they're working on. And so that we preserve that capital, not just for the clinicians, but also for the marketing to continue our growth track. Also, all the other things that go into making sure that the inside of the practice is growing as much as the outside of the practice. The outside is going to be that base of customers and everything, the patients that are coming to that practice for all the help. The inside is going to be that structure and foundation like we talked about that makes sure that all those resources are coming to bear and everyone inside the practice is getting what they need. So that's the big thing I see. I was talking with one practitioner, and this is an example. She had five providers in her practice, and she had five admin people. And what she was hearing from the admin people was she was hearing that they were just overwhelmed with work. Well, he shouldn't have five providers and five admin. That's a little out of balance. And she was feeling it. She was feeling in the pocketbook and things weren't going well. And so that's the typical thing. Like, you know, be very, very clear on the admin side of that practice. That's got to be one of the most efficiently run things you've ever seen. It's got to be tight. It's got to be very, very efficient. And there's got to be some really, really strong accountability between the practice owner and all of those admin supporters. They really, really need to produce and be effective so that the space that the clinicians are operating in can be the right space and they can do all their work.
Melvin Varghese:
Is there a broadly like a number, like for example, one admin per three clinicians, like anything like that, that's sort of like a, or does it really depend on like, I guess, the type of practice, what they're doing, therapy versus assessments, like, like anything like that?
James Childress:
Yeah, it does kind of depend on what they're doing. And so I wouldn't necessarily, I can't necessarily use kind of a benchmark in terms of headcount. But what I will say is that for the clinical side of things, what we often see happening with a lot of group practices, this is maybe a little bit of an uncomfortable truth as well. is there on the admin side and the supervision side, things increase based on headcount. The demands increase based on headcount, but the revenue increases based on sessions. Right. And so if we see a lot of folks coming into a group practice where on average, we've got sort of a part time clinician base, What we're going to see is we're going to see the admin and the supervisor load be really significant because they're serving all the people. But then the revenue is dictated by the sessions. And so another way I like to describe it is sometimes we'll have a situation. This is, again, a bugaboo about, you know, billable sessions, you know. But sometimes we'll see a situation where the session load is spread out over a significant number of people. And what we've done is we've traded a concern over clinician burnout for an alternative concern of supervisor burnout. Because now the supervisors are basically, their attention is spread across a head count, not necessarily a session count. And so that's sort of that balance. And so when you think about that, if we get that in check, we're not only protecting, hopefully protecting clinicians against, you know, safety concerns and workplace concerns, but we're also protecting supervisors. We can keep things kind of nice and neat and efficient and then have the right accountability in place for the admin team and judge that based on like their success and their progress along their tasks and the efficiency and thing. The other thing I will say is, is, uh, and this is a big, very important thing is whenever we're working with the admin team, we have to. Pass through a few gates for whether or not we're going to hire. And we need to make sure one, that the admin team is doing things in the right timing. You know, there might be things they're doing monthly that they really should only be doing quarterly or annually, you know, like we don't actually just need that that much, you know, that's good to make a point in. And it also may be that, you know, instead of hiring another person to do a task in a manual way, perhaps there's a software or perhaps there's an outside service. You know, I'm a really big advocate and we've seen this play out in the business world. Businesses that bring on external resources like experts and like, you know, little areas in the business, they tend to get ahead a little bit faster as opposed to everyone's sort of reinventing the wheel as they go. Billing especially is a big one for that. I'll see practices hire sort of a biller and an internal biller, one person, and that person will learn how to do all the things. I definitely appreciate people learning and everything, but when you're a small group practice, it can be very good to hire an expert because if that billing gets behind, and I've seen it, we had a client we brought on a few months ago, they had four years of billing that wasn't collected. Four years. And it was just because it was like, hey, they hired someone and that person did their best. And I don't necessarily think anyone was nefarious, but it was like, wearing a pickle, you know, and hopefully we would have in the all best scenarios, we would have seen this sooner.
Melvin Varghese:
Thanks for noting that one. What's another kind of uncomfortable truth or emerging trend that you've seen?
James Childress:
Yeah. You know, I think one of the big things I like to advocate and it's a little bit bittersweet, but I think therapists really, really need to succeed. And I mean that like in every area, like the real truth is they've got to want it all. And they've got to want it all. They've got to, they've got to want to serve their patients really, really well. They've got to want to make good money. They've got to want to have a very efficient business. They've got to want to have an excellent brand that pulls people in. They've got to want demonstrable results with their patients. They actually need to have it all. And I say that because, you know, we're heading into this space where the stigma is subsiding or, well, subsiding, it's still subsiding, and diagnoses are increasing and people are facing challenges. But in turn, people are also realizing Hey, I can just get help with this. Like, I don't have to be a wreck. Again, I'm using air quotes. I don't have to be a wreck to talk to a therapist and get this incredible experience of the objective experience of someone who can help me understand myself. It's amazing. And I think more people are starting to see that. So what we need is we need more therapists coming into the space. And that means we have to increase these average clinician incomes. We have to improve those outcomes. They have to be doing better, because we have to make it attractive. This is the big mistake that my profession made. 75% of the CPAs that were working in 2010 have retired by now. They're gone. 75%. And for every three that were retiring, one was sitting for the exam and most of them didn't pass and then most of them when they got in the industry, they didn't stay. And so, you know, there's not a lot of CPAs, you know, it's harder to find and everyone complains about how their CPA doesn't pay any attention to them and everything like that. And that's a real issue for our profession. I'm on one of our state societies and the discussion all the time is what they call pipeline, which is like how to get people into the profession. And I'm the one who always says, hey, wouldn't it help if they got paid more? You know, and it's like, but it's not just one problem. Like you can't just sort of chop a tree down and fix everybody's pay. It's systemic. And it's like it's lots and lots of little levers that we have to pull to make all these things run right. We've got to make sure like in private practice, we've got to make sure cash flow is good and billing's good. And we're adjusting our average revenue rate. and things are growing at a decent clip and we know what our future is going to be, we know what our past was, like we can make really confident decisions moving our foot from the gas to the brake or the brake to get to the gas. So that uncomfortable truth is they really have to want it all otherwise I think in five to ten years we're all going to be really frustrated because the status of these group practices isn't going to be really what we want. And we're not going to be seeing a lot of people flocking to this as a profession where they can serve others and indeed also serve themselves.
Melvin Varghese:
Man, so fascinating how you phrased that. Because in the moment, you're just thinking about sustaining a practice, whether it's solo or group. But we're not thinking about the ripple effects, the downstream effects of the actions that we do now. and how can it impact like perception of the field, future earning potential, all of that. That's like really fascinating. What's like a normal rate of growth, like healthy growth for like a solo group practice? Again, I could imagine this probably depends on the area, type of clients, like, I don't know. So I guess that's like one part. I have a second part, but I'll let you answer that first part, so. Sure.
James Childress:
Yeah. So I would first say that, you know, balanced growth is essential, right? External growth and internal growth. But it's not uncommon for a practice to double within two years if the right things are in place. I mean, what we've seen with everything after COVID and with the climate around mental health changing, growth can happen relatively quickly. producing good outcomes, having patients be satisfied and having all the right connections be out there and building a referral network, you can have the incoming requests and everything. And that's really what we're after is to take advantage of this but take advantages in the right way because the thing I'm a big advocate of as well is I think clinicians should supervise clinicians and because I've been in the therapy session and I understand compassion fatigue as a patient and sympathetic trauma as a patient, I've gotten to the end of a session being like, are you actually going to go talk to someone else now? Like you've got to be kidding me, you guys have your ways of managing that and everything. But I don't think that people who aren't clinicians understand that space and that experience. It's almost like when you think about it from my perspective, again as a patient, but it's more intimate than even like the most complex surgery because you're actually the emotions that are involved are actually experienced by both parties. And that's challenging. I see it as challenging. And so I think it's very important that clinicians be supervised, led and managed by clinicians. And that is why this is important. And I was thinking about all the interesting things I thought would be worth sharing. So I apologize if I'm rambling. That's part of it, I think, is that clinicians leading clinicians is really what we're after. And the biggest kind of ripple effect we're trying to create is we want people who are entirely outside of this profession to sort of have their ears perk up and say, oh, wait, I could do that. Oh, and I could make some decent money and I could have a great career. I could have all those things. I could be really proud of myself at the end of the day for the work I've done. And I could have a retirement, you know, like all the things. I mean, so we have to pave that way. We have to make that happen.
Melvin Varghese: Thank you for saying that and like normalizing all of that. I think we have we have our final one. What would you say is kind of a third uncomfortable truth or emerging trend when it comes to private practice finances?
James Childress: Yeah, so, and it's a little bit different than I think what most people would expect me to say, but the way I like to say it is the external environment must match the internal environment. And again, I try to sort of get to like basic truths. I try to not be the, you know, the messenger as much as someone who's pointing to the message. But we see this like one of the best ways I think it's described as, you know, Sam Walton, the guy who created Walmart, you know, back when it was less of a sort of corporate juggernaut, like it is now, it was, you know, at the original start, a lot of these businesses that are doing well, they're doing well because they really, really serve customers. But he said, there is only one boss, the customer. And they can fire everyone from the chairman on down just by spending their money someplace else. Now, as a business owner and an entrepreneur, what you realize, and this is where things get sort of tough sometimes, is you realize the external environment is full of customers that may ignore you completely, may not understand your message, may hear the message that's perfect for them and still not buy. And they may show up and they may stick around a while and you'll think it's going to last and they leave. Like there's this real challenge. And this is why marketing is so important because the experience in the external environment of any business and a practice can be this sort of ambivalent and like transient sort of customer experience where it's like, why isn't this working? Why aren't we getting traction? Don't they know we can help them? like all these things and businesses that do really well ensure that the inside of the company, the internal environment matches that external environment. This is, they can sum it up by saying things like product market fit, right? Does our product match our customer? And sometimes it has to match in ways even the customer doesn't know that they're needing this thing, right? But the internal environment has to match the external environment that has to take place. That fit has to take place. And so the uncomfortable truth is then everything inside that internal environment has to adapt to the external environment. And so sometimes like this is what happens, you know, I'm working with practice owners and they're talking about conversations, you know, it'll be between sort of them and like a clinician or a supervisor and admin person, like they're kind of experiencing a little bit of friction. The thing that sort of cuts through that noise is What about the patient? How does this serve the patient? But how does this serve the patient as a customer? Right? The uncomfortable truth then about finance is productivity is essential. Product market fit is essential. Actually, truly catering to the needs of the customer in the right way. both ethically as a provider and a practitioner, but also like business to customer. Like how are we meeting their needs? How are we not only meeting their needs, but how are we helping them make sure they know their needs are met? Because maybe they don't know. Maybe they don't know what we had just accomplished in that session. That's why things like collaborative charting are so interesting to me and hopefully everybody. But that's that nugget. And if it's not working right, if that product market fit isn't working right, we're going to lose ground. We really are going to lose ground. And it will be obvious in the financials. We'll see a lot of patient turnover. We'll see a lot of clinician turnover because we also have an internal thing, product market fit, the market of talent. What is talent needing when they come here? Not only do they want all the admin things to be taken off their plate, what else are they looking for? What else are they trying to accomplish and what can we effectively deliver to them? So that's kind of that thing. That's just a way to think about it. And, you know, it keeps us away from looking at a big spreadsheet full of numbers and talking about all that boring stuff. But, uh, it's a very, very important challenge, you know, making sure that we are matching and it can be insidious sometimes just the little details that have the biggest impact. So.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, I'm just like, the one thing I'm taking away from our conversation is one is like how many layers one has to consider. And hearing this is not like, meant to intimidate you. It's meant to like inform you and to be thoughtful about it. Because I was even thinking about like my own clinical journey. I was at a previous group practice. I remember there was situations where it was evident that we needed certain things, and certain things that seemed like basic things, but then they weren't really willing to do that. And then there was this huge turnover of clinicians. And it's such a, I don't know, I think I'd like us think about it, like, maybe think about like, probably what was happening, like, there was like this internal, the external environment wasn't matching, like the internal
James Childress:
Yeah, that's great. And I see that too. Like, and, you know, just as I guess one example, that's kind of interesting is another sort of corporate juggernaut, but Amazon at its start had a lot of very good things going for it. And one of the things I think they did that was really exceptional is on all their executive meetings and the board meetings, they'd have an empty chair at the table. And that was meant to represent the customer. And it was like, let us never forget who this is supposed to serve, because if we lose sight of that, it all goes sideways. But yeah, I just thought I'd share that because that probably was a little bit missing there, you know, where and you probably had some of those clinicians in that experience where they were like, you know, thinking like, hey, these people need something different, needs to operate different. I just know it needs to operate different. In a right setting, everyone should be able to raise their hand and say, Hey, this isn't working. My customer who I'm having a direct experience with because the folks further up don't, right? So they need that input, like on the ground level, that customer interaction. How did that go? Did they get what they needed? Were they satisfied? You know, those things have to be shared. And if they're not, if that gap is closed, then there's no hope for that. Those two environments to match. They'll never match.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, James, I'm so grateful for you, grateful for our friendship, grateful for you coming on the podcast. Where can we learn more about you and the awesome work that you're doing with therapists?
James Childress:
Oh, yeah. Thanks so much, Melvin, for having me. Our website is cacadvisors.com and we'd love to hear from anyone who might want to chat. No pressure. We're not boring snobs as some of our peers might be. We'd love to hear what your challenges are, see if there's any way we can support you.
Melvin Varghese:
Awesome. Thank you so much, James. Have a great rest of your day and we'll talk soon. Hey there, I hope you enjoyed my conversation with James and especially if you are starting private practice or you are in private practice or you're a seasoned practitioner, whether it's a solo practice or a group practice, I hope today's session has just been really helpful for you. I was trying to think about like, you know, what are my sort of big takeaways I wanted to focus on the first thing that James talked about, which is realizing that there is a seasonal nature to private practice. And I would even say like most businesses probably have a seasonal nature. And so when you're first starting out, thinking through where can you start if it's possible, right? Like when can you start the private practice in a way that helps you ride the momentum wave, right? And even if you are like established, I think one thing to really think about is if you're building on new products and services, when can you time those? In relation to when there might be demand so for example with like our online course mastermind there's like a legitimate reason why we launched it in. We have two launches we have one in the spring. or early in the year, like mid-January, and then we have one that's like end of summer into the fall. And the main reason was because we noticed that's usually the space when clinicians are most excited and ready to create something and create a course. It didn't really make sense to do it in the summer when there's like, you know, maybe travel and stuff like that. Again, that's just a personal example from STC, but it's something that I thought a lot about as James was sharing. It's not just about launching the thing, it's about the timing of launching the thing. That's also equally important. James' website is over again at cacadvisors.com. And definitely if you have tax kind of questions and just want to get a second perspective on things please don't hesitate to reach out to him. I've gotten to know James online and then obviously we shared a meal and yeah it's just a great vibe that I got from James and I know like you know he's just one of the good folks doing good work to serve our field. Have a great rest of our day and I will talk to you soon. Bye.
Narrator:
Thanks for listening to the Selling the Couch podcast. For more great content and to stay up to date, visit www.sellingthecouch.com.
Melvin Varghese:
Hey there, thank you so much for tuning in to today's session. Just wanted to also let you know that we have a free email newsletter that goes out every week. You can download it over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash newsletter. Basically that newsletter contains some of the stuff that's happening behind the scenes with STC and also with my life and how I'm balancing and trying to balance being both an entrepreneur as well as building a life around my family and my health as well. And it also contains the latest podcast episode and some of the stuff that I'm doing on LinkedIn, some of the strategies and things that are working for me. And then finally, a brand new section called On Mel's Mind, where I take a video or a book or a blog post or something like that that's inspiring me for that week, and I share how I'm implementing it both in my life and in my business. Again, you can download that over at signthecouch.com forward slash newsletter. And if you are one of the 3,700 colleagues that have been a part of the email newsletter, I so appreciate you and I'm grateful for your support. We genuinely try to make these helpful and just based on the data and based on the feedback we're getting, it seems like we're doing a really good job. So appreciate you and I hope that you have a great day.
timestamps00:00:00 – Preparing for Private Practice Success
00:05:30 – Meeting James Childers: Insights from a CPA
00:10:02 – The Journey from Employment to Private Practice
00:15:15 – Building a Strong Foundation Before Launching
00:19:03 – Understanding Seasonal Trends in Private Practice
00:24:49 – The Bootstrapping Phase of Group Practices
00:30:03 – Balancing Admin and Clinical Staff in Group Practices
00:33:50 – The Importance of Competitive Compensation
00:40:32 – Aligning Internal and External Environments
00:44:37 – Key Takeaways and Final Thoughts
selling the couch podcast with melvin varghese phdWeekly interviews, strategy, and advice for building your private practice in and beyond the therapy room.
Apple podcastsYou TubeSpotify ready to launch your podcast?Please check out our FREE podcasting workshop for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This workshop is pre-recorded so you can watch it on a day and time that works for your schedule.
It contains a lot of practical tips that we've learned as STC has reached 1.81 million+ downloads and become a 6-figure business with podcasting as the backbone.
sign up for podcasting workshopJames childressCPA
James Childress is a CPA whose practice primarily focuses on working with therapists, giving him a unique perspective on today’s topic. In this episode, we cover the top three uncomfortable aspects of private practice that can lead to imbalance and big problems. James shares insights that help us better understand business ownership, financial stability, and the seasonal nature of private practice.
Melvin varghese phdPsychologist and Founder @ Selling The Couch
Melvin Varghese, PhD is a licensed psychologist in Philadelphia, PA. In 2015, Dr. Varghese founded Selling The Couch, a podcast to help therapists move from clinical to online income.
On the podcast, he interviews successful practitioners about how they've built their practices, social media/marketing experts, and shares lessons as he uses our clinical skills to create an online business powered by podcasting + online courses.
The podcast is one of the top Career podcasts in Apple Podcasts, has been downloaded over 1.8 million times, and is heard in over 125 countries. Mel is a successful course creator with 240+ students and $300k+ in course sales.
More PostsUncomfortable Truths About Private Practice Finances (with James Childress)by Melvin Varghese | Jan 24, 2025 | Blog, Private Practice, STC Podcast
Melvin Varghese with James Childress on Uncomfortable Private Practice Finance Truths
When Should You Hire An Intake Coordinator? (Uriah Guilford)by Melvin Varghese | Feb 6, 2025 | Blog, Growing Your Practice, Private Practice, Productivity, STC Podcast
Uriah Guildford joins us to talk about hiring an intake coordinator.
5 Signs You're Ready To Launch Your Online Courses (with Melvin Varghese))by Melvin Varghese | Jan 31, 2025 | Blog, Online Courses, Passive Income for Therapists, Private Practice, STC Podcast
Melvin Varghese giving an overview of launching successful online courses and how you know you are ready.
« Older Entries The post Uncomfortable Truths About Private Practice Finances (with James Childress) appeared first on Selling The Couch | Melvin Varghese PhD.
381: Lessons Learned After 2 Years On LinkenIn + 500k ViewsWritten By Melvin Varghese PhD5 Lessons I’ve Learned About LinkedIn Growth in 2 Years
When I first started on LinkedIn, I was completely intimidated. I thought LinkedIn was only for job updates and resumes. Since I wasn’t job hunting, it felt unnecessary. Fast forward two years, I’ve gone from 600 followers to over 3,600 and reached over 553,000 impressions and created 480+ posts. I’ve learned so much by experimenting, failing, and figuring out what works for LinkedIn growth. Here are the five lessons that transformed how I approach LinkedIn:
1️⃣ The Magic Is in the DMs
I’ll be honest: early on, I got caught up in chasing followers and comments. But I soon realized that meaningful relationships are far more valuable than numbers.
What I Learned: Use LinkedIn’s filters to connect with the right people, like local therapists or those who share your niche (e.g., EMDR or IFS-trained clinicians). If you’re looking to guest on podcasts, search your niche + “podcast” to find hosts with similar interests.
💡 Pro Tip: Before sending a connection request, engage with their posts. Leave genuine comments. When you finally DM them, it feels natural and thoughtful.
2️⃣ The Algorithm Will Always Change
Platforms like LinkedIn are constantly evolving. One month, carousel posts might be king. The next, video shorts might dominate. Chasing trends can feel overwhelming.
What I Learned: Diversify your content. Try text posts, carousels, video shorts, and posts with images. Use tools like Opus Clip to repurpose podcast or YouTube content into engaging shorts for LinkedIn. The key is to repurpose your content strategically.
3️⃣ Beware of Growth Gurus
When you’re on LinkedIn, you’ll inevitably come across “experts” promising quick growth hacks. Some are great, but many over-promise and under-deliver.
What I Learned: Focus on creating content for your ideal audience. For me, that’s therapists transitioning into online income streams. Don’t chase “going viral.” Instead, aim to connect deeply with the people you truly want to serve.
4️⃣ Followers Matter Less Than You Think
It’s not about having all the followers. It’s about having the right followers.
What I Learned: Turn on LinkedIn’s Creator Mode to grow your audience intentionally. Be selective with connection requests. Curate a network of people aligned with your values and goals. Create win-win opportunities vs. quid pro quo ones (you do something for me; I do something for you).
💡 Pro Tip: Think long-term. Who do you want in your network five or ten years from now? Build toward that vision.
5️⃣ Consistency Beats Burnout
When I first started, I tried to post daily, sometimes multiple times a day. It was exhausting. Now, I prioritize sustainability.
What I Learned: Take breaks when you need them. I use “Walden Months” to focus on self-care and big projects. Think long-term. Posting consistently over time is better than sprinting and burning out as a creator.
Ready to Grow on LinkedIn?
First, please send me a connection request as I'd love to learn about the good work you're doing in the world. Second, LinkedIn growth isn’t about quick wins. It’s about playing the long game, connecting with the right people, and sharing content that resonates.
If you’re a therapist ready to diversify your income, our Course Creator Starter Kit can help you validate your online course idea before you invest time and money into it. Let’s build something amazing, one step at a time.
If you’re a solo therapist considering taking some (to hedge) or full insurance but want to skip the headaches of dealing with insurance companies, Alma is worth checking out.
With Alma, you’ll benefit from:
• A 45-day credentialing process (no more months of waiting!)
• A HIPAA-compliant telehealth platform to keep your sessions secure
• Guaranteed payouts every two weeks
• Access to CEUs included with membership
Alma makes it easier than ever to build a thriving practice.
👉 Learn more and get 2 months FREE—an exclusive offer for STC listeners
Transcript (AI-Generated)Melvin Varghese:
Hey it's Melvin. Before we jump into today's podcast session just wanted to take a moment to thank the team over at Alma for supporting today's podcast session. Alma is an all-in-one platform that works with solo practitioners particularly who want to take insurance but don't want to deal with all of the headaches of taking insurance. We know that as clinicians doing private practice, that managing all of the different facets of private practice is absolutely overwhelming. everything from managing clients to the admin to the billing. It's not just seeing the clients, right? It's all the other stuff. And so Alma is an all-in-one platform that really makes this process a lot easier. Their core thing is that they let you get credentialed with a majority of insurance providers. They do a 45-day credentialing process. They offer higher reimbursement rates than if you were to go through just solo and apply for insurance. And they also do guaranteed payback within two weeks. So basically your income stays steady. You get paid within 14 days of actually seeing the client. Now, where Alma really shines is actually beyond all of this, the other stuff that they do. So they offer everything from peer supervision groups to resource sharing groups, where clinicians can exchange worksheets and all sorts of stuff, as well as live CEUs and on-demand CEUs, so you can get your CEU hours. They also provide a HIPAA compliant telehealth platform so you can see clients and do telehealth sessions without worrying about safety and security and all of those things.
The team at Alma hooked Selling the Couch listeners with a special code two months absolutely free. This is not even advertised online, but if you go to sellingthecouch.com forward slash Alma, Alma is spelled A-L-M-A, you get two months absolutely free. Again, that's sellingthecouch.com/alma.
We'll jump right into today's session. Hello, hello. Welcome to today's session of Settling the Couch. I hope you're doing well, having an incredible day. So the LA wildfires are happening as I am recording this, and I know that many of our colleagues have been directly and indirectly impacted by these fires. So before even jumping in, I just wanted to take a moment to acknowledge just the heartbreak of the situation and how so many of us are struggling. And I just wanted to also let you know that definitely thinking about you, your loved ones, you're definitely in my thoughts and prayers as we sort of navigate the, both like what's happening right now in the moment, but also what I imagine will be many, many months of piecing things together and rebuilding things. Today's podcast is for you if you have been thinking about LinkedIn and posting more on LinkedIn or just have been curious about LinkedIn.
LinkedIn, to be completely honest, absolutely intimidated me. We've been posting on LinkedIn consistently over the past two years and some change. And over that two years, we have grown. I basically had about 600 some odd followers. These were friends and colleagues that I knew, but I wasn't really active on LinkedIn. To be honest, I thought the whole point of LinkedIn was basically to share job updates and then occasionally to like post a resume or something. Since I wasn't actively looking for a job, I just didn't really see the purpose for LinkedIn. But over there, about two years ago, I started noticing a couple of things. One is, when Elon Musk bought Twitter, I felt like there was a huge change within Twitter and the Twitter landscape. And I was actually posting on Twitter, or X as they call it now, but I had grown on X to just a shade under 5,000 followers, but the reality also was I was connecting with some pretty awesome folks, a lot of founders and creators, but I wasn't connecting with a ton of therapists on X. I started kind of looking more on LinkedIn and I made a post two years and some change ago.
It was literally around Thanksgiving about serving mashed potatoes at our daughter's Thanksgiving Day school meal. And that post ended up getting a couple of thousand impressions, which I was so surprised by. And since then, we have grown to, as I record, just 3,664 followers from 600. We've reached 550,703 impressions, which are basically the number of people that are seeing your posts throughout this two years and about, what, two months. And I've actually created about 474 posts on LinkedIn during this time. So I've learned a lot mainly by just testing and experimenting and by no stretch of the imagination am I an expert on LinkedIn. But I wanted to create this episode just to share some of the things that I have learned over the past two years with the hope that it just it helps you and helps you think about LinkedIn. Now, the complete honest truth of this is LinkedIn was very intimidating to me. I had friends and like family from India and friends that don't know me like in a professional setting like with selling the couch as LinkedIn friends and there was always this like mental thing that I was navigating where I was like do I want to post some of this stuff on linkedin and i worried like if my friends would judge me or what they would say for example i i do a lot of hikes so i pretty much hike daily kept wondering like what would people think if i was posting like daily hike you know selfies on linkedin and but i I pushed through it, which I'm just so grateful for, and some of those fears around being judged. And I have learned some pretty surprising lessons.
And I wanted to specifically share five lessons with you that I've learned along the way. So the very first thing is the magic is in the DMs. So DMs is direct messages. So it's, especially on a platform like a LinkedIn or Instagram or TikTok or any of these or X, where followers, where the number of followers you have is very explicitly put on the profile, it's really easy to chase followers and comments. And I did that for a while, and what I found is I was burning out because I was trying to like churn out all of this content. And I was definitely getting followers, but I was also burning out. And I honestly don't even know if they were like the right type of followers. I think people were… I was attracting, for example, people that were marketing folks that could help you grow on LinkedIn. But what I've learned along the way is focusing on thoughtful relationships are way better than chasing followers and comments. So, kind of a couple of practical things. If you are listening and you're in private practice, LinkedIn has an amazing, like, search tool. You can search by all sorts of things, like, for example, what city somebody on LinkedIn lives in, or what interests they have, or stuff like that. So what I would do is I would connect with local therapists using LinkedIn's filters. So you can say, for example, I want to find therapists in Philadelphia or something like that. You can also find therapists who have similar or the same specialties or are trained in a certain modality, perhaps as you are. So for example, like EMDR or IFS. Because usually, so what LinkedIn is basically doing with their search tool is they're analyzing everybody's profiles. So if inevitably, for example, a therapist might have that they're IFS trained therapist or an EMDR trained therapist. And so LinkedIn is then able to capture that on the search. Now, here's kind of a next level strategy. If you want to guest on podcasts, which I think is such a smart play for every therapist, because if you're like, hey Mel, at some point maybe I want to create a podcast, but I just want to kind of feel it out. Or if you're like, Mel, I have no desire to create a podcast, but I do see the power of podcasting. I've mentioned this before, but from a strictly research perspective, there was a study that came out about a year ago and they found that podcasters are the most trusted media personalities. And so definitely guesting on podcasts is a wise move because there's a connection that people feel to you. So what you can then do is you can search your niche plus podcast or plus podcaster and you can kind of see what comes up.
So essentially you are looking for folks that are in similar or aligned niches that also have podcasts. You can reach out to them, connect with them. Now here's kind of a key strategy. I highly recommend engaging with their posts. So leaving a thoughtful comment, not like an AI-generated one, but like a smart, thoughtful comment, and before you actually send them a request to connect. So, the reason for this is, if you have a premium account on LinkedIn, premium users can see if you just search for them and then hit the connect. Right? So, I've gotten a ton of DMs like this, like, Hey Mel, I've been following you for a while and love what you're doing. I'd love to connect. And then I look on their profile and then I saw literally they found me 10 minutes ago on search. So basically they're not being truthful and they're just trying to connect with me for the sake of connecting or growing their business or something like that. Instead, this whole process of what I personally do is I engage with somebody's content for a couple of weeks and then I'll send them just a quick DM and I'll just say, hey, hey Mel, like I've been really enjoying your post, particularly the one on online courses, thinking about creating an online course. So these tips have just been helpful. I would love to connect. So something like that is a way more genuine ask than the previous example that I shared. Another thing you can do is you can share like what resonated from the posts that they've created and how that's been impactful to you or to your business. The second tip or the thought that I wanted to share is the algorithm will always change. So LinkedIn, like many of these kind of platforms, they're basically, when you create a post, they will send it out to a group of people, and if it's resonating for a lot of people, i.e. the post ends up getting engagement, it will end up pushing it out to more and more folks. Now here's what I've kind of learned being I think on both sides of this where there was definitely a season where I was trying to chase virality so that I could grow my followers quickly. But what I found is don't chase trends, focus on consistency. So instead of, you know, trying to post many times a day or trying to post like carousels, which are basically like PDFs, like think of it like a slide deck, like a PDF slide deck, which those are really popular on LinkedIn. Instead of just posting those like day after day, focus on diversifying your content. So, for example, create just regular posts that share thoughts that you have. Other times include a post with perhaps a selfie that is ideally connected to what you shared in the post. Other times do something like a video, like a video short. So posting short on video and just including some text as well. Side note, we use Opus Clip for these, so what we basically do is when I record this podcast, I'm recording an audio version of the podcast and I'm also recording the video. The audio gets distributed to Apple and Spotify and Amazon Music and all of these folks. And the video version gets placed onto YouTube. What we then do is I use the URL for the video version, the YouTube URL, and run it through OpusClip, and OpusClip finds all of these, like, shorts using AI, like, interesting moments in these videos. And then it will make recommendations of, like, it'll basically clip it.
So you can say, like, I only want 30 to 60 second shorts created. And then the cool thing also is OpusClip will then give you, like, a score. It'll say, like, this is in terms of, based on 0 to 100, and 100 being, like, the most engaging. And so basically you can then, like, post some of those shorts on LinkedIn as well. And now carousels are the same way. Carousels traditionally are, again, almost like a PDF of a slide deck, like a PowerPoint slide deck is essentially the way that I think of a carousel. Carousels do really well because people, I don't know, for some reason I think it's just like they break apart the posts and the videos and that kind of content on LinkedIn. They also take a little bit more time to create. But now all of that being said, I would still like diversify your content. So generally what I try to do every week is post some combo of posts, some video shorts, and if I can try to get a carousel in, I'll try to get a carousel in. And if I don't, I don't put too much pressure on myself. I used to put a lot more pressure on myself on LinkedIn, and I just found that the process was just not getting as enjoyable. Basically, what you want to do is experiment on LinkedIn, but don't overthink the metrics. Also just remember, one of the reasons that I went on to LinkedIn after just doing an audio podcast is I noticed that LinkedIn stuff was starting to get indexed by Google. So, for example, LinkedIn articles definitely get indexed by Google. And I've heard kind of mixed things, but LinkedIn posts are also, I think, starting to get indexed by Google. What's interesting is when I just ran like a, I just put out like a, like a privacy on my browser, like I went into private mode. My LinkedIn account was like one of the top, like top five when you just search for my name, which is really interesting. So it's definitely getting indexed by Google. You know, as therapists, we manage so many roles in private practice, from being a clinician to a business owner, to doing all the things that we need to do to market our practice. It's really easy for all of us to feel overwhelmed, especially when we are juggling so many things. That's where the team at Alma comes in.
This is a platform that I would consider if you are a solo practitioner that is either wants to take insurance or that is private pay but just wants to hedge a little bit, especially to account for periods of economic uncertainty or weird things like hyperinflation like we've been dealing with in more recent times. Alma makes it easier than ever to build a thriving private practice. They include a bunch of different cool stuff. So one is they have a members only platform where you can exchange resources with other clinicians, exchange referrals, and just find support. They have consultation groups as well. And they also offer CEUs as part of your membership at no additional cost. These are both live and on demand. Now in order to get credentialed with Alma, typically to get credentialed with insurance it takes months and months, but Alma actually has a 45-day credentialing process and you actually get increased reimbursement rates. So they're often higher than if you were to go just through the insurance carrier and if you were just apply as a solo practitioner. And the really cool thing is they guarantee payback within two weeks of when you see the client so that you can ensure your income stays steady. You can see as few as like one client or two clients just to hedge a little bit. And Halma also has a HIPAA compliant telehealth platform so that everything is safe and secure.
Alma also has a bunch of different stuff to support clinicians, all the way from workshops and all sorts of things, as well as an online directory, so that you can continue to get referrals coming your way. The best part, the team at Alma was able to hook the Selling the Couch family and listeners with a unique code, which is over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash Alma. That's actually for two months absolutely free on Alma's platform. This is a non-advertised, like non-publicly advertised discount, so definitely encourage you to check it out over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash Alma for a 60-day free trial just to see if it makes sense for you. Now, as I alluded to, all of these different types of content, what I've seen over the past couple of years is there's a season where one type of content does really well and then it moves on to like another type of content. So when I first got started, for example, carousels were extremely popular and they did really well. And then it kind of moved to like videos and video shorts. So those ended up doing pretty well.
Now, the key thing is currently like videos and shorts seem to be getting popular. But again, don't try to get hung up on like trying to just produce one type of content. Try to diversify and and I think it'll just make it like a lot more enjoyable and fun. The third tip is watch out for growth gurus. So, I don't know, I think I was like a little teep when I got on LinkedIn. But all of these like social media platforms, whether it is like you run a Facebook group or if you are on TikTok or Instagram or whatever it is, All of these platforms have folks that own agencies, or they're solopreneurs that focus on helping you grow on that specific platform. Now, there's definitely legit ones out there, and they're doing amazing work in the world. But I've also found that many of them kind of over-promise and under-deliver. So just be a little bit careful as you get on LinkedIn as you start posting more, you'll definitely attract like ideal clients, but you'll also attract sort of these growth gurus. And what I found is just broadly, when I create content, I'm usually speaking to like a earlier version of me, which is The therapist that was in clinical practice that now wants to diversify and expand into online income, specifically related to courses and podcasting and things like that. And I realize that I will never like quote-unquote go viral or have like hundreds of thousands of people following me just because there aren't like, I have like, I have a pretty niche audience. So I'm more interested in posting things that's gonna resonate for a therapist that is struggling and navigating that than I am trying to like quote-unquote chase virality. Now, this is a side note, but I also try to find folks on LinkedIn. Again, this is just things that you can do over time, but I try to find folks who are growing a following where most of their content is not about growing on LinkedIn. So this is a little subtle nuance, but the folks that write about growing on LinkedIn, by and large, I think, tend to get followers. But I'm more interested in folks that are writing kind of regular content and how are they writing, what's resonating, that kind of stuff. The fourth point I wanted to share is followers are less relevant than you think.
So it's about the right people, not all people. So what basically you can do is you have to turn on something on LinkedIn called creator mode. Now if you're like unfamiliar with that, I had previously done a podcast on LinkedIn. and but it's an option that you can turn on where basically it allows you to quote-unquote have followers versus just connections and I would highly recommend turning on on creator mode because the main thing is LinkedIn has a 30,000 person connection cap So for me, realistically, it's probably going to take many years to get to that 30,000. But I'm also trying to think long term. And I'm like, OK, what would it be like? Who are the 30,000 people that I want in my first my first like network, my first green network? And so basically, I think as you start to post more and more on LinkedIn, folks will follow you, but then folks will send you like connection requests. And you want to be really discretionary about who you connect with, because you basically want to curate your network intentionally. So for example, if you're connected to some pretty big folks, you being, if you let in somebody, I think there's something with the algorithm where it's seen as beneficial. So I don't see it as an arrogant thing. I'm just more like, okay, who are the folks that I want to connect with? And others, I kind of just let them give them the option of following me if they want. Now, the fifth and final point is the daily posting game is a slow burn. So if you follow any sort of LinkedIn experts, one of the things that they'll often tell you is post on a regular cadence and ideally even like daily or even like multiple times a day. Now, I tried to do this and it is extremely hard to post thoughtful content on LinkedIn. and engage on LinkedIn, like especially if you're doing this like multiple times a day. I tried to do this and for for a couple of months and I quickly burnt out and I've learned now to just pace myself with LinkedIn. I am kind of thinking about like I'm always thinking like 10 years ahead. If I maintain this consistent pace, this pace that I'm maintaining now, what would it look like 10 years from now? That's what I'm focused on versus like trying to focus on just like one month or even one year into this. For example, for me, I take what I call Walden months throughout the year. This is a shout out to Henry David Thoreau. But basically, Walden months are times where I focus a lot on self-care. I work on big projects. But for the sake of LinkedIn, I actually pull back on posting on LinkedIn.
I still post on LinkedIn, but I just don't post as frequently. And This just allows me to like, one, make sure that I still enjoy LinkedIn, make sure that I'm posting content that's actually going to be helpful to folks versus just like posting it to like feed an algorithm. This often, this way of doing it, to be completely honest, it's definitely a slower way of growing. I have friends that we both started around the three, like two year mark, two years ago. And they now have 20, 30, 40, 50,000 followers and I'm closer to like 3,500. But the other side of this is, so one is there's not a high, I found, right, like high followers doesn't necessarily mean like high revenue or anything like that. But the other thing is I'm finding that even though I'm not growing as fast, I still, I'm enjoying it because I'm able to just pace myself. And I'm, this mindset came from podcasting. The STZ podcast is 10 years old this year. And one thing I realized early on, I kept, all these like podcasting coaches that I was working with would tell me, Mel, the average podcast lasts like seven months. And so if you can get past that, like you're in good shape. And I just thought, okay, I got past the seven, or sorry, seven episodes. So if I can just get past the seven episodes, I can, you know, I'm in good shape. But then once I got past the seven episodes, I started really thinking, okay, I love podcasting. I want to do this for a long time. So how can I design it around my schedule? And so that's why, even with this podcast, I only release live episodes about six months of the year, new episodes.
The other six months we do replays. And the main reason is because I found that this is a good cadence for me, especially having a young daughter and managing multiple responsibilities. And I took this same mindset to LinkedIn and what I'm realizing is consistency and sustainability are way better than like speed and burnout. So i.e. trying to post a whole bunch of content and not really getting anywhere. So I hope that you found this podcast really helpful. I wanted to make this like less tactical, but more of like, hey, here's the mindsets that I think has been helpful for me on the first two years on LinkedIn. Again, the magic is in the DMs. Second, the algorithm will always change, so don't get too caught up in that. Third, watch out for growth gurus. So there's definitely folks that can give a wealth of knowledge on terms of what's working on LinkedIn, but trying to like follow what they're exactly saying while not filtering through what makes sense for you. I think it's usually a formula for burnout. And the third, fourth one is followers are less relevant than you think. So it's more about the quality of followers. And the fifth one is the daily posting game is a slow burn. The daily posting game is a slow burn. I would love to connect with you on LinkedIn. You can go to sellingthecouch.com/LinkedIn if we haven't connected there. And yeah, and if anything, just I would love to connect. And then feel free to also send me a DM and say, hey Mel, I heard this episode and I'm connecting with you. And I try to respond to all the DMs that I get. Have a great rest of your day and I will see you next time. Bye.
Narrator:
Thanks for listening to the Selling the Couch podcast. For more great content and to stay up to date, visit www.sellingthecouch.com.
Melvin Varghese:
Hey there, thank you so much for tuning in to today's session. Just wanted to also let you know that we have a free email newsletter that goes out every week. You can download it over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash newsletter. Basically that newsletter contains some of the stuff that's happening behind the scenes with STC and also with my life and how I'm balancing and trying to balance being both an entrepreneur as well as building a life around my family and my health as well. And it also contains the latest podcast episode and some of the stuff that I'm doing on LinkedIn, some of the strategies and things that are working for me. And then finally, a brand new section called On Mel's Mind, where I take a video or a book or a blog post or something like that, that's inspiring me for that week. And I share how I'm implementing it both in my life and in my business. Again, you can download that over at signthecouch.com forward slash newsletter. And if you are one of the 3,700 colleagues that have been a part of the email newsletter, I so appreciate you and I'm grateful for your support. We genuinely try to make these helpful and just based on the data and based on the feedback we're getting, it seems like we're doing a really good job. So appreciate you and I hope that you have a great day.
timestamps05:00 Point 1: The Magic Is In The DM's
10:00: Point 2: The Algorithm Will Always Change
15:17: Point 3: Watch Our For LinkedIn Growth Gurus
17:46 Point 4: Connect With The Right People
19:37: The Daily Posting Game Is A Slow Burn
selling the couch podcast with melvin varghese phdWeekly interviews, strategy, and advice for building your private practice in and beyond the therapy room.
Apple podcastsYou TubeSpotify ready to launch your online course?Please check out our free online course starter kit for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This FREE 7-day email course will help you validate your course idea (so that you can create a course that has buyers).
sign up for free course starter kitready to launch your podcast?Please check out our FREE podcasting workshop for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This workshop is pre-recorded so you can watch it on a day and time that works for your schedule.
It contains a lot of practical tips that we've learned as STC has reached 1.81 million+ downloads and become a 6-figure business with podcasting as the backbone.
sign up for podcasting workshopMelvin varghese phdPsychologist and Founder @ Selling The Couch
Melvin Varghese, PhD is a licensed psychologist in Philadelphia, PA. In 2015, Dr. Varghese founded Selling The Couch, a podcast to help therapists move from clinical to online income.
On the podcast, he interviews successful practitioners about how they've built their practices, social media/marketing experts, and shares lessons as he uses our clinical skills to create an online business powered by podcasting + online courses.
The podcast is one of the top Career podcasts in Apple Podcasts, has been downloaded over 1.8 million times, and is heard in over 125 countries. Mel is a successful course creator with 240+ students and $300k+ in course sales.
More PostsUncomfortable Truths About Private Practice Finances (with James Childress)by Melvin Varghese | Jan 24, 2025 | Blog, Private Practice, STC Podcast
Melvin Varghese with James Childress on Uncomfortable Private Practice Finance Truths
When Should You Hire An Intake Coordinator? (Uriah Guilford)by Melvin Varghese | Feb 6, 2025 | Blog, Growing Your Practice, Private Practice, Productivity, STC Podcast
Uriah Guildford joins us to talk about hiring an intake coordinator.
5 Signs You're Ready To Launch Your Online Courses (with Melvin Varghese))by Melvin Varghese | Jan 31, 2025 | Blog, Online Courses, Passive Income for Therapists, Private Practice, STC Podcast
Melvin Varghese giving an overview of launching successful online courses and how you know you are ready.
« Older Entries The post Lessons Learned After 2 Years On LinkedIn + 500k Views appeared first on Selling The Couch | Melvin Varghese PhD.
380: Why Are Therapists Burning Out Of Private Practice?Written By Melvin Varghese PhDBurnout in Private Practice: Lessons from Dr. Jennifer Blanchette
Burnout is something many of us face as therapists, yet we rarely talk about it openly—especially in private practice. I recently had the chance to speak with Dr. Jennifer Blanchette , host of the Therapy Burnout Podcast. She shared her personal story about burnout in private practice, and her insights really stuck with me.
Why Don’t We Talk About Burnout?
Dr. Blanchette and I started by asking, Why don’t therapists talk about burnout more? A lot of what we hear about private practice focuses on reaching goals, like earning six or seven figures or having a certain number of employees. But behind the scenes, many therapists feel isolated, emotionally drained, and overwhelmed by admin work.
While private practice often promises freedom, it can also come with challenges, like loneliness and too much on our plates. Dr. Blanchette shared how isolation was one of the biggest burnout traps she faced.
Signs of Burnout
Dr. Blanchette shared how her body gave her warning signs—like tension, fatigue, and eventually panic attacks—during the pandemic. She realized something had to change.
For others, burnout might look like dreading work, always feeling tired, or not bouncing back even after a vacation. The reality is that therapist burnout looks different than many other professions.
She reminded us how important it is to listen to our bodies when something feels off. It’s much better to notice these signs early than to hit a breaking point.
The Cost of Caring
Dr. Blanchette also talked about something therapists often experience: compassion fatigue. This happens when constantly helping others leaves us emotionally drained.
She also brought up moral injury—when we feel like we’ve had to compromise our values to stay in this work. These challenges build up over time, and they can take a toll on how we see ourselves.
Redefining Success
One of the most powerful takeaways from our conversation was about redefining success (side note: this was a recent insight I had as well as I decided to focus on just building STC vs. trying to manage private practice as well).
For many therapists, success means building a thriving practice. But Dr. Blanchette reminded us that what works in one season of life may not work in another.
She said success is not just about money or reputation. True success comes from aligning your work with your values and listening to your limits.
Burnout Recovery vs. Prevention
A lot of advice we hear is about burnout prevention—like practicing self-care and setting boundaries. But when you’re already burned out, you need recovery.
Recovery might mean slowing down, getting therapy, or even stepping away from client work to reset your nervous system.
It could also mean working with someone like Jen who's a colleague and gets the unique challenges we face.
For Therapists on the Brink
If you’re a therapist who feels burned out, Dr. Blanchette wants you to know this: It’s okay to pause. You don’t have to keep going at the expense of your health.
She reminded us that even if you don’t carry your clients through their entire journey, the part you did carry them through was important.
Final Thoughts
This conversation left me thinking about how we define success as therapists and what it means to prioritize our well-being.
Burnout is real, but so is recovery. If you’re feeling burned out, take a step back, look at your support systems, and know that it’s okay to make changes.
You can learn more about Dr. Blanchette at drjenblanchette.com or check out her podcast, The Therapist Burnout Podcast.
Let’s keep normalizing these conversations and supporting each other.
If you’re a solo therapist considering taking some (to hedge) or full insurance but want to skip the headaches of dealing with insurance companies, Alma is worth checking out.
With Alma, you’ll benefit from:
• A 45-day credentialing process (no more months of waiting!)
• A HIPAA-compliant telehealth platform to keep your sessions secure
• Guaranteed payouts every two weeks
• Access to CEUs included with membership
Alma makes it easier than ever to build a thriving practice.
👉 Learn more and get 2 months FREE—an exclusive offer for STC listeners
Transcript (AI-Generated)Melvin Varghese:
Hey it's Melvin. Before we jump into today's podcast session just wanted to take a moment to thank the team over at Alma for supporting today's podcast session. Alma is an all-in-one platform that works with solo practitioners particularly who want to take insurance but don't want to deal with all of the headaches of taking insurance. We know that as clinicians doing private practice, that managing all of the different facets of private practice is absolutely overwhelming. Everything from managing clients to the admin to the billing, it's not just seeing the clients, right? It's all the other stuff. And so Alma is an all-in-one platform that really makes this process a lot easier. Their core thing is that they let you get credentialed with a majority of insurance providers. They do a 45-day credentialing process. They offer higher reimbursement rates than if you were to go through just solo and apply for insurance. And they also do guaranteed payback within two weeks. So basically your income stays steady. You get paid within 14 days of actually seeing the client. Now where Alma really shines is actually beyond all of this, the other stuff that they do. So they offer everything from peer supervision groups to resource sharing groups where clinicians can exchange worksheets and all sorts of stuff, as well as live CEUs and on-demand CEUs so you can get your CU hours. They also provide a HIPAA compliant telehealth platform so you can see clients and do telehealth sessions without worrying about safety and security and all of those things. The team at Alma hooked Selling the Couch listeners with a special code two months absolutely free. This is not even advertised online, but if you go to sellingthecouch.com forward slash Alma, Alma is spelled A-L-M-A, you get two months absolutely free. Again, that's sellingthecouch.com forward slash Alma. We'll jump right into today's session.
Hello, hello. Welcome to today's session of Selling the Couch. I hope you're doing well. Having an incredible day, incredible start to the new year. Today's topic is one that I know a lot of us will resonate with, which is burnout and particularly burnout in private practice. And I am joined by Dr. Jennifer Blanchett. Jen and I have connected through LinkedIn over the past couple of months, and I loved the stuff that Jen was talking about, both just sharing her own story of burnout, starting a practice, and then burning out, and realizing private practice just didn't make sense for her. Her website is over at drjenblanchett.com. And today we are honestly having an open and honest conversation on burnout and the things that we talk about, like the hazards of our profession. But this episode isn't like, you know, go do more like spas and stuff like that. It's more like a deeper conversation on our profession, the ways that our profession is changing, and the things that we often don't talk about, particularly in the private practice space, where the emphasis is often on like reaching certain revenue marks, or certain number of, if you're a group practice owner, certain number of clinicians in your practice, or reputation, or any of those kind of things. We start this conversation with this question of burnout among therapists, especially in private practice, is not talked about a lot. What's Jen's sense of like why we don't talk about those things? We also get really into what are some of the telltale signs that Jen saw when it came to her own burnout. We also felt this fascinating conversation on this juxtaposition between private practice is supposed to be this thing that gives us freedom,
Yet, when we get into private practice, we realize all of the things that we have to navigate, not just from seeing clients, but the administrative overload, the emotional toll, the isolation, all of that, and navigating all of that as a clinician in private practice. We wrap up with a couple of different questions, which is even Jen just sharing honestly about her own evolution and really some of the ways that she has shifted, particularly like even in learning to tune into her own body and being able to recognize these early signs of when Some things that she wants to do, it may make sense on many levels financially, all of these, but there's something about her body is responding in a certain way and how she's learned to tune into that part versus just sort of pushing it down. And we wrap up with this question of Jen's advice for a therapist who has built a successful practice, who looks successful on the outside, but is teetering on burnout on the inside. I think you're going to love this conversation. It's one that, you know, it has me thinking a lot when it comes to how I build things and all of those things. So here's my conversation with Jennifer Blanchett from drjenblanchett.com. Hey Jen, welcome to Selling the Couch.
Jennifer Blanchett: I'm so happy to be here.
Melvin Varghese: Oh my gosh, LinkedIn out of all places, right? Connected us.
Jennifer Blanchett: I know.
Melvin Varghese: I know. It's the happening place.
Jennifer Blanchett: It's where you should be.
Melvin Varghese: Yeah, it is. It's a cool place. Although I do have, as with like most of these social media platforms, I do have like a love hate with it, you know, so I've, I feel like in the past two years have had to learn to be boundaried and partly related to like burnout and, and trying to like mitigate against that. But it is a, it's a cool medium for sure.
Jennifer Blanchett: Definitely. I mean, I think especially for therapists, psychologists, I think it's an interesting space if you're like pivoting, thinking about different things in your career or just connecting again with people that you haven't talked to from the past. So I think it's been fun and it's text based. So I did like a whole another podcast before the podcast I have now, which I did Instagram, which felt like so much work for marketing and all of that. And so I'm really enjoying it.
Melvin Varghese: app. So with Instagram, you'd have to like create videos and then the text with the videos. Like it was just a lot of work. It sounds like. Yeah.
Jennifer Blanchett: Yes.
Melvin Varghese: Yeah. It's fascinating. Yeah. I'm really enjoying it. I'm glad that we've been able to connect there. And I mean, if y'all are listening, definitely follow Jen on LinkedIn, especially if you're like interested in this idea of therapist burnout, which is what we're talking about today. I was telling Jen before we even started, I feel like any time we do a burnout related episode, it tends to resonate with a lot of you know, what we're navigating. And I especially feel like in this season, with whatever is happening with the economy, new administration, there's just a lot of layers that I think therapists are legit thinking about. I feel like many questions among them what role does clinical work play in my broader sort of business? How much do I want to do it? How do I mitigate against, you know, compounding effects of hearing some really traumatic stories and while also dealing with things personally. So I'm just grateful for you. I'm grateful that we get to have like an open and honest conversation about this.
Jennifer Blanchett: Yes. I'm very excited too.
Melvin Varghese: You know, I had a bunch of questions for you. I actually had to like stop because I was like, okay, I got to like, make sure not to overwhelm Jen here. So, but the first question I had was burnout among therapists, especially in private practice is not something that's talked out about a lot. Right. So even like in the private practice building space, it's often about, for example, building the six figure practice. or if you've become a successful solo practitioner, like going to a group practice and scaling that group practice to seven figures, right? So there's always these like numbers that I think if we're not careful, it can really like dictate our own like self worth, especially because many of us don't have backgrounds in business or marketing. When we start businesses, what's your sense of like, why we don't talk about burnout in the therapist space, but particularly among private practice therapists.
Jennifer Blanchett: So many reasons. I think, yeah, when we hear it in the business space or on podcasts or things like that, it's often this place that people think of, okay, I did agency or I did my internship in community mental health and private practice is this dream where I can have freedom. I can have all this expansion to kind of explore and play and And it can be those things and it can also have a lot of burnout traps. And I think namely with the one I hear from therapists so much is isolation. I mean that is like top thing that I hear from therapists is I did not realize just how isolated private practice would be. And so it really takes a lot of intentionality if you're in private practice to figure out how am I going to find community? How am I going to find other therapists, other people that I can talk to about my clinical work? about the isolation that I feel and when I get stuck with clients. And I think we forget what it was like in our training where I never forget, like I had five hours of supervision in my doctoral program at one point. And I was like, I just talk about therapy so much. How could I ever get burned out?
Melvin Varghese: Right.
Jennifer Blanchett: And then I get to this place where I don't talk to people for a whole week really about my clinical work when I was in private practice.
Melvin Varghese: Yeah, you said so many really good things there. So I think one of them you said was private practice is often this stream for freedom. And I think it's like important to acknowledge that because I do think a good chunk of therapists, it's usually private practices. There's something that's making me discontent with my previous employment situation. right? IE, maybe we can even say there's elements of burnout there. And then private practice offers something like different and particularly in the realm of freedom. I was wondering if you could like expand on that, that idea of when you think about like, I guess, private practice, freedom, but often like, you know, this transition from previous employers and
Jennifer Blanchett: Yeah. I mean, I think what we face in other situations in agency work or in group practice even is that we have to do practice in a certain way, right? You have to hold 26 clinical hours, for example. I mean, that's kind of typical, I think in a lot of spaces, that's actually not that bad. Some expectations are 30 hours a week. That was the expectation when I was in agency work was 30 clinical hours a week. So one is the workload. So we can alter our workload that gives us freedom there. the way we work, right? So in private practice, we can set our own schedules. So there's a lot of freedom in that. And also the types of clients that we can see, right? We can kind of tailor the type of clientele we want to see. So I think it can be advantageous for many, many reasons. And that creates a sense of freedom, right? I can kind of control my day. And that's really great. And that worked for me for a number of years that I had freedom in practice. And I also had another job. So I had something else that I was doing. So I think it did create a lot of freedom and that can work for a lot of therapists that they make that pivot to private practice and it really works. But I think there's not also the space where if you need community, if you need other things in your work life, that it's okay if it doesn't work, that it's not the solution for you. And where I think therapists get stuck when they thought, this was my place where I had freedom, where it worked for me, and maybe that worked in a season and now it doesn't work. Now it feels like the antithesis of that, that I'm stuck, that I'm burdened, that I've been seeing clients for years And I didn't really think clinically about the changes I need to make in the relationships there. And they're feeling really stuck. And so I think they get to the place where the private practice really feels, they feel trapped. I mean, those are the words that therapists will tell me. I feel trapped in it. I feel like I've, I've set up this practice that I no longer feel like myself. anymore, like inside the practice and outside the practice. And that was very true for me too. Like I didn't really know what to do with this thing that I created that then felt like I was trapped in.
Melvin Varghese: First of all, thank you for normalizing that, and particularly even normalizing that people, we can change, businesses can change, right? What may make sense for a season may not make sense in other seasons. I think the solo episode that I will create around an hour episode, this is a similar conclusion after a lot of navigating this. Because about a year before, I had shared, I'm thinking I want to go back into a very small practice while still handling SD. And I don't know, over the past year, some details, but some real life stuff has happened. where I am like, there is no practical way I can see clients and do a good job. Like I like, you know, my partners had to go back from, you know, work from home to back in the office, right? So the times that I was going to go see clients, now I have pick up and drop offs. right? So stuff like that. And I think for the past few months, I've really struggled with this guilt of, oh my gosh, I said something, I like to like follow through on it. But I didn't also know this was gonna happen. And now like, I'm trying to fit, like, I don't know, I'm like curious if you I think you struggle with this too, which is like that overachiever kind of like wanting to follow through part of me was like, okay, I'm just going to figure it out. Like, it doesn't matter if others know this is really hard for me. And then there was like a moment I was like, Oh my God, what are you doing? Like, it's okay. Like that freedom was there when you thought about it, but like things changed, you know?
Jennifer Blanchett: And I've done so many things like that. I think over this journey where I'm like, Oh, I like over just the summer, I was going to like, maybe I'll launch a small practice around just therapists. And I started creating web pages. I started, you know, getting my mind around it. And I got up into the precipice of maybe I was going to do some console calls and my body just gave me that knowing stop. And so I had to listen to it and, I guess now when that happens, when I talk on the podcast about things about like I was, I was getting ready to launch a group and I just talked about it on the podcast last week and I'm not ready. My life is not, can't hold that right now. Like I want that to happen. I want to have a group of therapists together, but I can't provide that. And so that is part of my burnout journey also is really listening to my body and that push that my personality wants to do because I think you're a podcaster like I am, right? Like we, we lean into like putting ourselves out there and like we have all these ideas and want to see a lot of them come to fruition, but it, maybe it's not a right now. Maybe it's a later time for you or maybe it's, that's just not going to happen. And I realize that now. So I think that that is part of knowing like what you can hold and when it's the right season.
Melvin Varghese: Yeah. How did you learn to listen to your body versus your like ambition?
Jennifer Blanchett: Oh my gosh, full surrender. So I think the lesson, the hardest lesson that I learned in that was probably when I developed panic attacks in the midst of all of this and the pandemic as a therapist. So my body just kind of gave me a full stop and it said, we, you really need to slow down. And I developed panic attacks while driving on the highway. And I did a year and a half of EMDR therapy. I mean, I was an EMDR therapist. I still consider myself, I have that training, right? But it made me realize that something was happening inside my body. My body was having these reactions to the work that I was doing and to the chronic stress that I was under. And I think that was being, you know, apparent in the pandemic. It was being, a therapist in the pandemic and really trying to hold space for my children, for my partner, for my practice, for my clients. And my body just really gave me a full stop and said, something has got to give. And so that's when I started really doing the like untethering that I needed to do from all the things that I had committed to to figure out what can I hold now?
Melvin Varghese: It's often like the scariest step to do that, but I think like often the most liberating when we can take a step back and say like, okay, my body's responding in this way. Something is not right. And what can I like control or take out the situation to mitigate some of this? I don't know. And I just keep thinking like, the work we do, it's not, yes, it's confined to maybe a 45 minute, 50 minute session, but it's not really confined to a 45, 50 minute session, right? It permeates how we think about stuff, what we do, the energy we show up out into the world as we have or spend time with family and loved ones and all of that stuff, right? And I don't know. For me, I think the past couple of years, this is like does not come easy. Thinking about like a broader definition of success. And among those is like, what is my like, how's my body feeling in the midst of like making a decision like this could be a great financial decision. It could be amazing, whatever. But like ultimately knowing my body will probably shut down at some point. And so instead of getting to that point, think about it as an onset.
Jennifer Blanchett: Yeah, I think it's the compass that we have to listen to. And, you know, I think, you know, a lot of times we want to make these choices. We want to, you know, continue to push and the work changes us. And I don't think we realize that the work that we've done over the course, for me, over the course of my 20 years of working in mental health changed how I saw the world and then what the healing that I needed after all that work that I did.
Melvin Varghese: How do you think it changed you?
Jennifer Blanchett: I mean, I think I got to a point where I started to, my emotional responses were just different. So I became more numb. I think that vicarious trauma really came, was super loud for me in the pandemic, that I just was different. I was quieter. I didn't want to reach out socially. So it looked a little bit like depression during that time. And so part of me not being a therapist now for nearly two years is that I have, Like I can feel emotion, like emotion is coming up now for me, like as I'm talking to you. And I don't think that would have happened two years ago, you know, just that I have it available anymore. And I think it was because I kind of had to hold so much back to hold space for other people. Because when people would tell me things, you know, that were really difficult, traumatic, horrific, I had to hold a part of myself back. And I think that's how it changes. It changes you to do, you have to do that. to not have a natural human emotional reaction. As much as possible as we try to do that, I think it does change our emotional response.
Melvin Varghese: You know, as therapists, we manage so many roles in private practice, from being a clinician to a business owner, to doing all the things that we need to do to market our practice. It's really easy for all of us to feel overwhelmed, especially when we are juggling so many things. That's where the team at Alma comes in. This is a platform that I would consider if you are a solo practitioner that either wants to take insurance or that is private pay but just wants to hedge a little bit, especially to account for periods of economic uncertainty or weird things like hyperinflation like we've been dealing with in more recent times. Alma makes it easier than ever to build a thriving private practice. They include a bunch of different cool stuff. So one is they have a members-only platform where you can exchange resources with other clinicians, exchange referrals, and just find support. They have consultation groups as well. And they also offer CEUs as part of your membership at no additional cost. These are both live and on demand. Now, in order to get credentialed with Alma, typically to get credentialed with insurance, it takes months and months, but Alma actually has a 45-day credentialing process, and you actually get increased reimbursement rates. So they're often higher than if you were to go just through the insurance carrier and if you were just to apply as a solo practitioner. And the really cool thing is they guarantee payback within two weeks of when you see the client so that you can ensure your income stays steady. You can see as few as like one client or two clients just to hedge a little bit. And Hama also has a HIPAA compliant telehealth platform so that everything is safe and secure. Alma also has a bunch of different stuff to support clinicians, all the way from workshops and all sorts of things, as well as an online directory, so that you can continue to get referrals coming your way. The best part, the team at Alma was able to hook the Selling the Couch family and listeners with a unique code, which is over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash Alma. That's actually for two months absolutely free on Alma's platform. This is a non-advertised, like non-publicly advertised discount. So definitely encourage you to check it out over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash Alma for a 60 day free trial just to see if it makes sense for you. I remember, I think this was during practicum, a supervisor likened the therapy session to a container and that we're sort of containers. I think I was like, and I loved that analogy, but I was looking back and I was like, my gosh, ability to be a container and really like take in so much stuff right and hear these stories and like oh my gosh what happens to the walls of that container when that happens like over and over and over again.
Jennifer Blanchett: It's tough.
Melvin Varghese: It's tough.
Jennifer Blanchett: And I sit with therapists who just literally feel like they've come to the end of themselves. And the one reaction that I want to give them so much compassion for is what they feel like. They feel like they failed. They feel like somehow I'm broken because I can't do this anymore. So I just don't want to speak to any therapist listening to this. It is a common response and reaction to feel like you have somehow, you're somehow broken or not, not good enough because you feel like you can't do this work anymore. I feel like it's a consequence of holding really difficult space for people that it's okay if you needed a break. It's okay if you can't do this work anymore. So I think a lot of the work that I do is giving permission, providing permission for rest, for breaks. I just talked to my podcast about, A lot of times, I just want you to really learn to be an expert on rest and figure out what that looks like for you so that you can feel like yourself again, so you can get some of your humanity back. Because that's where I sit with a lot of, in a lot of space with other therapists.
Melvin Varghese: You and I, like, I noticed you got teary, I got teary just before, as we were talking about this, like, I don't know, what do you think was happening? I don't know for you. I know for me, like I just, I don't know, there was an image flashed in my mind of like starting grad school in like 2005, you know, going through all this training and like loving it, but also like so much compassion for that Mel, right, that had to hear all these things. And yeah, I had the supervision and I was like so grateful for it. And I'm like, I will always be so grateful for my supervisors. But reality also is like, it does take a toll on you, you know? And I think I wasn't a clinician during the pandemic, but I can imagine that is like normal therapy stuff amped up like times 10.
Jennifer Blanchett: I think the compassion you're talking about, you know, I, I've thought about that therapist. I thought about myself, that Jen, who was in 2020 and 2021, who had like a kindergartner and a preschooler and how I was trying my best. And I think part of it was feeling like I wasn't the mom for them that I needed to be. And that part is hard. You know, I think, and that's what I was like, something has to change. Like I need something different for my life. And I think getting to that point was important, but I have so much compassion. I'm so proud of who I was to know that I needed to pivot to close my practice. Even though I felt like at that point, I felt like I'd failed, honestly, that I built this thing. I thought, It was my baby, you know, I think for a lot of people in private practice. I built it with a son who had heart surgery and I couldn't go back to my agency job and it was a way for me to continue to work. And it worked for a while and I was so proud that I started a practice. I never thought I could do it. I never said I wanted to own a private practice. I never wanted to be a business person and I learned so many skills. And so I often like do this building up with my therapist clients to like, just look at what you've done. Just look at all the things that you've been able to do. Like you, you know, you have a doctorate degree, you got your LCSW, you built a practice, you're holding space for all these people. You know, I think about those, those beautiful sessions that you've had. So a lot of it is like building people up and just showing them like all the things that they have within them that when they've gotten to this place of chronic depletion, it just feels like everything is awful and I failed. And there's this some cost fallacy, of course, that I got this degree, I built this practice and now I can't do it. And what does that even mean about me as a person? Because I've tied my identity to being a therapist, to being this practice owner, to being the person that holds things. I can't anymore.
Melvin Varghese: you said something of so beautiful, which is I think so true, right? Like it's never, you're building a private practice in isolation, right? It's building private practice. And there's usually some other thing you're navigating, right? Whether it is son who needs heart surgery, being a parent, being as you know having a significant other like maybe you know parents that need caregiving whatever it is right like it's i think i was a little naive to it you know because i just thought like oh this is like i can just do this thing here and then step out of it and you know
Jennifer Blanchett: I think throughout our lives, we don't realize that we just have a certain capacity for caring, right? And that goes through clinical work to home life. And as we get older, we have more demands of that caring quotient as I kind of talk about it. Like we only have so much available to us. And so if some of that is depleted in our therapy practice, then we can't provide it for our loved ones at home. If it's depleted at home, then we don't have it as much clinically. So we have to think about managing our resources because they're finite and they're precious. And our ability to give is just what we have.
Melvin Varghese: Yeah, I like that definition of it. You said something earlier, you said a lot of your work with therapists is just reminding them of what they have accomplished, even in the midst of like feeling like they failed, right? Like the sunk cost fallacy. Something I struggle with is when something doesn't work out, I'm like, I feel like it failed, but then I also have this hard time seeing that it was never that black and white, right? There were some really beautiful moments. And so I sort of minimize the positive things that happened and even the lessons that I learned. And I feel like a lot of us do that. What would you say to someone that's listening and that has that, that tendency as well?
Jennifer Blanchett: I think one of my favorite things to say is that you have a human brain, right? That thinks in this way, right? We tend to think of the things that are going wrong or that we're struggling with because, you know, I think our sympathetic nervous system is just prone to do that. It wants to protect us from threat. So all the things that are hard, we don't want to continue to want to do that. And so when you've been in chronic depletion, especially in burnout, I think we are just trying to do whatever we can to escape all of that. And so I think a lot of the therapists are like, what is the next thing? Is it, you know, is it intensive? Is it a bridge job? Is it, you know, starting a podcast, which was some of my dirty and burnout, my first podcast. to try to get the escape hatch, right? Your brain is trying to do that escape hatch. So it's not thinking of like, okay, let's slow down. Let's remember like actually what we can do, what skills we do have, what things we have accomplished and how we can figure this out because we are in fight or flight. So I think through kind of that trauma lens of what we're going through, that we're often operating in that mode. And so we have to really turn down the volume, get some rest, figure out what we can, you know, what things we can take out of our life before we can put things back in.
Melvin Varghese: Looking back, what were telltale signs of burnout that were there, but you didn't see?
Jennifer Blanchett: Yeah, I think that's come over the course of my career with different. My first burnout experience was back in my twenties when I was a caseworker in foster care and it usually is my body. My body will give me kind of reactions. Either I have some tension or headaches. Um, I think this, this past one was a full stop. panic attacks that just developed out of nowhere. But I think some of the early signs were that when I would be on, I would go on vacation, right? And then I'd come back from vacation and it didn't feel like it was enough of a break. I think that's one of those kind of early signs that we are starting to get depleted and that we really need to start to work on really figuring out what we need, what supports that we need or kind of changing the way we work completely. And I think a lot of the pivots that I've done throughout my career was like, Ooh, I'm starting to feel like this is burning me out. So I pivot to another job and really hadn't thought about setting up the systems in my life for whatever I do so that I can feel like I am, you know, healthy in my relationships, that my body feels strong and healthy as well. That I think in all areas that I'm thinking through how I'm navigating through the world in a healthy way.
Melvin Varghese: Yeah. Almost like thinking about the thinking, right? And being folk and like, like in that moment, right? Like realizing all of these things and, but that's not like acting without like intention, I guess.
Jennifer Blanchett: Yeah. And I think a lot of my career choices have been out of like, you know, not really thinking methodically towards like, Hey, I really want to work towards this goal or whatever. And I think our field sets us up for that, right? Something doesn't work. So I have to go to this other thing. Like when my son had heart surgery, okay, I have to like take this all in and start my own private practice with zero help. I did my own website. I did my own billing. And so I think a lot of times we just take so much on as therapists that we don't realize that we need help. We need support. And it's okay to look for that even in making our decisions that it's okay to, you know, reach out to a colleague or hire a coach or do some of the things that might be helpful in those decision-making processes.
Melvin Varghese: I think one thing with private practice, I think there's, for most therapists, right, when they're starting private practice, like they don't have a lot of discretionary income to spend on things like that, right? Like to hire a biller or handle someone with like phones or whatever it is, right? And it is. I think you're absolutely right. That system sets it up to at least closer to burnout potential from the onset. I don't know. I would love to hear your thoughts on what What are the alternatives? One idea that I just randomly had when you were talking is maybe it's like, hey, you set aside X amount of money even before jumping into private practice. just so that you can put some of these bare minimum systems or systems that I guess in the moment feel like a luxury, but potentially could or mitigate against some of that burnout stuff. So you're not trying to like see clients, build a practice, handle calls, like, you know, all of that stuff.
Jennifer Blanchett: Yeah. I mean, I think there's so many to think about and for every therapist, it's going to be different. Right. First would be doing math.
Melvin Varghese: the bait of many therapists.
Jennifer Blanchett: But I wish someone would have told me that. I wish someone would have said, you know, think about your average clinical hour and what are your expenses and really think through if that makes sense for you. Because I think a lot of times I just like threw myself into it. I took every insurance panel, I took Medicaid and every year insurance under the sun, I didn't think about what is my average session cost or payment that I'm going to get. And then does that make sense for my expenses and the money that I need to make to sustain my life? Does that even make financial sense? Because if we think through that, then it might be, well, actually it doesn't make a lot of financial sense, but if I take this contract job, maybe that actually makes better sense for me right now. So, I think really going into it, looking at all aspects of what a practice might take, the hours that it might take for admin work, for example, is a lot. And so, what is it going to cost to get my website up and running? What is it going to cost to do the billing if I'm handling it or if somebody else is handling it? Because there is going to be a cost for you to learn billing because I learned it all I learned how to bill and I wasn't great at it and I lost money, a lot of money, not getting the money that I actually earned. So if we think through, well, if I pay 5% to a biller, that's that 5%. But you don't think about, I'm probably, if I'm not doing that, I'm going to lose 10% of my income. We don't think about all the money in cancellations and late cancels. And so having that tight cancellation policy, how that's going to benefit us. I've read some statistics that therapists can lose anywhere between 10% of their income in cancellations and no-shows. So I think of there's so many things I think therapists can think about, but I think starting very simply, you know, I started with a huge website and doing all the things. That's how I had to start because we're overachievers as therapists. We want to have like the great website and look really competent, but that's not as important to just get yourself started and start with the very simple 1.0 version of your therapy practice website or whatever it is for you.
Melvin Varghese: Yeah. I love that, man. I've got like one or two more questions for you. You've had such an evolution, I think through like various careers, various, uh, how burnout has looked different, like different for you. What are things that you're thinking about now when it comes to like just burnout or burnout prevention? I don't even know if that's the right word, but like, how are you thinking about it now versus like how you used to think about it?
Jennifer Blanchett: Yeah. I mean, in so many ways, I think, you know, there's, there's burnout that we all, I think experience from, and that's from an occupational kind of sense that anyone can experience burnout, right? Your workload is too, too high. You have, maybe you're overworked, there's low pay. That is, that is a thing that happens for therapists, right? I think also what is unique to therapists is compassion fatigue. And, you know, we've all heard some of that research, but it is that cost of caring. It is the constant like holding space that we do as therapists that is unique to a caregiving relationship. And then I think coupled also with moral injury, that this work becomes morally injurious often to many of us, whether that be for me, part of that was, you know, being a therapist in, you know, an election cycle of 2020. And I identified at that time as a Christian psychologist. And having clients that would tell me racist things, I felt like a lot of times I was complicit, you know, in some of that. And so that's just one example of how I think moral injury can show up. for therapists, but we don't often think about what is it costing to the way we see ourselves and what we feel like is moral to do as therapists. So I think it is the interaction between all of and the vicarious trauma. I didn't put that in the mix. So especially for trauma therapists, we don't realize how much sometimes we can be impacted. Our own bodies are impacted by doing that trauma work, by hearing the stories of our clients and then having our own trauma symptoms. And I had acute trauma symptoms with a couple of cases where I needed my own EMDR work. And so I think really it's the interaction of a lot of that for therapists that it's really hard to untangle for them. So I really recommend thinking through your own personal therapy, your own personal trauma work. Potentially I've had an EMDR therapist done EMDR work as a client that has been really, I think important for me to heal from a lot of that, which I think kind of segues into burnout prevention versus burnout recovery. If that makes sense for me to go into that.
Melvin Varghese: Yeah, yeah, of course.
Jennifer Blanchett: Yeah. So I think a lot of what we hear in the space is around burnout prevention, self-care, nervous system regulation. That is stress management. We all need stress management because life is stressful, right? I think a lot of therapists are in burnout. They need burnout recovery. So they need deep nervous system resets. they need really to think through medically, relationally, how they can reset their entire lives. And so I, I'm going to touch on a little bit of my experience from working with folks with TBI. So I know overwhelmed brains. I've worked with them all of my career and I see therapists who are just, they are at the point of chronic depletion. They're in the bed at night. They feel like they can barely get up in the morning. And that's just the reality of where they are. And so they really need like a year or two of deep recovery, therapy work, medical intervention, some kind of body work likely to help their body recover from what they've been suffering from. And I think a lot of them don't realize it till they're literally at the end of the rope and just, I cannot, my body wouldn't let me get up today is some of the realizations that I hear from therapists.
Melvin Varghese: Thank you for like outlining that. Cause I think like, I think you're right. Like it is beyond just like go to the wellness spa, get a massage, like, right. Like, especially at beyond a certain level, like you said that deep nervous system reset. I think that's like such a great way of, of, of saying it. I had one final question for you, if that's okay. What would you tell a therapist who's successful on the outside in private practice, successful on the outside, but teetering on the edge of burnout on the inside?
Jennifer Blanchett: I think that it's okay to be where you are and just that I'm just going to normalize it that I think a lot of therapists feel like they have to hang on to where they are because I think a lot of them are scared of letting people down. I mean, that's one of the biggest things I work with therapists on is they're scared of letting their clients down. They've held them for so long and they're scared of that abandonment. I'm going to abandon this client. They're going to be upset with me. I'm going to hurt them, which I think a lot of therapists are such caring and loving people and they, they want to continue to carry that client through their whole journey to see everything happen. And I just had said this on a call recently, you know, sometimes we don't carry our clients all the way through. but we've carried them through a part. And that part that you carried them through was really important. And so to honor that part and just to acknowledge it for them and yourself of the great work that you did, even if it doesn't always feel that way, especially at this point where you might be closing or terminating or whatever with them, because it's important for you to do that.
Melvin Varghese: Thank you for saying that. Jen, I'm so grateful for you, grateful for the work that you are doing, grateful for your courage and vulnerability, sharing your own story and the ways that you serve our field. Where can we learn more about you? Where can we connect with you? All of those things.
Jennifer Blanchett: Yeah, you might hear a child in the background. So yeah, so I host the therapist burnout podcast. So certainly connect with me on the podcast. Um, I think that's a great place for people to hear what I offer. Yeah. And I'd love to connect with you more so you can find me there. It's probably the best place.
Melvin Varghese: Awesome. Jen, thank you again for this conversation. And, uh, yeah, I'm just, again, grateful for you.
Jennifer Blanchett: Thanks so much. It's been awesome.
Melvin Varghese: Bye.
Jennifer Blanchett: Bye.
Melvin Varghese: Hey there, I hope you enjoyed my conversation with Jen, and especially if burnout is something that you're starting to recognize in yourself. I hope that this podcast has been helpful for you. More than anything, I hope that it's given you just different ways to think about it besides go see your own therapist, do supervision, you know, build more self-care into your days. This topic of burnout, you know, the longer I get in with STC and build out STC, and I realize, man, there are so many nuances to this that one really has to think about and factor. I hope the conversation with Jen has just been incredibly helpful for you. I resonated with so much of it. I shared even my own. I alluded to this of like deciding not to go back into private practice and this will again be an episode that's somewhere around this conversation but I think Jen put words in that I hadn't quite thought of it in that way of man like doing these businesses and the toll that it takes on you know even if we love them right but the totality of the toll that it takes and I love that phrase of like a deep nervous system reset and so I hope that this is one of these episodes where it's not just like you've listened to it and you're like oh that sounded so good I want to do that a lot right which most of us have a tendency, including me, to do. But I hope it's something that you legitimately think through, even if you're not feeling particularly burned out, even if you're actually feeling great with your work, which is fantastic. But I hope it also encourages you to put in some of these systems into place, realizing seasons can change. And if you are on, you know, at that edge of burnout, I hope that today's session has particularly been helpful for you. Please don't hesitate to shoot Jenna a message or DM. She's quite active on LinkedIn. Her website is again at drjenblanchette.com. And yeah, I hope that you enjoyed today's session. Have a great rest of your day and appreciate you. Bye.
Narrator: Thanks for listening to the Selling the Couch podcast. For more great content and to stay up to date, visit www.sellingthecouch.com.
Melvin Varghese: Hey there, thank you so much for tuning in to today's session. Just wanted to also let you know that we have a free email newsletter that goes out every week. You can download it over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash newsletter. Basically that newsletter contains some of the stuff that's happening behind the scenes with STC and also with my life and how I'm balancing and trying to balance being both an entrepreneur as well as building a life around my family and my health as well. And it also contains the latest podcast episode and some of the stuff that I'm doing on LinkedIn, some of the strategies and things that are working for me. And then finally, a brand new section called On Mel's Mind, where I take a video or a book or a blog post or something like that that's inspiring me for that week, and I share how I'm implementing it both in my life and in my business. Again, you can download that over at signthecouch.com forward slash newsletter. And if you are one of the thirty seven hundred colleagues that have been a part of the email newsletter is so appreciate you and I'm grateful for your support. We genuinely try to make these helpful and and just based on the data and based on the feedback we're getting, it seems like we're doing a really good job. So appreciate you. And I hope they have a great day.
timestamps00:00:34 – Introduction to Burnout in Private Practice
00:01:28 – The Hidden Hazards of Private Practice
00:02:52 – Recognizing the Signs of Burnout
00:05:15 – The Challenges of Social Media for Therapists
00:05:36 – The Importance of Community for Therapists
00:06:28 – The Illusion of Freedom in Private Practice
00:09:54 – The Transition from Agency Work to Private Practice
00:15:25 – Listening to Your Body vs. Ambition
00:20:04 – The Container Analogy in Therapy
00:29:15 – Telltale Signs of Burnout
00:40:04 – Advice for Therapists on the Edge of Burnout
00:41:53 – Conclusion and Resources for Therapists
selling the couch podcast with melvin varghese phdWeekly interviews, strategy, and advice for building your private practice in and beyond the therapy room.
Apple podcastsYou TubeSpotify ready to launch your online course?Please check out our free online course starter kit for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This FREE 7-day email course will help you validate your course idea (so that you can create a course that has buyers).
sign up for free course starter kitready to launch your podcast?Please check out our FREE podcasting workshop for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This workshop is pre-recorded so you can watch it on a day and time that works for your schedule.
It contains a lot of practical tips that we've learned as STC has reached 1.81 million+ downloads and become a 6-figure business with podcasting as the backbone.
sign up for podcasting workshopJen BlanchetteCertified EMDR therapist and Consultant-in-Training
Dr. Jen Blanchette is a licensed psychologist, former private practice owner, and therapist burnout consultant. She understands the struggles you face as a therapist or heart-focused professional. Using a neuroscience-based approach, she helps therapists create space to find the answers you’re seeking.
Melvin varghese phdPsychologist and Founder @ Selling The Couch
Melvin Varghese, PhD is a licensed psychologist in Philadelphia, PA. In 2015, Dr. Varghese founded Selling The Couch, a podcast to help therapists move from clinical to online income.
On the podcast, he interviews successful practitioners about how they've built their practices, social media/marketing experts, and shares lessons as he uses our clinical skills to create an online business powered by podcasting + online courses.
The podcast is one of the top Career podcasts in Apple Podcasts, has been downloaded over 1.8 million times, and is heard in over 125 countries. Mel is a successful course creator with 240+ students and $300k+ in course sales.
More PostsUncomfortable Truths About Private Practice Finances (with James Childress)by Melvin Varghese | Jan 24, 2025 | Blog, Private Practice, STC Podcast
Melvin Varghese with James Childress on Uncomfortable Private Practice Finance Truths
When Should You Hire An Intake Coordinator? (Uriah Guilford)by Melvin Varghese | Feb 6, 2025 | Blog, Growing Your Practice, Private Practice, Productivity, STC Podcast
Uriah Guildford joins us to talk about hiring an intake coordinator.
5 Signs You're Ready To Launch Your Online Courses (with Melvin Varghese))by Melvin Varghese | Jan 31, 2025 | Blog, Online Courses, Passive Income for Therapists, Private Practice, STC Podcast
Melvin Varghese giving an overview of launching successful online courses and how you know you are ready.
« Older Entries The post Why Are Therapists Burning Out Of Private Practice? appeared first on Selling The Couch | Melvin Varghese PhD.
379: Why I'm Pausing My Private PracticeWritten By Melvin Varghese PhDCelebrating 10 Years of Selling the Couch: Thank You for Being Part of the Journey
This year marks 10 years since I started the Selling the Couch podcast. I’m also celebrating the start of 2025, and I want to thank you for being part of this journey.
When I began Selling the Couch in 2015, I was nervous. I didn’t know if anyone would listen or care about what I had to share. As an introverted psychologist, I wasn’t sure I could handle podcasting or public speaking. But with your support, we’ve reached this big milestone together.
A Hard Decision
This episode is special because I’m sharing something personal: I’ve decided to pause my private practice journey. A lot has changed in my life, and this decision hasn’t been easy.
Here are three big reasons why:
My wife, Susan, went back to working in the office. This means I’ve taken on more parenting responsibilities. Our daughter, Chloe, is at an age where I want to be fully present for her, and that’s really important to me.
My parents are getting older, and I’ve realized how much I want to be there for them. During a recent visit, I saw how much they’ve aged, and it made me think about how I can support them better.
I’m leading a small group at our church. It’s been a rewarding experience, but it’s also another responsibility I’ve taken on. Balancing everything has been tough.
Listening to My Body
Running Selling the Couch and a private practice at the same time has been too much for me. I’ve struggled with anxiety and trouble sleeping. These were signs from my body that I needed to slow down.
I’ve also been thinking a lot about what’s really important to me. I’ve set a financial goal that lets me live comfortably and make an impact. I’ve also learned to say no to things that don’t align with my values.
Looking Ahead
One of my big dreams is to use Selling the Couch to help others. I’m excited to share that I’m starting a scholarship fund to support girls rescued from the commercial sex trade. This idea comes from my childhood experiences in India, and it’s a cause close to my heart.
Thank You
Reaching 10 years wouldn’t have been possible without you. Thank you for listening, for encouraging me, and for being part of this community.
Success isn’t about big numbers or awards. For me, it’s about living in a way that matches my values and making a difference in the world.
I’m excited for what’s ahead, and I’m so glad to have you on this journey with me.
Alma: A Resource for Solo Therapists In Private Practice
If you’re a solo therapist considering taking some (to hedge) or full insurance but want to skip the headaches of dealing with insurance companies, Alma is worth checking out.
With Alma, you’ll benefit from:
• A 45-day credentialing process (no more months of waiting!)
• A HIPAA-compliant telehealth platform to keep your sessions secure
• Guaranteed payouts every two weeks
• Access to CEUs included with membership
Alma makes it easier than ever to build a thriving practice.
👉 Learn more and get 2 months FREE—an exclusive offer for STC listeners:
Click here to explore Alma
selling the couch podcast with melvin varghese phdWeekly interviews, strategy, and advice for building your private practice in and beyond the therapy room.
Apple podcastsYou TubeSpotify ready to launch your online course?Please check out our free online course starter kit for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This FREE 7-day email course will help you validate your course idea (so that you can create a course that has buyers).
sign up for free course starter kitready to launch your podcast?Please check out our FREE podcasting workshop for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This workshop is pre-recorded so you can watch it on a day and time that works for your schedule.
It contains a lot of practical tips that we've learned as STC has reached 1.81 million+ downloads and become a 6-figure business with podcasting as the backbone.
sign up for podcasting workshopMelvin varghese phdPsychologist and Founder @ Selling The Couch
Melvin Varghese, PhD is a licensed psychologist in Philadelphia, PA. In 2015, Dr. Varghese founded Selling The Couch, a podcast to help therapists move from clinical to online income.
On the podcast, he interviews successful practitioners about how they've built their practices, social media/marketing experts, and shares lessons as he uses our clinical skills to create an online business powered by podcasting + online courses.
The podcast is one of the top Career podcasts in Apple Podcasts, has been downloaded over 1.8 million times, and is heard in over 125 countries. Mel is a successful course creator with 240+ students and $300k+ in course sales.
More PostsUncomfortable Truths About Private Practice Finances (with James Childress)by Melvin Varghese | Jan 24, 2025 | Blog, Private Practice, STC Podcast
Melvin Varghese with James Childress on Uncomfortable Private Practice Finance Truths
When Should You Hire An Intake Coordinator? (Uriah Guilford)by Melvin Varghese | Feb 6, 2025 | Blog, Growing Your Practice, Private Practice, Productivity, STC Podcast
Uriah Guildford joins us to talk about hiring an intake coordinator.
5 Signs You're Ready To Launch Your Online Courses (with Melvin Varghese))by Melvin Varghese | Jan 31, 2025 | Blog, Online Courses, Passive Income for Therapists, Private Practice, STC Podcast
Melvin Varghese giving an overview of launching successful online courses and how you know you are ready.
« Older Entries The post Why I’m Pausing My Private Practice appeared first on Selling The Couch | Melvin Varghese PhD.
331: How To Work Through Perfectionism When Launching Your Online Course with Katie Lear, LCMHC, RPT, RDTWritten By Melvin Varghese PhDIn today’s episode of Selling the Couch, I’m excited to welcome Katie Lear, a therapist based in Davidson, North Carolina. Katie is an alum of our STC Elite Online Course Mastermind and a current member of our highly-selective mastermind for established therapist course creators. Together, we explore her journey as a private practice owner and her next big step: creating impactful online courses.
Katie shares about her thriving solo practice, where she specializes in supporting preteen girls (ages 8–13) navigating anxiety and OCD symptoms. Her approach combines cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT) with play therapy, making her work both effective and engaging. She opens up about how her own experience with OCD shaped her path, giving her a deep understanding and connection to her clients.
We also dive into Katie’s “why” behind creating an online course. Initially, she simply wanted to replace her agency income. But as her practice grew, she began dreaming bigger—of reaching more children and families through online education. Katie created her first course—a collection of coping skills for anxious kids—during a particularly anxious season in her life. The course has been well-received, but now she’s ready to refresh it with creative twists, like role-playing activities and pop culture references, to keep it fun and engaging.
During the call you'll hear how Katie's initial course idea transformed into a Dungeons and Dragons Leadership Course For Tweens called Young Dragonslayers (basically, a place where tweens who may not have typical leadership opportunities in schools can stand out and become leaders through D & D games).
The course has exploded in popularity, with her most recent launch generating $50k in revenue, with 20 groups running at once.
Of course, the course creation process isn’t without its challenges. Katie shares her struggle with “blank page syndrome,” even though she has a clear vision for the content. Translating her ideas into slides and videos feels overwhelming, and the pressures of perfectionism and fear of judgment make it even harder—especially when students are financially investing in her work.
In our conversation, e talk about the power of embracing imperfection and seeing a course as a living, evolving project rather than a final, polished product. We talk about delivering value in bite-sized, digestible pieces and to experiment with creative ways to make her content come alive.
This episode along with a live stream I did with Katie is packed with insights for therapists considering their own online courses. It’s also a reminder that building something impactful doesn’t have to come at the cost of our mental health or personal lives. Tune in for a candid coaching session as we navigate the joys and challenges of course creation together!
Finally, just wanted to let you know that our STC Elite course mastermind program is opening up for enrollment in January. If you've build a successful practice and are now looking to add an online course to your tool kit and looking for accountability, please consider joining us.
Or better yet, please download our free 7 day email course to validate your online course idea. These are the exact strategies we use in our mastermind so you get a really good idea of the quality and depth we teach at.
Transcript (AI-Generated) Melvin Varghese:
Today's podcast is supported by the American Psychological Association, PsyCareers. If you are a psychology professional looking to advance your career or thinking about a pivot, definitely encourage you to check out PsyCareers, which is the career center from the American Psychological Association Services, Inc. There are over 400 positions available. It's the perfect time to create a free account, upload your resume, and set up job alerts. You can learn more over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash A-P-A. Sellingthecouch.com forward slash A-P-A. We'll jump right into today's session. Today's podcast is supported by the American Psychological Association, PsyCareers. If you are a psychology professional looking to advance your career or thinking about a pivot, definitely encourage you to check out PsyCareers, which is the career center from the American Psychological Association Services, Inc. There are over 400 positions available. It's the perfect time to create a free account, upload your resume, and set up job alerts. You can learn more over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash A-P-A. Sellingthecouch.com forward slash A-P-A. We'll jump right into today's session. Hello, hello, welcome to today's session of Selling the Couch. I hope that you're doing well, having a fantastic day. So today is a coaching call. This is actually something we're trying to do more regularly here on the STC podcast. And I'm joined by Katie Lear from katielear.com.
Katie is a therapist in private practice down in, outside of Charlotte, North Carolina. And Katie's actually part of, was part of our Online Course School Live cohort when we did the Online Course School cohort, but we're actually integrating the Online Course School curriculum into the Online Course Mastermind this year. And Katie's actually a member of the Mastermind and will be continuing with us into the upcoming year as well. And, you know, Katie and I have been just chatting, and one of the things that she's mentioned is you know, she's getting ready to do the beta launch of her group and soon after the beta launch there will be the actual recording of the digital version of the course. This is something that I would highly recommend. It's something that we teach because if you go straight to recording the digital version, one, you won't have data in terms of what lessons and modules are going to resonate the most for folks. And so you may end up like over recording stuff and kind of overwhelming students. And two, if you want to have, you know, great case studies and testimonials and stuff like the beta group is a great way to get that. And you know, in our mastermind, we, you know, share sort of ethical ways to do that, all of that kind of stuff. But there's, Katie has run into this sort of concern where, you know, one of the things that she's struggling with is, you know, I need to record like an amazing version of this course, right? And if I don't, then it's not worth putting it out there. But related to that, there is this fear of once she's been sitting down to actually create the slides for this course, This thought of like, what do I put on there? I don't know what to do. And we're just going to have an open and honest conversation about that. As you know from STC, I try to just be open and honest about my own journey as a course creator. and my own journey as a business owner. There's going to be a lot of vulnerable, slightly awkward things in today's conversation, so we're really excited to share this with you. We'll get right into today's coaching call. Here's my conversation with Katie Lear from katielear.com.
Hey, it's Melvin. Before we jump into today's podcast session, just wanted to take a moment to say thank you from the bottom of my heart for taking the time to listen to this podcast and taking the time out of your day to listen. You know, when I launched this podcast back in 2015, it was done with a lot of fear and a lot of uncertainty, and I just never realized the impact that it would have on so many. And for that, I'm just so humbled and so grateful. If you do find the podcast helpful, if you could do a small favor for me, which is to subscribe to the Selling the Couch podcast, the best way to do that is to go to sellingthecouch.com forward slash listen and subscribe on your favorite channel and on your favorite device. Practically, this allows the podcast to be able to reach more people for us to increase our download numbers, which also helps us to land bigger guests so that we can serve you through these guest interviews. Have a wonderful day and I hope that you enjoy today's session. Hey, Katie, welcome to Selling the Couch.
Katie Lear:
Hello. Thank you. I am so excited to be here. It's kind of surreal to be
Melvin Varghese:
uh on the call after listening to so many yeah no i i appreciate you and even before jumping in i one i'm just so grateful for you for the ways i mean we've gotten to know each other really well i feel like over the past year and yeah man yeah and i feel like right at that point at this point it's a very informal relationship you know and Both of us are parents with young kiddos and navigating that as well in the world of entrepreneurship and especially the world of course building. And I mean, it is it is a lot. And so one, I'm just so excited for you, but I'm also equally excited for this conversation that we're going to have.
Katie Lear:
Thank you so much. Yeah, I was just thinking this morning before I hopped on, like we probably met around this time last year was probably when we first spoke. And I remember then like thinking, oh, I've got this baby like he's you know, not quite one, like really in that baby mindset. And then I watched him like run out the door for daycare today. And he's like enormous and the full toddler. And I was like, wow, time is time has really passed. We are we are in a different place than we were a year ago.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. No, I think in in the moment it feels like, man, like this is like there are definitely moments where you're like, I want this time to pass. And then yeah, I pass it. You're like, oh, where do you go? And you're absolutely right.
Katie Lear:
Yeah.
Melvin Varghese:
You have been extremely busy. You've built a successful solo practice in North Carolina.
Katie Lear:
Yep. Yep. Just outside of Charlotte. Yeah.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. It's out of Charlotte. You're also like a Squarespace, like I hope I can. Yes.
Katie Lear: Yes. Yeah.
Melvin Varghese:
I mean, it's amazing what you've been able to do. I mean, your your website, first of all, is beautiful. And but you've done so much cool stuff with SEO and maybe even like Let's start here, which is, I mean, tell us a little bit about your private practice and the niche that you honed it on and then we can jump into some of the other questions.
Katie Lear:
Yeah, absolutely. Like you said, it's a solo practice, so it's just, just me hanging out in there. And I specialize in working with, um, preteens, mostly preteen girls, but tweens, which I would categorize as maybe roughly eight to 13, dealing with anxiety and OCD symptoms. So that's really where I've found myself landing after some time in practice. And I mostly work from a CBT perspective, and then I incorporate a lot of play therapy into that since I'm working with younger kids. I have just found that that age is so cool because if you do have that sort of skills oriented brain, Cognitively, kids are getting to the point where they're really eager to use those skills, but they've also retained this sense of play. So I don't know. It's just never a dull moment in there. And I've really, I've really loved that age.
Melvin Varghese:
That's cool. That's, uh, I mean the combo of that, right? Like you just said it so well, like now losing play, but still having the cognitive abilities, right. And developing cognitive abilities to be able to use something like CBT. Uh, how did you find that niche? Cause I know part of it, I mean, I feel like for all of us when we find niches, part of it's a personal experience, part of it's just tweaking. Like, I mean, tell us a little bit about that journey.
Katie Lear:
Yeah, I mean, some of it was trial and error. I started out working with much younger children, which I still love, but I think I came into it as somebody who had worked as a nanny all the way through grad school. I had like 10 years of nannying experience and I loved toddlers. I loved nannying for little children and then realized in practice that Working with young, young children and working with toddlers is also a ton of parenting work that really you're working with parents most of the time. And that the age that I loved to nanny and the age that I love to counsel were different, and probably a little older. So I've kind of gradually shifted the bulk of my practice older, and for a long time was really focusing on anxiety. And I think felt like OCD was something that was too complex or required really special training, which it does, or, you know, why I, there's no way that I would be able to, you know, get that kind of expertise, which is kind of interesting looking back because I also have an OCD diagnosis and was diagnosed around this age. That tween age also happens to be one of the most common times that kids get diagnosed with OCD. Like the age of onset is right around that kind of seven to 13 range. And post pandemic, I've been seeing more and more and more and more of these cases, which might be partially pandemic influenced, and might be because I also started blogging about it on my website. But realized that having that identity as like, I'm also a person with OCD is really helpful to these kids, because there's so much shame, I think, around having these thoughts that feel like they're very outside of yourself. So I had put myself on a wait list for ERP training, which is exposure and response prevention. It's the CBT that's like specifically for OCD people. And it was a pediatric training. I waited two years to get into this training, finally got off the list, finally attended. And I'm just finishing that up now. So I, I feel a lot more confident to treat these cases now. And I'm really opening my practice more to OCD.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, that's amazing. I feel like, I wouldn't say it's like 100%, but I feel like, especially with a lot of solo practices, when you hone in on a niche where you're speaking to a younger version of you, I just think that's so good. Like, not just in the therapy room, but also in the content that you create, right? And it's, there's just a different connection. So it sounds like you share that, like the diagnosis with parents and with, like, How, like is this in the initial session? Is it on the website, like combo?
Katie Lear:
I've debated this a little bit. I think there might be one mention of it in passing on the website. It was something that I didn't really share is on the website. I think I mentioned it in passing in my bio now, but that's kind of a newish decision. It's not something that I share with everyone who comes in, but I have found that often sharing it with parents at intake if they're seeing these OCD symptoms has been really comforting. And then I also share it on like the IOCDF website, which is like the training body that does this ERP training. And I don't always do that for things like anxiety. Like, I think there's something different about, you know, Oh yeah, well, I was an anxious kid and saying like, no, I had OCD. Like this was really something that I went through. especially because I didn't get ERP as a kid. This training wasn't really as accessible yet when I was growing up. And I feel really confident that it would have changed things for me in a significant way if I had gotten it early in life. So I really, there's a belief for me behind why the treatment works. And like, I can feel really confident saying like, this is what I would have wanted for me or for my kid. And it's a hard treatment to do. It's exposure, right? You're facing things you really don't want to do. So I think having somebody who has that experience has been helpful for kids even to buy into like, why would I put myself through this?
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. I think how you said it, I think it's so good because there's this stigma or the shame around it. And then just to be able to say, like, yes, I took this training, but it's meaningful to me because like this is something that would have been so helpful for me. Right. I feel like that's a different conversation or is a different heart to that conversation.
Katie Lear:
Yeah. Yes. Yeah. Yeah. I can't quite say like, oh, I did it and it changed my life, but I can look back and say, man, I ended up kind of like exposure therapy. you know, later in life, just through life, but that if it had come earlier, it would have made things so much easier and it would have been so much easier to understand what was happening. So, yeah, I started self-disclosing when I started taking on more OCD cases and found it to be really helpful. And I think like a lot of us, I'm kind of gradually self-disclosing more the further I get out of grad school. And it has just felt right to do that with this specific group of kids.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. No, absolutely. Um, I'm glad you mentioned that. Cause I do notice, I do notice that general trend of like, as we get further away from grad school, maybe it's sort of the season nature of it, right? Like it's guided by heart versus just fear. maybe. Yeah. But that's really cool. I wanted to shift a little bit and you know, because we're going to spend the majority of our time here talking through your course and some of the things that you're navigating and struggling with. So tell us, okay, private practice, there is this leap into online courses because it's natural leap or although I think it's becoming more normal, but you know, yeah.
Katie Lear:
It was certainly not my plan when I went into practice. My plan when I went into practice was, man, maybe if I play my cards right, I'll make as much as I did at my agency job. Like that was the goal was if I could just replace my agency income, then I'll be really happy. And like, that was that was the bar for me, which I did. And with the sort of like puttering around on Squarespace and SEO kind of accidentally built a much more robust website than I had anticipated. And something that I love about SEO is that like, it is really gratifying and that you can just chip away and do a tiny bit at a time. And it's almost like investing money, like over time, you just see this kind of snowball effect of how it grows. And I really loved that you did not have to be an expert coming in. So yeah, I ended up with this big, big website that was getting lots and lots and lots of referrals. I didn't really want to become a group practice, but I was getting all of these people looking for counseling. And that all happened right around the same time that my son was born. And I was going to take a maternity leave. And we were in the early pandemic. And I was like, oh, man, not only am I getting more referrals than I can take, I'm about to leave for three months. And then I'm going to come back and probably never want to see as many clients again as I'm seeing now. I could already feel myself getting pretty tired. And so at that point, I made a baby course where I, I think I built it in a week and I had this fire under my butt because I was so anxious and there was so much that was outside of my control at that time. And I just sat down and was like, and like wrote out this whole thing. Right. And wasn't expecting it to really be a true source of passive income for me. But that course has done fairly well, given that I don't really market it and it just kind of hangs out on the website and I, you know, haven't, gone back and updated it or given it any extra love since that time. It's me speaking over PowerPoint slides. It's pretty low key. But now that I am in this toddler parenting world, I think, as a lot of us are, I'm realizing that my capacity for one-to-one work is lower than it used to be. I love the idea of being able to reach kids who either I wouldn't be able to see because I'm at capacity or they live too far away or they're in a rural area where it's harder to find therapists. I think it's, it's such a unique win-win where it really is a value to a lot of people. And it helps me to be able to spend more time with my son and, you know, not have to give away all of my afterschool hours, which are also his afterschool hours. And like, I get a lot more balance in life. So I think it sort of arose out of pre-baby anxiety and just needing an outlet for that, but I'm ready to go back now and build it into something bigger.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, I'm so glad you said this because like, I don't know. I mean, I think we've all seen this, right? There are coaches programs out there and it's like the online course, like they sell the dream and the dream is often these things that most therapists doesn't really connect, right? Yeah, just sitting on some beach, whatever, right? That's typical, right? But I think for most of us, it's like, you know, how we have specialized knowledge and how do we sort of serve many with that specialized knowledge? Because ultimately, for all of us, I think we want to live out the self-care we preach to our clients, right? We want to spend more time with our loved ones. Many of us have young kiddos, so it's like, how do we build a life around our life versus doing career and then fitting all the other stuff around the career?
Katie Lear:
Yeah, yeah. That's something that That is something that you say a lot that I think about, which is building the career around your life rather than building life around the career, which is such a simple thing. But the more I think about it, the more I'm like, man, I really have built my life around my career and not the opposite. So I've really been trying now to tweak my schedule so that I do have more time in the evenings when my son is home from daycare. And I'm just noticing that Even just having a little bit more gas in the tank is the difference for me between like, I guess he'll play by himself while I get dinner ready. And like, no, we've got 20 minutes. Like, let's do some water play. Like, let's bust out, you know, the sensory table. Like, what if we put some food coloring in this pitcher of water? And like having these little experiences that are so small, but like, that's the beach for me, right? Is like, do I have enough at the end of the day to come home and still have something in the tank? for my kid. And I think with a full caseload, I just wouldn't. I wouldn't right now.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. I think you said that so well. I mean, even for me, like a practical example, right. We had like, oh, it was Taco Monday. I know we're recording on Tuesday. It should technically be Taco Tuesday. But, you know, like we've noticed Chloe's just getting more into she watches me like I usually end up just cooking most of our dinners because of just schedules. But And we've noticed she's had more interest in it. And so I'm like, oh gosh, should I be letting my four-year-old use different things like the spiralizer or whatever, right? But kind of let her immerse in it. But all that to say, I think if I was so stressed out with clients, um, and then I would approach dinner. It would just be like, this is a thing we just got to get done. I don't think I would have the patience to be like, okay, look, let daddy show you how to use this paralyzer. And, you know, I'll watch you and butter these like little, uh, what do they call them? Silicone, but like these knives, like safe knives. And yeah, I just wouldn't have that. And I think that's, that's so cool that you mentioned that. So.
Katie Lear:
Yeah. No, it's absolutely. I've had those months where I'm in survival mode, where it's just like, we just got to get it done, man. Like, here's, here's your dinner. Like, please just eat it. Like, we just got to get through this. Right. And it's not, I don't want to like white knuckle my way through this. You don't, you don't get another, another shot. So yeah, it is the work-life balance. I think of having two ways to reach people that I think can both have genuine benefits and like, they're, they're different, but not, you know, one isn't lesser than is, is exciting to me.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, 100%. So I want to dive into what we're going to spend time talking about. So tell us about the course idea and tell us about an area that you're struggling with.
Katie Lear:
Yeah. So the baby course that I have right now is a collection of coping skills that are sort of like what I often front load my first few sessions with when I'm working with anxious kids. So my thought process was, you know what, can this be something where if a child has mild anxiety, they may not really need counseling, they just need these skills that they can work on with a parent at home? Or is this something that they can at least have to get them started as they're searching for a therapist in a market where there might be a weight to get in? And so it's a pretty straightforward series of coping skills that are the ones that I have found most effective with tweens and some psychoeducation about anxiety. And then one hour is for kids designed for kids to watch. And then one hour is for parents talking about how to use those skills and then also some parenting stuff like Are we accidentally accommodating anxiety? And, you know, how can you speak to kids in a way that's validating but isn't, you know, encouraging rumination and all that, all that good stuff. Something I think I realized going through online course school with you and with our cohort was that just doing the content I had was something that I already was like not as excited about. Like I would have been building something that I already felt like I'd kind of done. And like, do you want to build a product that you've already feel like you're like over? And so something that's been really exciting to me is incorporating more elements of role play, pop and geek culture, and some kind of a little bit more of a playful flavor into this course. I also run these Dungeons and Dragons groups for kids online. And I think that that role play element is so helpful in figuring out how to actually apply the skills. And so I have this idea of revamping and expanding the content, but then also including these modules that are like choose your own adventure stories, where you have opportunities to almost do like simulated in vivo, right? We're like, it's probably going to be like text-based in this first round. But like, getting a scenario and trying out the skills you've just learned to see what might play out in a given situation, if you're trying these different coping skills, what might work, what might not work, right? Common pitfalls, and just having kind of a fun, no-pressure way to play these skills out in advance. Because I think so often kids don't practice them until they really need them. And ideally, we want them to practice before. So like, how do we make that fun and interesting. So that idea really excites me. And then someday I probably will incorporate some ERP as well once I really feel like I am solid in that. But yeah, it's sort of a more playful look at at CBT skills.
Melvin Varghese:
Hey, it's Melvin. Before we continue with today's session, I just wanted to encourage you to check out APA's PsyCareers blog. I know that many of us are thinking about work, and especially work in relation to life, and many of us are also thinking about how do we use this underlying skill set as clinicians in other realms beyond just the clinical room. If you are interested in any of that or are just curious, I encourage you to check out the American Psychological Association Services Inc. Psych Careers blog. It's absolutely free. It's their career center. There are over 400 positions that are currently available. You can literally create a free account, upload your resume, set up all sorts of job alerts, and get started on the next chapter of your career journey. You can learn more over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash A-P-A. Sellingthecouch.com forward slash A-P-A. We'll jump right back into today's session. Yeah, that's awesome. And then, you know, I know one of the things that we had talked about was, you know, you've kind of thought through the lessons, the modules, but now you're at this point of like recording or actually even creating the slides. Yeah. Tell us a little bit about that and where you're getting stuck and we can like workshop some of this together. Hi there, I hope that you're enjoying today's podcast session. Before we get to the rest of this session, just wanted to let you know that we have a weekly email newsletter. It's called the SDC Newsletter. I know, super creative, but we've literally been sending it pretty much every week since 2015. It's at this point now trusted by over 2700 clinicians and each week we share the latest podcast episode, some of the writing that I'm doing on LinkedIn with regard to my journey as a course creator and making this transition from psychologist in clinical practice to online creator and owner of an online business. And we also included a brand new section called On Mel's Mind where I break down a blog post or a video or something that's inspiring me to become a better person and a better business owner. If any of that sounds interesting, I would love to have you sign up. You can sign up over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash newsletter. We also have a bunch of different guides that we include. The current one that we have is an A to Z online course guide. So if you sign up through there, you get that guide absolutely free. It basically takes all of the lessons that I've learned as a course creator since 2015 and growing my own online course to over 270 students and over $315,000 in revenue. Just many of the lessons, but more importantly, the epic fails I've learned along the way. Again, it's over at signthecouch.com forward slash newsletter. And we'll get right back to today's session.
Katie Lear:
Yeah, I have like what I'm calling blank page syndrome, where like, I have all of the content mapped out. In OCS, we did this really beautiful post-it note exercise, and they're still on the wall, and I look at them all the time, and it looks great. I know exactly the content that I want to teach, and I feel like I have loaded myself up on research. I've done so many CEUs. I've expanded things so much. I have all of these notes. I am over-prepared to create the course, but there's some kind of a block happening for me where I can't translate all of that knowledge into I'm sitting in front of a blank slide and what goes on this slide. How much do I write out in advance versus how much am I just speaking extemporaneously? How much information per slide? How do I mix it up so they don't all look the same? The sameness of it to make it engaging. And I think it's something I'm much more aware of this time around. How do I make this engaging content? And how do I break it up so that it's not just the monotony of me speaking? But I think it's very intimidating to get started on that when you're just looking at the blank slide.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, absolutely. And then you said, like, a point, which is something I struggled with, too. Yeah. When I created, you know, the HealthCasters course, which is You know, I feel like most of us, right, that are creating online courses, we're like learners at heart, right? And so you said it, like you've taken all these different courses, you see you use, I think it's almost like this, I almost call it like the curse of over knowledge, right? Like, so you have all of this stuff, but then like, you don't, how do you put that in a course, but in a way that doesn't overwhelm you or them? Mm-hmm, mm-hmm, yes. And I wonder if a little shift would be more about, so a couple of things. One is, versus like, I got to get all of this stuff into my course. What if you are more of like the distiller, right? And you're sort of taking the little pearls of wisdom, right? Like the one thing you took from one, you know, one thing, right? And you're the person that distills it, but leaves it through your own personal experience. Yeah, right. Like, so I don't know, it feels I don't have a great image for this. But like, part of it, it sounds like maybe there's like this tremendous pressure, like I gotta be the person that distills it. So
Katie Lear:
Yeah, or this has to be like the course like this iteration of the course has to be the really good one, the really, really good one. And I don't know that I had that pressure the last time I built it, because it was just a random idea that I had and I was meeting a kind of immediate. Yeah. But now I'm like, okay, this time it's gotta be really good.
Melvin Varghese:
I think that you bring up a really good point, which I think is a very common thing. So I think people that have created one course, right. They set the barometer for the second course to line up with like, well, listen, you already got one. It better be like to this level, but likely like significantly better. Yeah. Um, so that's like one thing. But I think the other thing that's been really helpful for me, and this is hard work because I am a perfectionist. I know that's something that you struggle with as well, which is seeing it more as a journey where there will be different iterations of the course and there will be things that you tweak and refine versus the first one being the end product. Because the reality is, no matter how much you study, how many CE workshops you attend, how many times you diagram and workshop, there's just going to be feedback that we'll only get from our students that we just can't predict, right? And part of that is that's letting, holding loosely and letting go, right? Like, it's so hard though.
Katie Lear:
Yeah, no, the perfectionism is for sure a part of this and actually like even thinking back to some of the like OCD and perfectionism overlap, like this was a huge thing for me in school anytime we had like an unstructured writing assignment. Like I was really good when there was structure, but if it was just like a reaction paper, I would often just not turn it in. Like, I don't know, my teacher's going to think it's really bad. And then she's going to think I'm really bad. So I might as well not turn it in, which makes very little sense, but I did it all the time. And so like, that is something that I've had to figure out as an adult of like, how do I build my own structure into things where there is none so that I can do things like blog or send out a newsletter or whatever. I need an internal structure that I have built, but I feel like I've just accepted being cringy in those formats a little bit more than in the course, which feels so big and so permanent. If I send out a cringy newsletter, it's gone in 30 seconds, but this feels very like it's a bigger deal and it's something that people invest in. Yeah.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. Uh, so is it the, I guess let's break that down a little bit more. Is it the financial piece? Because there's going to be a larger investment or is it.
Katie Lear:
Might be actually, like I had it considered it, but I think that might be part of it. It's like, yeah, people are going to pay good money for this. Right. So maybe it does feel like there's more pressure than content I'm giving away for free.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. Um, which I can totally understand that. I think, I don't know. I was thinking, I mean, you know this story, but like, for those of you guys who are listening, you know, when I created the health gestures course, like some of it was kind of good that I was a little naive because I probably wouldn't have ever released it. But there's one video where I'm sharing how to record, like how to use a podcast mic and how to set it up. And I just didn't get the memo on like a tire. So I'm sitting here wearing like a Batman shirt. right from the movie The Dark Knight and you know I've got my old microphone which had like a purple light coming off it so this light is like shining on my light so it's like I'm like Batman but recording this thing right and you know I look at it now and I like totally cringe In that moment, I've gotten so many nice notes. Because I think in our mind as course creators, we think it has to be Hollywood-level production at the onset. But actually what matters is heart and intent. And you have that. And worst case, I know it's, I would actually even say like a newsletter you send out, right? Like in some ways you can't pull that newsletter back, right? With the course, you can actually swap out modules, re-record stuff, you know?
Katie Lear:
Yeah, that is absolutely true. Yeah, even just I think reframing it for myself of like, in my head, it's been like, this has to be like, you know, coping skills course 2.0, right? It's the next version of the authority course. Yeah. What if it's like 1.5? Like, what if it's just the goal is to make it like, yeah. What if it's just like a little bit better than what's there right now? Like, what if it doesn't have to be, you know, this monolithic, like, this is it. I don't touch it again for five years, but like, what if we just like, you know, add some video content and put in a little bit of new stuff. And like, that's enough. Yeah. But it can evolve.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. I'm like keenly aware of like that image you shared earlier of like not turning in the assignments. Yes. And it just feels like that. Right. Like it's almost like, yeah, this feels so big. So let me just not record it because that just seems way safer. Yeah. There's, I don't know for, and I could just totally be projecting this. So like, correct me, but you know, one thing I've struggled with is this sort of fear of judgment. Like if something's not like, if I'm aware, like this could be better, but I'm giving like what I'm capable of doing right now. Like I'm afraid somebody will like call me out on that.
Katie Lear:
Yes. Yes. Yeah, very much. So I think there's definitely a fear of that. And in some ways I think as I've. I don't think like following is the right word, but as my, as my website has ranked higher and as people have visited more, in some ways, there's more pressure. Now we're like, at first, when I was blogging, it was like, I'm screaming into the void. No one will ever read this. Like it doesn't have to be good. It just needs to be there. Like no one will see it. And now that I do get people responding to blogs or responding to the course, and it's generally like, I don't think I've ever gotten an email. Like I thought this blog. was poorly written. Nobody's ever said that, but I think there's a heightened awareness as you grow. I can't trust anymore that I'm just screaming into the void and no one will see it. People are going to see it. People will read it. When you're thinking about kids who are anxious and parents who are struggling, people who are in a tough spot are going to read it. I don't know. Sometimes I fall back on that, like, do no harm thing where I'm like, as long as I'm not actively giving bad advice or saying things that are going to hurt people, I'm at peace with the fact that it probably won't help everyone, right? Because that's just not, that's not how any of this works.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. The other side of it is, I mean, this is stuff I'm learning with STC. I'm again, so naive to so much of this, but like, as influence grows, right, like statistically, you will always attract people that will be disappointed, right, with what you put out there. That is really hard for anyone that struggles with perfectionism and or people pleasing and or like, just wants to genuinely put stuff out there. You know, like I remember, I mean, just even to bring this home, I remember last year, I created a twitter thread and um it ended up going like viral i think it ended up getting like half a million views or something some crazy amount wow um had a lot of really nice comments on it right and then there was one comment and said you know something about, I don't exactly remember, but it was a comment that was just meant to be hurtful. And that one just stuck with me. I magnified that one, completely negated the 45 other comments. So all that to say, I wonder what it would just be like to accept that even with your best effort, right, there may be somebody that's just disappointed, hurt, like, you know, may even, you know, buy the course and then be like, this is crap, but it probably has nothing to do with you. And they're like, you know, I wonder what it would be like just to be okay with that.
Katie Lear:
That was actually weirdly comforting to hear. Like, what if I was just at peace with the fact that, like, some people aren't going to like it or somebody someday will ask for a refund or.
Melvin Varghese:
Which is going to happen.
Katie Lear: Yeah.
There might be a there could be a part of it that just doesn't work the first time. And I have to redo it. Like, what if that just was built in? Like, that's part of it. But actually, it's very comforting of like some parts of it are just not going to be as good. And I'll figure that out.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. I mean, it's the same as like sort of a parallel process therapy, right? There's no matter how good the work we do, right, there will inevitably be no shows. There will inevitably be lines that fire us, right? Like, and sometimes it's things that we could have done better. Other times it's things that, you know, they're things, right. And I don't know, it's just, it is, but I will tell you, you're absolutely right. Like it's the hardest thing to be okay with, you know, Yeah. And not personalizing it. I think that's a big one, you know? Yeah.
Katie Lear:
Yeah. Not personalizing it as hard. I've had that same thing of like, I think I told myself when I started, like, posting on Instagram and Facebook, like, no one's going to say anything for a really long time. Like, you've got to be really big before you start getting those kinds of, like, weird comments. And that has not been the case, man. I feel like I was lied to and that like, no, you don't need a ton of people to have somebody feel you know, emboldened to like say something weird back, like it happens a lot.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, yeah, absolutely. I mean, this is, I mean, this is the nature of social media I'm learning, right? Like, it is a wonderful tool because it can help share our message in big ways. And yet at the same time, it also means we attract the general population, right? Statistically, there's gonna be times where it may not be an easy person, right? We've got about just a couple of minutes, but there was another piece I know we had talked about, which was the sitting in front of the slides, what to put on there. Tell us a little bit about that, because I think this is something a lot of our colleagues struggle with.
Katie Lear:
I think so, too. I believe that in talking with other course creators, I think this is something that other people have experienced. But for me, I know the content that's going to go in this module, or I know it has to be on this set of slides. But there's something just so on a practical level of how much of this do I script out to read for myself? How much of what I'm saying needs to be on the slide? How prepped do I want to be? right? How much information goes on each thing, right? Like, just the practicality of what do I put on it? I know the concept and how do I turn that into a concrete thing is very daunting for me at times of just like, you know, am I spending too much time on introducing it? Or is it one slide per coping skill? Or, you know, I sometimes wonder, like, do I just need to come up with, like, a silly arbitrary structure for myself of like every module is going to have two talking heads in it and two where it's just me in the bottom and like one that's just text or like something for me where I'm arbitrarily dividing up the content and then I can be flexible if I need to be.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, man, I have a ton of thoughts on this. Can I just like shoot them?
Katie Lear:
Yes, please.
Melvin Varghese:
So in terms of structure, like and worrying, like, should I be on camera? Is it just slides only? Should I do a hybrid? I would just vary it up and I don't have a rhyme or reason of like why certain ones are. The thing I mainly think about is just mixing it up for, so that people aren't watching like module after module and just sort of like, you know, just like staring, but not, not actually picking up. So I wonder if a simple structure could be. First video is going to be just me, me talking. Second video is going to be. slide only third one is you know slide with me me on the corner and then just yeah and repeat that same pattern over and over and don't even worry about it, because then, and then, you know, as you sort of get feedback, there may be folks like, oh, you know, I don't know, maybe you get feedback that, you know, hey, this would have been cool if you actually demonstrate this, right? And so maybe it was only a slide only. So then you turn that one in the next iteration into a you talking and into a demonstration. All that to say, like, I think there's just information we don't know yet, that I think just putting something out there and just following simple format, I think would be good.
Katie Lear:
Yes. I'm even thinking I've got the post-its already lined up, so maybe I now just go through and I'm like, next to this one is the post-it that's like, this is just me. This is text only.
Melvin Varghese:
The structure, I think, is a common struggle. I know one of the things that we learn in OCS that we're integrating to our mastermind is this format, which is A simple one is just to say, just to say, hey everyone, in this video we're going to be covering this topic, right? So you can do it like, they're like a, just a statement or you can do like almost like a comment, you know? Hey everyone, in this video, I know a lot of us may be wondering how in the world do you record with a podcast mic. In this video, I'm going to show you how to do that. So a little intro, a little brief story, I think can be helpful, right? Related to that, because people remember stories, right? Because there is so much information out there. And then I think the simple thing is like three tips. Like, I mean, that's the, and then, uh, uh you can do after the three tips you can do like a common mistake you don't yeah and then just a simple call to action so basically introduce with the question a story three tips common mistake and a call to action yeah i love that you know
Katie Lear:
Yeah. And maybe for these skills too, it's really like, can I try to distill the coping skill into like a three-step process, right? If it's like step one, step two, step three, you know, and try not to make it this real lengthy, like.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. A hundred percent. Yeah. One of the things that we'll do for the mastermind for this year, we didn't do it in notes, yes, but there's this little exercise called, and then what? So basically like you, you can do this with a trusted friend, but If you're trying to teach something, like let's say, you know, my example, right? I'm teaching from not being able to podcast to starting a podcast. So what you do is you just talk to a friend and then, okay. And they ask, well, what's the first thing of starting a podcast? Well, you need to grab a mic. Okay. And then what do I need to do? Right. And just, and just have that person say, and then what, and then what, and as they say it and you respond, you just make a note and essentially you're creating a little roadmap. Right. And that can help distill stuff that is actually the essential stuff versus what we think is the essential stuff.
Katie Lear:
Yeah. Yeah. And I'm hoping to see that that is where like the beta will be really helpful. It's like, well, maybe it's okay if I don't know exactly how to explain it now, because I need to explain it to my, my audience. Right. Like it, it, it, maybe that will become clear what some of those points are that I'm missing when I'm teaching that online.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. 100%. Katie, our time flew. Yeah. Thank you for doing this. You know, I feel like I love having these conversations. And I mean, the one thing I think I always take away from conversations like this, there we're all learning still right there's no like you know no one i think has arrived you know yeah and there's so many especially in the world of course building there's so many nuances to consider um where can we learn about you about the course and yeah well you can go to katylear.com to get
Katie Lear:
kind of information on the counseling, get information on the course. I have a book on childhood grief that you can also learn about through the website. So lots of stuff there. I actually just created a free guide this week that has five of my favorite coping skills from the course in just a downloadable guidebook format. If you join the mailing list, which will also be where I tell people as I get ready to host this live version of the course in the spring, that will ultimately lead to this coping skills 1.1 or 1.5, uh, later this year, whatever, whatever number feels less intimidating to me. Yeah. So I would say the website and then the mailing list are probably the places to go for that.
Melvin Varghese:
Perfect. Um, Katie, I'm super grateful for you. Uh, thank you again for doing this and have a great rest of your day.
Katie Lear:
Thank you so much. Yeah. This has been such a treat. I'm genuinely excited to go back to those Post-it notes. Bye.
Melvin Varghese:
Hey there, I hope that you enjoyed today's session. Thank you again for taking the time to listen all the way through. If you are a therapist and you're specifically in a season where you're a seasoned therapist and you are wanting to move from clinical to online course income, We actually have a specific mastermind for therapists who are doing this. So this is basically a group of really kind and supportive therapists who are also wildly successful as business owners. And we meet together to build and grow and scale our online courses. You can learn more about that mastermind over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash mastermind. All one word, sellingthecouch.com forward slash mastermind. Thank you so much for taking the time to listen to today's session. Hey there, hope you enjoyed this coaching call with Katie and especially if you have been struggling with, you know, the, whether it's perfectionism or whether it's the fear of being seen or the fear of judgment, um, as you put your online course out into the world, I hope that today's session has just been genuinely helpful for you. Uh, I, uh, you know, I speak so much from personal experience, even this podcast, I never imagined doing something like this. I got licensed as a psychologist in 2012. And I thought all I was going to literally do was therapy, assessment, supervision, and teaching. Never thought about podcasting. Never thought about, you know, I was going to launch an online course. Never thought I was going to, you know, transform My clinical skill set into an online business. And so I just more than anything, I love creating episodes like this because they show us what is possible and they show us when what is possible when we tap into sort of our inner child and that inner creative child. And just different ways that we can use our skill set. Katie's website is over again at Katie Lear. Lear is spelled L-E-A-R dot com. And you definitely got to go check out this website because it's just beautifully designed. And yeah. And Katie's just doing some pretty, pretty amazing stuff on it. I was thinking about this conversation and the one thing that I took away from it is this idea of perfectionism, right? Like so many of us as clinicians struggle with this because I don't know if it's just trauma, I don't know if it's like messages from society, messages in our families of origin, probably all combinations of all of those, right? Fear of rejection and This is the stuff that I think, when we start building courses, it's an amazing and interesting thing, how it manifests. We're actually in the middle of launching our online course mastermind, and I notice a lot of this stuff coming up, and I've had to be really intentional about my therapy and about brain spotting to do this work, because it's hard showing up anew in different ways. I'm just so proud of Katie for the ways that she's choosing to show up. Yeah, it definitely just takes a different level of courage. If you are interested in launching an online course and you want to stay updated with regard to our online course mastermind, this is specifically for us that are more seasoned as business owners, but we're just in a season where we want to use our skillset in different ways. You can check out the A to Z online course guide for therapists. It's absolutely free. You can download it and we'll keep We'll keep you in the loop. You can download that over at sign the couch comm forward slash online course guide Have a great rest of your day, and I'll see you next time.
Narrator:
Bye Thanks for listening to the selling the couch podcast for more great content and to stay up to date visit www.sellingthecouch.com.
Melvin Varghese:
Hey there, I hope you enjoyed today's podcast session. Just wanted to let you know we have a free weekly newsletter that is trusted by over 8,300 of our colleagues. Basically, we just share the latest podcast episode, some of the things that I'm learning as an entrepreneur and as a business owner. And it's absolutely free. You can sign up over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash newsletter. Would love to have you. Have a great rest of your day. Bye. Hey there, I hope that you enjoyed today's session. Thank you again for taking the time to listen all the way through. If you are a therapist and you're specifically in a season where you're a seasoned therapist and you are wanting to move from clinical to online course income, We actually have a specific mastermind for therapists who are doing this. So this is basically a group of really kind and supportive therapists who are also wildly successful as business owners. We meet together to build and grow and scale our online courses. You can learn more about that mastermind over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash mastermind all one word sellingthecouch.com forward slash mastermind. Thank you so much for taking the time to listen to today's session.
selling the couch podcast with melvin varghese phdWeekly interviews, strategy, and advice for building your private practice in and beyond the therapy room.
Apple podcastsYou TubeSpotify ready to launch your online course?Please check out our free online course starter kit for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This FREE 7-day email course will help you validate your course idea (so that you can create a course that has buyers).
sign up for free course starter kitready to launch your podcast?Please check out our FREE podcasting workshop for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This workshop is pre-recorded so you can watch it on a day and time that works for your schedule.
It contains a lot of practical tips that we've learned as STC has reached 1.81 million+ downloads and become a 6-figure business with podcasting as the backbone.
sign up for podcasting workshopKatie LearLCMHC, RPT, RDT
Katie Lear is a therapist in solo private practice near Charlotte, NC. She runs virtual D & D groups as well. She was part of the Online Course School Live Cohort, and she’s part of the Online Course School Mastermind this year. She has completed a digital version of her online course.
Melvin varghese phdPsychologist and Founder @ Selling The Couch
Melvin Varghese, PhD is a licensed psychologist in Philadelphia, PA. In 2015, Dr. Varghese founded Selling The Couch, a podcast to help therapists move from clinical to online income.
On the podcast, he interviews successful practitioners about how they've built their practices, social media/marketing experts, and shares lessons as he uses our clinical skills to create an online business powered by podcasting + online courses.
The podcast is one of the top Career podcasts in Apple Podcasts, has been downloaded over 1.8 million times, and is heard in over 125 countries. Mel is a successful course creator with 240+ students and $300k+ in course sales.
More PostsUncomfortable Truths About Private Practice Finances (with James Childress)by Melvin Varghese | Jan 24, 2025 | Blog, Private Practice, STC Podcast
Melvin Varghese with James Childress on Uncomfortable Private Practice Finance Truths
When Should You Hire An Intake Coordinator? (Uriah Guilford)by Melvin Varghese | Feb 6, 2025 | Blog, Growing Your Practice, Private Practice, Productivity, STC Podcast
Uriah Guildford joins us to talk about hiring an intake coordinator.
5 Signs You're Ready To Launch Your Online Courses (with Melvin Varghese))by Melvin Varghese | Jan 31, 2025 | Blog, Online Courses, Passive Income for Therapists, Private Practice, STC Podcast
Melvin Varghese giving an overview of launching successful online courses and how you know you are ready.
« Older Entries The post How To Work Through Perfectionism When Launching Your Online Course (Katie Lear, LCMHC, RPT, RDT) appeared first on Selling The Couch | Melvin Varghese PhD.
336: How To Give Better Virtual Presentations with Lorraine LeeWritten By Melvin Varghese PhDIn this episode of Selling the Couch, I had the pleasure of speaking with Lorraine K. Lee, a seasoned expert in virtual presentations. Our conversation delved into the evolving landscape of presenting in a digital world, especially in light of the pandemic, which has made virtual presentations the norm for many professionals, including therapists.
We kicked off the episode by discussing Lorraine's impressive background, which includes her experience at LinkedIn and Prezi, and how these roles have shaped her understanding of effective communication in virtual settings. Lorraine shared her insights on the unique opportunities that virtual presentations offer, such as reaching a wider audience and creating engaging experiences that go beyond traditional in-person formats.
One of the key takeaways from our discussion was the importance of incorporating movement into presentations. Lorraine emphasized that movement—whether through dynamic slides, engaging visuals, or the presenter's own body language—can significantly enhance audience attention and engagement. She suggested aiming for two movements per minute to keep the audience captivated.
We also explored the role of slides in presentations, with Lorraine advocating for them to serve as a supplement rather than the main focus. She highlighted the need for presenters to integrate their personal presence with their content, creating a seamless experience that fosters connection with the audience.
Throughout the episode, Lorraine provided practical tips for therapists and other professionals looking to improve their virtual presentation skills. We discussed the significance of eye contact, the impact of a well-curated background, and the power of visuals in conveying information effectively. Lorraine shared her framework for engaging audiences, which includes warming up the crowd and using interactive elements like polls to maintain interest.
As we wrapped up our conversation, we touched on the challenges that introverts may face in virtual settings. Lorraine reassured listeners that introverts can leverage their strengths—such as preparation and thoughtful communication—to excel in virtual presentations. She encouraged them to embrace their authentic selves and find ways to connect with their audience, even in a digital format.
This episode is packed with valuable insights and actionable strategies for anyone looking to enhance their virtual presentation skills. Whether you're a therapist transitioning to online work or a professional seeking to improve your public speaking abilities, Lorraine's expertise will inspire you to show up authentically and effectively in your virtual engagements.
For more information about Lorraine and her work, you can visit her website at LorraineKLee.com or connect with her on LinkedIn. Don't miss this opportunity to elevate your virtual presentation game!
Transcript (AI-Generated)Melvin Varghese:
Today's podcast is supported by the American Psychological Association, PsyCareers. If you are a psychology professional looking to advance your career or thinking about a pivot, definitely encourage you to check out PsyCareers, which is the career center from the American Psychological Association Services, Inc. There are over 400 positions available. It's the perfect time to create a free account, upload your resume, and set up job alerts. You can learn more over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash A-P-A. Sellingthecouch.com forward slash A-P-A. We'll jump right into today's session. Today's podcast is supported by the American Psychological Association Psych Careers. If you are a psychology professional looking to advance your career or thinking about a pivot, definitely encourage you to check out SciCareers, which is the career center from the American Psychological Association Services, Inc. There are over 400 positions available. It's the perfect time to create a free account, upload your resume, and set up job alerts. You can learn more over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash A-P-A. Sellingthecouch.com forward slash A-P-A. We'll jump right into today's session. Hello, hello, welcome to today's session of Selling the Couch. I hope that you're doing awesome, having a wonderful day. So today's podcast conversation is actually all about virtual presentations. I'm joined by Lorraine Lee. Lorraine and I actually connected in fall of 2021. We were both part of Maven's third cohort for cohort-based courses and part of Maven's accelerator program. I You know, Saul Lorraine was doing some pretty amazing things when it came to virtual presentations. So, you know, practically, right, if you're doing any sort of anything from doing a webinar to drive business, all the way to speaking virtually at conferences, and how do you show up on video in a way that is authentic and as much as possible mimics the actual live experience. So today Lorraine and I are going to have an amazing chat about some of the tips and practical strategies that Lorraine has learned along the way. In the process of this, Lorraine has built a very massive following on LinkedIn and several hundred thousand followers on LinkedIn. Lorraine was formerly at LinkedIn, worked LinkedIn and then was also part of Prezi. So she's very much immersed in this world of virtual presentations and learning and what sort of, you know, how we learn best online. And there's just some interesting stuff. What's actually even more amazing is right in the middle of this podcast conversation, Lorraine actually does the thing that she preached and like put this amazing graphic right on the screen. This is the part I kind of stinks that we have these audio conversations, but I was just like blown away. by what Lorraine did. And you'll probably hear my voice right in the middle of the podcast conversation. So we'll get to today's podcast conversation. Here's my conversation with Lorraine K. Lee from LorraineKLee.com. Hey, Lorraine, welcome to Selling the Couch.
Lorraine Lee:
Thank you for having me, Melvin. I'm so excited.
Melvin Varghese:
I know it's kind of a little bit of a full circle moment. We first connected and I remember We were a third cohort in Maven, I think, right? Oh, yeah. And I remember I don't remember if we were ever in small groups, but I remember we I can't remember it was on the Slack channel, but I was like, oh, yeah, it seems awesome and grateful we got to connect there and then grateful we got to connect. And you've been so kind and supportive as I forayed into LinkedIn because I have no idea what I'm doing.
Lorraine Lee:
And oh, yeah, I know you're doing a great job.
Melvin Varghese:
Thank you for saying that.
Melvin Varghese:
And thanks for, you know, just being kind enough to comment on stuff.
Melvin Varghese:
And yeah, it's, I mean, it's a different world. Right. And we're talking about the world of presentations. I mean, I don't know, maybe even before we start this, like, could you have even imagined this like pandemic, like how like virtual presentations would become almost the norm.
Lorraine Lee:
No, and it's funny, I have such a, I have a lot of experience in the presentation space. And so I worked at SlideShare, which was a LinkedIn company at the time I worked at Prezi. And yeah, I could not have imagined that all of that would be so useful by the time virtual presentations came around and that it's, you know, taken off in the way that it has, but I'm really happy as I think it's made it a lot more accessible and just provides a lot more possibilities for how to make great presentations.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, absolutely. And you said, right, it provides more possibilities. So I know we'll get deeper into this, but even at a surface level, what has been a shift? Like what has been some of those opportunities from as a result of going virtual versus just, you know, live?
Lorraine Lee:
Yeah, well, I think there is, of course, the obvious where if you're presenting virtually, you get to reach a much wider audience and people you might not normally have spoken to before. No, I think virtual is really a unique way for people to stand out. I think when we shifted to virtual, a lot of people were just trying to take the in-person experience, kind of plop it onto the virtual experience. They weren't really doing anything differently. They were kind of going through the motions, maintaining the status quo, doing the screen share, all of that. But with virtual presentations, for those who can do it well and kind of put in a little bit of that extra work, you are really able to create an experience for your audience. You're able to grab their attention in different ways. You're able to, you know, for better or for worse, the virtual audience is a lot harder to engage. So there's a lot more distractions and things just grabbing our attention. So, you know, if you can do virtual well, I mean, you're just going to rise immediately above the pack and really stand out.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, man, I love how you said that. And even like, you know, I mean, you know, this, like, you know, I run, you know, I have like a live teaching for our mastermind. And this is something I've been thinking a lot about right now, just like presenting information, but it's like this infotainment element that I feel like gets even more magnified in the virtual setting because attention is so limited.
Lorraine Lee:
For sure. And I actually, I created this framework for meetings. So kind of related to presentations, but the first step in that framework, I talk about warming up the crowd and like, to your point, when you're on video, you are kind of an entertainer now and you really have to do more than just, you know, hi everyone. And just jump into the presentation to make it interesting and make it engaging and make people remember what you're talking about.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, no, absolutely. There are like so many nuances and I think, you know, you know, there's like the majority of the listeners for this podcast are therapists, but I actually feel like this kind of comes in a way natural to therapists because many therapists are kind of natural feelers. They're empathic, like, right. They feel that connection. And I think probably, I think for a lot of therapists, the biggest intimidating factor is the actual tech piece of it. Right. And, but I feel like, you know, I don't know, so many therapists have made this transition to telehealth, right? And they've stayed on it. So yeah, it's just there's an interesting, interesting thing, I think, just in that, in this among colleagues, you know, I wanted to kind of dive a little bit deeper. So into kind of strategies, tips and things like that. There's, I mean, virtual presentations, maybe we can even start there. So when you're saying virtual presentation, is this like, what are some examples of that? Maybe we can even start there.
Lorraine Lee:
Examples of virtual presentations. Yeah. I think it's anything where you are virtual. So just not in person. So it doesn't have to be just zoom specific, but it can be any platform. And you are sharing some sort of content. to an audience that's not in the room with you.
Melvin Varghese:
Perfect. So this could be anything from a paid talk you're doing to a webinar to like anything where you have information and you're trying to communicate information to a group of people, right? What would you say are like, so I know when we were chatting, you know, we were like, let's try to like hone in and really think about some practical tips to do these virtual presentations. So maybe we can just dive there. What would you say is like a kind of an easy to implement tip?
Lorraine Lee:
Yeah. Well, I love that you're saying easy to implement, because I mean, as you referenced before, I think people can get really overwhelmed with virtual. But, you know, I really like to break it down into simple, actionable things that people can can do and can implement to really stand out. So the first step I would share is to add movement to your presentations. And I had this colleague at my former role, and he would always say movement is the gateway to attention. And Melvin, if you think about, you know, binging Netflix or you go on a walk and you see a bird flying by and your eyes are just automatically drawn to it, you know, that's movement. And our brains get bored very easily. We get used to things quickly. So movement is kind of what breaks us out of that monotony of a presentation or just daily life. And it's what triggers like a dopamine hit in our brain. And if you think about the presentations you've seen, whether in person or virtually, you think about the presenter. sitting on a slide and they're just talking about the same thing for like 10 minutes. I mean, you are zoning out after, you know, minute two. It needs to kind of keep moving, keep changing. And so I think that's, you know, kind of the first thing I always like to tell people virtually, because virtually you have to move even a little bit more than you might in person. But it's a very easy thing to implement.
Melvin Varghese:
That's really awesome. And again, I tend to ask a lot of like silly questions on this podcast.
Lorraine Lee:
No, not silly questions.
Melvin Varghese:
So you said like movement, so it sounds like movement within like slides, right? So is this also like physical movement of the presenter?
Lorraine Lee:
Yeah, yeah, yeah. So movement in terms of the physical slides could be showing a video. It could be having a GIF, you know, a moving sticker. Maybe you just have some fade-ins, you know, coming in. And then movement of, yes, like the body language as well. And so, you know, another aspect of presenting well virtually and appearing confident and competent is having the right framing and using your hands to emphasize your points and all of those good things.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, absolutely. And then you said about slides and transitions and having these, I remember like we, I felt like when we were in Maven, like this was really like, like emphasized over and over, like switching stuff up.
Lorraine Lee:
They did it well.
Melvin Varghese:
They did. They did it really well. Do you have like a general framework of how you think about it? Like I try to aim to switch stuff up every 15 seconds or like any sort of hard and fast rules like that.
Lorraine Lee:
Yeah, so I like to say two movements per minute. And I think, so Maven did a really good job moving through things. I think what Maven also did a good job doing is creating pattern interrupts, or I think they call them state changes. And essentially, and that's kind of what movement is, in some way. So for example, if you show a video, that's a state change, because you're kind of breaking up what you're already doing. So you're talking through content, you show a video, you're kind of breaking up that attention. Anytime you launch a poll, or ask a question, or ask people to write something down, that's going to be a state change because they're moving into a different state of things, and that's also going to be a really good way to capture attention. I think it's a little bit harder than just simply adding, you know, some movement to your presentation, but it's also a really great way to keep people engaged.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, and so just to kind of hone in on this, and the whole idea behind this is the more of these intentional changes they are, the more you can sustain attention for longer periods of time, right?
Lorraine Lee:
Yeah, just because our brains get used to things. And so we're living in the TikTok era now, right? So things are just constantly moving and changing and just quick content, quick info. So yeah, exactly.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, that's so interesting. And I mean, I'm even thinking about like grad school, right? Like I'm sure you can resonate with this, but like so many of, you know, lectures that we saw were like slides, lots of texts, right? And you're sitting here trying to read it. And it's not that way, I feel like anymore. Right. And in fact, I hope not.
Lorraine Lee:
I think there are some people who still do that.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, yeah. Right. Right.
Melvin Varghese:
I hope not as well, but like, I forgot where I am probably going to butcher how I heard this, but the basically like slide should be a supplement and not the main thing. Right. And so I was wondering if we could dive a little into that, like how you think about like the role of slides versus the role of the person.
Lorraine Lee:
Yeah, yeah. I mean, I would agree with that. I think slides are not meant to be the sole focus. And really, like one of the reasons when we went virtual, why it was so difficult to pay attention is because we lost that human connection piece. Because with the screen share, for example, our face
Melvin Varghese:
Hey, it's Melvin. Before we continue with today's session, just wanted to encourage you to check out APA's PsyCareers blog. I know that many of us are thinking about work and especially in work in relation to life. And many of us are also thinking about how do we use this underlying skill set as clinicians in other realms beyond just the clinical room. If you are interested in any of that or are just curious, I encourage you to check out the American Psychological Association Services, Inc. Psych Careers blog. It's absolutely free. It's their career center. There are over 400 positions that are currently available. You can literally create a free account, upload your resume, set up all sorts of job alerts, and get started on the next chapter of your career journey. You can learn more over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash A-P-A. sellingthecouch.com forward slash APA. We'll jump right back into today's session.
Lorraine Lee:
Just got really small, the slide took up the whole screen, and you're just staring at a, you know, a wall of text. And then I think, you know, platforms like zoom kind of change it. So you can make the person bigger, for example, but even still, you're kind of competing person or, or content. And so when you can kind of integrate the two, I know this is not a video podcast, but maybe in a video clip later, you'll see I have some visuals on my screen. And when you can integrate the two, that's really where like, that's the sweet spot. And like you said, it's kind of you building this experience. And it's you plus the content, just kind of working in tandem versus one, you know, being super dominant.
Melvin Varghese:
Hey, it's Melvin. Before we continue with today's session, just wanted to encourage you to check out APA's PsyCareers blog. I know that many of us are thinking about work and especially in work in relation to life. And many of us are also thinking about how do we use this underlying skill set as clinicians in other realms beyond just the clinical room. If you are interested in any of that or are just curious, I encourage you to check out the American Psychological Association Services Inc. Psych Careers blog. It's absolutely free. It's their career center. There are over 400 positions that are currently available. You can literally create a free account, upload your resume, set up all sorts of job alerts, and get started on the next chapter of your career journey. You can learn more over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash A-P-A. sellingthecouch.com forward slash APA. We'll jump right back into today's session. Yeah, I like that. And I think what you're saying also in this is people need ways to center themselves besides just seeing you or just seeing a slide. Like on your presentation, you've got your logo, you've got what you do, you've got your face, you've got some beautiful kind of gradation right there between the white to the blue. I know you have thought about all of this. I know it's intentional, but I mean, can you take us a little bit behind that and sort of how you sort of even think about that visually even for you?
Lorraine Lee:
Yeah, well, I know that this is not a video focused podcast. So I didn't want to put so much on my screen and like so much information where no one's going to even see it. But yes, I put my logo, I put my, the gradient you see here, that's my brand colors. And then I have your your couch here and you're in your own logo. And that was meant to kind of tie in, you know, my brand, your brand and shows that we're, you know, doing something together. And then, you know, put my, my name, obviously, and you know, some information about myself. Yeah, you know, I kept it simple. And this works perfectly well. And I could add, you know, a little bit more as well. But for this use case, it makes sense.
Melvin Varghese: Yeah, no, absolutely. Yeah. I love how you sort of integrated a lot of these things. And even just, I think, you know, this, um, maybe, you know, like I took a lot of art classes growing up, so I'm like really interested in design and even you have these beautiful flowers, right? Like, uh, where your right shoulder, right. And I love sort of the contrast because it's very on brand color, right. But it's a nice contrast with my logo on the opposite diagonal. And so, I mean, it feels like it's a, like my logo is red bold, right? Like heavy, like heavy kind of emphasis, but I love the contrast on the other side because it kind of a nice blend of the two, you know, balances it out better.
Lorraine Lee:
Yeah, yeah. Thank you. I appreciate you saying that. Yeah. And, you know, you referenced my background. So I'm talking about the visuals now. But, you know, I like to say curating your background is also a big part of that virtual presence. Again, you want to appear confident, you want to appear professional, competent, like you know what you're doing, curating your background, ideally staying away from virtual backgrounds, if you can help it, and just having people, you know, see the real thing. Just because our brains are already, you know, working in overdrive on video. You have to put in a little bit more effort in terms of interpreting what's going on, seeing people's facial expressions on video. There's like the slightest lag just because of technology and we're not live together. So yeah, anytime you can kind of ground people in reality and just kind of imitate or make it seem like we're talking in person, that's also going to go a long way.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, I mean, it is amazing, right? The shift of pre-pandemic, we just saw Zoom as a way to do a quick meeting, but now we really think about all of these things like background and what that plays in, the things that you put in your background. Speaking of which, generally, how do you think about stuff that you put in backgrounds for when you show up on video?
Lorraine Lee:
Yeah, well, I always like to include some flowers or plants I think it just, you know, and same in person to plants, I think just create like a more positive, calming environment. And so I wanted to come across as professional, but still personable. So I have like the plants, I have a little bit of like my Muay Thai gloves behind me, my retired gloves, just to show off a little bit more of my personality. It's a great conversation starter as well. I have some candles over here on my right side as well, kind of creating that calming atmosphere. And yeah, I'm just making sure it's not too cluttered and just clean.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, I like that. I had no idea about the Muay Thai. That's pretty awesome. Yeah. Yeah, I was trying to figure out what those were and that is, but I think this, this is the thing, right? Like you just said it, our backgrounds, right? They are also meant to create curiosity, form sort of a human connection, right? Like, yeah, I mean, I thought a lot about this stuff from my background too, right? Like I love landscape photography. So my like, all the cameras like right there and I've got, I don't know, my little glass head that I usually put these headphones on when I'm not recording.
Lorraine Lee:
Oh, OK.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. Yeah.
Lorraine Lee:
So I like your background. It's really cool. Yeah.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. But I mean, thank you. But I love the fact that we're talking about this because like I think especially sometimes therapists, right, you're often taught almost to like be blank slates. I think that's definitely changing. Yeah.
Lorraine Lee:
Yeah.
Melvin Varghese:
but in a virtual setting like this, right, there's, I don't know, the thing I kept thinking is like, how do you connect like heart to heart, you know, in a virtual setting like this and showing like little bits and pieces of your life and history and, you know, and I think that looks different for everybody, right? Like what's comfortable and what's not comfortable.
Lorraine Lee:
Yeah. Yeah. I'm all for it. Yeah.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. Well, I wanted to ask you, like, maybe it's like a little nuanced one, but like, how do you think about like, pictures, like personal photos?
Lorraine Lee:
I have a few in my background. I don't know if you can kind of see it from a distance.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, I can.
Lorraine Lee:
I like them. I don't usually have people asking about them, but I think people see them and they know I have a life and people I love and people who love me. So I think that kind of adds to that human element, right? Like just giving people a little peek into your life. And, you know, I've seen people with bigger photos. So like, I think, you know, if that was the case, people would be more likely to ask. Mine is a little bit small and kind of at a distance, but yeah, artwork, family photos, things like that. I think those all give a peek into the window of who you are and it's really nice to have people ask and you get to share that.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, yeah. We're so glad Lorraine is not just like in her apartment by herself.
Melvin Varghese:
She has family. It's so awesome.
Melvin Varghese:
Okay. So we, we talked about like, generally when you're presenting like these state changes, we talked about having slides as sort of a supplement and thinking about other elements that you, so like all the pressure doesn't fall on your face or on the slides as you're giving these presentations. We talked about integrating like backgrounds, like rep that represent you that form a human connection. Any other sort of easy to implement sort of tips?
Lorraine Lee:
Yeah. Another one I would say is to include visuals. So I'm going to just throw out a few stats there. So 90% of the information processed by the brain is visual. 80% of people remember what they see versus what they hear and read. And then 65% of people identify as visual learners. And so I'm listing a bunch of stats now, right? You might remember some of them, but I just want to show this to you here. Now, let's say I set all those stats and I had these visuals on screen. Now, you're probably not necessarily going to remember all these numbers, but you're going to remember the slide that Lorraine had that showed this cool brain, these bright colors on the paintbrushes, and this art piece, right? And so this is just an example showing how visuals can help people remember what you've talked about. It's just like more interesting to write than just hearing or just seeing like three bullet points of stats as well. So just anytime you can add some sort of visual element, use the visual element to replace text. I think that goes a long way as well.
Melvin Varghese:
amazing. I'm like so impressed you just did that in a moment. And you're right, like, I mean, again, this is how like naive I am with all this stuff, right? So I'm thinking like, you just mentioned those stats, okay, you're gonna pull up like a slide deck or something, right? But how in the world did you just pull up like the
Lorraine Lee:
So I used to work at a company called Prezi, and they have this product, Prezi Video. And so that's what I'm using right now. And I use this for all my talks. As you can see, it's just a really different way. And I talked about virtual presentations being an experience, right? This is kind of, you know, what I'm trying to convey is that you can be put into the slide, you merge together, it creates like the ultimate experience when it's you plus the content at play.
Melvin Varghese:
That's amazing.
Lorraine Lee:
Right.
Melvin Varghese:
And there's a, yeah, there's like a play element to it, right? Like it's, it's not like this boring presentation where you're telling me about like 90% of, you know, our, us are probably, you know, like brain process and visual, like, but you're seeing it. I'm seeing you like, yeah.
Lorraine Lee:
Yeah. You can get really fun with that. You can get really fun with it.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. I got it. Well, listen, you know, I'm going to be trying this out after we get done with our, our podcast chat.
Melvin Varghese:
I don't know, the more we're talking, the more I'm realizing, one, how do you present information in a way that is interesting and memorable, but also forms a human connection, right? And is that, I don't know, not to overly simplify it, but is that a general sort of thing that you think about as you create presentations?
Lorraine Lee:
Yeah, I definitely think so. And, you know, you were asking about easy to implement tips like and you mentioned the human connection. You know, one other tip I would share is that eye contact is not specific to the presentation, but eye contact virtually is really important. So I am still getting on calls, still seeing presentations where people kind of look off to the side like this, or they're just looking at an entirely different monitor. And it is so hard for me to focus because I'm like, are you looking at me? Are you paying attention? Like, what are you looking at over there? And so to have the eye contact is really important. And when we met in person, we would shake each other's hands and that would release oxytocin, which is the social bonding hormone. And of course, virtually, we don't have that opportunity. But making eye contact on camera is kind of going to replicate or at least get you some of that oxytocin that you would normally get doing the handshake. And it's going to make people feel like you're looking at them. Like you are, you know, more connected to what's going on. Melvin, you do a great job with the eye contact. I always appreciate it. And so that one, maybe not as easy to implement. Once you know it and practice enough, it will become hard to not make eye contact, but it does take a little bit more practice at first than those other tips that I mentioned.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. Well, thank you for saying that. But like, it's been a process for me, because, I mean, practically prior to this, right, so I use a DSLR for, you know, for the zoom calls, but I didn't have like a teleprompter, I'd have my monitor off to the side. And so I would be looking like this at questions, or, I mean, again, this I know it's hard to describe, but as much as well as possible on audio. But how do you set this up so that, how do you set up your monitor so that people can see that you're looking at them while not looking off screen? Is it like a multi-monitor setup?
Lorraine Lee:
So I just have one main monitor and then I have my laptop off to the side. And I think what a lot of people do is they have monitor and the laptop and they're using their laptop camera but they are dragging everything onto the monitor so that's why they're kind of looking that's why the eye contact never quite quite works there but what I did is I bought an external camera put it on my monitor my monitor is where everything is going to be and then you know you kind of test it out like if I look into my camera it's probably looking a little too high up but I found out that looking right below the camera is kind of that that good sweet spot. So it might take a little bit adjusting, but essentially rule of thumb is put the camera where your main screen is.
Melvin Varghese:
Got it. And then you said this little thing, which I just wanted to make sure you said when you're looking at the camera, you kind of look a little below the camera, usually.
Lorraine Lee:
Oh, yeah. So just for my setup, when I look into the camera, it kind of looks like I'm looking a little bit higher up, like I'm not looking at eye level. And so I personally, for my setup, will look a little bit right below the camera, the top of my monitor. And that's where it looks like I'm making good eye contact with my audience.
Melvin Varghese:
Got it. And then you have the laptop. So I'm just trying to imagine this. What is the function of the so all your main content is on this monitor. And then what is the function of the laptop, other windows and apps? that you need that you may not.
Lorraine Lee:
Secondary windows and apps. Yeah. It's more for like when I'm actually working and just need two screens. Um, but when I'm speaking to someone or speaking to an audience, I'm going to want, you know, everything on the monitor. Got it.
Melvin Varghese:
Lorraine, any kind of other quick tips? Otherwise, I have a question about introverts.
Lorraine Lee:
Yeah, no, please go ahead. Go ahead with your question.
Melvin Varghese:
You know, I feel like a lot of therapists are naturally probably more introverted and they're also like feelers, right? So the introverted part is like, you know, it can be really intimidating to do these presentations. The feeler part, right, is that human connection, right? You talked about the oxytocin being released. That's really hard on a virtual presentation, right? They feed off like energy. Any tips for folks that either are introverted or more feelers, right, as you do these virtual presentations to kind of show up, you know, authentically?
Lorraine Lee:
Yeah, well, I love that question. I think virtual is really perfect for a lot of introverts. I'm an introvert myself, and so I'm speaking from experience, but, you know, I like virtual because you don't have so many different stimuli around you as you would in person, and you can really focus on the presentation at hand. you know, introverts have a lot of strengths. You know, what comes to mind in the context of presenting is that introverts are really good at preparing, thinking thoughtfully, and listening. So I think, you know, where introverts have that advantage is really trying to understand your audience, understand their challenges and pain points, probably ahead of the presentation. And then, you know, building a thoughtful presentation that is catered to them. And of course, you're going to be practicing a lot. So you're going to come across really confident, really knowledgeable, and then you're going to make a great impression. So I think all those things are, you know, in the favor of introverts and, you know, I love virtual presenting. I think it really works for, for the introverted personality.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, that's awesome. And then for anyone that's sort of like, uh, is more of like a feeler type, right? Like they really rely on that sort of human connection. How do you, I guess, I don't know if the, how do you simulate that maybe in sort of a virtual setting? Like, I don't know if that,
Lorraine Lee:
Yeah, it makes sense. I think there's some different things you can do. So one, if there's an option for people to turn on their camera, and it's not like a close off event, where it's just you speaking, I always like to encourage people to turn on their cameras and just asking for and saying, you know, I know, there might be many reasons why you might not want to, or maybe you're not comfortable. But it would help me a lot feel more connected to understand that what I'm saying is resonating. if you could turn on your camera. So kind of giving them that reason why I think is always really great and encourages people to turn on their camera. And then there are different other tools or things you can do. For example, you can have polls or there's certain like interactive polling tools or like multiple choice or like word clouds or things like that, that I know, you know, can't replicate necessarily that in-person feeling, but you can kind of see audience engagement and get a feel for you know, how engaged they are and what's working. And if it's not working, you can, you know, just ask them, you know, what's helpful and what's not, and just be, be direct with them. And I think, yeah, that kind of ability to connect with people, just, it goes a long way and comes across very authentic and can help you kind of find out what works.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, I love how you said that. And I think like what I heard and what I took away is there's such power in vulnerability, right? Like even the way you phrase that, like just saying like, you know what, I know this is really uncomfortable to be on camera, but like it would really help me so that I can, and just sort of presenting it that way, right? And the vulnerability in that, I really like how you phrase that. So Lorraine, thank you so much for doing this. I really am just grateful for you, grateful for you know, just sharing these tips, uh, in order to do these virtual presentations so much better. Please tell us how we can learn more about you and tell us also about some of the awesome work that you're doing that if folks are interested in.
Lorraine Lee:
Oh, yes, of course. So I am expanding my business this year. Uh, so I do a lot of presentation consulting and, um, you know, people are interested in using Prezi. I do consulting on that as well, but basically how to public speak, how to present virtually. So you can learn more at LorraineKLee.com, or you can connect with me on LinkedIn, and that's going to be Lorraine K. Lee as well on LinkedIn.
Melvin Varghese:
Awesome. And Lorraine has quite a massive following on LinkedIn. But I mean, you show up and you do with authenticity, and I think people are really drawn to that.
Lorraine Lee:
Thank you. Yeah. And if any of your listeners decide to connect, just let me know. You've learned about me on Melvin's podcast, and I'll definitely send you a note back.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, absolutely. And Lorraine is fantastic with that, always responding to DMs. So thank you again for doing this, and have a wonderful rest of your day.
Lorraine Lee:
Thanks, Melvin. Bye.
Melvin Varghese:
Hey there. Hope you enjoyed my conversation with Lorraine. And especially if you have been doing more virtual presentations, or you're envisioning doing them, or you're making this transition to clinician, to online creator, doing more videos, doing webinars. all of that kind of stuff. I hope that today's podcast conversation has just been really helpful and beneficial for you. Lorraine's website again is at lorraineklee.com and as Lorraine mentioned at the end of the podcast, she does keynote presentations, presentations for groups, all of those things. Lorraine's somebody that I absolutely trust so definitely reach out to her if your group practice or if you are listening and you host a conference or retreat and you want Lorraine as a presenter. I was thinking about this conversation and first of all like when I have conversations like this it's so hard not to take notes while having these podcast conversations but I found myself reflecting on one major thing which is For me, even when we do our online course Mastermind, we do teaching workshops twice a month. And as I shared at the beginning, I went through Maven's accelerator program. And one of the things that they taught in this accelerator was two major things. One is this I do, we do, you do framework. So if you're presenting something, you share a little bit of your experience, have people do it together, and then have them do it independently. during this sort of presentation. But the other thing they talked about was this state change concept. And for me, I like tech, but conversations like this also make me realize how much more I have to learn and get more versed at. This whole concept of Prezi and being able to actually put these graphics on your screen, it's really hard to explain it, which is I'll see if I can include a screenshot when we post this in our community, but literally what Lorraine did is she pushed a button and these graphics popped up in front of her that had the visuals of what she had just shared. So she didn't switch over to a slide or anything like that and it just was so natural and it worked out so well. So it just has me thinking about how to present better. realizing like I've really nerd out on this stuff, especially with our mastermind and just learning, you know, different ways of being more dynamic and presentations and things like that. So I hope that today's session is just giving you some new ideas in order to present better online and, and also just give permission to show more of yourself on these presentations, whether it's just your personality or where it's just the physical things that you may have in the background. Have a great rest of your day and I will see you next time. Bye. Hey there, I hope you enjoyed today's podcast session. Just wanted to let you know we have a free weekly newsletter that is trusted by over 8,300 of our colleagues. Basically, we just share the latest podcast episode, some of the things that I'm learning as an entrepreneur and as a business owner. And it's absolutely free. You can sign up over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash newsletter. Would love to have you. Have a great rest of your day.
Melvin Varghese:
Bye.
Melvin Varghese:
Hey there, I hope that you enjoyed today's session. Thank you again for taking the time to listen all the way through. If you are a therapist and you're specifically in a season where you're a seasoned therapist and you are wanting to move from clinical to online course income, We actually have a specific mastermind for therapists who are doing this. So this is basically a group of really kind and supportive therapists who are also wildly successful as business owners. We meet together to build and grow and scale our online courses. you can learn more about that mastermind over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash mastermind all one word sellingthecouch.com forward slash mastermind thank you so much for taking the time to listen to today's session
selling the couch podcast with melvin varghese phdWeekly interviews, strategy, and advice for building your private practice in and beyond the therapy room.
Apple podcastsYou TubeSpotify ready to launch your online course?Please check out our free online course starter kit for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This FREE 7-day email course will help you validate your course idea (so that you can create a course that has buyers).
sign up for free course starter kitready to launch your podcast?Please check out our FREE podcasting workshop for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This workshop is pre-recorded so you can watch it on a day and time that works for your schedule.
It contains a lot of practical tips that we've learned as STC has reached 1.81 million+ downloads and become a 6-figure business with podcasting as the backbone.
sign up for podcasting workshopCorey wilks psydPsychologist and Executive Coach @ Corey Wilks PsyD
Corey Wilks is a psychologist and executive coach in Austin, TX who's worked with founders like Ali Abdaal and with communities like David Perell's Write of Passage, Jay Clouse's Creator Science Lab, Justin Moore's Brand Deal Wizard, and Tim Stoddart's Copyblogger Academy.
Dr. WiIks helps top entrepreneurs, CEOs, founders, and creators in the world build fulfilling lives and thriving businesses aligned with their values.
Melvin varghese phdPsychologist and Founder @ Selling The Couch
Melvin Varghese, PhD is a licensed psychologist in Philadelphia, PA. In 2015, Dr. Varghese founded Selling The Couch, a podcast to help therapists move from clinical to online income.
On the podcast, he interviews successful practitioners about how they've built their practices, social media/marketing experts, and shares lessons as he uses our clinical skills to create an online business powered by podcasting + online courses.
The podcast is one of the top Career podcasts in Apple Podcasts, has been downloaded over 1.8 million times, and is heard in over 125 countries. Mel is a successful course creator with 240+ students and $300k+ in course sales.
More Posts378: therapists lauching an online course should do this…by Melvin Varghese | Nov 9, 2024 | Online Courses, Private Practice, STC Podcast
Melvin Varghese presenting a solo episode on fast tracking online course creation for therapists
Corporate Transparency Act: What Therapists Need To Know Before 2025by Melvin Varghese | Nov 2, 2024 | Blog, Growing Your Practice, Private Practice, STC Podcast
Melvin Varghese talking about the Corporate Transparency Act out of Anti Money Laundering Act with Dan Mayer and David Yood
7 Subtle Public Speaking Tips I Learned From My First Conference Talkby Melvin Varghese | Oct 24, 2024 | Mel On Other Podcasts, Passive Income for Therapists, Public Speaking, STC Podcast
Melvin Varghese speaking at the Mental Health Marketing Conference, in Franklin, TN.
« Older Entries The post ENCORE: How To Give Better Virtual Presentations with Lorraine Lee appeared first on Selling The Couch | Melvin Varghese PhD.
378: therapists launching an online course should do this...Written By Melvin Varghese PhDIn this episode of Selling the Couch, I share some valuable insights and lessons learned from my nearly decade-long journey as a course creator. As we approach the end of 2024, I announce that this will be the last episode of the year, as I take time off to rest, recharge, and work on a significant project—re-recording our podcasting workshop to reflect the latest changes in the podcasting landscape.
The focus of today's episode is on launching an online course, a topic that many of us are considering as we look to diversify our income streams or supplement our clinical work. Drawing from my experience of creating the HealthCasters podcasting course, which has seen over 244 students and generated more than $328,000 in revenue, I emphasize that success in this space is not an overnight phenomenon. Instead, it requires thoughtful planning and execution.
I outline five key tips for anyone looking to launch an online course:
Focus on What You Already Know and Love to Teach: I stress the importance of leveraging your existing expertise and passions. Many colleagues make the mistake of venturing into unrelated niches, which can lead to challenges in course sales. Having a successful practice and a clearly defined niche can significantly enhance your course's market demand.
Start Small and Build Slowly: I encourage listeners to avoid overwhelming themselves by trying to launch multiple offerings at once. Instead, focus on creating a solid online course and consider developing related offerings over time, such as retreats or membership sites.
Validation is Non-Negotiable: Before diving into course creation, it's crucial to validate your course idea. I share resources, including our free 7-day email course, the Course Creator Starter Kit, to help therapists assess the demand for their course ideas.
Embrace the Tech, But Don’t Let It Overwhelm You: I discuss the importance of having a professional setup for course creation, starting with sound quality, followed by lighting and camera quality. I provide recommendations for affordable equipment to help listeners get started without breaking the bank.
Build Your Audience Early: I emphasize the need to start building an online audience well before launching your course. Engaging with potential students on platforms like LinkedIn or through discovery platforms can help create a solid foundation for your course launch.
As I wrap up the episode, I express my gratitude for the support of our listeners, highlighting that Selling the Couch has reached the top 0.5% of podcasts globally. I look forward to returning in 2025 with new episodes and continuing to serve our community of therapists. Thank you for joining me on this journey, and I hope you find these insights helpful as you consider launching your own online course.
Transcript (AI-Generated)Melvin Varghese:
Today's podcast is supported by the American Psychological Association, PsyCareers. If you are a psychology professional looking to advance your career or thinking about a pivot, definitely encourage you to check out PsyCareers, which is the career center from the American Psychological Association Services, Inc. There are over 400 positions available. It's the perfect time to create a free account, upload your resume, and set up job alerts. You can learn more over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash A-P-A. Sellingthecouch.com forward slash A-P-A.
We'll jump right into today's session. Hello, hello. Welcome to today's session of Selling the Couch. Before we jump too much into this, just wanted to let you know that this will be our last episode of the podcast for 2024. I'd like to take most of November and December off. just to mainly just to rest and recharge and plus with the craziness of holidays and then try to release new podcast episodes. I realized about two years ago this is a unrealistic proposition and so I'm going to be taking just the next several weeks off Just one, I think, really to focus on, again, on REST.
I also like to use… I incorporated something last year called Walden Months, which is basically an opportunity for me to, one, prioritize REST, but then to work on a big project that I just normally can't do over the course of running things for STC. And so this month we're going to be re-recording our podcasting workshop that we have. It's a free workshop, but there's been so many changes in the world of podcasting, and I'm excited to re-record that. And today's episode is something, I called it, if I were launching an online course soon, here's what I would do. I know that many of us as we approach the end of this year and are looking into next year are considering launching an online course whether it is to supplement clinical income or if you want to pull back on clinical work and then figure out another alternative income stream.
Whatever that reason is, I know that many of us are thinking about it. I've been a course creator for nine years, and next year will actually be year 10. And my podcasting course, the HealthCasters podcasting course, we just passed our 244th student. We've also generated a little over $328,000 in revenue from that online course. But I am not an overnight success by any stretch of the imagination. And I wanted to like openly and honestly share that with you because I think sometimes in the online space we see these like folks that launch courses and they have like over like very quick success or it seems like overnight success and I This guy right here is not one of those people. But I think developing and growing this course over the past nine years has given me such more of a rich tapestry in terms of how to think about stuff. We've also had the incredible privilege now to support over 50 of our colleagues launch their online course through our STC Elite program. our mastermind program. And so I've learned a ton in today's session. Honestly, I just wanted to share some of the things that I've learned along the way. Now, the very first and I focus this on like kind of five things that I would share. And the very first thing is focus on what you already know and love to teach. Now, I know you might be listening to this or you're watching this on YouTube and you're like, Mel, that is the lamest piece of advice I've ever heard. That seems so obvious. And I am completely with you. It is, it does seem completely like logical. And yet I have seen so many colleagues launch courses that are completely unrelated to niches and specialties they've already had success with. But before we share a little bit more on that, my recommendation generally has been, I'm sure there are some exceptions, but my general recommendation is only to launch an online course once you have a successful practice. and you have a clearly defined niche. Or if you're doing coaching or an online business or something like that, once you are, you don't have to get like, I'm 100% sure and clear on what my niche is because the thing I've realized with finding a niche is it's kind of an evolving thing as markets and trends and all that stuff evolve.
But If you have some clarity, like this is the general ballpark of the folks that I love to work with. And the main reason that I recommend doing it in this way is it's much easier to have folks pay you for an online course if they've already paid you for therapy or if you've done paid workshops or anything like that. In other words, there's already market demand for the topic that you're going to create your online course over about. Now, I know that this seems really obvious, but I just cannot tell you the number of colleagues that I have found or that reach out to me and they're like, Mel, I'm going to create a course on insert whatever topic. And then what I usually will then ask them is, is that a niche that you've already have some thought leadership in, you've already established in? There's a segment of our colleagues that will say, oh, I didn't think about that. No, it's kind of related, but not really. But, you know, I just feel like I want to go into that. And there are definitely, I think, times where you can go into a niche and capture a niche. But I don't think and get good demand if you haven't already made money in that niche. But I don't think that's the norm. And I tend to be pretty conservative when it comes to like being thoughtful about the course creation journey. And what I've generally found is one of the best forms of validation of a course idea is if people have already paid you money, right? So it's not if people have downloaded a something from you to join your email list. It's not, you know, I've accumulated a certain number of social media followers on this topic, any of that. There's a, I think there's a difference in sort of the quality if there's a financial transaction that's involved.
The other nuance of this, and I've, you know, accidentally kind of stumbled on this idea, but it really helps to have a course idea that is a past or ideally a current lived experience with what you're navigating. So for example, again, I didn't think about this in the initial stages, but I have a podcasting course for therapists, but I actively have a podcast. And because I actively have a podcast, I'm able to integrate new things into lessons, new lessons into coaching calls, and all of those things. versus if it's like an area that I have just like a strictly academic knowledge on versus like a lived knowledge on. So it's just something just to think about. My gut feel is also as AI continues to permeate many areas, I think there will inevitably come a time where online courses will be generated through AI. and there is a chance there's going to be this mass amount of courses coming out. But my gut feel on this is if you generate a course that just not only shares knowledge but also integrates your lived experience, the stuff that you can only talk about because you're actively doing it, I think that course is going to then stand out way better. The second tip that I wanted to share with you is to start small and build slowly. Now, many of us want to build an online course, but we also want to then springboard it into other related offerings. So it could be, Mel, I want an online course, and then I want to do a retreat related to that online course. I want to do a conference, or I want to set up a membership site, or I want to write a book related to that online course idea. It's super smart because you don't want to put all of the pressure off on your online course to get sales. So you basically want to like strategically diversify across so that you're not feeling all that pressure as well. Now one of the things that we do in our online course Mastermind for Therapists is we actually have an entire live workshop where we create something called the Value Ladder. This concept is something I learned I would say about four to five years ago. And basically the value ladder is think about like your ideal course student and think about the lower priced offerings and the higher priced offerings in comparison to your online course. If your course is your mid priced offering, what are those lower and higher and even ultra priced offerings that are related to your course idea that folks would be interested in? Now, you don't need 40 of these offerings. In fact, what I've actually found is just having one or two and building those out over a couple of years versus trying to like launch the course, then a retreat related to the course, writing a book related to the course. Like, don't do that because it's just too overwhelming. But a good framework to really think about is an online course. And then think about what a segment of that population that is going through that online course. Think about a recurring offer that is related to that online course idea. So these aren't like finalized, but I'm just I will, you know, just for the sake of being helpful, I'll just share some of the things that I'm thinking through with our help guessers course, right? So one kind of interesting thing is, there might be a need for like editing help, right? So if you already have a podcast, there might need either for audio or for video, because you know, video podcasts are growing very significantly. Another might be to do a course plus a cadence of coaching or a group coaching. And then another related offer might be a course plus, you know, you have one here where it's like course and group coaching access. Another one might be like course plus group coaching plus like one-on-one coaching or something like that. and you would then charge like a recurring fee for that. So the big thing to just take away from this is don't put all the pressure on your online course to make the sales. Think about lower and higher cost offers related to your course, but at the same time don't put all the pressure on yourself to try to create all of these like yesterday. The third tip that I just wanted to mention is validation is non-negotiable. This is a huge one. Before diving in into the course creation journey, I think one of the most normal things is we get a course idea and we're like, oh my gosh, I'm going to run with it. I got to go on Amazon and buy a bunch of gear or I got to figure out my course like where I'm going to the course platform where I'm going to host my course all of that kind of stuff but none of that like all of that's going to go to waste unless you figure out there's actual demand for your course idea. Now, my recommendation, and I say this with humility, is to validate your course idea before you jump into any of it. And the thing is, doing that will save you a lot of heartache down the line because you don't want to spend all this time and money on a course idea.
And you don't want to create like a beautiful sales page and all of this stuff. And then like nobody wants to buy it. Like that would be heartbreaking. We actually have, I've mentioned this a few times, but we have a free 7-day email course to help you validate your course idea. It's built for just therapists. It's called the Course Creator Starter Kit. It's basically the exact same exercises that we use in our online course Mastermind. we put it in email form and you can download that over at coursecreatorstarterkit.com coursecreatorstarterkit.com and it's totally free and it'll give you a lot of clarity with regard to how to move forward with your course idea and it can also help if you have multiple course ideas that you kind of just want to sift through. So use that please like and have it help you and save you a lot of heartache. Hey, it's Melvin. Before we continue with today's session, just wanted to encourage you to check out APA's PsyCareers blog. I know that many of us are thinking about work and especially in work in relation to life. And many of us are also thinking about how do we use this underlying skill set as clinicians in other realms beyond just the clinical room. If you are interested in any of that or are just curious, I encourage you to check out the American Psychological Association Services Inc. Psych Careers blog. It's absolutely free. It's their career center. There are over 400 positions that are currently available. You can literally create a free account, upload your resume, set up all sorts of job alerts, and get started on the next chapter of your career journey. You can learn more over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash A-P-A. Sellingthecouch.com forward slash A-P-A.
We'll jump right back into today's session. The next thing I just wanted to share is embrace the tech. And this is point number four. Embrace the tech, but don't let it overwhelm you. Tech is one of the most common things that colleagues come to me about. And if you're watching this on YouTube, this has been an evolution over nine years, but we have a very, like, professional setup now with, you know, hair lights and fill lights and DSLRs and blurry backgrounds and all of this kind of stuff. But when I first started, none of this existed. I told myself I'm going to just set aside like 10% of core sales and over time we will make incremental improvements in our studio setup. The recommended, the way that I would upgrade is first upgrade your sound, then upgrade your lighting, and then upgrade your camera. That's the setup that I would recommend. When I've talked to friends that are in the studio creation space, they've said the same thing because people are very forgiving if you have not great lighting or your camera is a little bit blurry. But if your sound is horrible, or it's got like a lot of static or something, people will click off. And as a course creator, you just, you don't want to do that. Now, that doesn't translate into things needing to be expensive. So if you're like, if you're just using a laptop and you've got the integrated like mic or the integrated camera, that's totally fine. You know, you can probably get away with something like AirPods. The only thing with AirPods is you just have to, if you're recording, because that would give you a little bit better mic quality than like using the standard mic that comes with a laptop, with a MacBook Pro, for example. Usually that's the case. Now the only the thing to think about with if you put use like an airpod pro or use headphones or something like that if you wear things like jewelry or you have clothes that have zippers that stuff can hit on that mic and what I found is it becomes a little bit of a little bit of a pain. So what I would recommend is and just depending kind of on your budget so one The cheapest option I would say is just to get what's called a dynamic USB mic. The one that I like to start out with is the Samsung Q2U. It's around $60 on Amazon. And it would just give you a lot more of a deeper sound and just a more rich sound as you create your course material and then also the marketing material related to your course. Now the thing to just factor in is the benefit of that mic is you can actually just plug it into the USB slot on your computer and then you are good to go. Now if you're like Mel, I don't want this mic right in my face as I record this course. You want to look for something called a shotgun mic and the one that I would recommend starting out with is the Rode VideoMic NTG. It's a bit more. It's around $250 the last time I checked. But the benefit of that mic is you can keep it about 8 to 14 inches away from your face, i.e. off of the screen when you record your course material, and it will produce a really… and it'll pick up the sound. And this one is also USB powered as well, so it just makes it really, really nice and convenient. As I mentioned, I spent about $110 on my initial setup, so I used the Logitech C920 webcam because the webcam that came with my MacBook Pro was just really not good. This is like way back in the day in like 2014. And then the mic that I used was the was my dynamic mic was the mic that I use for my podcast. It's $110. You know, I look at some of the I have some of the screenshots and videos from those early days. And I'm like, look at it now. And I cringed. I'm like, man, that was a hot mess. But The other piece I've just kind of remember thinking about in those early days is, you know what, I just want to get this course out there and I know I can refine these things later. And even down to like the course videos, I can always record it later.
So what I would do is just this sort of defaulting to action is something that's just incredibly valuable. I have found this over and over with clinicians and I hope there's like one day like a study or something done on this but generally what I found is those of us who end up getting like advanced degrees like master's degrees and higher we tend to, and I think it's this intersection of academia, it's this intersection of perfectionism, of being a high achiever, all of that stuff, it manifests in the course creation space by crippling us in terms of actually putting our course into the world, i.e. we think we're gonna get quote-unquote graded on this course, and so we then don't put it out there because we keep making these last 10% tweaks, and we, it's just hard to put it out there. Now, the thing what I've kind of learned, which is actually just been really healing for me is people really connect when you create a course, or you're sharing on LinkedIn, like your course journey on the early stages, and it just, it doesn't look like so put together, people really resonate with that, because it connects you to them at a much more human level, uh to be completely honest like this is sometimes even things that i feel like i struggle with because we have a really nice setup now which i'm like so grateful for but the other piece of that i think a lot about is does it like almost remove me from the therapist as just starting a podcast and wanting to like figure out and navigate this because it just looks like i've got like a really you know i've got a nice mic i've got all this kind of stuff right and but it's just something to think about Now, with course platforms, Teachable has a free tier and as does ConvertKit for your email marketing. So that's a good idea because, you know, we've generally found that email is the best way to sell an online course. And specifically, people sign up for a webinar and then you send messages over email. And those are both have free tiers, and I feel like it's a very low risk, right? Because you're not like investing a significant amount of money, any money, and you can get just that confidence to get your course out in the world. So if you go through sellingthecouch.com forward slash teachable and sellingthecouch.com forward slash convertkit, there should be some discount codes that are available if you do decide to upgrade to a paid tier. And just for full transparency, those are affiliate links. But those are both companies that I've used in the past and have had good experience with. A few years ago, we made the switch to an all-in-one platform, which we currently use, Kartra. And if you go through sellingthecouch.com forward slash kartra, the Kartra team was incredibly kind to create a landing page for just SGC listeners. And there's a discount code there that is not available elsewhere. It's a very generous code there. So, so I would just start there. I would start, you know, the crux of this is start with good enough equipment, start with a good enough course platform and a good enough email, and then just build out. Don't let that sort of I got to get this perfect. Otherwise, I will be judged by either internally or externally stop you from launching your beautiful course out in the world. The final thing I just wanted to mention, and I'll just review the top four. So one is focus on what you already know and love to teach. Two is start small, build slowly. Three is validation is non-negotiable, and there's our Course Creator Starter Kit that you can download again over at coursecreatorstarterkit.com. Four is embrace the tech, but don't let it overwhelm you. And the final thing, I just wanted to mention is build your audience early. Now, if you're thinking about launching an online course, particularly in the next couple of months, really start to think about building your online audience. Now, this is a different skill set and something I think many of us as clinicians are still getting used to, like quote unquote, having social media followers. But you don't want to wait until your course launches to start connecting with your ideal students. I won't go into this but if you're watching this on YouTube I'll link to a previous video here that goes kind of into how I think about social media and the purpose of social media and picking social media platforms. But basically if you don't have an audience like online Start with either a discovery platform. So discovery platform means that your content can be found if people are searching for it either on Google or once they log into the platform if they're searching for it. My current favorite, the one I'm on, is I like LinkedIn because I feel like it has the mindset of the folks on LinkedIn are generally they're coming to learn and they're also the benefit is there's like companies that could also serve your the audience that is that you're creating your online course for as well. But but generally just pick a platform and it doesn't have to be LinkedIn, but generally pick one that people can search for.
Or the other alternative is to do what I did, which is use a discovery platform and a relationship deepening platform. So in the early days of STC, we had the STC podcast, but the reality with podcasts is they're still not like the best in terms of discoverability they're getting better and better with it but so a lot of times you'll need a discovery platform to kind of prop it up so a logical one that a lot of therapists think about is like a facebook group or something like that basically you don't One, the big thing from this is you don't want to wait to launch an audience and you don't want to wait until your course launches to start creating and building an audience. And you also don't want to depend upon somebody else's audience in order to get your course sales. Otherwise, for example, you'll be like going from one podcast to another. You may get sales from that person's audience, but I almost see it as like doing things like podcast interviews as the cherry on top versus, again, putting all of the pressure on you going on these interviews and trying to get it from audiences that may only know you from that one interview. And so I hope that you find today's session incredibly helpful. More than anything, if you are thinking about launching an online course, I'm just genuinely excited for you. I think it's wonderful that so many of us are adding courses to our clinical toolkit. I think it makes a lot of sense, given the demand for mental health services and just not enough of us that are licensed in order to be able to provide those services. And then I also love that so many of us are thinking about private practice and business differently in that it's not just focused on this model of trading time for income, but how do I expand beyond that and also then by extension design a career around the life that I want versus fitting life around a career. Thank you again for tuning in to this year's episodes. It has just been an incredible joy to be able to serve you in this way and to serve our field. I can't believe we're going to be at year 10 next year of the STZ podcast. I feel great. Like I had no barometer of where we started this thing of like how long I would last, things like, you know, nine years of podcasting, 10 years, those were not even fathomable. So I really do feel like I'm just kind of, you know, going with it. But I'm thoroughly enjoying podcasting. And I feel an even more joy with podcasting than I did even when I first started. And there was a lot of joy there. but i'm looking forward to new sessions with you and uh you know i realize i'm just so keenly aware that none of this would be possible without you uh without you telling colleagues about the stc podcast and uh so from the bottom of my heart thank you we are now officially in the top 0.5 percent of podcasts in the entire world which is just really wild for a podcast that literally started on a tv dinner stand and some old psychology So I appreciate you and I will see you next year. And if you are tuning in, we'll continue to have some replay episodes since we have so many from the backlog through the rest of November and December. And I'm so excited to release some new episodes coming up in 2025. Have a great rest of your day and I will talk to you soon. Bye.
Narrator: Thanks for listening to the Selling the Couch podcast. For more great content and to stay up to date, visit www.sellingthecouch.com.
Melvin Varghese: Hey there, I hope that you enjoyed today's session. Thank you again for taking the time to listen all the way through. If you are a therapist and you're specifically in a season where you're a seasoned therapist and you are wanting to move from clinical to online course income, We actually have a specific mastermind for therapists who are doing this. So this is basically a group of really kind and supportive therapists who are also wildly successful as business owners. We meet together to build and grow and scale our online courses. You can learn more about that mastermind over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash mastermind all one word sellingthecouch.com forward slash mastermind. Thank you so much for taking the time to listen to today's session.
timestampsComing Soon
selling the couch podcast with melvin varghese phdWeekly interviews, strategy, and advice for building your private practice in and beyond the therapy room.
Apple podcastsYou TubeSpotify ready to launch your online course?Please check out our free online course starter kit for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This FREE 7-day email course will help you validate your course idea (so that you can create a course that has buyers).
sign up for free course starter kitready to launch your podcast?Please check out our FREE podcasting workshop for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This workshop is pre-recorded so you can watch it on a day and time that works for your schedule.
It contains a lot of practical tips that we've learned as STC has reached 1.81 million+ downloads and become a 6-figure business with podcasting as the backbone.
sign up for podcasting workshopMelvin varghese phdPsychologist and Founder @ Selling The Couch
Melvin Varghese, PhD is a licensed psychologist in Philadelphia, PA. In 2015, Dr. Varghese founded Selling The Couch, a podcast to help therapists move from clinical to online income.
On the podcast, he interviews successful practitioners about how they've built their practices, social media/marketing experts, and shares lessons as he uses our clinical skills to create an online business powered by podcasting + online courses.
The podcast is one of the top Career podcasts in Apple Podcasts, has been downloaded over 1.8 million times, and is heard in over 125 countries. Mel is a successful course creator with 240+ students and $300k+ in course sales.
More PostsCorporate Transparency Act: What Therapists Need To Know Before 2025by Melvin Varghese | Nov 2, 2024 | Blog, Growing Your Practice, Private Practice, STC Podcast
Melvin Varghese talking about the Corporate Transparency Act out of Anti Money Laundering Act with Dan Mayer and David Yood
7 Subtle Public Speaking Tips I Learned From My First Conference Talkby Melvin Varghese | Oct 24, 2024 | Mel On Other Podcasts, Passive Income for Therapists, Public Speaking, STC Podcast
Melvin Varghese speaking at the Mental Health Marketing Conference, in Franklin, TN.
Burnout in High Achieving Mental Health Professionals: A Conversation with Dr. Jessi Goldby Melvin Varghese | Oct 19, 2024 | Growing Your Practice, Mindset, Private Practice, STC Podcast
Melvin Varghese holding a copy of the book How Do You Feel by author, Jessi Gold, M.D., MS
« Older Entries The post 378: therapists lauching an online course should do this… appeared first on Selling The Couch | Melvin Varghese PhD.
377: Corporate Transparency Act: What Therapists Need to KnowWritten By Melvin Varghese PhDIn this episode of Selling the Couch, I am thrilled to welcome two knowledgeable guests, Dan Mayer, an attorney, and Dr. David Yud, a licensed psychologist, to discuss an important and timely topic for therapists in private practice: the Corporate Transparency Act (CTA). As we navigate the complexities of running a private practice, understanding the implications of this new legislation is crucial, especially since compliance is required by the end of 2024.
We kick off the episode by expressing gratitude to our sponsor, Alma, a service designed to support solo practitioners who prefer to operate primarily on a private pay basis while still having the option to accept insurance. Alma simplifies the insurance process by managing billing, verifying benefits, and guaranteeing payment within two weeks, allowing therapists to focus on their clients.
The conversation then shifts to the Corporate Transparency Act, which aims to combat money laundering and financial crimes by requiring certain business entities, including LLCs and S-Corps, to report their ownership information to the federal government. Dan breaks down the act in simple terms, explaining that it is part of the Anti-Money Laundering Act and is enforced by the Financial Crimes Enforcement Network (FinCEN). He emphasizes that the goal is to create a database that helps track and identify businesses involved in illicit activities.
David shares his initial panic upon learning about the act, but he quickly found relief when he discovered that compliance is straightforward and can be completed in about 10-15 minutes. He details the information required for filing, such as the LLC name, tax ID number, and ownership details, noting that only those with a 25% or greater ownership stake need to register.
We also discuss the filing process for both solo and group practices, clarifying that if a therapist has never registered their business, they may not need to comply with the CTA. However, Dan and David stress the importance of consulting with an attorney or accountant to ensure compliance and avoid potential penalties, which can include hefty fines and even jail time for willful noncompliance.
As we delve deeper into the implications of the act, we touch on the ongoing debate regarding its constitutionality. Dan argues that the federal government has the authority to regulate business practices, while David acknowledges the possibility of future legal challenges.
In the latter part of the episode, we explore the potential ripple effects of the CTA on private practices. David reassures listeners that the filing process is a one-time task unless significant changes occur in ownership structure. He emphasizes that the act is designed to deter illegal activities, and for the average therapist, compliance is a simple and necessary step.
We conclude the episode by encouraging listeners to take action and file their information with FinCEN before the deadline. I express my gratitude to Dan and David for their insights and expertise, and I invite listeners to check out their podcast, “Protecting Your Practice,” for more valuable information.
This episode is a must-listen for any therapist in private practice, as it provides essential information on navigating the Corporate Transparency Act and ensuring compliance in a straightforward manner.
Transcript (AI-Generated)Melvin Varghese:
Before we jump into today's podcast session, just wanted to take a moment to thank the team over at Alma for supporting today's podcast session. Alma is spelled A-L-M-A and Alma is a wonderful option if you are a, particularly if you're a solo practitioner in private practice, that maybe doesn't want to take insurance fully, that primarily wants to be private pay, but just wants to hedge a little bit, especially given some of the uncertainties that we've had economically here over the past several years. So with Alma, you can take as few as one client that takes insurance while having the rest of yours be private pay, But the really cool thing with Alma is that they actually handle all of the insurance craziness that none of us as therapists want to deal with. So whether that is managing billing, verifying benefits, making sure that you're actually getting paid, that's the other cool thing too. So if you see a client, Alma actually guarantees payment within two weeks, even if they themselves have not been reimbursed by insurance. You can learn more about Alma and the wonderful services that they provide. It's not just like a insurance credentialing and billing service. They offer a bunch of things from an online directory for therapists, so you can get ideal fit referrals, to CEUs and a bunch of other workshops, which I'll mention when I talk about them here in the middle of our podcast. But you can learn more about Alma and the awesome work that they're providing over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash Alma. sellingthecouch.com forward slash Alma, and there's a discount code just for STC listeners there. Hello, hello. Welcome to today's session of Selling the Couch. I hope you're doing well, having an incredible day. So today's podcast is actually something that you should absolutely listen to if you are a therapist in private practice based here in the U.S. We are talking about the Corporate Transparency Act, what therapists need to know. This is a brand new act and it's required that you are in compliance by the end of 2024. The process, it sounds very scary, but the essential point of the Corporate Transparency Act is to reduce the amount of money laundering and all of these things that are happening when folks are creating shell companies and stuff like that. So especially if you have an LLC or an S-Corp, please take a moment to listen to this session. So I am joined by Dan Mayer, and David Yud. David is a licensed psychologist. Dan Mayer is an attorney. Again, this session is just for informational purposes only. Definitely consult with your attorney and or accountant as you navigate this. But we're talking about this Corporate Transparency Act. In simple language, what is it? What are the requirements of the Corporate Transparency Act when it comes to being a therapist? And then also, what does the filing process look like for therapists, both solo practitioners and group practitioners? So if you're a group practitioner, for example, does every one of the therapists that are working under you, do they also need to file those questions like that? And then we get into some things like what are the implications of not complying with this act, as well as even the constitutionality of this act. There's a whole bunch of articles online with regard to this. And so I think you're going to find this session incredibly helpful. And so we'll just jump in. Here's my conversation with Dr. David Yud and Dan Mayer. Hey, Dave. Hey, Dan. Welcome to Selling the Couch.
David Yood:
Thanks.
Dan Mayer:
Thanks for having us. Thanks, Melvin. Good to see you again.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, great to see you. This has actually been a while since we've done a three-person one. So this is either going to be epic or it's going to be a failure, but we'll see. We'll roll with this and high hopes, right? Low Robert or whatever it is.
Dan Mayer:
It's going to be a spectacular thing. So it's fine. Okay. But we're assuming for the high volume.
Melvin Varghese:
Yes, absolutely. When you guys reached out over the summer, I mean, Dan, you and I have known each other five plus years. Dave, we're just getting to know. Yeah, it's crazy. And you've worked with a lot of therapists. I mean, that's primarily your practice in working with, you're an attorney by profession. You work primarily with therapists to navigate the legal stuff that they have to figure out. You're also valuable resources for us in our online course, Mastermind, as therapists think about courses and how to legally and ethically do that. Dave, I know you guys have been doing a lot of cool stuff together, including a podcast. And I'm excited for you to be here because you're a psychologist in private practice. So you're navigating this. And I think to get that perspective, I think will be really interesting. We're talking about the Corporate Transparency Act, what therapists need to know, Dan, in super simple language, because like legal stuff scares the heck out of me sometimes. What is the Corporate Transparency Act?
Dan Mayer:
Okay, so a couple things to know. First off, the Corporate Transparency Act is actually the subact of another act, the subact of another act, right? So believe it or not, in New York State government, you know, Corporate Transparency Act is actually part of the Anti-Money Laundering Act, which is in itself part of the National Defense Authorization Act for 2021.
David Yood:
May I just say, may I just interrupt Dan and say he asked for super simple language.
Dan Mayer:
You're doing great so far. I just want people to know, like, this is where it's coming from, right? But it went into effect as of this year, okay? And so what it basically means is it requires certain business you know, what they title as a reporting company, to file something with the federal government, confirming that you are who you are and that you do own or have some sort of interest in this reporting company. It is reported to and you file with the Financial Crimes Enforcement Network, in the long words, FinCEN as we call it, and that's through the Department of the Treasury, with the federal government, right? Just a quick kind of analysis of what that means and why This is now being asked of people and therapists. Essentially, the goal was to combat money laundering, financial crimes, money laundering, terrorism, things like that. And so what they were finding was bad guys were using shell companies to do this, and they didn't have a good way of tracking it. So they decided that through this law, they could have those who do qualify to have to file some information, which is then put into their database. One other point I want to add to people, because I've actually gotten this question, is, okay, well, what does the federal government do with this information once we file it? It does sit in a database that can be used by FinCEN, and they also are authorized to disclose it, and I have a list here, so I'm just going to read it out of memory, to U.S. federal law enforcement agencies, with court approval to other agencies, to non-U.S. enforcement agencies, like judges, prosecutors, and then with the consent of a company, you know, there's practice to their financial institution, or the regulator should govern finance. That's just a little bit of kind of the ice on the cake there what we're talking.
Melvin Varghese:
So the way that I understood it, it basically is a way for the federal government to verify that you have like a LLC or an S corp or whatever is set up in the US, that it's doing what it's supposed to, it's not doing something illegal.
Dan Mayer:
and foreign. So, it's anybody doing business in the United States. And yeah, the goal is to say, look, we want to know who you are. So, that way, if you're doing something bad, we can track you and figure out what you're doing and what company you're dealing with. The reality is, of course, for all those listening, right, this is not, they're not really concerned with you, right? But they want to have that database, right? The other thing to know is if you've filed a registered lease that you filed with your state, right, your LLC or state knows who you are, and the state knows what the registrants are, but the federal government didn't necessarily know that. And there's a question about constitutionality, which we can talk a little bit later. But generally speaking, the federal government's like, look, we don't have this information readily available, so we want this information. That's why we're doing it.
Melvin Varghese:
Got it. Dave, switching over to you, I know as a clinician, you're thinking about this, like, how are you thinking about this for your private practice?
David Yood:
Well, when I first learned about this, the first way I think about it was a little bit of a panic because the enforcement is very, very scary. They have a whole list of ways that they say they can go after you, including jail time and fines, daily fines for being out of compliance. And then I found out what it took to comply. And then I was very relieved because it took about 10 minutes, 10, 15 minutes. to go on the website, input the data that I already had, it didn't take any research, click submit, and then I washed my hands of it, I'm done. This is not like some other rules where you have to re-up your compliance every year or anything. You just set it and forget it. I'll never have to do this again unless I make significant changes to my ownership structure or anything like that. So the way the rules are is that we have to be in compliance by the end of 2024. For you.
Dan Mayer:
For me. We can talk about this in a couple of minutes about what other, but just to clarify people, a certain pop segment of the population does have to be in compliance.
David Yood:
That's right.
David Yood:
Yeah. Because my company was created in 2021. Uh, I'm a, we're a three person partnership and because our company was created back then we have until the end of this year to be in compliance, which again, I did it in 10, 15 minutes, a couple months ago. I believe companies that are created this year and then companies moving forward have about one month to be in compliance if I'm not mistaken. But for the rest of us, they give us to the end of this year and then that's it. Like you can then then be done with it.
Melvin Varghese:
I mean, it's nice to hear you talk that it like it brought relief. Do you remember offhand, like what sort of information like, that they wanted was like your LLC name?
David Yood:
Like, yeah, stuff like that are our tax ID number who owns it. So the rules are that if you they want the information for ownership, And if you own 25% or greater of a share in the company, then you have to register. And so they just wanted my personal information so that they could find me if there was ever an issue with, if I were ever skimming money from foreign governments, which, you know, if you're a foreign government, reach out, let me know. I can use your money. I say with my lawyer on the call, but honestly, they just wanted that basic information of who I am and where they could find me. And that's about it. It was really not complicated. Yeah.
Melvin Varghese:
And you said the 25% of because you had a three person partnership, like each of the partners had, yeah, we have 33% ownership.
Dan Mayer:
So yeah, yeah. And there's a number of people who would apply to 25% ownership is one of the categories. The other thing I would say, though, kind of latch on what they were saying was, You know, it is when you first look at the rules and you look at the compliance, you're like, oh, my God, this is terrifying. I think the two points that Dave highlighted that are important are that while there are, you know, steep penalties and we can talk about the consequences of not reporting it in a little bit. But I think that there's sort of an asterisk on that, first of all. Second thing is for people to know is, guys and everyone listening, this is not hard to do if you are required to do it. And you're going to hear me say this repeatedly and Dave will tell you and you know I say this all the time. You know, if you're not sure what to do, then get help, right? Go to your accountant, go, you know, get, go to your lawyer and get done really quickly for you. It's not as scary as you think it might be.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. No, thank you for like, I think normalizing that and saying all that. Uh, we started to talk about this and Dan, maybe you can start this and Dave, feel free to like chime in. What does this filing process look like for. Like solo and group practices. So it sounds like for us with regard to this, like corporate transparency act, I wonder if we could just go a little deeper into it. Is it just the submission or it's a different, like depending on your LLC structure, all that kind of stuff.
Dan Mayer:
Right. So when we talk about reporting companies. Right? We're talking about LLCs for sure. We're talking about corporations and UNS Corp. and LLC. We're talking about you. The way I describe it is other entities that are otherwise required to file with the state, right, or the federal government. Right? Generally, like if I'm filing to create my identity with the state that I'm in, like Maryland, for example, most likely the act will apply to me and I will be required to apply. As Dave said, there's a process, there's a website. What I do like about what they've done with the defense head website is I think, now I'm a lawyer, I try to put myself in the shoes of an ordinary person. And doing that, to me, it seemed pretty self-explanatory. I think they do a pretty good job, step by step, walking through what they want. You know, so it's really just, okay, do this, upload this, give us this information, tell us this, click submit, right? When it comes to, you know, people who don't have registered, so let's say I'm a therapist and I've never registered my company, essentially you're what we in the IRS would call a solo or a proprietorship, right? So if you've never registered, you just are, you're just doing your thing. One way to know if that's you is, you know, if you don't have a LLC or a score for that, you don't, you know, from a legal perspective, you don't have liability protection.
David Yood:
Now that's a whole nother issue to look into.
Dan Mayer:
It would also mean saying you should have an entry register and likely then you may not need to actually file, right? Because the government's saying, well, you're not actually a registered entity that we care about, right?
You're just new.
Dan Mayer:
The IRS cares, but the IRS knows that you, John Doe, are filing with them and saying, I earned X amount of money, I have X amount of expenses, here's my taxes. There's nothing you're reporting on, like if I have an LLC where I'm filing an annual report every year. That's the government saying, okay, yeah, this applies to you. Does that make sense? Am I trying to explain this clearly as possible? Yeah, it does. My one caveat is, again, I'm gonna say this over and over again, if you're sitting here listening to this right now, I'm not really sure, no problem. Go on the website, read the information, see if that makes sense to you. If not, hopefully you have an accountant or a lawyer or no one you can contact, they can absolutely help guide you here to make sure to figure out whether you need to apply at all.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, Dave, is there anything that you would add with regard to that, like similar group practices?
David Yood:
No, they only care about ownership information. So if you have a group practice, and you're the sole owner, and you have 20 employees, they don't care about the 20 employees, they just want to know about you. So it only matters if it's a multiple owners or single owner.
Melvin Varghese:
Got it. And then I'm thinking like, you guys alluded to this earlier. So I know there's like this thing where a lot of times when clinicians first start in private practice, they don't have like an LLC or S Corp or anything, they kind of just start out. So it sounds like they're because they're technically not an entity, right? There may not be a responsibility disclosed, but it's probably just being cautious to go ahead and do that. Is that the way that I understood that?
Dan Mayer:
I don't know. No, I actually, well, I think the first part is correct, right? From what we can tell now, based on what's being documented in the law and what the procedures and policies are now, yes, you are a solo practice. You've never registered, right? So let's say I decide tomorrow I want to start my own therapy business. Great. I'm Dan Mayer therapist. I'm not, since I'm not saying I am, let's say I was, right? I'm now saying I'm here, I'm me, I'm doing business as Dan Mayer therapist. okay, you know, as far as the state, my state, Maryland is concerned, and the IRS is concerned, okay, when I file my taxes, they're gonna say, what did you earn this year? You know, any exemptions you're making? Great, here's what you owe. Right, and that's it. That's all, you know, it's simple as that. It's when you file with the state that you're in and say, no, I now want to add, I want to become an actual registered business. Now I'm an actual legal entity. that I'm now acting under, that those reporting partners kick in now, right? I'd like to be subject to change down the line, but as of now, that's our understanding is that if you're not, you're just you doing therapy, you're not likely gonna be needing to report. Again, and I know, I know I sound like I broke the record, but I'm a lawyer, I have to do this, just like I told you I have. You know, as they say, if you're not sure, talk to someone, verify the report, decide not to do it, okay?
Melvin Varghese:
This might be a really silly question, but like, if they're only really going for like registered entities, isn't there like a loophole of like, couldn't businesses technically like still would like do illegal behavior where they just don't register and they somehow do stuff under the like, I mean, isn't that a possibility? I don't know.
Dan Mayer:
You're talking about therapy practices?
Melvin Varghese:
I mean, generally, like not just therapy practices, right?
Dan Mayer:
So if you're a business and you don't register, so I believe the federal government has unlimited amount of resources and the ability to find you if they want to find you. And the IRS, and this goes into some of the constitutionality questions that I was going to talk about, the IRS knows exactly who you are. So having a social security number, they know who you are. And it's your reporting and said, well, well, I mean, X amount of money and during my business. If someone really wanted to, in my opinion, someone wants to say, you're out and I just want to figure out what we have a business that you can do for her to go do it. Right. Or they can even contact the state say, you know, we're doing an audit. We're investigating. You know, can you please tell me what business this person has? Oh, they do have an asking. Oh, you didn't register. Okay. Well. You gotcha. Right. They have the ability and the resources to look towards that to figure out what's going on. I think there's a broader question, which I've gotten from people as well. That's the thing. Why do I need to report at all. But I think it's because Again, all of that's extra steps that they have to jump through to get to figure out who you are and what you're doing. This is kind of designed, in my opinion, this is my own personal opinion. This is not a fabric label opinion, is that they're creating a shortcut and saying, no, we're creating a database where we have this like access.
David Yood:
It's like they're streamlining the process. They can still do it the old fashioned way, but this just makes it much simpler. Okay. That's what I would say. So, so my advice, don't do that.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. Right. It's just not worth the risk.
Dan Mayer:
I would say everyone probably, I'm going to go on a limb here and say, everyone wants to do the right thing. And it's trying to, you know, run things the right way. So don't go down that road.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, absolutely. We started talking about this, like alluding to it. So there is some controversy around this Corporate Transparency Act, whether it's constitutional or not constitutional. I was wondering if you guys could speak to that part of it.
Dan Mayer:
How high is soapbox? If I can get on it and start preaching?
Melvin Varghese:
Low, medium soapbox.
Dan Mayer:
No, I'm kidding. My personal opinion is this. But, you know, I look at this and say, I've had this discussion with a lawyer, but I've heard the arguments made by. like the Chamber of Congress and stuff, you know, I don't buy, personally, it's the argument that the federal government can't do this or shouldn't do this. The federal government regulates our taxes, they regulate our waterways, they have the power, and we agree by the fact that we're a united country, to regulate and enforce laws and regulations, right? Everything from pay taxes to you don't hunt without a license to, you know, here's how you, you know, what you can do in natural fisheries and not fisheries, We generally accept that they have the power to regulate things like that. In my opinion, then, personally, from a legal perspective, they do have the power. Congress approved and passed this act to say, this is what we want to happen. The president signed it. It's law. The question of constitutionality for my question is really more an esoteric one in that what I would say is the flip side. It hasn't yet been proven not to be constitutional, right? So until a court decides that it is unconstitutional, as of now, it is constitutional by the very fact that it hasn't been overturned, you know. So in the way I look at it is, The law is the law. The government's saying this is what we want. So until a court comes along and says it's not, you know, I just don't buy into the argument. So I was thinking, oh, we can't do this. Well, they are doing it.
David Yood:
Yeah, I suppose it's at some point a court could decide that it is unconstitutional because the way the courts work these days in the United States. anything can happen. It's Calvin ball out there when you can pick your judge and pick the Supreme Court and all that. So it's a possibility that that could happen. But until that point, it's moot for us. Somebody has to challenge it. And then the court has to choose that.
Dan Mayer:
I'm not a constitutional scholar, right? There are those who are far more intelligent and educated on me on this particular point of the Constitution than I am. But what I would just say, also say is that from my understanding and knowledge as an attorney, I look at this law and I personally can't see anything that seems to me to stand out as saying Congress oversteps here. Congress makes a decision. We want the treasurer to have these powers. When you create this database, if I'm doing my own analysis here, we have other databases like sex offender registry. We have all sorts of different ways of categorizing, collecting information already. This is just one more. Now there may be constitutional scholars out there who may hear this and say, I absolutely disagree with you and that's fine. But from my perspective, that's what I would do.
Melvin Varghese:
That's great. The last question I have for you, and this is for you, Dave, beyond just submitting the stuff that you needed to and that you alluded to, is there any other kind of things that have, is there any like ripple effects or anything that you're thinking about like for your private practice?
David Yood: None whatsoever.
It's such a simple, here's the information, submit it. I never have to think about this again. So I'm not concerned about any ripple effects unless one of my partners or me decides to start doing very illegal behavior, then this makes it easier for the feds to come after us. And honestly, good. They should come after us if we're doing that kind of illegal behavior.
David Yood:
I don't want that kind of thing happening here.
David Yood:
And by illegal behavior, I mean specifically the things that this act is trying to protect the people against, you know, money laundering primarily. So it makes it maybe a little bit harder to do very illegal things. And I am okay with that. I do not foresee that being a problem. So no, I don't see any ripple effects, anything like that. When we were all trying to figure out the No Surprises Act and good faith estimates, the answer would have been yes, absolutely. It's a lot more paperwork and a lot more things to track because that's a recurring thing, needing to make sure in compliance with that is an ongoing process. But this one, set it and forget it.
Dan Mayer:
So I'm good. Yeah, I'm glad you mentioned it. That's what I was going to latch on to that and say the same thing. I actually think the No Surprises Act created much more paperwork and burdened some tasks or practices on a seemingly recurring basis. This, as Dave said, is literally, you said it, you get it done. Now, if I may, there's two things I want to just tackle, which we kind of touched on, but I think it's important because those listening may have these questions, I get these questions. And we touched on them briefly, so I want to expand on it quickly for those listening. When we talk about, yeah, if you set it, you know, file this and forget about it, that's fine, but there's an asterisk on there, okay? And I want to give everyone listening just some information. You can find this online too, obviously. But what are the rules here? You know, if, as David alluded to, if you are a company, you're a great LLC or a company, any times in January 2024 and December 30th, you have 90 days to file. So if you file, create your LLC in February and you still haven't filed this, you're overdue, get it in as quickly as you can. If you've created your, before 2014, yes, you do have until the end of the year, okay? Starting next year, if you create an LLC, that's going to work, that is going to drop down to 30 days, okay? Another thing that they alluded to is that if you do create your company, you file this, but then you make changes to it, you know, substantial changes to ownership, things like that, very likely there's going to have to be a follow-up piece where you're going to have to update or amend the file you have. Again, that's not overly burdensome. It's go in, update it, submit, you're done.
David Yood:
Yeah, we should say what is burdensome are the consequences if you do not do this.
Dan Mayer:
And that's what I want to talk about next because I also get that question. What I would simply say is, if you look at it from, here's what the consequences are, it's terrifying. And I said earlier, there's an asterisk on this, and I wanted to mention that asterisk now. So everyone just sort of knows, the consequences are, you can have civil penalties up to $500 a day for noncompliance. There can be criminal penalties, including up to two years in jail and a fine of $10 a month. That's scary. But the reality is, for all those listening and believing, and most Americans who own businesses, you're not willfully, likely willfully not trying to file this, not trying to do the right thing. Melvin, you asked about that earlier. If I'm a company trying not to do this intentionally, they've essentially said, we will, that's called willful, we are going to comply and we are going to eventually come back to you. The question is, what happens if it's not willful? How does that work? And that's still kind of up in the air. It's not really sure, like, really clear to find what they're defining as willful or intentional or unintentional. So again, my advice here is, if you're listening to this, And you're like, well, I haven't done that. My advice to you is either go on onto the website. You can literally type in FinCEN beneficial reporting, and it'll start bringing up all the websites you need. Go on there, walk yourself through it, see if you can understand it and if it applies to you. If you're not sure still, talk to your financial person, your accountant, your lawyer, and get this just figured out. As Dave said, it's really quick. Once you kind of figure out whether you need to do it or not, you file it and you're done. You don't have to think twice about it.
David Yood:
Yeah, the likelihood that the federal government is going to come after you for being negligent and fine you $500 a day seems low and cumbersome, but they do have the enumerated powers to do so, so best to just knock it out. once you're done with listening to this episode, take care of it, and then you don't ever have to worry about any of that.
Dan Mayer:
There's something that a Medicaid attorney was told, and I often think about this, and I often think about it in the larger context of practice for practitioners in general. You know, we were talking about Medicaid and, you know, what happens when a practitioner does something that violates Medicaid. And I remember her saying, look, you know, at the end of the day, Medicaid, for example, is not trying to hunt you down, right? You know, we go after someone because they're a bad actor. There's a reason. We're really trying to feel like they've done something egregious from a public policy perspective or a financial perspective. They need to be dealt with, right? But the average person, like, if you make a mistake, we're not necessarily, like, going to, like, bring a hammer down. And I would argue that with how many businesses are in the United States and the resources that our government has, the average business owner, if you don't get the compliance, likely you're going to, my analysis would be, you likely probably will be able to get the compliance without too much happening. What they're really using this for is to scare people. They're like, this is serious. We're being dead serious about this. Do it. Kind of dissuade people to do it. And then also having the teeth available if they need to use it. Right. That's my analysis. They're not looking to screw over the modern populace in this country. They're not trying to make it unusually burdensome. You know, and I think that's part of the reason why they've said, you know, file it, you're done. Right. We don't want to make this the extra hard, but it's really important. So that's what we want.
Melvin Varghese:
Dan, Dave, thank you both for your time on such an important topic. I mean, I am literally going to go take care of this right after we're done.
David Yood:
Oh, good. We've done our job.
Melvin Varghese:
Yes. Where can we learn more? Well, tell us a little bit about the podcast where we can find it and then how we can touch base with you if we have questions or any of that.
David Yood:
Well, we are at protectingyourpractice.com and, you know, just type in protecting your practice to whatever podcast platform you have and you'll find us there. Also, Dan is at Mayor Law and I'm at Maryland OCD and Anxiety Therapy. That's my practice. And you can come find us there. Go on protecting your practice. Leave us some feedback. Shoot us a message. Let us know you heard us. It's always nice to hear those things. And we'd love to hear from you all.
David Yood:
And yeah, our podcast will listen.
Dan Mayer:
And I would say to, you know, latch on what Dave said, you know, we, we are working on becoming better at Epson. And I think Dave and I have a bunch of different ideas and topics we want to cover, and that's forthcoming. So definitely feel free to check us out.
David Yood:
You know, if you have a topic or something or interest that's like, you know, really have, feel strongly about, maybe we'll look at it and do an episode on it. So, but thank you so much Melvin for having us on. No, thank you for it. Really appreciate it.
Melvin Varghese:
No, you're so welcome. And have a great rest of your day. Thanks. Hey there, I hope you enjoyed my conversation with Dave and Dan, and especially if this is your first time hearing about the Corporate Transparency Act, and if you're a therapist in private practice here in the U.S. I hope that today's session is helpful for you. Big action step on this, go to fincen.gov, so that's F-I-N-C-E-N dot gov, and I'm looking at the website right now, there's literally a section that says how do I file, and you can literally get this done in 10 minutes. I don't mess with this kind of stuff, so I'm going to be doing this as soon as I finish recording. And, I don't know, I mean, this is, on one hand, like, yes, there's like questions around constitutionality and all of these things, but I'm, at least for me, what I'm trying to think about is like, okay, this seems like something that can really help reduce things like shell corporations doing illicit stuff and money laundering and all of that kind of stuff. Definitely again, go over to FinCEN.gov and take care of this before the end of 2024. Have a great rest of your day and I will see you for the next session, which will be the final session for 2024.
Narrator:
Thanks for listening to the Selling the Couch podcast. For more great content and to stay up to date, visit www.sellingthecouch.com.
Melvin Varghese:
Before we continue with today's podcast session, just wanted to take a moment to thank the team over at Alma for supporting today's podcast session. So the best way to think about Alma is it's almost like a giant group practice, but because it is a big group practice, a significantly large group practice, they're able to negotiate higher reimbursement rates for you if you are a therapist in private practice that takes insurance. But the cool part I actually wanted to mention today is they actually have a very thriving and active community for professionals. So what does this look like? So one is they actually have a cross-referral network within almost so yeah you know therapists can refer clients to you that are good fit they also there's opportunities in places where therapists can share resources with each other and just find general support now they're Alma kind of takes things to the next level. So by being a member of Alma, you also get continuing education courses, workshops with industry experts, as well as peer support groups where clinicians can discuss their work in a very collaborative environment. You can learn more about Alma and sign up over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash Alma. And if you go through that link, there's a special discount or a special bonus there for Selling the Couch listeners. Let's get right back to today's session. Hey there, I hope that you enjoyed today's session. Thank you again for taking the time to listen all the way through. If you are a therapist and you're specifically in a season where you're a seasoned therapist and you are wanting to move from clinical to online course income, We actually have a specific mastermind for therapists who are doing this. So this is basically a group of really kind and supportive therapists who are also wildly successful as business owners. We meet together to build and grow and scale our online courses. you can learn more about that mastermind over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash mastermind all one word sellingthecouch.com forward slash mastermind thank you so much for taking the time to listen to today's session
timestamps00:00:00 – Mel's Intro
00:04:04 – Overview of the Corporate Transparency Act
00:08:03—How to think about this for your private practice
00:10:04—The information you need to share for compliance
00:12:25—The Filing Process
00:20:15—Is this act constitutional?
00:31:53 – Mel's Reflections
selling the couch podcast with melvin varghese phdWeekly interviews, strategy, and advice for building your private practice in and beyond the therapy room.
Apple podcastsYou TubeSpotify ready to launch your online course?Please check out our free online course starter kit for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This FREE 7-day email course will help you validate your course idea (so that you can create a course that has buyers).
sign up for free course starter kitready to launch your podcast?Please check out our FREE podcasting workshop for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This workshop is pre-recorded so you can watch it on a day and time that works for your schedule.
It contains a lot of practical tips that we've learned as STC has reached 1.81 million+ downloads and become a 6-figure business with podcasting as the backbone.
sign up for podcasting workshopDAN MAYERAttorney at Law
As the principal of Mayer Law, LLC, Daniel Mayer is passionate and dedicated about providing his clients with the best legal services that they require. Mayer Law is a full service law practice passionate about being the go-to legal source for healthcare and mental health practitioners and their practices throughout Baltimore and Maryland.
david a yoodDr. David A. Yood PsyD
David is a licensed psychologist in Maryland and Virginia who specializes in treating OCD and anxiety disorders. He has permission through PSYPACT to practice telehealth in Washington D.C. and other participating states as well. He is a co-host of the Protecting Your Practice podcast, a show that delves into the legal and ethical issues pertaining to owning and operating private mental health practices.
Melvin varghese phdPsychologist and Founder @ Selling The Couch
Melvin Varghese, PhD is a licensed psychologist in Philadelphia, PA. In 2015, Dr. Varghese founded Selling The Couch, a podcast to help therapists move from clinical to online income.
On the podcast, he interviews successful practitioners about how they've built their practices, social media/marketing experts, and shares lessons as he uses our clinical skills to create an online business powered by podcasting + online courses.
The podcast is one of the top Career podcasts in Apple Podcasts, has been downloaded over 1.8 million times, and is heard in over 125 countries. Mel is a successful course creator with 240+ students and $300k+ in course sales.
More PostsCorporate Transparency Act: What Therapists Need To Know Before 2025by Melvin Varghese | Nov 2, 2024 | Blog, Growing Your Practice, Private Practice, STC Podcast
Melvin Varghese talking about the Corporate Transparency Act out of Anti Money Laundering Act with Dan Mayer and David Yood
7 Subtle Public Speaking Tips I Learned From My First Conference Talkby Melvin Varghese | Oct 24, 2024 | Mel On Other Podcasts, Passive Income for Therapists, Public Speaking, STC Podcast
Melvin Varghese speaking at the Mental Health Marketing Conference, in Franklin, TN.
Burnout in High Achieving Mental Health Professionals: A Conversation with Dr. Jessi Goldby Melvin Varghese | Oct 19, 2024 | Growing Your Practice, Mindset, Private Practice, STC Podcast
Melvin Varghese holding a copy of the book How Do You Feel by author, Jessi Gold, M.D., MS
« Older Entries The post Corporate Transparency Act: What Therapists Need To Know Before 2025 appeared first on Selling The Couch | Melvin Varghese PhD.
376: 7 Non-Obvious Things I Learned from My First Conference TalkWritten By Melvin Varghese PhDAfter 9 years, I finally spoke at my first conference! I had some wonderful opportunities previously but a combo of our daughter being so young (and a NICU baby) and just anxiety about getting COVID and getting her sick made me pause.
But things feel different now internally especially after I spoke to two large organizations (via Zoom) on South Asian mental health. I'm also been curious about what the whole “speaking from the stage” vs into a mic with no one else in the room is like.
I spoke at the Mental Health Marketing Conference in Franklin, TN that my friend Steve Turney runs (shout out to the entire MHM team for putting together such a wonderful conference). This conference attracted 300 folks (I would say about 30% were clinicians and the other 70% were mental health tech and marketing folks).
In today's session, I wanted to share 7 key (but non-obvious) lessons I learned.
Know the Setup: Understanding the stage before you get to the conference and technical setup is crucial. The MHM team provide a detailed speakers sheet on what to expect, when to submit slides (a lesson here; I made my slides in Canva, and had to convert them to Power Point). I discuss how the conference provided a detailed speaker document and the importance of familiarizing myself with the equipment, including the lavalier mic and the presentation screen.
Find a Place to Rest: I emphasize the need for personal downtime before speaking. As an introvert, I struggled to find a quiet space to recharge and the importance of being grounded before taking the stage. In hindsight, I should have just gone to my car (I stayed with a friend who lived about 30 minutes away) or rested in the green room in the back.
Lavalier Mic Awareness: The sound engineer places a lav mic on my jacket and how it can inadvertently pick up sounds from clothing. I suggest being mindful of attire and movement to avoid distractions during the presentation.
Utilize Social Media: One of the best things that I did was post about my talk before and after my talk. This kept the engagement going before and after.
Have a Supportive Squad: I discuss the comfort of having friends in the audience (shout out to Michael Fulwiler, Dr. Justin Dodson, Dr. Brian Dixon, Anna O'Brien, Brandon Gill, Kruti Quazi, and Ryan Scanlon) . Their presence helped calm my nerves and made the experience more enjoyable, allowing for a more interactive session.
Start with a Story: I shared a personal story about my struggles with acne, which resonated with the audience and set the tone for my talk on video podcasting. That story was the one that most people who came up to after the talk started out conversation with.
The Power of Speaking: Finally, I reflect on the exhilarating feeling of being on stage and the validation that comes from sharing knowledge. I acknowledge the need to pace myself in future speaking engagements to maintain balance in my life.
Transcript (AI-Generated)Melvin Varghese:
Before we jump into today's podcast session, just wanted to take a moment to thank the team over at Alma for supporting today's podcast session. Alma is spelled A-L-M-A, and Alma is a wonderful option if you are a, particularly if you're a solo practitioner in private practice, that maybe doesn't want to take insurance fully, that primarily wants to be private pay, but just wants to hedge a little bit, especially given some of the uncertainties that we've had economically here over the past several years. So with Alma, you can take as few as one client that takes insurance while having the rest of yours be private pay. But the really cool thing with Alma is that they actually handle all of the insurance craziness that none of us as therapists want to deal with. So whether that is managing billing, verifying benefits, making sure that you're actually getting paid, that's the other cool thing too. So if you see a client, Alma actually guarantees payment within two weeks, even if they themselves have not been reimbursed by insurance. You can learn more about Alma and the wonderful services that they provide. It's not just like a insurance credentialing and billing service. They offer a bunch of things from an online directory for therapists, so you can get ideal fit referrals, to CEUs and a bunch of other workshops, which I'll mention when I talk about them here in the middle of our podcast. But you can learn more about Alma and the awesome work that they're providing over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash Alma. sellingthecouch.com forward slash Alma and there's a discount code just for STC listeners there. Hello, hello, welcome to today's session of Selling the Couch. I hope you're doing well, having an incredible day.
So if you have aspirations to speak at a conference or conferences or do any sort of keynotes in your future, then this episode is for you. And if you're already doing this, I hope that today's session is helpful for you. So about two weeks ago from this recording, I had the opportunity to speak at my first ever conference. I had some opportunities before, but I declined them mainly because, you know, just going through the whole NICU process with our daughter. And then also, to be completely honest, just some anxiety around COVID and traveling and doing all of that at Speaking of conferences, I just had to kind of work through some of that stuff. But it was the Mental Health Marketing Conference. It's an annual conference where clinicians and mental health tech marketing folks gather. And the sessions range from more clinical related topics to more business related topics. And it's just a fantastic gathering. It's run by my friend, Steve Turney, shout out to Steve. And this was my first chance and my first opportunity to speak at this conference. And there were around 300 participants. at the actual conference, and then I believe like about 100 more who had bought digital tickets as well. This conference has been going for several years, but it has been really growing here in the last couple of years. And I think they're projecting at an even like double this number in the next year. And so today what I wanted to just walk you through are seven things that I wish I had known before speaking at my first conference. Basically what I did was after I finished up my talk, I wrote down some notes. And then I thought to myself, why in the world am I like holding this to myself?
Might as well just share it in order to help others. And so that's the intent of this episode. And so the talking point set, I'll just kind of share the front end just so you can have some a way to just conceptualize things. So first, know what the setup looks like in front of you. Number two is find a place to rest and recenter before you get on stage. Three is make sure that the lav mic doesn't hit your clothes when it moves. And then four is use social media before and after to chronicle your journey. Five is have a small squad of friends in the crowd to cheer you on. Six is remember and start and lead with story because that's what people remember. And number seven is the power that comes with doing talks. And so number one is know what the setup looks like in front of you when you start. So basically, again, I'm going to do this as a brand new person. So kind of learning. So the mental health marketing folks, they were so incredibly helpful in that one, they were available if we had any questions, but they actually did a like a speaker document that they sent out a few weeks prior to the conference. And so I had somewhat of an idea of like what the setup look like. So what one thing I learned in just talking with friends who also do public speaking is it really depends upon the conference. So if you are speaking at a conference, some conferences, they'll have a time usually like a day or two before your actual talk where you can do almost like a dry rehearsal, or they'll have a time set up where people can do kind of a rehearsal and get an understanding of the stage.
The way the Mental Health Marketing Conference was set up is you show up about 45 minutes before your scheduled talk to wherever you're designated. So Mental Health Marketing, they had three, they had one large stage, which is where I had the incredible opportunity to speak from and then they had a smaller stage and then they had a third kind of almost like conference room feel and then they had a fourth location as well that was more of a sit down kind of like you know it's it's great for like one-on-one small group conversations and so but basically what happens in most conferences is there's usually some sort of what they call like a green room and this is kind of where the audio and technical folks are hanging out where there's usually seating for if you're a speaker or any of that, which they definitely had at the Mental Health Marketing Conference. They had a bunch of really comfortable chairs. They had drinks and snacks and all of that kind of stuff available, which was really nice. The one thing that a friend recommended, shout out to my friend Michael Fulweiler for recommending this, was just to take a bottle of water with you onto the stage because you may not think about it, but when you're talking for, my talk was 40 minutes long, and so when you're talking for that amount of time, inevitably your mouth is going to dry out and you don't want to be like struggling up there. And so just doing that can be really helpful.
But when you're in this green room and you're in that like time period, usually about 10 to 15 minutes prior to you actually going on stage, they're going to plug you with a lavalier mic. And so this is a mic that basically connects or clips to a shirt or a jacket or something that you're wearing. And then they will do like a quick sound check behind the scenes, make sure everything is getting picked up. They'll do a confirmation of your slides, what your slides look okay, here's what, you know, here's what all that's going to look like. And then they will also usually give you like a tiny clicker device that will help move your slides Mine also had a built-in like laser pointer. I ended up not using it, but it was cool that that was an option available. And when I got actually on the stage, and they had explained this prior, so I kind of knew what to expect and the document had mentioned it prior, but there's actually this giant TV that was just below the stage. So I was like kind of above everyone when you're speaking. And then just below the stage, there's this TV and on the TV, I don't know, I would say it's like maybe a 60 inch TV, like a big flat screen. And it's basically almost flush to the floor, but pointing upward if that makes sense. And on that TV screen, what I could basically see is I could see my current slide, I could see the slide that was upcoming, as well as if I had notes, those were available there as well. And then there was a separate section for how much time I had remaining. This was incredibly helpful because I was trying to figure out like, oh my gosh, like, am I gonna know like, you know, how much to talk and all that kind of stuff. The second point, and so you can then use that to kind of guide the conversation.
So again, just the basic thing is know what the setup looks like on the front end, because I think knowing that really helped relieve a lot of the anxiety that I was feeling about doing this first talk. The second point is find a place to rest and recenter about one to one and a half hours before you have to show up backstage. this really could depend upon personality, right? I'm naturally more of an introvert. I'm also an HSP, a highly sensitive person. So I knew that I needed some time to one get some energy, and then to just ground myself because I would be speaking in between, you know, I ended up speaking in front of I think about 125 to 150 folks. And I knew that all those folks were staring at me. which is, you know, for an introvert, this is like my worst nightmare, right? So I just knew I would need some time. I, to be completely honest, I didn't do a great job of this. And I had planned it out. And I had thought that I had found a corner in the venue that the conference was held at, which is the factory in Franklin, Tennessee. But And I was kind of in this corner, but it still got too loud. There were folks coming in and out. So basically, what I was trying to do is grab like a 25 minute power nap, just because I knew. Also, my talk was at 145. And usually I know like my body to know during that time period. I generally tend to have a dip in energy. And I knew that, you know, trying to get a nap in would be really helpful. Also, my topic was on video podcasting and whether video podcasting is the next big thing. And there was a section in there that was like highly technical. So your recommendations and stuff like that. And I knew just being able to get some rest would have would have been really helpful for me in terms of just being able to remember some of those Now in hindsight what I should have done is I should have asked the conference folks where if there was like a place where I could just kind of rest maybe like the green room that was there available for the stage would have been a great option. or I could have gone back to my car and just rested. The hotel was not an option because I ended up staying with a friend and the friend lives about 30 minutes away, so that would not have just been feasible right in the middle of the conference. But I think in hindsight, I probably would have just gone to my car and rested. Now, that being said, it's not like I was going to get a super restful nap because I noticed like my my like nervous energy was pretty high. And I but I did want to just get some shut. I think I was able to do it because I felt very grounded and centered. But it wasn't as like restful because I remember distinctly feeling like, oh, gosh, I wish these folks were coming through here.
The third point that I just wanted to mention is make sure that the lav mic doesn't hit your clothes when it moves. Before we continue with today's podcast session, just wanted to take a moment to thank the team over at Alma for supporting today's podcast session. So the best way to think about Alma is it's almost like a giant group practice, but because it is a big group practice, a significantly large group practice, they're able to negotiate higher reimbursement rates for you if you are a therapist in private practice that takes insurance. But the cool part I actually wanted to mention today is they actually have a very thriving and active community for professionals. So what does this look like? So one is they actually have a cross-referral network within Alma. So Yeah, you know, therapists can refer clients to you that are good fit. They also, there's opportunities in places where therapists can share resources with each other and just find general support. Now, Alma kind of takes things to the next level, so by being a member of Alma, You also get continuing education courses, workshops with industry experts, as well as peer support groups where clinicians can discuss their work in a very collaborative environment. You can learn more about Alma and sign up over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash Alma. And if you go through that link, there's a special discount or a special bonus there for Selling the Couch listeners. Let's get right back to today's session. So if you're watching this on YouTube I think this will make a little bit more sense but basically I had like a you know like shirt like you know like a dress shirt on and what they did is they ran this mic kind of underneath and underneath through through underneath my shirt and then they had it kind of placed right here. I had a jacket on above and it was fine but I think one thing I didn't realize is I would be doing a lot of moving on the stage And when that happened, the jacket was hitting the lavalier mic, but I myself could not tell that that's what was getting picked up. And so I kept moving. And it wasn't like folks, you know, asked friends for like some honest feedback. And they said it wasn't distracting or anything like that. But there were like some, you know, few moments where it kind of hit a little bit hard, and it was, was a little bit distracting. I think in hindsight what I'll probably do is I will put a I'll either just be aware of the attire that I'm wearing and or you know the person that is outfitting me for the might I will I will kind of demonstrate like hey this is the way I'm planning on walking can we just do a test and make sure it's not gonna hit any of my clothes and I think that should really relieve it.
Number four is use social media to share a before and an after that chronicles and documents your journey. Now, I imagine you're probably listening to this and you're probably the exact same way I was, which is you feel both excited to do a talk and you feel nervous. And the last thing you want to do is add more and more stuff to the plate. But doing this was actually a really good call. So what I basically did is I made two posts on LinkedIn kind of on the same day. So once in the morning, which was about five hours or so before my talk, and then I did a second one three to four hours after my talk. By before, I basically posted a selfie of myself at the conference venue. I tried to pick like a cool vibey place in the background. My photographer site is coming up. But, and I basically said, you know, I'm excited for, I'm excited to be at Mental Health Marketing Conference. And I'm so excited for my talk on whether video podcasting is the next best thing. I'm going to be speaking from I think I said something like I'm going to be speaking from the center stage at, you know, 145. I would love to see you there and something like that. And I think in hindsight, what I what I could have also done is done a call to action like a question like, you know, what questions do you have for me? as you are thinking about starting a video podcast or something like that. I think that would have been really fascinating and would have, I think, helped with engagement of folks that perhaps were not at the conference, but also folks that were at the conference. We could have kept the conversation going on social media. Now, the little nuance I wanted to mention on this is I asked two of my friends in the crowd if they could also take a some pictures of me just on their phone while I was speaking. So shout out to Justin and Anna for helping with that. I'm so grateful for both of you and for getting some great pictures. And the reason I did that is obviously there's I wasn't sure if I would be able to get like a great picture from the video team. video team at the conference within a couple hours. So I felt like just making sure that I could get a picture. Also for like future things like social media posts, or let's say I want to speak at a future conference, I've got an asset that I can then deploy and show and all of that kind of stuff. Now, after the talk was done, about three to four years, I went a bit crazy, three to four hours later, I came off the stage and I posted a picture that, you know, one of my friends had taken. And I basically said three sentences, my first ever conference talk is done. You know, what an unbelievable experience. And I even had a cheering squad or something like that. And that post ended up getting a ton of traction. I think as of this recording, I think it's definitely over 1,500, possibly over 2,000 views. And there were, I think, over 160 likes or comments or, yeah, actually including both, probably well over 200. And so it was just a cool way to keep the conversation going, but also a way to just document the journey. I, you know, I'm a big believer in this concept of building in public and that concept, I think one thing I've realized during the conference is I could document my own journey in the conference as someone attending and doing a conference for the first time and speaking at a conference for the first time.
Number five, I alluded to this, but have a small squad of friends in the crowd sit near the front. This 100% helped calm my nerves. I was like very excited to do the talk, but because there were some technical things and because it was my first talk, And I, I don't know, I felt like, you know, I've done this podcast for nine years and the majority of it has been an audio only format. And in the last year we've gone to video, but there's still something different about that versus you're actually have people in front of you and you're, you know, going off of the crowd. And I know like traditionally when I was, you know, growing up, you know, I did like sermons at church and stuff like that. Then in undergrad, I did model UN and I know when I've done public speaking traditionally, one of two things happens. One is I get like beads of sweat forming on my forehead. And then the other thing that happens is I turn into like a preteen boy and my voice like squeaks for like, you know, half a second before it. It comes back and I was anticipating both of those and it never happened, which was just really interesting. But I think it was fully related to just having some friends in the crowd. I asked them to sit kind of near the front if they could, just so that I could look at them during the conference. and know that and I could kind of read, read them and read off their energy. And it was just wonderful. So I want to like name all of you guys, but you know, thank you. If you did take the time to do that is just so appreciated. The other benefit of that is, you know, with my talk, it wasn't a traditional, like, I didn't want to make it like I talk at you. I wanted us to talk together. And so there were some points in the conversation where I actually just asked from the stage, like, what questions do you all have? Or how are you thinking about it? And it was just nice to have friends in the crowd who were willing to engage and just talk about what was going on and how things were going. Number six is start with a story that people remember. So I started by this talk by sharing the story of how I had severe acne growing up and how I eventually had to go on Accutane, which is this really powerful drug for the acne. But I wove it into why I didn't do video, i.e. YouTube, like this video that I'm recording, why I didn't do that for a number of years, that I felt really self-conscious about having the acne. I still have some scars on my face, especially on my cheeks, and I felt like people were going to look at that, and therefore I didn't want to bring attention to myself. And I also talked about how it impacted my own self-worth. Leading with story is something that I've just kind of learned both through these podcast episodes because usually the emails I get are not, you know, Mel, I love your tactical advice on LinkedIn or on podcasting. It's usually like, Mel, I love the story that you shared about this. I connected with that. And I remember, you know, I went through a similar experience and here's the experience that I went through. And so I knew that stories would be powerful. I also come, you know, having been born and spend my early childhood in India, I come from a very, a culture that that value story. And I think I've thought about all of those kind of things. And I remembered, you know, just even growing up, some of my most fond memories were the stories from my childhood. And so I just thought, let me just start with that story. The little nuance to it is I think my first slide was just a gray slide because I didn't want people to look at the slide. And then also, I wanted that focus to be on me as I shared this story about acne. But somebody in, you know, when I asked for feedback, they said, you know, Mel, it took me a while to figure out the topic was about video podcasting. I didn't initially pick it up from the story and so in hindsight I probably would have just put the first slide as what the topic is just so that folks had an idea of what I was going to talk about. Now the interesting thing after the conference is folks came up and said, you know, some things about like, oh, it was helpful with the technical stuff. But what they most came up over and over was about this story about having acne. They talked about their own acne and how they had it and how it impacted how they saw themselves and all of these different things. And what I also noticed in myself is I had the fortunate opportunity to go to several of the talks. The talks that I remember the most now, two weeks out of this, are the ones where stories were shared. Not just like one story, but even just woven in. And the nuance of that is I even felt more connected to the person that was speaking versus if it was a strictly tactical one. then I found it helpful, but I don't know that I felt like a full connection to the person. So it's just something to think about as you start to do these talks. The final thing I wanted to mention is, man, there is a crazy amount of power in doing a talk like this. It's something, to be completely honest, that I have never felt before. When I was on the stage, so I had a very cool moment, like I was definitely in this flow state because I noticed I was incredibly calm. I felt like I knew the subject matter really well. And what the amazing part that let me know I was in flow is there were moments in this talk where I've referenced talks that had happened one to two hours before and just wove them like very spontaneously into the conversation. But when I was on the stage, I was like keenly aware of, oh, my gosh, the endorphin rush of being on stage is something I'd never ever felt before. Not even like doing this podcast. People are paying attention to you and then they basically come up to you and tell you like how great you are. Which obviously I'm grateful for and it's like really humbling but it's like on another level I was like oh wow this is really powerful. I've shared this in other episodes but one of the you know we're all wounded healers I feel like and one of the things for me is As a result of my own trauma, I really crave external validation, because for the longest time, I could never fully believe what I felt about myself, or I couldn't even access that for the longest time. And so I always look to other people to tell me, like, was I doing an okay job? And, man, public speaking feels like a drug that fosters that, like, for external validation like no other. I just, I remember, you know, and just to even be, like, open and honest, I remember the contrast of coming, being at the conference and then coming back home and having to shift into, like, husband mode and parent mode and feeling like, you know, and then it was like, you know, got a cry kiddo or all of this right very much of different contrasts and from the conference and i think i felt this that juxtaposition i was like man i gotta really like i loved public speaking i could you know i was scared of whether it would be a good fit i wasn't actually sure but i loved it and i can see myself doing like you know a handful of conferences a year but one thing i realize is i really want to pace myself i don't think my my body is like ready to do like you know five six conferences a year to be honest i don't even know if i want to do that because i don't think that's the lifestyle that i want at least in this season of life but i was like keenly aware of it and so what i think i'm going to do is i'm going to kind of go from like speak at one to two conferences just to give my body some time to catch up. And yeah, so again, just the seven points. Know what the setup in front of you looks like and even behind the scenes, especially with your mic. Two is find a place to rest and recenter about an hour to hour and a half before you have to show up backstage. Three is make sure you have the lav mic. Your lav mic doesn't hit the clothes, especially if you're going to be moving on or moving around the stage and not necessarily like just from a lectern. Number four is use social media to share a before and after shot of your journey. Number five is have a small squad of friends that are going to be cheering you on. Number six is start with a story that people remember, that connects, that speaks from the heart to the heart. And then the final thing is there's a crazy power in doing the talk and there might be wisdom in pacing yourself if you want to go down this public speaking route. I hope you enjoyed this and thank you again for taking the time to listen and have a great rest of your day. Bye.
Narrator: Thanks for listening to the selling the couch podcast. For more great content and to stay up to date, visit www dot selling the couch.com.
Melvin Varghese: Hey there, I hope that you enjoyed today's session. Thank you again for taking the time to listen all the way through. If you are a therapist and you're specifically in a season where you're a seasoned therapist and you are wanting to move from clinical to online course income, We actually have a specific mastermind for therapists who are doing this. So this is basically a group of really kind and supportive therapists who are also wildly successful as business owners. We meet together to build and grow and scale our online courses. you can learn more about that mastermind over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash mastermind all one word sellingthecouch.com forward slash mastermind thank you so much for taking the time to listen to today's session
timestamps00:00:00 – Mel's Intro
00:01:56 – Know the Setup
00:15:44 – Have a Supportive Squad
00:18:24 – Start with a Memorable Story
00:25:06 – Mel's Reflections
selling the couch podcast with melvin varghese phdWeekly interviews, strategy, and advice for building your private practice in and beyond the therapy room.
Apple podcastsYou TubeSpotify ready to launch your online course?Please check out our free online course starter kit for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This FREE 7-day email course will help you validate your course idea (so that you can create a course that has buyers).
sign up for free course starter kitready to launch your podcast?Please check out our FREE podcasting workshop for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This workshop is pre-recorded so you can watch it on a day and time that works for your schedule.
It contains a lot of practical tips that we've learned as STC has reached 1.81 million+ downloads and become a 6-figure business with podcasting as the backbone.
sign up for podcasting workshopMelvin varghese phdPsychologist and Founder @ Selling The Couch
Melvin Varghese, PhD is a licensed psychologist in Philadelphia, PA. In 2015, Dr. Varghese founded Selling The Couch, a podcast to help therapists move from clinical to online income.
On the podcast, he interviews successful practitioners about how they've built their practices, social media/marketing experts, and shares lessons as he uses our clinical skills to create an online business powered by podcasting + online courses.
The podcast is one of the top Career podcasts in Apple Podcasts, has been downloaded over 1.8 million times, and is heard in over 125 countries. Mel is a successful course creator with 240+ students and $300k+ in course sales.
More PostsCorporate Transparency Act: What Therapists Need To Know Before 2025by Melvin Varghese | Nov 2, 2024 | Blog, Growing Your Practice, Private Practice, STC Podcast
Melvin Varghese talking about the Corporate Transparency Act out of Anti Money Laundering Act with Dan Mayer and David Yood
7 Subtle Public Speaking Tips I Learned From My First Conference Talkby Melvin Varghese | Oct 24, 2024 | Mel On Other Podcasts, Passive Income for Therapists, Public Speaking, STC Podcast
Melvin Varghese speaking at the Mental Health Marketing Conference, in Franklin, TN.
Burnout in High Achieving Mental Health Professionals: A Conversation with Dr. Jessi Goldby Melvin Varghese | Oct 19, 2024 | Growing Your Practice, Mindset, Private Practice, STC Podcast
Melvin Varghese holding a copy of the book How Do You Feel by author, Jessi Gold, M.D., MS
« Older Entries The post 7 Subtle Public Speaking Tips I Learned From My First Conference Talk appeared first on Selling The Couch | Melvin Varghese PhD.
375: Burnout in High-Achieving Mental Health ProfessionalsWritten By Melvin Varghese PhDRecently, I had the pleasure of speaking with Dr. Jessi Gold, the Chief Wellness Officer at the University of Tennessee's health system. Dr. Gold oversees wellness initiatives across five campuses, serving a staggering 59,000 students.
She recently authored a book titled How Do You Feel? One Doctor's Search for the Humanity in Medicine, which delves into the challenges faced by healthcare providers, particularly in the realm of mental health.
We began our conversation by talking about the unique challenges of Dr. Gold's role, particularly the importance of breaking down silos within academia and healthcare. She emphasized the need for a coordinated approach to wellness that encompasses not just emotional and physical health, but also financial, spiritual, and social well-being. Dr. Gold shared her passion for identifying common themes across campuses and helping students navigate the often fragmented mental health resources available to them.
A significant part of our discussion revolved around the inherent flaws in the mental health system and how these contribute to burnout among clinicians especially those of us who are high-achievers building private practices and businesses. This part of the chat reminded me a lot of a previous chat that I had with Jeanetta Garrison on defining what success looks like for YOU as a therapist vs. simply relying on an external metric like $1 million/year or 10 clinicians.
Dr. Gold candidly shared a personal experience where she forgot a patient she had seen just three weeks prior, which led her to confront her own burnout and the pressures of her role. This moment of vulnerability highlighted the importance of self-care and the need for clinicians to prioritize their own mental health.
We explored the cultural expectations placed on mental health providers, including the tendency to prioritize others' needs over our own and how this mindset can lead to a disconnect between what we preach to our clients and how we care for ourselves. She emphasized the importance of recognizing early signs of burnout and reframing our understanding of self-care as a necessity rather than a luxury.
Throughout the episode, Dr. Gold shared valuable insights on the impact of the COVID-19 pandemic on mental health professionals, noting that while the pandemic forced many to confront their own well-being, it also highlighted the systemic issues that existed long before. We discussed the importance of self-compassion, allowing ourselves to feel our emotions, and seeking support through therapy.
As we wrapped up our conversation, Dr. Gold offered practical advice for clinicians navigating the complexities of caregiving for loved ones while maintaining their professional responsibilities. She encouraged listeners to be kind to themselves, to recognize the importance of their own mental health, and to seek help when needed.
This episode is a heartfelt reminder that as mental health providers, we must not only care for our clients but also for ourselves.
Transcript (AI-Generated)Melvin Varghese:
Hey, it's Melvin. Before we jump into today's podcast session, just wanted to take a moment to thank the team over at Alma for supporting today's podcast session. If you are a solo practitioner that wants to take insurance or you've been taking insurance and you're either frustrated with the reimbursement rates or just done with all of the administrative headaches of going through insurance, definitely encourage you to check out Alma. They handle all of that. And the best part is that you actually get reimbursed within two weeks of the appointment. You can learn more about Alma and the services that they provide over at SellingTheCouch.com forward slash Alma. SellingTheCouch.com forward slash Alma. Hey, it's Melvin. Before we jump into today's podcast session, just wanted to take a moment to say thank you from the bottom of my heart for taking the time to listen to this podcast and taking the time out of your day to listen. You know, when I launched this podcast back in 2015, it was done with a lot of fear, and a lot of uncertainty, and I just never realized the impact that it would have on so many. And for that, I'm just so humbled and so grateful. If you do find the podcast helpful, if you could do a small favor for me, which is to subscribe to the Selling the Couch podcast, the best way to do that is to go to sellingthecouch.com forward slash listen and subscribe on your favorite channel and on your favorite device.
Practically, this allows the podcast to be able to reach more people, for us to increase our download numbers, which also helps us to land bigger guests, so that we can serve you through these guest interviews. Have a wonderful day, and I hope that you enjoyed today's session. Hello, hello, welcome to today's session of Selling the Couch. I hope you're doing well, having an incredible day. So today's podcast is with Dr. Jesse Gold. Dr. Gold is the chief wellness officer at the University of Tennessee's health system, basically is in charge of five campuses, 59,000 students across these campuses, and Jesse actually recently wrote a book called How Do You Feel? One Doctor's Search for the Humanity in Medicine.
I wanted to have this conversation with Jesse because I feel like as clinicians, and Jesse is a trained psychiatrist, so I wanted to have this conversation because I feel like as clinicians, many of us, right, have realized this for a long time, and many of us are currently realizing, which is realizing, especially here in the US, how flawed the health care system is, and how do we exist as clinicians in the midst of this to do good work, yet And on another level, how do we sustain ourselves from a holistic perspective, not just self-care and mental health, but from a whole perspective? And that's the conversation that we're having today. Jessie made an error, which she will share more about. But basically, a patient that she had seen three weeks prior, she had a second session with this patient and completely forgot they had met the first time. And it led to Jessie realizing just how much she was teetering on the edge of burnout and all of those kinds of things and what she learned about herself and how do we do good work in the world and also prioritize self-care. I think you're gonna really love this conversation. I learned a lot as well. Here's my conversation with Dr. Jessie Gold from drjessiegold.com. Hey, Jessie, welcome to Selling the Couch.
Dr. Jessi Gold, MD:
Thank you so much for having me.
Melvin Varghese:
Goodness. I'm excited. Shout out to our mutual friend Tamara for connecting us and also the magic of LinkedIn. You know, I feel like, I don't know about you and LinkedIn, but my whole understanding of LinkedIn has always been, it's like job updates or I'm looking for a job. And it's interesting how it's like completely changing. I feel like in the last, I don't know, year and a half, two years.
Dr. Jessi Gold, MD:
I've never been a LinkedIn person. I was always a Twitter or, you know, the artist formerly known as Twitter person, but I feel like academics is sort of looking for a new space and that a lot of people have gone to LinkedIn for it because of kind of what you're saying, like that was a place for jobs and discussing some topics related to that. And then it was a natural transition maybe. So I have had a lot of academic friends kind of transition to LinkedIn. So I'm trying it. I'm not great at it, but I'm trying.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, listen, I feel like I'm in the crash test dummy phrase of LinkedIn as well, trying a bunch of different stuff. But you're right. I do feel like there's been a huge segment of folks that are either cross-posting on Twitter X or whatever it's being called these days and LinkedIn or just have shifted completely to LinkedIn. But Yeah, it's a cool platform. And I mean, you're doing so many amazing things. And even I thought a lot about like how to even guide our conversation. So you're the first chief wellness officer for the University of Tennessee system. That sounds like a both an amazing job and then kind of a fun job. And then could also be an extremely stressful job because there are five campuses, 59,000 students. So two part question on this. What's your favorite part of the job and what's been the most challenging?
Dr. Jessi Gold, MD:
Yeah, for your listeners, Tennessee's a really big state if you've never been there. So when we also talk about five schools, it's a lot of landmass. I think people don't realize how big of a state it is, but it is a pretty big state and all of the campuses are pretty spread out. But I have the unique job of being placed at the system, which means that I have this sort of coordinated approach to what's going on on all five for wellness defined really broadly. So we kind of use the eight domains definition, which is not just emotional or physical wellness, but is also financial, spiritual, occupational, social, right? So all these things intersecting to make well-being. And so what I get to talk about is the ways that the schools are doing well, the ways that the schools need help, the things that they're struggling across the board on. And I think my favorite thing is silo breaking. So academics is very, very siloed in any bit of academics. I come from a healthcare space as well, and it's pretty siloed there. And, you know, when you have five schools and each school has a bunch of different divisions doing a bunch of different things, all related to the same topic, my job is really to figure out like where the redundancies are, what students even understand, how to help students better understand navigating that process. And it's really fun to be like, these silos were not created for the user. And my job is to get rid of that. And it's not something you always get to do. And I feel very supported in it. And the most challenging bit is probably the scope. I think it's a big scope and it's hard to start even. I've been pretty mindful about really doing more of like a needs assessment and an assessment of where we are up front before trying to do anything new or put anything new in place. But that doesn't always feel, sexy is the wrong word, but that's what comes to mind to people when you're like, I'm going to spend a year getting all of our data on one page, you know, and be able to compare between schools. And so it's just a lot of information and a lot of directions you can go. And it can be pretty hard to know exactly where to start or where to lay your hat. And so that part can be challenging. And I mean, I guess I like that challenge too, but that would be the thing that if I was to tell you like the hardest thing about my job is for sure the scope.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, no, I'm so glad you outlined that because I was thinking even as you were sharing at a practical level, I mean, I'm sure you have the main University of Tennessee system, which I'm sure is huge. And then you probably have these, you know, these smaller campuses, but size wise, and even, I don't know, like staff wise, all that stuff is all different, right? So it's almost like you're having to do, I don't know, I would think like, five different like factors into play and
Dr. Jessi Gold, MD:
super different and the cultures are different too, right? So a tiny campus is going to have a really different culture than a big football-centered fraternity and sorority campus in the United States, right? So I think that can be really hard to know exactly what to do. And they all have their individual identities. And so my job is not ever to go change or do something completely like this campus because it's working there, but to see like common themes, how you support a smaller campus with the larger campus, how you keep their cultures the same, but kind of look at what the barriers are on each campus because of that, because a rural campus is going to have different approaches to mental health. and wellness, but particularly mental health than other campuses. And so understanding that is essential for people even going to seek out resources or ask for help, you know.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. You used the phrase silo breaking, which I just thought was such a wonderful phrase. You know, most of the listeners for STC are mental health providers. How have you navigated just silo breaking, particularly related to mental health? And then again, like you said, Tennessee broad, like all these different campuses, different cultures, like how have you thought about that or thinking about it?
Dr. Jessi Gold, MD:
Yeah. So, I mean, the mental health system is inherently broken and the breaking in all of the places that exist definitely contributes to people not getting help at different points along the way. So that is a silo in itself, just like navigating and understanding the system. You could create a system that works, like most campuses have a college counseling center with some therapists, some psychiatrists, some outreach folks, and they're doing a lot of work and working so, so hard. But, you know, getting people in and even understanding that is a whole process. Understanding, you know, for faculty and staff to know where to send people and when I think is a whole process. So that's another sort of silo in mental health, which is like people are most likely to present to their friends, their family. or a faculty or coach first, and a faculty or coach person is often not trained in mental health the same way we are for sure, but even just to know, okay, that's a warning sign, now I send them to here is an education and process in itself that affects the faculty and the staffs. own mental health, which is another kind of component there that often gets neglected. And so I think across the board, how do we talk about these topics and identify them? What do we like know about how to send people? Where are the breakdowns along the way? And then, you know, really important to me too, like our own mental health in the process. So not just faculty and staff, but the folks doing the work. So I think that it's really hard to be a college mental health provider. Sometimes the system there often is set up for short term therapy. And so you're really trying to get people in and get people out. And that's hard in itself when you're not necessarily trained like that and people are not coming in with these like perfect prescribed one issue to target problems. And so, you know, I think that can be pretty hard, especially in a resource poor environment for some students where you don't want to just send them to a community because there could really not be anything in the community, let alone a long wait list or maybe not as good as going to you. And so I think all of that contributes to because you have sort of like the school ecosystem, but it can only support so much. And so you do need to rely on what's going on in the cities or what could be going on virtually. And that creates even more layers of kind of complication and siloing, I guess you could say.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, it's fascinating. I mean, you know, a lot of my training was that I university counseling centers. And so I know at a real level, like the challenges of that short term therapy model and like referring out and all of the layers and layers that go into that. Thank you for articulating that. Wanted to shift a little bit. You're releasing your first book or I guess by the time this episode goes, it'll officially Well, I guess it's officially live. Congratulations. It's titled How Do You Feel? One Doctor's Search for Humanity in Medicine. What do you think makes it so hard to care for oneself, especially as a mental health provider, while also caring for others?
Dr. Jessi Gold, MD:
Yeah, I mean, I think it's a lot of reasons. I think one is just kind of the people that we are. So we enter the field prioritizing other people before we prioritize ourselves and often are writing these essays like I just want to do that to help people. Right. And so inherently at our core, we are focused on others before we are focused on ourselves. And I think training only makes that worse, because in lots of ways, training either tells you that you shouldn't have your own emotions and your own reactions, or tells you to sort of remove them as much as possible from the patient setting. Self-disclosure is not encouraged. Freud made that even worse by sort of saying we should be blank slates in mental health. And that just doesn't make any sense in my opinion. But I think it does contribute to this like desire to push down and ignore our own emotional reactions. As much as our training programs like talk about things like countertransference and how we feel when a patient's talking to us, I think we talk about it in an academic way to then go back to helping the patient. We don't necessarily always talk about, okay, well, if that affects you, you should be getting help for that. I also think applying things to ourself is not as easy as we think it is. There's sort of this baseline This is just how I'm supposed to feel when I do a job like this. It's just supposed to emotionally affect me. It just boasts to make me tired. It's just supposed to be like this. Everyone else looks like this, whatever you want to say. Right. And so our baseline is to kind of be burnt out. And so when we look around, everyone else seems burnt out. And if we go, I'm not sure I should be burnt out. It feels almost like identifying a weakness or a reason you might lose in a perfectionism competition where we're all overachieving perfectionists and don't want to lose. And so we don't get help in that sense. Or, you know, I think inherently we're all pretty bad at practicing what we preach in that we might understand signs and symptoms, but not in ourselves, especially not until it starts to interfere with work. So we try, and this is a problem in college students too, we have this like objective measure of not okay. And that is like. Is my school affected or is my work affected? It has nothing to do with anything else. Like sometimes I'll ask college students like what the rest of their life looks like and they haven't left their room. They're just eating like takeout. They don't talk to friends. They're drinking. But but their grades are getting A's. So, you know, they're fine. Right. And you're like, oh, there's a disconnect here. And I think we do the same thing. We say, well, I haven't dropped a ball at work. I'm still being a good clinician to my patients or clients, depending on who you are and how you define that. But we don't notice all of the steps along the way sort of leading up to it because we aren't checking on ourselves. We aren't applying those symptoms to ourselves, and it isn't affecting work. So inherently, we must be okay, right? So I think that contributes all kind of compounded.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, it's just it's so fascinating, because I think you're right, like, there's definitely this weird badge of honor kind of thing, right? Also, of like, I can take on x amount, like, it's usually around, I can see x amount of clients or patients back to back, or I can over my overall caseload is this many people and, but then like, I'm kind of curious, for you, what have you noticed? I've noticed there's been a little bit of a shift, especially pandemic and post-pandemic, of clinicians being like, oh my gosh, is this model that we've been taught consciously or subconsciously, is that the best and most sustainable thing? What have you observed?
Dr. Jessi Gold, MD:
Yeah, I mean, I'm glad you mentioned that badge of honor thing, too, because I think people would probably be surprised the stories I've heard from health care workers, especially in sort of what they've done when they're sick and what their limits are. I mean, I've heard so many stories of people like miscarrying at work, you know, going getting in a car wreck, going to their shift and then going to the ER. Right. Like these things that just are illogical, but that you know, in a lot of ways are a really high barrier for physical health. So mental health doesn't even scratch the surface of what's an acceptable reason to not work. And I think, you know, when you think back of stories in training, like I can think of times I thought it was cool that somebody like passed out, ate a banana and came back into a surgical case. Right. And that shouldn't be something that I thought was cool, but it's kind of viewed like that, just like you're saying. And so, you know, we don't want to miss work because we're not supposed to. And, you know, I think when we think of the role of COVID, COVID forced us to miss work, right? There were a lot of rules around who could work and who couldn't. And I think we kind of went, oh, why were we working before? And it did reevaluate that in a lot of ways. It didn't make us feel less bad. for the burden we place on patients or the burden we place on our colleagues for needing to be out. But it was like this, these are the number of days you have to be out when this is the case, the end, right? And there's nothing you could do about it. And it kind of forced in a very strong way, you to take those days and realize that like, if you took one day now, maybe that would be okay, right? Like people can handle it. I think we're also, you know, because it universally impacted not just clinicians, but the whole population mentally, I think there was more conversation around it. So it was more normalized, like, hey, like our jobs do affect us. Our jobs are not easy. It's okay if our jobs affect us, but you should do something about it so you can keep doing your job and keep supporting yourself. I worry sometimes though that like we view it like this COVID fairy came down from the clouds and made everything worse. And when the COVID fairy left, we're going to be fine now. And that worries me. I mean, it's one reason I felt kind of motivated to write a book on that time period and that conversation because it wasn't good before COVID just compounded things and made it worse and trauma has no timeline. So the envisioning of it. Being fine now doesn't make any sense and I think it's really important for people to realize that that stuff's gonna affect us for a while But we weren't good to begin with and what we should take out of it is more Oh, we should care about our mental health. Oh, we should care about ourselves in this conversation It shouldn't be I just did for that time period because they made me and it was a particularly hard time period now We're fine again, and that worries me. I think a little bit
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. I mean, I'm so glad you outlined it. I mean, even like we're navigating this currently as a family, you know, my partners had to go back into the office, like, and, you know, we've got a young child at home and it's like, we went through COVID where, you know, she was able to work from home and we were able to kind of just like manage a lot of like childcare stuff. And now it's like, this new normal of like she's got to get up early and go and often comes back late. And I'm like, oh, I got to I got to do this or do that. And then, oh, yeah, we have to go pick up. And it's it is it's interesting. And I do I have the same concern as well of how it seems like quickly we've reverted back like we're oh, post pandemic, we're beyond like and now like we're I don't know, in some ways, I feel like this is even harder, you know.
Dr. Jessi Gold, MD:
It should be, I think. Like, that's the point is it made it worse. It didn't make it like just a blip worse. It made it worse compounded. And, you know, the stuff you're talking about too, like we forget we're humans doing the job and we like to pretend that like we have life over here and work over here and they don't intertwine, but that's impossible. When I don't sleep, a patient's story affects me much more. When I'm going through something at all challenging, a patient's story affects me much more. And I'll catch myself, like I had a time period where my dog, not my current dog, my previous dog, like had a sudden illness and was dying and I wasn't sleeping and I was in the doggy ER with her a lot and You know, for me, I was like, that was the first time I realized how much like my external life impacted my ability to deal with what patients were dealing with because it was all of a sudden like, oh my gosh, the world is really dark and depressing. And it was it was somehow like I didn't hear it before because we had learned so much to hold everything that patients are saying, no matter how dark and traumatic and challenging. But for some reason, like without that extra layer of sort of like, I mean, to use a word that will make people cringe, like resilience. you know, without that extra layer, because I was dealing with my own emotional stuff and dealing with my own stuff, like I just couldn't like unhear it. And I actually like cried after a patient told me their story, like not in session, but after and was like, what is wrong with me? But I had to realize that like our lives do impact our work and vice versa. And you can't just say one's over here and one's over here and we're good.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, and especially I think as we age, right? Like, I don't know, inevitably life gets more complicated. We're, you know, caring for loved ones or have additional responsibilities or responsibilities that we have just seem so weighty, right? And it is really hard to just like, you know, say, oh, let me just separate that out from the clinical work that I'm doing. Which brings me to the book. So, you know, so much of your story about especially being superhuman and just going above and beyond, taking on anything and everything. And often like, you know, in past episodes of the podcast, I've shared it, like, I'm sure this happens at a lot of families, but particularly like in Indian families, we, a lot of our parents bought these like corral plates, like often from like Walmart, right? and they come in different sizes. And for me, if my life priorities and stuff I have is like a small Corral plate, it's so easy for me to swap it out with a large one as more and more responsibilities come on. And there was a quote just in the writer for the book, I'll just read it. It says, her patients, colleagues, and loved ones needed her. So who was she to say no to any opportunity to help, be that an extra therapy session, corporate wellness talk, or favor for a friend? She was a doctor trained to serve, to put the needs of others before her own. But when Jessie is so mentally overwhelmed that she commits an unthinkable error during a patient session, she's forced to re-evaluate everything that the medical system has taught her. What was the error?
Dr. Jessi Gold, MD:
Yeah, it's so interesting. I mean, people listening, especially the people who do mental health, will understand why to me it was a serious error. Other people have said that wasn't that bad. But really, so I completely forgot I missed. I met a patient before and I reintroduced myself like I was in a first session and gave the same spiel like I was in a first session. And then the patient was like, Dr. Gold, I met you three weeks ago, you know, and I've never done that before. Charts help, obviously, with things like that. But when you're so bogged down and you haven't had a chance to really like get into that. You know, I didn't really have time to look and see that I'd seen the patient before. I had time to go. I have an hour appointment and an hour appointment usually means that it's a new patient for me. And if it's not, then it's because they're chatty or they need more time or they're anxious, but I didn't think about that. I just thought one hour new patient go. And I started talking in the, I could just like feel the rupture in the room. Right. Like, and, and how much, like, I mean, we were on zoom, but how much even physically the patient pulled away in discomfort and sort of like went in on themselves about sort of you know, how hard it is to tell someone your story in what we do and not have them remember you is not great. And didn't, you know, I worked really hard to sort of get that back, but I felt horrible. I mean, and I think I had never done something like that before. I've been told by other people it's not that serious because it wasn't a mistake that injured someone, but I really don't like that that's our bar, and that's my healthcare worker patient's bar. I'm okay. I didn't hurt anyone today. I hurt somebody. I emotionally hurt that person because they told me a lot about them that they had never told anyone, and instead of proving that I knew that and validating that, I forgot them. And that felt really bad to me. It felt really bad to them. And, you know, it was kind of a product of too much going on for me. I was burnt out and didn't define it that way. I was starting a program for like, you know, our faculty and staff to get care and at the same time doing all the outreach for it. I had a lot of guilt about being a frontline worker who was behind a screen all day. And all of that kind of compounded to me just not being as present as I would have liked to be and not being as on top of my job as I would like to be in our job as people and people who don't tell people their stories very often and people who. need us to be a certain way so they feel safe and secure. And I wasn't that. And it really upset me because I try really hard to be that person. And sometimes, obviously, we can't be as good as, you know, we can't be perfect all the time. But this really did impact me significantly because I did feel like I hurt that person.
Melvin Varghese:
First of all, thank you so much for even articulating and sharing that. I think it's one thing to talk about it and write about it in a book, but to be able to just verbalize that, I thank you for just doing that. You were burnt out, but you didn't define it that way. Looking back, what were things that you were like, I was definitely teetering?
Dr. Jessi Gold, MD:
You know, I've learned over time that I have early signs that I don't notice at all. And an early sign for me is that my email or my patient inbox, like messages, make me angry, not sort of mad. Like I'm going to take my computer and throw it across the room angry. And it is because an email or a patient message in an inbox is asking for something. They need something, need an answer to a question. They need me to give a talk. They need me to be present in some way. They're not like, Hey, Jesse, how are you? Just checking to say hi. Right? Like most of your emails or most of your messages are asks. And if you have nothing to give and ask is like an affront on your existence. And so I've learned that that's a really early sign for me that I tend to blow off and just go, I think I'm just mad today. But now I sort of go, why am I mad? What's that about? And do I need to look at that further? I mean, I got to the point where I was sleeping every day after work, like really burnt out. Like it looked like a physical illness to me. Like I would finish patients and then go sit on my couch to watch like an hour of television and decompress. And I would wake up three hours later. and not even know that I had fallen asleep and then it messed up my night sleep, obviously. But, you know, it was one of those like sleeps where your whole body just goes like out and you don't even know because you didn't even have a chance to fight it because you're that tired. And so I actually really did think I had a physical illness because it made sense to me that like it was a physical illness how tired I was, but it was really like my body's reaction to the job and the systems and like what we were dealing with, but I couldn't I had trouble seeing that, and especially until it was that bad, right? Like I clearly had other stuff that I could have noticed ahead of time where a slight intervention could have been helpful, but it got to the point where when you're like that, you have to take time, you have to get vacation, you have to take time off work, or you have to like you can't There's no other real answer at that point. Like yoga is going to make somebody want you to like, you're going to punch someone in the face if they suggest it. But if someone suggests yoga, when you're just mad at your email, it actually could be helpful, right? It's a, it's a scale problem. And most of the time when we suggest that stuff, everyone's at the 10 out of 10, not the three out of 10. And so, you know, being mindful of that in my own life is really important. Part of the reason for the title of the book, the like, how do you feel bit is the you. And I don't ask myself enough, like, yes, in our job, we spend tons of time saying that to each other, to patients and clients. But like the you, when applied to me as a human, I neglect. And I think that's the part where. If I paid attention more, I would notice subtle changes. If I paid attention more, I would notice before it's really bad. And I try to be better about that now, but it was like kind of a reckoning in some capacity for me.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, it's, I don't know, I feel like for so many of us, I can just speak for myself, like, I'm really, I was like, you know, heavy into clinical work, I tried to be consistent between what I was saying and what I was doing. But I noticed there was like this, at times, there was a disconnect, you know, I would encourage self care to my clients. But then often, I wouldn't do things until I was like, seven or eight. And by then, like, you're right, like a yoga session or doing like deep breathing or getting out for a hike, you know, it's not gonna like really move the needle. You know, it's often you're spot on. It's usually in those moments when it's three, four. And I think you're right. Like it's the not dismissing the little patterns, right? That's the key.
Dr. Jessi Gold, MD:
And we would tell a patient that or a client that, right? Like we would say, Oh, pay attention to that. Oh, what do you think that means? Or, you know, we would try to get them to identify those patterns in them. We just don't do it to ourselves. We just assume that we're are okay all the time and aren't all of a sudden not okay. Like I, if you would ask me, I'd be like, I don't know where this came from. I'm just sleeping every day after work. And that's just weird. And it wasn't like an obvious buildup. It was like a catastrophe. Right. And that there's no way that was true. But that's all I could pay attention to because it wasn't a problem till it was a really big problem.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. You know, one of the things that I struggle with is because I know I have this like overachiever perfectionist side of me. That side of me can easily dismiss these three, four level kind of things. How do you navigate that? Because I think that's the real battle for me of like, well, listen, you know where this is headed, you know? But it can be really easy to be like, hey, I'll just cut it out.
Dr. Jessi Gold, MD:
Yeah, I mean, I think we're all a lot of us are perfectionists. It probably helped us get where we are. And I think the overwork probably did too. I think a key for me has been to recognize that it's not actually a failure to have this be an issue, right? Like it's not actually a failure to burn out, it's life. If you do as much as we do, if you see patients like we do, if you are balancing 45 different things in your life and then doing work, of course you're going to burn out. And so I've almost like shifted my mindset to being like, it's an expectation instead of a mistake or a failure or something that proves that like, I did something wrong. And that's helped me be a lot better about noticing the early stuff because I'm like, I'm going to burn out because I know I'm going to burn out. I'm going to need to pay attention to the fact that I might burn out and then I can make adjustments along the way because I don't want to burn out so badly that it affects my job or that I have to take time off. I want to pay attention and do a better job adjusting along the way. And so that shift has really helped me.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, I'm glad you're articulating that because I think similar for me, and I don't know if I get it right all the time, but realizing where the path is going and realizing, wow, this has happened before. I think that's been really key. The final question, Jesse, I was I'd love to hear your thought, like as a fellow mental health professional, I feel like so many of us as clinicians are entering seasons where we're caregiving for loved ones or we're entering like later stages of life or retiring, or we realize maybe we need caregiving. What would you share with them? And many of us are still doing clinical work and navigating all of this.
Dr. Jessi Gold, MD:
You know, self-compassion is really big there. I try to pay attention to the things I tell myself because the things I tell myself are quite mean. I think it goes to the perfectionism bit as well. And if you hear those thoughts out loud, you would never say them to a client or patient or friend. You just wouldn't be like, you made an error because you're an idiot, right? Like you just couldn't tell someone that. And when you hear that, you're like, why am I so mean to me? And so I think reframing that is really important. I think allowing yourself to have feelings is really important. So I think we learn in training to tamp down in our own feelings and our own reactions. And maybe we already had that from our own cultural upbringings or whatever else that compounded gender. Right. So all of those things compound that, but. Feelings don't go away just because you push them down and push them down. They just manifest in other ways, like falling asleep every day after work, right? And so I think we need to let ourselves have feelings and not judge ourselves for them. I think if it feels authentic to you to be self-disclosing in times where it makes sense in clients and patients, that's okay. I think we don't learn it enough because I think we think we're not supposed to, but there are great ways to use it that can really help patients and can help you in your sort of authenticity journey to practicing the way you want to be practicing. And I think that matters too. And then lastly, I'd say, like, I go to therapy every week. I don't have a clear issue that I'm dealing with every week, but it makes me better at my job. It makes me better able to identify those things and those thought patterns. And I need that. And it makes me have an hour a week where no matter what, I will be taking care of me. And so in the context of all that you were describing, it's very easy to go, oh, I just don't have time for that this week. But to me, it feels like just another appointment, like I would for a patient, except for I'm the patient, right? Like it's fit in that way. And it really makes a difference. And I mean, my therapist is awesome. Half the book is probably like a gigantic thank you note to her and in like the most creepy, but also kind way possible. But, you know, it makes a big difference to my ability to take care of other people, to have someone who's also supporting me outside of friends and family. And I really would encourage folks that you know, you have that mindset a lot of time in training and it's encouraged in training and then we lose it. We still can benefit from that in different ways. And our job didn't get easier just because we're not in training. So paying attention to that and actually taking care of ourselves in that way can make a big difference.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, thank you for saying all of that. I think, I don't know, maybe it's just like the wisdom of aging. Or I realized like for the longest time, I took so much pride in like how much I could stretch and push myself. But now I think particularly seeing like a lot of friends, you know, loved ones with like terminal illnesses and these kind of things, like the last year and a half, I've really tried to say What if the other stuff I'm doing outside of work, what if I optimize for those? And I wonder if it could have a significant effect on my work. And it's not like a, I feel like it's more of a journey. You know, for me, it's like, you know, I have this wellness spa that I go to every week now. I do, you know, therapy as well, try to do a daily hike. But all of these things in the past, I used to think of it as like you're just being lazy, right? And it's keeping you away from the work, whereas I'm like slowly realizing those things actually help me to do better work, which is just so weird.
Dr. Jessi Gold, MD:
Well, so often we're like, oh, we have to keep studying. If I just keep studying, I'll be better. Instead of going, if I took a break, I'd actually be better at the test or better at studying after, right? And I think we apply that to work and our lives just as much. It's like, oh, I have to spend time on myself. Oh, no. Then somebody can beat me or I'm not being as good at my job or whatever it is. And I actually agree with you. Like I does take in some reframing from me, too. But like time out on me makes me better in all the other ways. We just don't view it like that. It doesn't always have to be a hike or something that takes a lot of time. Sometimes people just think about something when they're jelling in and out of a room or when they're walking the stairs at work or they're driving to work on a commute or on a train or whatever. there are these little moments in our lives where we're probably just not paying as much attention but could be focusing on ourselves and that can be helpful too, I think.
Melvin Varghese:
Awesome. Jessie, I'm so grateful for you, excited for you as the book launches. Where can we learn more about you, about the book and the awesome work that you're doing in the world today?
Dr. Jessi Gold, MD:
So I'm at Dr. Jesse Gold on most platforms. Jesse spelled J-E-S-S-I. I also have a website that's just drjessegold.com. And on there is like all the articles I write. You can get more information about my book. You can see where I'm going on tour for some of it and all of that's there. And you can contact me through it as well.
Melvin Varghese:
Perfect. Thank you again for this conversation. And I'm so excited for the ways that, well, I'm so encouraged by your courage to share something so vulnerable that most clinicians wouldn't talk about. And I'm just so encouraged by the ways that it's going to help other colleagues.
Dr. Jessi Gold, MD:
That would be my honor. So thank you for saying that. I hope that it does.
Melvin Varghese:
Have a great rest of your day.
Dr. Jessi Gold, MD:
Thank you. You too.
Melvin Varghese:
Hey there, I hope you enjoyed my conversation with Jesse and especially if you are in a season as a clinician and as a business owner where you do feel like you're in that early stage of burnout and or you may be a little bit further along I hope that today's conversation has just been really helpful for you. And you know, more than anything, I hope that it normalizes that each of us are worthy of self care. What you know, I just wanted to like highlight something I shared on the actual interview, which is, you know, for the longest time, I felt like I had to take on more and do more. And the what I could handle was a byproduct of my own competence and my own ability as a clinician and a business owner. And what I've kind of been realizing, and I think this is for me personally, I think it's a lot because, you know, our daughter was born two months early, and just going through the whole NICU experience and really having these like real questions around like, priority and mortality and all of these things it just made me realize that that time that we spend outside and again i realize we all are in different seasons right like i get the extreme privilege of you know being able to do like if you know an hour long hike right in the middle of the day i realize not everyone has that but i think the other side just to think about is what are like little things that you can incorporate into your day one thing at a time in order to focus on yourself so that when you are at these like level of two or three of burnout that you can use those things to kind of to recenter yourself and get back to baseline versus when it gets much more significant. Jessie's book is over at or it's called How Do You Feel? One Doctor's Search for Humanity in Medicine. It's available at all major retailers and you can also find more information about Jessie and the awesome work that she's doing in the world over at DrJessieGold.com. Have a great rest of your day and I will see you next time. Bye!
Narrator:
Thanks for listening to the Selling the Couch podcast. For more great content and to stay up to date, visit www.sellingthecouch.com.
Melvin Varghese:
Hey, it's Melvin. Before we continue with the rest of today's session, just wanted to take a moment to thank the team over at Alma for supporting this week's podcast session. So building and maintaining a private practice that you want can be extremely challenging. Alma offers a bunch of different tools, from administrative tools, time-saving resources, and an easy way to navigate insurance. So whether you're just starting out or you've been working independently for years, you can get the support you need to build your private practice. So creating, Alma has this online directory, so you can actually create a free directory once you join Alma, and then share what makes you unique, like your specialties or areas of expertise. People who are looking for you can filter by these details, so they're not just finding any therapist, they're finding you, and by extension, you're finding your perfect client. Alma will also help you get credentialed with all of the major insurance payers within 45 days, handle all of the administrative paperwork from eligibility checks to claim submissions. That means you can spend less time on the details and more time on providing great care. Plus, they provide, as I mentioned, they provide guaranteed payment within two weeks of every appointment. You support your clients and Alma supports you. You can learn more about Alma over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash Alma and there's a special discount code there if you go through that link. That's over again at sellingthecouch.com forward slash Alma. We'll jump right back into today's session. Hey there, I hope that you enjoyed today's session. Thank you again for taking the time to listen all the way through. If you are a therapist and you're specifically in a season where you're a seasoned therapist and you are wanting to move from clinical to online course income, We actually have a specific mastermind for therapists who are doing this. So this is basically a group of really kind and supportive therapists who are also wildly successful as business owners. We meet together to build and grow and scale our online courses. you can learn more about that mastermind over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash mastermind all one word sellingthecouch.com forward slash mastermind thank you so much for taking the time to listen to today's session
timestamps00:48: Mel's Intro
04:53: The challenges of addressing mental health in academic settings
12:26 Why it's hard to care for others as a therapist and care for yourself
23:18 Why forgetting a patient's name lead to Dr. Gold realizing she was burning out
39:29: Mel's Reflections
selling the couch podcast with melvin varghese phdWeekly interviews, strategy, and advice for building your private practice in and beyond the therapy room.
Apple podcastsYou TubeSpotify ready to launch your online course?Please check out our free online course starter kit for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This FREE 7-day email course will help you validate your course idea (so that you can create a course that has buyers).
sign up for free course starter kitready to launch your podcast?Please check out our FREE podcasting workshop for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This workshop is pre-recorded so you can watch it on a day and time that works for your schedule.
It contains a lot of practical tips that we've learned as STC has reached 1.81 million+ downloads and become a 6-figure business with podcasting as the backbone.
sign up for podcasting workshopDr. Jessi gold, Md, SDPsychiatrist and Chief Wellness Officer @ University of Tennessee System
In her role, Dr. Gold oversees the mental well being of students and staff across five campuses and more than 60,000 students. Dr. Gold is a sought after speaker, media advocate, author, and mental health consultant with a special focus on college students, healthcare workers, and the entertainment industry. Dr. Gold recently wrote her first book, How Do You Feel? One Doctor's Search For The Humanity In Medicine.
Dr. Jessi Gold – Personal Website
Melvin varghese phdPsychologist and Founder @ Selling The Couch
Melvin Varghese, PhD is a licensed psychologist in Philadelphia, PA. In 2015, Dr. Varghese founded Selling The Couch, a podcast to help therapists move from clinical to online income.
On the podcast, he interviews successful practitioners about how they've built their practices, social media/marketing experts, and shares lessons as he uses our clinical skills to create an online business powered by podcasting + online courses.
The podcast is one of the top Career podcasts in Apple Podcasts, has been downloaded over 1.8 million times, and is heard in over 125 countries. Mel is a successful course creator with 240+ students and $300k+ in course sales.
More PostsCorporate Transparency Act: What Therapists Need To Know Before 2025by Melvin Varghese | Nov 2, 2024 | Blog, Growing Your Practice, Private Practice, STC Podcast
Melvin Varghese talking about the Corporate Transparency Act out of Anti Money Laundering Act with Dan Mayer and David Yood
7 Subtle Public Speaking Tips I Learned From My First Conference Talkby Melvin Varghese | Oct 24, 2024 | Mel On Other Podcasts, Passive Income for Therapists, Public Speaking, STC Podcast
Melvin Varghese speaking at the Mental Health Marketing Conference, in Franklin, TN.
Burnout in High Achieving Mental Health Professionals: A Conversation with Dr. Jessi Goldby Melvin Varghese | Oct 19, 2024 | Growing Your Practice, Mindset, Private Practice, STC Podcast
Melvin Varghese holding a copy of the book How Do You Feel by author, Jessi Gold, M.D., MS
« Older Entries The post Burnout in High Achieving Mental Health Professionals: A Conversation with Dr. Jessi Gold appeared first on Selling The Couch | Melvin Varghese PhD.
374: If I Started Podcasting with a Busy Private Practice, I’d Do This . . .Written By Melvin Varghese PhDIf you're a therapist with a busy practice who's thinking about starting a podcast with no audience but also want it to be sustainable, this episode is for you.
We've had the incredible privilege of supporting 243+ therapists launching their podcasts through our Healthcasters podcasting community for therapists.
So many of our colleagues in the community haven't just built successful private practice. They're writing books, speaking, doing retreats, etc.
The demands of running a busy private practice are enough. Who wants to add another thing to the plate?
I get it. As I approach my 10th year as a podcaster with over 375 episodes and a podcast that's now in the top .5% of podcasts in the world, I've had to navigate a busy (but fulfilled) entrepreneurship schedule with STC and private practice while we became parents for the first time.
I just don't have the time to spend hours and hours podcasting!
In today's episode I wanted to walk you through 5 ways to launch and manage a successful podcast without it feeling like an overwhelming additional task.
This episode also supplements our brand new guide on How To Start A Podcast: The Ultimate Guide For Therapists and our free podcasting workshop that you can sign up for anywhere/anytime so be sure to check both out as well.
5 KEY POINTS
Batch Record and Automate: I emphasize the importance of time management in podcasting. Instead of recording weekly, set aside a dedicated block of time every couple of months to batch record multiple episodes. This approach not only saves time but also allows for a more structured release schedule.
Repurpose Existing Content: Many therapists already possess valuable content from therapy sessions, supervision, or written materials. Identify common themes and questions that arise in their practice and transform these insights into podcast episodes, ensuring client confidentiality is maintained.
Podcasting as a Client Attraction Tool: I discuss how podcasting can serve as an effective marketing strategy. By showcasing your expertise through episodes, you can organically attract clients. I share a personal example of how many of my mastermind participants discovered me through the podcast, highlighting the trust and connection built through this medium.
Keep Episodes Short and Impactful: I advocate for shorter episodes, around 15 to 25 minutes, which can be more digestible for listeners. This format not only makes it easier for you to create content but also allows listeners to engage with your material during their busy days.
Outsource Editing to Free Up Time: I address the often time-consuming task of podcast editing. I recommend hiring an editor or utilizing AI-powered software to handle this aspect, allowing you to focus on content creation and your core business activities.
Transcript (AI-Generated)lvin Varghese:
Hey, it's Melvin. Before we jump into today's podcast session, just wanted to take a moment to thank the team over at Alma for supporting today's podcast session. If you are a solo practitioner that wants to take insurance or you've been taking insurance and you're either frustrated with the reimbursement rates or just done with all of the administrative headaches of going through insurance, definitely encourage you to check out Alma. They handle all of that. And the best part is that you actually get reimbursed within two weeks of the appointment. You can learn more about Alma and the services that they provide over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash Alma. sellingthecouch.com forward slash Alma. Hello, hello, welcome to today's session, Selling the Couch.
I hope you're doing well, having an incredible day. So if you've been thinking about starting a podcast for a while, but you're keenly aware that you have a successful and busy private practice, you may be struggling with how in the world am I going to manage starting a podcast on all of with on top of all of the other things that I'm doing. Next year for me will be my 10th year as a podcaster. We've released over 375 episodes of the STZ podcast and I've learned a ton of things along the way. And today we're diving into five unique ways that you can launch and run a successful podcast without it feeling like another thing or another job that you have to factor in, you know, running a private practice is demanding. There's the clinical side, the admin side, the marketing side of it, and just like the emotional toll that running a private practice and seeing clients takes on us as therapists. And, you know, I'm like keenly aware of the last thing that any of us want to do is like add another task unless there's like a disproportionate ROI to that task. But what if I told you that in a weird way, podcasting has actually made my life a lot easier? If someone had told me this, I would have been like, listen, I'm like, check it out in this episode. I have not listened to this because I do not believe this at all. But back in 2015, when I launched STC, I was doing five and a half days of clinical work. So I was doing some therapy, working with individuals and couples, and then i was also doing uh biopsychosocial evaluations and then bariatric surgery psyche vows it took up a lot of time and i remember in those early days i would just be like how in the world i knew that i wanted to start a podcast but how in the world am i going to balance all of this in today's episode we just really wanted to share five unexpected insights that will not only show you how to start a podcast efficiently, but also how it can be a benefit to your business and just your personal life as well.
So the five points that we're going to cover, I'll just share them here at the top just so that you can start to, you know, get a framework on things.So point one is batch record and automate. Point two is repurpose your existing content. Point three is C, podcasting as a client attraction tool. Point four is keep episodes short and impactful. And then five is outsource editing to free up time. So point one is all about batch record and automate to save time. Now, why is this important? We are all keenly aware, especially I think in this post-pandemic world, of how precious time is. Time really is our most precious asset. It's the thing that we can't get back. Time is even more prized when you're already busy and running a successful business or successful practice.
You know, most think that podcasting requires weekly sessions, but the truth is you can actually batch record a bunch of podcast episodes in one sitting. So imagine something like this. You set aside a block of time, like a two to three hour block of time every two months and you record six to eight episodes during that time. That's enough content for two months of weekly episodes without interrupting your day-to-day schedule. I personally, I did this in the early days of STC and that's how I was able to kind of release a lot of episodes. But personally for me now is I just block off Tuesday mornings for two hours to record podcast episodes. So that structure is also helpful. But I think the underlying principle is if you can just find a block of time, I like the two to three hour block of time because I feel like you can get a lot of stuff done and dive deep into it. And then you just kind of go about your day.
So here's kind of the action tip that I would recommend, especially even before you start thinking through your podcast. Look at your schedule and block out a like a two to three hour block where you can actually work on your podcast. Then you can also, the other cool thing is once you record those episodes, all of these podcast hosts, you don't have to be physically there in order to release the episodes. So i.e. you can actually schedule out episodes. So we use Captivate for our podcast hosts. If you go through sellingthecouch.com forward slash captivate, that's an affiliate link, but there's a little discount code there as well. But this just makes it way easier because then you know at this point we have an editor as well and that'll be 0.5 but you can literally then just schedule these episodes out and it saves a ton of time and it's like and then you just kind of go about your day. Now I have a little bonus tip for you related to this. It's more of a next level tip, but you can actually stack this by creating a podcast on your live schedule. So with the STC podcast, we're currently recording live episodes six months of the year.
The other six months I'm running replay episodes of old episodes because, you know, we now have like 375 plus episodes. Now when I first started, I didn't do this, but I think as I've become a dad and as just other life kind of things, this schedule seems to really fit. It's basically designed around our daughter's school schedule. and at a pace that feels sustainable for me. So again, this will really depend on you and your pace. But what I have found is two months of doing live episodes and then one month break where we release replay episodes, and then two months, one month break, the summers, and then November and December are off. I found just that sort of pace seems to be really conducive to doing a podcast, particularly as a parent. Now, what I do is I basically get ahead on my off months. So I'm essentially always like four to six episodes ahead. This lets me get into really good stretches where I don't have to record or I can just take the time to think really deep about the types of episodes I want to release, the guests that I want to have on, all of that kind of stuff. The alternative is you feel this pressure to release an episode, oh my gosh, I gotta get an episode out in two days, let me record something, or oh man, let me just like reach out to a random guest because I just need content. So if you can really like structure it in a way that is conducive to your life schedule and also realize you can change that over time as things change, then I think it's a good stack as well. Point two is repurpose your existing content. So why is this important? You probably already have tons of valuable content through therapy sessions, or if you're in supervision, or like just in in the course of like, you know, maybe you've written blog posts, all of that kind of stuff. Now, of course, you want to be mindful to protect client privacy. You don't want to ever disclose anything. I know that all of us know this.
But one thing you can start to do in especially if you have a therapy practice is just like take 15 minutes and jot down any common themes that seem to be coming across sessions. So the benefit of this is people are coming to you for therapy to address a particular pain point. And you're now identifying these themes. And you can create then create podcast episodes around those common themes. So common client questions, challenges that you're encountering, any of that kind of stuff can be wonderful fodder for podcast sessions. Kind of a nuance of this is think about the advice that you give to clients on a regular basis. Chances are it's kind of the wisdom many people want to hear. And you can turn those into podcast sessions. Now here's kind of a little actionable tip to go along the way. One thing I found really helpful is, you know, in the early days of STC, I would sit in front of the computer and put on my mic, you know, get on the, get my mic ready, all of that stuff and be ready to record a podcast session. And then I would be like, Oh, wait a minute. I don't have any content. And what I found instead is if you can capture ideas throughout the course of your day, i.e. when you're not in front of the podcasting mic, that just makes it a lot easier. So you can create, like if you're like, just like love good old fashioned notebooks, you can just have a notebook, or you can have like a notes app or something, note taking app on your phone, just to jot down recurring topics from sessions. And I do something which is a little bit interesting, but I found it really helpful, which is I created a free slack account and I have a private slack channel for just myself. And I have different sub channels within the main channel and one of them is podcast ideas. And so as I met, you know, for example, if I'm on a hike or something and I'm listening to a book, or I'm on a conversation with a friend and we get into something and I'm like, oh, this is really interesting. I'll just go into my Slack sub-channel and just make a quick note to myself.
The magic of Slack also is that you can write a written note, or if there's like, you see a quote or something that inspires you, you can take a picture of it, or you can just do an audio recording. you know, came across this quote, and I wanted to put it here because I think this could be a good idea for a podcast episode or related to blank, blank, blank, right? So the main thing to just take away from this part of it is always think about ways that you can capture the new insights that you're learning, and capture it on a day to day or even hour to hour basis. The third point I wanted to share with you is podcasting as a client attraction tool. So I feel like the vast majority of us, right, we are creating podcasts to grow our businesses and also to enter into thought leadership. So maybe we want to do more speaking at conferences or write a book or launch an online course or create a membership site, whatever it is. And that's the way that I think about podcasting. I definitely, you know, with the STC podcast, my primary, like one of my big goals is just to be helpful and provide value. But absolutely, I'm thinking about the podcast in terms of what is a larger marketing engine for STC. So one thing I've realized is starting a podcast and it can actually reduce your marketing workload. And It can even attract organic clients, like clients organically, or customers. Your episodes basically serve as free content that highlights your expertise. There's also something really powerful about our voices. There was a recent ACAS media study that studied sort of online influencers or online thought leaders across a bunch of different platforms. And they found that podcasters, audio podcasters were the most trusted media personalities. And even just like a practical example, if you've been listening to the STC podcast for a while, you and I likely have never met, but I imagine you feel some sense of trust and connection to me. I think there's just something unique and interesting about the medium. And then I think there's also something unique when in the way that this medium is able to capture our voices. And in case you're curious, YouTubers were the second most trusted personality, which is part of the reason why we also started doing videos of these episodes. If you haven't followed us there, definitely check it out over on YouTube. You can just search for my name or search for Selling the Couch and it'll definitely pop up. Would love for you to subscribe there as well. And so just two things to remember with podcasts.
So they're evergreen, meaning that people find our podcasts hours, days, weeks, months, or even years later after it's published. The second thing to realize with podcasts is that they have binge potential. So if you're like me, you've listened when you find a new podcast, you're not listening to just one episode, you're likely downloaded multiple episodes. I know like some of my most favorite business podcasts. Once I like hear an episode for the first time, I will literally go through the playlist and then download the individual episodes on topics that are particularly interesting to me. But at a practical level, we know that from a marketing perspective, the more time someone spends with us, the more connected generally they feel to us. And so when you combine the fact that there's already a high level of trust with this medium of podcasting, combined with this binge potential, I think there's some real opportunities to really market your business and grow your business to podcasting. Now, I wanted to just share an example. So we recently wrapped up our launch of STC Elite, which is our mastermind for therapists who are creating their first online course. So this is just for therapists. We gather together and we work through live teaching to take your course from an idea to all the way to your beta group. We have 11 colleagues that are in our current cohort. And, you know, with all of these colleagues that join, I do one on one calls just because I like, I don't know, for me, it's like, you know, everything, especially with our mastermind is not just like trying to get a whole bunch of numbers. It's about getting the right type of person. And I don't know, maybe I'm just kind of old fashioned. I like the human connection. You know, I don't want, you know, hundreds of people in this mastermind, and I never actually get to know them as people. And because we do these one on one calls, I'm able to just have conversations with colleagues. And what's really interesting is 10 of the 11 mentioned that they first learned about me through like a colleague, or they like searched on Apple podcasts, and they came upon the podcast. And then They listened to the podcast. They felt the sense of trust and connection with me. And then they joined our free email newsletter, which again, if you haven't joined there, it's over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash newsletter. We send it out every Sunday night. It's now all our list is over 8,000, but the STC newsletter is now at 4,700 something around their colleagues. And so.
But they loved what was shared on the newsletter and then they decided to join the Mastermind when it became live because of the trust and connection they felt. It's not an overly complicated marketing funnel, like I don't have a background in business. But I do really feel like this medium of podcasting, there's something that's very relational about it. And it was just so interesting to get it, get also like data validation. And this has happened, this stat, this 10 of 11, there's a very consistent pattern when I've talked to colleagues in the past about this. So actionable tip for you is create episodes around questions that clients are asking related to your niches and specialties. At the end of each episode, include a call to action. So inviting listeners to reach out for a consultation if they resonate with your message. And if you're doing, if you're using the podcast to grow your therapy practice, of course, just mention the states that you're licensed in. And then that can also kind of help make sure that you're attracting the right type of ideal client. Point four is keep episodes short and impactful. So why is this important? Your podcast doesn't need to be an hour long endeavor. I don't know about you, but like, you know, like Joe Rogan's podcast, for example, are like three to four hours long. And that format works really well. But I I don't have that much bandwidth and honestly, I don't think I'm that interesting to talk for three to four hours. And in fact, what I found is that shorter episodes, so 15 to 25 minutes can be both impactful and easier for you and the listener to digest. So an example of this therapists often worry about filling like an hour of content, but you don't need to some of the best podcasts are short, they're bite sized pieces of wisdom that people can listen to between like a lunch break or on their commute to work. And the other cool part is when you have a 15 to 20 minute episode, and then we talked earlier about batching, let's say that you batch for like three hours, you can literally create anywhere from like, I don't know, like on the low end, you know, let's say, six or eight episodes all the way to, you know, 10 or 12 episodes just in that in that time, essentially, you can create three to four episodes an hour. So the actionable tip for this one is set a 20 minute timer and cover one question that your ideal client or niche is struggling with. Hey, it's Melvin. Before we continue with the rest of today's session, just wanted to take a moment to thank the team over at Alma for supporting this week's podcast session. So building and maintaining a private practice that you want can be extremely challenging. Alma offers a bunch of different tools, from administrative tools, time-saving resources, and an easy way to navigate insurance. So whether you're just starting out or you've been working independently for years, you can get the support you need to build your private practice. So creating, Alma has this online directory, so you can actually create a free directory once you join Alma, and then share what makes you unique, like your specialties or areas of expertise. People who are looking for you can filter by these details, so they're not just finding any therapist, they're finding you, and by extension, you're finding your perfect client. Alma will also help you get credentialed with all of the major insurance payers within 45 days, handle all of the administrative paperwork from eligibility checks to claim submissions.
That means you can spend less time on the details and more time on providing great care. Plus, they provide, as I mentioned, they provide guaranteed payment within two weeks of every appointment. You support your clients and Alma supports you. You can learn more about Alma over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash Alma and there's a special discount code there if you go through that link. That's over again at sellingthecouch.com forward slash Alma. We'll jump right back into today's session. format that I like to use, and you probably notice this even with STC podcasts, I always start with a question, I usually share like kind of a personal relevant story. Again, like, as a therapist, again, respecting confidentiality. In fact, I do a lot of like relating to my life, and stuff that I've had to navigate. And then I simply share three insights and then a call to action to work with you if the intent is to fill your therapy practice. Or the other thing you could also do is invite them to join your email list. I'm a big believer in building an email list. I, you know, like disproportionately, we've had a much higher ROI from and this is just like business revenue. Literally 92 to 93% of anything people have ever bought from us have come through our email list. And so that's something also to think about. Point number five is outsource editing to free up time. So editing a podcast, that whole process is usually traditionally the most time consuming thing. Now there are AI powered software now like Descript and that makes things way easier. But it doesn't, you don't have to be the person doing the editing, basically. Especially if you have a business practice, you likely have discretionary income. And just what my recommendation is, hire an editor at the onset. Or if you have like an executive assistant or something like that, have them get trained into script and let them do, let them handle that sort of editing and uploading of the episodes. That way you are just focusing on the outlining the episodes and then actually creating the content like I'm doing right now. So the other benefit of outsourcing is you can then just focus and be in your zone of genius and you don't get bogged down with the technical side because I think the technical side is also the side that I notice that a lot of therapists get overwhelmed with and yeah. So for example, so imagine recording episodes and then handing off to handing them off to a professional who edits it. This is literally what I do. So I'm recording this episode right now. And then once this is done, we have a file and I literally Dropbox it to my podcast editor. who edits the audio and uploads it through Captivate and schedules it out. And then with the video, we have a video editing team through Floxy, and I literally upload the video. I tell them I have a template that I use. It literally takes 10 minutes. And I let my editor go to work, and then they're able to just create a great episode for us. And again, if you're like, hey, I don't know that I have the bandwidth to go hire an editor, I think you'll be surprised by how reasonably priced it is, especially like, you know, $50 to $70 an episode is like totally like reasonable, right? And think about it, like even on the high end, $240 a month to outsource editing is like such a game changer. There's a bunch of different places you can find it. Upwork is one place you can look at. Or just do a quick Google search of top podcast editing services and there's just a number of them out there. Many of them afford really like affordable packages. The other sort of little secret tip is reach out to local universities and community colleges particularly that have like audio or music programs and there may be students that are looking for internships or paying work. Definitely that's another option you can consider as well. So just to recap, the five points, batch record, repurpose your existing content, use your podcast as a marketing and self-care tool, keep your episodes short and sweet, and outsource out the editing. I think these strategies will help you create a podcast without feeling overwhelmed. Now, if you've been thinking about starting a podcast, but you feel like you don't have the time, I really hope that today's session has been helpful.
Truth be told, I was terrified to start this podcast. But now looking back, this has been singularly the best career decision that I've made. It's allowed me to build out a really nice network. It's allowed me to serve our field. It's allowed me to create content at scale and distribute it at scale. And it's just been personally gratifying. I am naturally an introvert. I'm an HSP. I'm an INFJ in my Myers-Briggs. And just the thought of doing public speaking and doing all this stuff, Nine years ago, I would have cringed at this thought of doing any of this stuff. But when you release this many episodes, it's really interesting and kind of weird and kind of strange how it changes you from the inside. And it just makes you so much more courageous. We have a free podcasting workshop called Using Podcasting to Grow Your Business. This is basically, the subtitle is Lessons Learned from Nine Years of Podcasting, a Top .5 Global Podcast, and a Six-Figure Business Designed Around My Family. It's an on-demand workshop, so you can watch it at a time and a date that works for you. It's absolutely free. And you can watch it multiple times if you need. A lot of folks and a lot of colleagues do that. That's over at selling the couch.com forward slash podcasting workshop. Thank you for taking the time to listen and have a great rest of your day. And if you're starting podcasts, your podcasting journey, I'm just so excited for you and I can't wait to cheer you on. Have a great rest of your day. Bye.
Narrator: Thanks for listening to the selling the couch podcast. For more great content and to stay up to date, visit www dot selling the couch.com.
Melvin Varghese: Hey there, I hope that you enjoyed today's session. Thank you again for taking the time to listen all the way through. If you are a therapist and you're specifically in a season where you're a seasoned therapist and you are wanting to move from clinical to online course income, We actually have a specific mastermind for therapists who are doing this. So this is basically a group of really kind and supportive therapists who are also wildly successful as business owners. We meet together to build and grow and scale our online courses. you can learn more about that mastermind over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash mastermind all one word sellingthecouch.com forward slash mastermind thank you so much for taking the time to listen to today's session
timestamps00:00:00 – Coming Soon!
selling the couch podcast with melvin varghese phdWeekly interviews, strategy, and advice for building your private practice in and beyond the therapy room.
Apple podcastsYou TubeSpotify ready to launch your online course?Please check out our free online course starter kit for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This FREE 7-day email course will help you validate your course idea (so that you can create a course that has buyers).
sign up for free course starter kitready to launch your podcast?Please check out our FREE podcasting workshop for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This workshop is pre-recorded so you can watch it on a day and time that works for your schedule.
It contains a lot of practical tips that we've learned as STC has reached 1.81 million+ downloads and become a 6-figure business with podcasting as the backbone.
sign up for podcasting workshopMelvin varghese phdPsychologist and Founder @ Selling The Couch
Melvin Varghese, PhD is a licensed psychologist in Philadelphia, PA. In 2015, Dr. Varghese founded Selling The Couch, a podcast to help therapists move from clinical to online income.
On the podcast, he interviews successful practitioners about how they've built their practices, social media/marketing experts, and shares lessons as he uses our clinical skills to create an online business powered by podcasting + online courses.
The podcast is one of the top Career podcasts in Apple Podcasts, has been downloaded over 1.8 million times, and is heard in over 125 countries. Mel is a successful course creator with 240+ students and $300k+ in course sales.
More PostsCorporate Transparency Act: What Therapists Need To Know Before 2025by Melvin Varghese | Nov 2, 2024 | Blog, Growing Your Practice, Private Practice, STC Podcast
Melvin Varghese talking about the Corporate Transparency Act out of Anti Money Laundering Act with Dan Mayer and David Yood
7 Subtle Public Speaking Tips I Learned From My First Conference Talkby Melvin Varghese | Oct 24, 2024 | Mel On Other Podcasts, Passive Income for Therapists, Public Speaking, STC Podcast
Melvin Varghese speaking at the Mental Health Marketing Conference, in Franklin, TN.
Burnout in High Achieving Mental Health Professionals: A Conversation with Dr. Jessi Goldby Melvin Varghese | Oct 19, 2024 | Growing Your Practice, Mindset, Private Practice, STC Podcast
Melvin Varghese holding a copy of the book How Do You Feel by author, Jessi Gold, M.D., MS
« Older Entries The post 374: If I Started Podcasting with a Busy Private Practice, I’d Do This appeared first on Selling The Couch | Melvin Varghese PhD.
371: 3 reasons i left psychology behind for a coaching careerWritten By Melvin Varghese PhDIn this episode of Selling the Couch, I have the pleasure of speaking with my friend, Dr. Corey Wilks. Corey is a licensed psychologist who has made the significant transition from an addictions psychologist to executive coaching.
We begin by exploring Corey's initial career goals during his time in graduate school. Originally a business management major, Corey found his passion for psychology through an unexpected encounter with a dynamic professor who changed his perspective on the field.
He shares how his journey through doctoral training led him to believe that achieving a doctorate would grant him the autonomy and freedom he desired. However, as he entered the workforce, he quickly realized that the reality of working within bureaucratic structures often stifled that autonomy.
He reflects on the disillusionment he experienced while working in integrated primary care, where he felt constrained by regulations and the limitations of insurance-based therapy. This led him to question the traditional mental health model, particularly the focus on pathology rather than wellness.
A big moment in Corey's journey occurred during the COVID-19 pandemic when he was unexpectedly let go from his job. This event forced him to confront his career path and ultimately propelled him into entrepreneurship and coaching. He emphasizes the importance of bridging the gap between psychology and coaching, noting that many therapists possess valuable skills that can translate well into the coaching realm.
Throughout our discussion, we address common misconceptions about coaching, how to actually get proper training, and the stigma that therapists may feel when considering this path. Corey shares practical advice for therapists contemplating a transition to coaching, including the need to embrace their existing skills and shift their mindset from a pathology model to a wellness model.
We also touch on the potential downsides of leaving traditional mental health for coaching, such as the loneliness that can come from working independently.
As we wrap up, Corey provides insights into the top mistakes therapists make when transitioning to coaching, emphasizing the need for effective marketing and client acquisition strategies. He also discusses how to navigate the fine line between coaching and therapy, ensuring that clients receive the appropriate support for their needs.
I'll also a drop a few articles from Corey's site that can further inspire you.
11 Lessons From The Alchemist To Help You Escape Mediocrity
3 Counterinutive Reasons To Leave Money On The Table
Most People Don't Know This Is The Real Difference Between Therapy And Coaching
Corey also has two wonderful course that I recommended.
The Intentional Life Design course will help you figure out your values and line up a life and career with those values.
And the World Class Coaching course will help you learn strategies from top personal and executive coaches to stand out, build a business around the life you want, and attract amazing opportunities.
I've personally found the Build An Intentional Life course life-changing as a psychologist who thought I'd spend an entire career at a university counseling center with a private practice on the side. It gave me permission to build STC and my private practice around the life I want as a husband, dad, and son vs. some external metric. And I'm about to dive into the World Class Coaching course.
Transcript (AI-Generated)Corey Wilks PsyD:
What success in this job, what success as a psychologist actually looks like, right? When we talk about like, you know, the highest tiers, that ultimately means becoming the director of a program, you know, behavioral health director, maybe the president of your state psychological association. And I'm like, I don't want to be the president of state psychological association because all of these conventions are people preaching to the choir.
Melvin Varghese PhD: Hello, hello. Welcome to today's session of Selling the Couch. I hope you're doing well, having an incredible day. So today's session is all about leaving psychology for coaching. Now, you might be wondering, Mel, I thought this was a private practice related podcast, but The reality is I know that a lot of us are thinking about what we want our businesses to look like. And the reality also is that a lot of colleagues are shifting out of therapy into coaching. And today we're joined by Dr. Corey Wilkes. Corey is a dear friend. He's a licensed psychologist. His website is over at coreywilkespsid.com. And we're having an open and honest conversation about this transition. Corey, much like me, went through a doctoral program, internship, training, and became licensed as a psychologist. And just a number of circumstances led him to realize that he couldn't sustain his job as a psychologist and he decided to shift into coaching. So we're going to cover a number of of different topics. One is we just really start with Corey's career goals and what that looked like in grad school and how that kind of evolved and morphed as he went into private practice. And then we really explore what does autonomy mean for Corey and how he's really tried to design his coaching business around this ability to create autonomy. We wrap up with a couple of different questions. So the first one is what are the top three mistakes that therapists make when they become coaches? This is based on Corey's own personal experience. Corey also has a course for a coaching course and how to become a coach that he's that he's developed. He went through pretty extensive training to become a coach as well. And so just some of the mistakes. And then, you know, I feel like sometimes with episodes like this, it can be about like, you know, very like a let's do this, go in and go and forth and do this. And we actually spend a good amount of time looking at like, what are the cons of actually leaving the traditional mental health and pursuing coaching? Because, again, a big part of my responsibility and role with this episode is to give like holistic perspectives on certain things so that you can make an informed decision versus like making a decision. So we'll jump right into my conversation with Dr. Corey Wilkes from coreywilkesid.com. Hey, Corey, welcome to Selling the Couch. Thanks for having me, man. Oh, my gosh. So if if you don't know, like Corey and I have gotten to be friends over the past couple of years and you know he if you're watching on YouTube he's got like contrast him and me like complete opposite sort of appearance yes all of that right but uh we really just hit it off and uh underneath the, uh, you know, MMA and all of that stuff, really like big teddy bear and just a incredibly, uh, kind and thoughtful person. Um, just to even share a little bit, like anytime we go to Texas, Corey just goes out of his way to be like, Hey, can we hang out? Can we come visit? And just like, thank you for just being you. And, uh, I'm just so grateful for your friendship, brother. And, uh, yeah, I'm really looking forward to this conversation today.
Corey Wilks PsyD: Likewise, man.
Melvin Varghese PhD: Um, that's all you got, man. After I like, hey, hey, you know, I love you.
Corey Wilks PsyD: Like that's like, and everybody who listens to this knows you're lovable and worthy of love. So I don't know what else you want me to say other than you're awesome. Thank you. There's your validation.
Melvin Varghese PhD: Um, you know, we're talking about a topic that I know a lot of folks are thinking through and navigating, um, leaving psychology for coaching and sort of navigating that. Um, you know, like me, you spend many years getting your doctoral degree and you became a licensed clinical psychologist. What was the career goal in grad school?
Corey Wilks PsyD: So actually early on, I was a business management major, um, yeah, in undergrad. And I took a couple of business classes and quickly realized that at least the way business was framed, um, with the classes I took, I was like, this is not for me. Like there's, there's no, there's no people, right? Like all of these classes are about numbers, not about people. I care about people. And so then I, you know, I went through multiple other majors. I kind of was just adrift for a minute. And then I had this like required like adult or child development course. And it was like, you know, Professor Hinton. I was like, okay, so I was expecting some like old white dude who's just like so ancient. And he has like the elbow patches and things like when he talks, you know, chalk dust just poofs out of his armpits or something like that. That was my expectation, right? And in walked this young, like 30s, like early 30s black dude from Memphis. And he walked in, he his tattoos, he had like, like sleeves, he was he had, you know, very visible tattoos. He talked like he was from Memphis. And he was like, I'm Dr. Hinton, I'm your professor. And I was like, dude, you have my attention, because you are in no way what I was expecting. And what I was expecting was super boring. And the way Keelan, because it's Keelan Hinton, the way Keelan described psychology and how, you know, basically people are like puzzles and psychology is about helping people put those pieces in the right place. So people can understand themselves better. We can understand them better and we can kind of help people heal and grow. And that really, really stuck with me. So like literally that day, I went to what, like the bursar's office or registrar's office, whichever, and changed my major in psychology because of Keelan. And we've maintained a friendship, you know, for years after that. And I got like an undergrad, master's, and then a doctorate. And that all started with Keelan's class. So I originally wanted to go into business. We didn't start, I was like, oh, I'm going to do therapy. And I think a lot of us, a lot of psychologists, especially, we go into the therapy world because we were like, oh, if I get a doctorate, I'm at the top of my discipline. I will have autonomy and freedom. And for a lot of us, we have a degree of freedom within our sessions, but there's still a lot of bureaucracy that we have to operate within, especially if you work for a company, especially if you take insurance. And I think that, especially me, but I think a lot of us in the field, kind of grew disillusioned because it was like, Oh, I thought I would have a lot more autonomy than I actually will have if I continue down this path. And there are, there are ways like private practice, you can get more autonomy. There's some other things, but I was working in rural Appalachia in integrated primary care. So I was working within like a much larger institution with a lot of regulations, a lot of bureaucracy. And I just, I didn't have the autonomy that I need as a person to really show up. Um, so then, you know, and we'll get into this, but then I later went, you know, kind of full circle back into entrepreneurship, just without the business background.
Melvin Varghese PhD: What does, um, autonomy mean for you?
Corey Wilks PsyD: So I, I talk a lot about like core value work, which I, you know, I know, you know, and my core value is freedom and you, and freedom is synonymous with autonomy for me. And it really comes down to the freedom to do more of what I love and the freedom from doing things that I just, that, you know, burn me out. So I love being able to express myself, to speak my truth and to help others sort of clarify and speak their own. That can be very difficult to do in bureaucratic structures because there's a lot of rules. There's a lot of don't rock the boat. There's a lot of you are required to do this thing in this way, in this time frame. I like being able to use my perspective to help guide somebody else. I like being able to, you know, use different modalities to, you know, whatever is going to, whatever the person in front of me needs to understand or needs to hear, I want to be able to do that. Right? I don't like having to check off very specific boxes or phrase something very specific way or all, you know, like when I would do therapy, like, oh, I can't, I have to give you a diagnosis in order for you to keep coming back. Because if you are subclinical, then insurance won't cover it. You have to, you know, you, have to have insurance paid for it. Otherwise you can't come in. So now it's like, then you get into like upcoding and downcoding and like all those ethical issues. And it's just like, that was really burning me out. In addition to like, you are a member of this program. These are the requirements for that program. And it just, it, it didn't feel aligned in how I wanted to show up and how I deeply believed that I would be most effective. So a lot of it now is autonomy of, What is most fulfilling for me? What is most intrinsically rewarding for me, both as my day-to-day life, but then also the type of work, the type of people I want to work with? What does that look like? And then now, how can I build my life and my business aligned with those things that truly matter so that I can keep freedom and autonomy, both for myself, my personal freedom and autonomy, but also facilitating the freedom and autonomy of others? What is the best path forward to do both of those?
Melvin Varghese PhD: That's a really way. That's a great way of putting it. You talked about bureaucratic structures and the struggles and the tensions that you had right on many levels, insurance, all of that. Was there one central event that made you realize like, hey, I don't know if this is the career path that I want to keep going down?
Corey Wilks PsyD: A specific thing, not necessarily so much as like, You know, we all have our own opinions about the DSM and, you know, especially in the U S you know, how, how insurance works and things. Um, one thing I realized was so, uh, two things. The first was the, this whole idea of this is a legacy institution. We don't change things. Like I remember one of the places I worked at, um, we had, you know, an EHR, right. Cause I worked in integrated primary care. So we had this electronic health record. And this is where we put all of our notes in. At the end of this, and it was like a workflow of step one, you do this, step two, you do whatever. At the very end, it defaulted to it would send out a copy of your notes to the patient, which it was like, no, you can't do that. And part of our training was you have to go in and manually click all these boxes to make sure that doesn't go out. And it had been done like this for years. And I was like, can't we just like change the default to like not do that? And they're like, no, we can't. Like all of my bosses were like, no, we can't. I was like, I'm just going to email tech support and just ask them. Like separately from all of that, I'm just going to ask them. They're like, oh, sure, that's super easy. And then they did it, like same day. And I was like, this is the kind of stuff that it just burns me up. It's just like, you never even thought to question it because you're like, this is how we do it. And I'm like, this one change saved all of us easily 15 to 20% of the time we were doing on notes, just, just from something that was easily fixable, but nobody thought to question it was things like that. Like those, those highly just, there's this legacy bureaucratic structures. Um, and then the other thing was that I didn't fully, it didn't fully sink in until after I had switched into coaching, which we can talk about too. But, um, A lot of the therapy world defines wellness as the absence of illness. But just because you're not sick doesn't mean you're healthy, right? So like, fundamentally, my role as a therapist working in the therapy world, especially with insurance, isn't to get you to human flourishing or self-actualization or, you know, these other terms you want to put to it. It is my, my actual role is to get you to be subclinical, right? My actual role is to help you no longer warrant a diagnosis of major depressive disorder, single episode mild. That is the actual role of a therapist in, in, You know, you accept insurance, all those caveats, right? Like private practice in an affluent area, you have more leeway, but fundamentally people go to therapy or psychopathology. That is, is one of the core pieces with most of most therapy with most of the country. It is for psychopathology. So then my role is to make you no longer psychopathological, which means being subclinical, but it's like, there are plenty of people who are like, okay, you no longer want a diagnosis necessarily. but you still are in no way really thriving or flourishing. But because this is the model, and unless I take private pay or you can afford private pay, we have to end therapy, this therapeutic relationship, once insurance will no longer cover you coming because you no longer have a good enough diagnosis for them to cover it. That was the thing that really, really just burned me out because like there were people like I would work on like you are awesome and now we've worked through all these things and now you find like your head is above water and we can really help you like thrive and flourish and it was like sorry my insurance won't cover that. Insurance doesn't cover self-actualization and I'm just like damn. So that was a big thing for me.
Melvin Varghese PhD: I mean, I've run into that too. Right. And then you feel like, uh, I mean, it is, it's a formula for burnout because it's like, then what do you do? You just move to the next client, same process kind of happens. And yeah, I mean, I think I followed a very similar path, right. Of what you know questioning like my role in all of it like what it, you know, like all of that right and then this larger sort of maze that you know we often have to navigate, whether you know whatever the bureaucracies right insert whatever. Was it an overnight thing for you to like decide to leave like traditional clinical work and enter coaching or was it more like a these things keep happening? I'm teetering on burnout. I got to make I got to make a leap or I got to do something else.
Corey Wilks PsyD: It was certainly multifactorial, right? So one, I had really good experiences with my practicums and with later jobs. but my internship, one, my internship here was the closest I've come to clinical depression in my adult life. It was absolutely horrific. And that's just the whole story. But basically, No, everybody hated their job largely. And it really showed. And the place actually, after I graduated, because it was APA accredited, after they're like, we're not doing this internship anymore. And everybody left, like all the supervisors left for different jobs. Like it was, it was hellacious. But that gave me a really good glimpse into like, okay, cool. I don't want my life to look like this, this specific thing. I will avoid it at all costs. And that year, was when I kind of started, I think, dabbling and let me read some some books on entrepreneurship. Let me read some books on like the craft of writing, because it's like I have all this knowledge and all this training was like. You know, I think a lot of therapists and psychologists, like we get really disgruntled with like the self-help industry, right? And when you go to a bookstore, psychology and self-help are in the same section, right? So a lot of us with like true expertise, we look at these books and like, there's just so much like snake oil here, or so much just like the most generic things that aren't actually helping people. The issue is, a lot of those fake gurus are really good at talking to a lay population. A lot of experts suck at talking to lay people or a lot of the knowledge we have. is locked behind paywalls and academic journals that are super jargony, that even most of us don't enjoy reading, or access to us is gated behind private practice paywalls and things. So it's like, well, where do lay people turn when they want to learn actual psychology? And it's like, and personal development, like true self-help kind of stuff, where do they turn? Well, they can't really turn to us unless they find us, you know, your local provider, right? Because again, state lines and jurisdictions and geography, like that's a whole separate, even with SIPAC, that's a whole separate conversation, right? Or they go to the gurus. I wanted to bridge that gap of, I have the true expertise, but also I can speak to a lay population. So I started learning because it's like, okay, now people can get access to real information. Right. So I started that process, um, during, you know, early on, like internship kind of thing. Cause it's like, I can't keep, I have to have a backup plan. I have to have a way out of this, you know, in the next five or 10 years, cause this, I cannot do this. Um, so it was, that was part of it. Then I got a job that I, go ahead.
Melvin Varghese PhD: Can I pause you there? Cause you said, um, I knew that I couldn't do this for five to 10 years. Right. I think if I'm being honest with myself like when I was on internship and postdoc I think I was so fearful of like getting a stable job right that that thought of like entrepreneurship like didn't even exist for me so what what made you even think that?
Corey Wilks PsyD: Yeah. So like I kind of referenced before, like I went into this because I really wanted to help people and I value my freedom and autonomy.
Melvin Varghese PhD: But then I values kind of thing.
Corey Wilks PsyD: Correct. And then I quickly realized, oh, what success in this job, what success as a psychologist actually looks like when we talk about, like, you know, the highest tiers that ultimately means becoming the director of a program, the behavioral health director, maybe the president of your state psychological association. And I'm like, I don't want to be the president of the State Psychological Association because all of these conventions are people preaching to the choir. Everybody in the room knows largely everything the person up top is talking about. Most of us largely are there for CEs because we have to renew our license. And yes, this is a very cynical, pessimistic view of it. That has just been my historical experience with all these things. Occasionally you'll get somebody, a new presenter, but a lot of times it's just like, these are the same things we, we, especially at the doctoral level, we all already know. Right. Um, and then like, as like, like BHP directors, like now you are, you have a, a clinical caseload and an administrative, you know, uh, schedule as well. And it's just like, you're expected to see, especially in the medical model, you're expected to see anywhere from 10 to 16 plus patients a day, And I'm just like, so I just got to like, I just got to go from one to the next to the next. I'm like, I feel like a cog in a machine. I don't feel like I am a doctoral, like a doctorate holder at the top of my, my, my expertise, you know, in my discipline where I should have one be making a lot of money and to have a lot of freedom. I'm making good money relative to my profession, but I'm not making good money relative to many other professions. Right. And that's just that really disillusioned me because I'm like, Oh, you know, in grad school, I'm like, Oh, I'm going to get a doctorate. I'm going to have all this freedom and flexibility. I'm going to be making, you know, six figures within the first couple of years. And then you also stuff. And then it's like, you get into it and it's like, no, like you can make six figures. If you do a lot of assessments, if you see an insane caseload, but largely, I mean, maybe if you become director of a good place, but I knew directors who made like 70k. And it's just like, you have a full caseload and a full admin load, like, and you're making this, right? Because you don't know the worth, the value you bring to the table, and this place isn't gonna tell you how much it is. But your physician colleague is making four to five or six times as much as you, right? And it's just like, but then we talk about parity. It was just, it was a whole thing, man. Like it's just, so those were a lot of the things that were really like adding to my own disillusionment and burnout. But the thing that really kicked off was during COVID, I had negotiated a remote position. So I was working physically at a company, and then I was actually, we were moving across state lines. And I was like, hey, I'm gonna quit because I know I can't keep working here and live somewhere else. And I'm like, well, actually, why don't you just do a remote position? Everything's the same, we'll renegotiate your contract, but then you can keep working. I was like, oh, that's awesome. two months into that new contract, they send me an email, the COO, and she was like, hey, in 30 days you're fired. Like, no explanation. And I talked to my boss, they were like, oh, your paperwork's great, everything's on time, you're seeing plenty of people, patients love you, coworkers love you, you're a model employee, but because you are exclusively remote and we are now pulling everybody back into the clinic during COVID, just a reminder, during COVID, they were like, you're fired. So I had 30 days and three paychecks worth of runway and I couldn't get another job out of the state I'm licensed in. I wasn't willing to move back. And in order to get licensed in the new state would have taken four to six months because the board only meets every other month. And they only see like three people at a time. And they were already booked up for the next two meetings, right? More bureaucracy. And I was like, I've spent 12 plus years of my life. to get a doctorate to practice therapy. And I literally can't practice therapy anymore because I don't have four to six months to wait to get my license to then wait another handful of months to get on all the boards and stuff of the licensure stuff. Like I can't wait six to eight months to be making money. Right. And again, and this was early, early SIPAC. So that wasn't really an option. And even now SIPAC doesn't have the level of flexibility that hopefully it does in the future. So I was like, I literally cannot practice therapy right now or slash anymore. So it was like, I was burnt out, but then this was like, you know, the kick out of a nest that I retrospectively needed. Cause it was like, okay, well, I guess I'm going to be an entrepreneur now. So I guess I got to figure it out. I didn't have business training. I didn't have a business degree. Um, so I actually read about coaching. Uh, the APA had an article about how coaching was a wild West, but cause like, you know, a 14 year old with a tick tock and call themselves a life coach. Like there's, there's, there's in no way regulated. But one of the things this article was saying was because it is unregulated, people with real mental health training, if we join the discipline of coaching, we can collectively elevate the quality bar for the discipline of coaching. And we really stand out because we have such deep expertise and largely everything we do in therapy, all those skillsets translate very, very well into coaching. We just have to make a couple of modifications. And one of the guys quoted in it was Dr. Jeffrey Arbach, who runs the College of Executive Coaching. And it's sort of like a four psychologist by psychologist sort of executive coaching training program. Other people with like advanced degrees also go through it, but largely it is run by a lot of like doctoral level psychologists and things. And that really gave me a lot of comfort. Cause I'm like a lot of coaching programs I looked at were super generic and like for very like just basic stuff. I'm like, I know all of those things. And honestly, I knew a lot of what we went through in the college executive coaching. It just helped me shift my lens from a pathology model to a wellness model. That was a huge thing. It really helped me with. Um, so it was great, but for a lot of us in the therapy world, coaching is a four letter word, right? Like I remember being in grad classes and we would like actively talk trash about coaching and life coaching and all these other things. And it's just like, All of that internalized stigma held me back because there was so much elitism in the program, in the discipline itself of psychology and therapy. Some earned, some very much not, because I honestly think, man, This is a very like spiky point of view. I honestly think that therapists would be, any kind of therapist, would be better served to function, to try to emulate life coaches more than medical providers. We are taught, especially nowadays, we are taught we need to be many medical providers. We need to work alongside physicians. And an integrated model is phenomenal for patients and barriers to treatment and things. The issue is, that's what psychiatrists did. And psychiatrists like, and I could be making up some of this, who knows, but so take it all with a grain of salt, look, look it up. But psychiatrists, from my understanding, historically functioned more like therapists back in the day. But over time, so they would do more therapy and prescribe, right? Because like now a lot of psychologists are wanting to get prescription privileges. They would do therapy and prescribe, but then over time it's like, well, I can do a 10, a five to 10 minute med check and do a refill and make way more money. Cause I can see five to six people at an hour and just make way more. Let me just do that. And then I can just offload the therapy bit to a counselor, a psychologist, a social worker, whatever. Right. Well now psychologists more and more are trying to be like, oh, we should get prescription privileges so we can help with this. And it's like, that's the early phase of what psychiatrists went through. And a lot of people have stigma around talking about therapy or talking about some of these other things. And it's like, nobody has stigma about having a coach, right? And I'm not saying you should just instantly call yourself a coach, but functionally like, Oh, what are coaches doing differently? than medical providers or psychiatrists, or how we are taught in psychology, that is making them feel, the perception of them making them feel so much more approachable, and there's more excitement around working with these types of people. That I think is what a lot of us in the therapy world miss out on, is the excitement people have to work with us. And I think that is a key piece of like, we're too busy, especially modern programs. We're too busy trying to play catch up with physicians to think about, well, where are we truly most valuable and what are other disciplines that though they may not have the same level of expertise, they have a higher level of success and resonance with people. How can we learn from what is working for them and modify it to our own needs?
Melvin Varghese PhD: That's such a great way of approaching it. Um, I have a couple of questions for you before we wrap up. So one is, what do you think are the top mistake? Let's even just say one. The top mistake that a therapist makes when they become coaches.
Corey Wilks PsyD: The top mistake? OK, so the biggest one I see is expecting clients to find you in the therapy world, especially if you work for any sort of like company, they just send you referrals. Right. Um, if like, you know, when I worked for medical clinic, I never had to worry about that. Like they filled my schedule. There was a team of people whose responsibility it was to advertise, to get people or, or, you know, patients were seeing their physician. They were like, Hey doc, I'm depressed. And the physician's like, oh, cool. Go see Corey. Right. Like I never had to ever worry about that. And also I was salaried. So I didn't care if I had 10 people or one person show up because my paycheck was the same. when I worked at a private practice, I remember specifically, they bought ad placement at the local grocery store. The issue was, so they spent their marketing budget on these ads. The issue was if you like, we call it a buggy, like a cart, like a shopping cart. I'm Appalachian, we call it a buggy. You know, like where like the kid sits and like the front of it. Not, not the thing where, you know, there's like full child safety flat that goes back and forth. Not where that was where like the shopper is, you know, where you would be looking. It wasn't that it was, if I'm walking towards you, it's, it was this side of, of where the kid sits. So you could see the ad from 30 feet away, but me, the shopper who is primarily looking here, I, I couldn't see it. So I'm like, no one. can read this ad. No one is looking for this ad. Also, this ad is pointless, like nobody's ever going to see it. But you just spent your marketing budget because you don't understand advertising and marketing and outreach. But they're like, Oh, we pay for ads. It's like you you threw money out the window, you'd been better off to legitimately just throw it out the window, because and then write your number on a dollar bill. So because a lot of therapists are not trained as entrepreneurs and do not think entrepreneurially, that can be a real big issue moving into coaching because you're not just a coach. You are an entrepreneur at that point, and you have to learn customer acquisition. You have to learn marketing, copywriting, advertising, and creating content, which is content marketing. You have to learn these things largely Because without that, you are purely reliant on word of mouth, which is really hard to, to create that momentum early on.
Melvin Varghese PhD: Yeah. That's such a good point. I, um, yeah, I think, especially, I think when you come from exactly what you said, either salary positions or where there's already some sort of infrastructure or system, I definitely think that's like the biggest one. Um, what would you say is the biggest con of leaving mental health for coaching in your experience?
Corey Wilks PsyD: For me personally, like I said, I worked in integrated primary care. So I was part of an interdisciplinary team. And I really enjoyed being on a team and having like, you know, shared records and just like this, this interdisciplinary like team approach to care. That was really, really fun. Coaching largely is much more solo. However, I will say, um, what I have done to kind of, uh, get some of those like needs met. Um, even though I work largely solo is collaborating with people, um, you know, on a regular basis and, and doing like short term projects with people, um, that has been really helpful, but, but it can potentially be lonely if you come from an, like an interdisciplinary model.
Melvin Varghese PhD: Got it. I'm going to ask a kind of silly question. Is there like a group supervision equivalent in coaching? Is that like a norm or is that?
Corey Wilks PsyD: So specifically when I went through the College of Executive Coaching, which it does give you, you qualify for like ICF certification if you know what that is or care what that is, it's just an extra credential. Going through their program, it qualifies you to like fill out extra paperwork to get an extra piece of paper. I didn't, because I'm like, I have a doctorate, I don't need an extra certification. But during their program, you do get supervision, specifically. Um, with a lot of less, um, less good programs. Um, probably not because they don't, I don't think they take it as seriously because again, coaching is unregulated. You don't have to have supervision. Um, but they offer it. Yes.
Melvin Varghese PhD: And then is it the norm? Like I, and it sounds like the norm is not that. the typical coach has like supervisors or, or they're going into their own group supervision where they're discussing like a coaching client or any of those.
Corey Wilks PsyD: No, no. Like everything you did in, in like grad school for therapy coaches don't do. Because again, there's no regulation, so there's no formality to it. Like, you could literally read Atomic Habits, and I'm in no way disrespecting James Clear, like, dude wrote a great book, dude knows his stuff. But I see people, they will literally like, oh, I read Atomic Habits, I'm a habits coach now. And it's like, Buddy, you ain't, but, but there, there, there's no board saying like, Hey, you don't have this credential. Hey, you haven't had X number of hours. You can't call yourself this. It's like a nutritionist versus a dietitian. You can't call yourself a dietitian because that is a regulated term. Right. As a protected term, anybody can call themselves a nutritionist. It is unregulated. Same thing with coach versus therapy.
Melvin Varghese PhD: Yeah. Corey, the last question I have for you is, what advice would you give to a therapist who is considering becoming a coach listening to our session?
Corey Wilks PsyD: One, learn to stop seeing coaching as a four-letter word. Like so much of your skill set, directly translates to coaching. Even like your diagnostic abilities can translate, even though you're not diagnosing, right? Cause you're really good at identifying patterns and figuring out like, oh, this is probably what's going on. Let me test this hypothesis with the right questions, right? Active listening, building rapport, asking questions, like all those directly translate, right? I have a whole course that goes through all this stuff of like, here's how to actually become a coach and like, here are all the skills and everything. Like I have a course that walks through all that, but that's it, right? Like, If you're a therapist, you have damn near all the skills to already be a coach that the missing pieces are moving, like shifting from a pathology or a disease model to a wellness model. And all that really means is assume the person you're working with is already pretty healthy. And then from that assumption, move forward rather than assuming all this person has clinically significant anxiety, depression, whatever. And that is what the focus is like. No, no. The focus is rarely that because that would get you into therapy territory. The focus is typically I want more out of life than what I currently have. I'm getting in my own way. I have become the bottleneck. I have some mindset or some habit issues. And I just want help with that. I want thought partnering to move forward to flourish. That is what they want. All your stuff directly applies. If you are, if what you're passionate about falls under therapy, then do therapy. Like if you really like helping people, you know, navigate like borderline, you know, traits or suicidality or schizophrenia, or if you really like assessments, um, for like disability evals, totally cool. Keep doing therapy. But if what you're passionate about doesn't directly fall under therapy, you would probably love coaching.
Melvin Varghese PhD: I mentioned that was going to be my last question. I had one more question. You said there's this balance. Sometimes you're teetering between coaching versus therapy when you see somebody and you're like, hey, this is getting into therapy territory. Like, how do you like what are the internal questions that you ask yourself to be like to, you know, to parse out?
Corey Wilks PsyD: Great question. And this is another like mini module I have in the course. Like, hey, if you're a therapist, like here's some things to consider. A big thing, one, I have in my contract that you sign up, like you agree that if I, in my own discretion, believe what you have going on is more related to therapy. You will either pause coaching or get a therapist in tandem because though I, I maintain a license, I am not doing therapy anymore. Right. Uh, so that is really important to, to have that caveat upfront. Obviously when you're doing like a discovery call, like before you actually sign somebody, you kind of suss out some of that of like, you got some other things going on that I am not trying to go into that quagmire with you right now. Um, so there's, there's like a filtering process, but the other piece too is like, you know, I've had coaching clients before where like, we're doing business coaching. But in the midst of that, maybe they're like a loved one dies or they go through a divorce. And it's like, I can't just be like, nah, we're going to talk about revenue over here. It's like, okay, let's touch on this as so far as it directly relates to why you're, you're seeing me. And let's both mutually agree on where this line is between coaching and therapy so that if we start to. come close to this line, we both agree like, okay, yeah, this is something I should just, you know, talk to my therapist about. Great. Awesome. Yes. Moving forward. Right. The one thing very quickly that we learned that I learned in grad school was like the idea of a Yavis client. Like I think it was like young, attractive, vocal, intelligent, whatever, uh, social or something. And it was like the quote unquote, like perfect client. And I remember being told you will never get a Yavis client. because that just isn't what therapy is about. That's a pipe dream. You may get one or two throughout your career, but most of your clients aren't going to be Yavis clients or Yavis patients. Coaching largely is just all Yavis. I'm not saying like they're attractive or young necessarily, but like they're all vocal. They're all intelligent. They're all very insightful. Okay. That is a huge difference. You see too, because coaching is private pay that naturally skews a lot of the demographics and the people you're going to see, right? Especially if you charge more that just they're, they're going to be a little more stable in a lot of areas. So it makes those conversations generally a lot easier. Like, Hey, remember where we said, like this line is, it seems like you're approaching it. Or a lot of times they'll just be like, I feel like we're approaching this line where like, I should just switch and just go to a therapist. Let's get back on track and talk about this over here. That is how most of those conversations have always went. Like we might touch on it a little bit of like, oh yeah, so your mood's kind of low right now, like that's super understandable. Have you thought about getting a therapist? Oh yeah, actually I already made a call this afternoon. Cool, then you can talk with that with them. So it generally hasn't, it hasn't been the issue that when we've had ethics classes in grad school, we're like, Oh my God, like, is a banana actually a banana? Or is it like, what if they have an eating disorder? Then like, if I have a banana on my desk, like, am I actually coercing them? Like, what if I, I, I had those conversations about like, is a banana really banana? And I wasn't even like a Freudian, right? It's the whole thing. Those aren't the issues you run into as a coach, largely.
Melvin Varghese PhD: uh yeah it's incredibly like helpful to hear because i think you're right like i think when you're when you don't know the tendency then is to just kind of turn it black and white right and there's definitely more nuances there uh cory appreciate you uh i'm grateful for our friendship where can we learn more about you and the work that you're doing the world
Corey Wilks PsyD: So I am Corey Wilkes Sidey everywhere, Twitter, Twitter X, whatever, LinkedIn. My website is Corey Wilkes Sidey.com. If you go to Corey Wilkes Sidey.com, you can find all my stuff, my newsletter, the courses I've created. If you're curious about any of those, everything else I'm up to, Corey Wilkes Sidey.com.
Melvin Varghese PhD: Awesome. And I've gone through, I have not done the coaching course yet, but the values-based course, um, I recommend this course to anyone because I think just in terms of like really getting clarity on your values, um, it was been, especially I think the past couple of years, as I've really thought about the direction of STC, um, that course just going through it, um, it's just been incredibly helpful. So, uh, Corey, appreciate you, man. And, uh, have a great rest of your day. Hey there, I hope you enjoyed my conversation with Corey, and especially if you are in a season where you are thinking about becoming a coach or adding a coaching component to your business. I hope that today's session has just been really helpful for you. Again, be sure to connect with Corey. Again, his website is over at coreywilksci.com. You know, I was just reflecting on this conversation and I think the one thing that I have, I took away is that decisions like this are never easy. They often have a lot of layers to it. I think one thing I've just noticed is, I think in our field, right, like there's sort of like those folks who are traditionalists are like, you know, you've got trained as this and this is the path that you need to go on. and then I think there is the other the other side of it right which is like you know I guess an extreme version is you know okay you have this training but now kind of unregulated like do what you want because anybody can hang up a shingle become a coach so I hope more than anything today's session is just giving you a little bit more of a holistic understanding of it and also giving you some resources that you may want to look into if you do want to go down the coaching route. I'm in this interesting season right of like having gone back into clinical work but then also having STC and i'm just learning like there's just a lot of things to navigate and maybe my situation is a little unique but i don't think it is because you know i've got this clinical arm and then i've got stc and we do courses and consulting and i think that's just the one thing that i would just say is like really um be up to the T when it comes to the legal and ethical stuff. So even with STC and private practice, those were like two different LLCs, two different bank accounts. I'm very clear on who I can work with in each of those domains. Again, be sure to connect with Corey over at CoreyWilkesID.com. And I hope that you enjoyed today's session. Have a great rest of your day, and I'll see you next time. Bye.
timestamps00:00:00 – Defining Success in Psychology
00:01:21 – Introduction to Coaching Transition
00:02:31 – Corey's Career Goals and Evolution
00:04:41 – Understanding Autonomy in Work
00:08:36 – Realizations About Bureaucracy
00:10:57 – The Impact of Insurance on Therapy
00:15:21 – The Catalyst for Change
00:20:01 – Disillusionment with Traditional Roles
00:22:52 – The Shift to Coaching
00:26:32 – Common Mistakes Therapists Make in Coaching
00:30:05 – Cons of Leaving Mental Health for Coaching
00:33:54 – Group Supervision in Coaching
00:35:00 – Advice for Aspiring Coaches
00:38:06 – Navigating the Coaching vs. Therapy Line
00:41:45 – Corey's Resources and Closing Thoughts
selling the couch podcast with melvin varghese phdWeekly interviews, strategy, and advice for building your private practice in and beyond the therapy room.
Apple podcastsYou TubeSpotify ready to launch your online course?Please check out our free online course starter kit for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This FREE 7-day email course will help you validate your course idea (so that you can create a course that has buyers).
sign up for free course starter kitready to launch your podcast?Please check out our FREE podcasting workshop for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This workshop is pre-recorded so you can watch it on a day and time that works for your schedule.
It contains a lot of practical tips that we've learned as STC has reached 1.81 million+ downloads and become a 6-figure business with podcasting as the backbone.
sign up for podcasting workshopCorey wilks psydPsychologist and Executive Coach @ Corey Wilks PsyD
Corey Wilks is a psychologist and executive coach in Austin, TX who's worked with founders like Ali Abdaal and with communities like David Perell's Write of Passage, Jay Clouse's Creator Science Lab, Justin Moore's Brand Deal Wizard, and Tim Stoddart's Copyblogger Academy.
Dr. WiIks helps top entrepreneurs, CEOs, founders, and creators in the world build fulfilling lives and thriving businesses aligned with their values.
Melvin varghese phdPsychologist and Founder @ Selling The Couch
Melvin Varghese, PhD is a licensed psychologist in Philadelphia, PA. In 2015, Dr. Varghese founded Selling The Couch, a podcast to help therapists move from clinical to online income.
On the podcast, he interviews successful practitioners about how they've built their practices, social media/marketing experts, and shares lessons as he uses our clinical skills to create an online business powered by podcasting + online courses.
The podcast is one of the top Career podcasts in Apple Podcasts, has been downloaded over 1.8 million times, and is heard in over 125 countries. Mel is a successful course creator with 240+ students and $300k+ in course sales.
More Posts372: Decluttering Tips For Therapists- Sarah Mueller From The Decluttering Clubby Melvin Varghese | Sep 27, 2024 | Blog, Private Practice, STC Podcast
Sarah Mueller, a decluttering specialist shares how therapists can declutter their lives and how clients can benefit when working with a decluttering specialist
371: 3 Reasons I Left Psychology Behind for a Coaching Careerby Melvin Varghese | Sep 22, 2024 | Growing Your Practice, Private Practice, STC Podcast
When an addictions psychologist leaves the profession to become an executive coach and whether it's right for everyone.
370: Why I Shut Down a 10K-Member Facebook Groupby Melvin Varghese | Sep 12, 2024 | Growing Your Practice, Private Practice, STC Podcast
A behind the scenes of our decision to shut down our 10k member Facebook Group.
« Older Entries The post 373: Tips On Starting A Private Pay Group Practice – Dr. Adam Assoian appeared first on Selling The Couch | Melvin Varghese PhD.
372: Decluttering As An Adjunct To Therapy- Sarah Mueller From The Decluttering ClubWritten By Melvin Varghese PhDIn this episode of the Selling the Couch podcast, I have the pleasure of reconnecting with my friend Sarah Mueller, the founder of The Decluttering Club. Sarah and her team have supported over 188k people declutter their homes and their lives especially focusing on how to declutter when feeling overwhelmed by the process.
Our conversation dives deep into how decluttering can serve as a supplement to therapy, especially in the wake of the emotional challenges many of us have faced during and after the pandemic.
We begin by exploring Sarah's personal journey that led her to create The Decluttering Club. Despite being an organized person, she struggled with clutter in her home, particularly while raising her four children. It wasn't until she realized that the issue wasn't about organization but rather about having too much stuff that her life began to change.
This epiphany sparked her passion for decluttering, and she has since built a thriving community around this concept, helping countless individuals find relief and clarity through the process of letting go.
“Decluttering” is a word that's deep with meaning. Sarah emphasizes that it's not just about tidying up or moving things around; it's about letting go of anything that doesn't serve you.
We delve into the emotional complexities of this process, including the fears and attachments that often accompany our belongings. Sarah shares valuable insights on how to distinguish between what serves us and what we might be rationalizing as necessary.
One of the key takeaways from our conversation is the myriad benefits of decluttering. From the immediate sense of relief and peace to the practical advantages of saving time and money, decluttering can significantly lighten our mental and emotional burdens. We also discuss the importance of approaching decluttering with kindness and compassion, especially when feelings of overwhelm arise. Sarah introduces her “10-minute decluttering method,” which encourages small, manageable steps to ease the process (this blog post is a deep dive into this concept).
As we navigate the topic of sentimental items, we touch on the grief that can accompany letting go of cherished belongings. Sarah shares her perspective on how releasing these items can be a crucial part of healing, allowing individuals to accept what has changed in their lives. We also discuss how working with a decluttering expert can complement therapeutic practices, providing a holistic approach to emotional well-being.
This episode is packed with practical tips and heartfelt insights, making it a valuable resource for anyone looking to declutter their physical space and, in turn, their emotional landscape. Whether you're a clinician working with clients who struggle with anxiety, OCD, or hoarding, or simply someone interested in the art of decluttering, I hope you find inspiration in Sarah's story and the wisdom she shares.
Transcript (AI-Generated)Melvin Varghese:
Hey, it's Melvin. Before we jump into today's podcast session, just wanted to take a moment to thank the team over at Upheal for supporting the STC podcast. Upheal is AI-powered case notes that are HIPAA compliant and GDPR certified. If you've been struggling with case notes and just trying to keep them and get them in all in order and just even complete them, I definitely encourage you to check out Upheel over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash upheel. And at checkout, be sure to use the promo code couch to get 50% off Upheel for the first three months. This is just for STC listeners, but the offer expires on October 31st, 2024. Let's jump right into today's session. Hello, hello, welcome to today's session of Selling the Couch. I hope you're doing well, having an incredible day. So today's podcast session is all about decluttering, and specifically how decluttering can be a supplement to therapy. I'm joined by my friend Sarah Mueller over at thedeclutteringclub.com. Sarah and I actually connected about eight years ago. We were part of Stu McLaren's tribe community. So in the early days of my podcasting course, one of the things that we had been thinking about was, do I just have this as a course only offering? Or is there like a membership site opportunity that's there. And Sarah hosted a meetup of like local entrepreneurs. 70 years ago and I remember at that meetup we spent a lot of time just Sarah and I just talking and just connecting because I felt like there was so much alignment when it came to values and how we sort of saw things and all of these things. Since then Sarah has grown a massive following online She'll share some more of the numbers, but we are now, you know, talking like hundreds of thousands of people following her. She's built a very, very successful business around this concept of decluttering. And I, you know, wanted to have Sarah on just to kind of share her story but more about decluttering and this concept of it because I feel like many of us as clinicians especially are in seasons of life where we're thinking about letting things go and especially as the pandemic in the midst of the pandemic and after the pandemic I think so many of us have had losses and we're trying to now figure out what the purpose of a lot of things are and part of that means is that we let things go. So We start off just by talking about Sarah's story, why this was such an important mission for her. We talk about exactly what decluttering means. I think before this conversation I had this assumption of decluttering means a certain thing, but it actually means a more holistic thing, which I love the way that Sarah describes it. we talk about some of the benefits of decluttering and then we talk about the real meat of this is about how do you start decluttering when you're feeling overwhelmed and then we get into a little bit deeper of I know many of us are really have a lot of our old books we love collecting books but if we're not careful you know books can take up a ton of space and sometimes they might be meaningful to us but how do you declutter in the midst of like declutter books essentially And then we finally talk about how decluttering can be a supplement to therapy and some of the ways that that can be truly helpful. So here's my conversation with Sarah Mueller from TheDeclutteringClub.com. Hey Sarah, welcome to Selling the Couch.
Sarah Mueller:
Oh my gosh, thank you so much for having me, Melvin. This is such a treat.
Melvin Varghese:
You know, it's so we were talking about this right before, but it has been probably a good eight years since we connected and we were thinking about like our businesses and like just little babies in the business world. And first of all, I'm just so grateful that even in the midst of a long period of time of like connecting that we can just like pick up, you know, and I think I love when there are relationships with folks where it can do that and definitely consider you one of them. And yeah, I'm just so thankful for you and for our conversation today.
Sarah Mueller:
Oh my God. I love it. I mean, it's true, right? We just hopped right on and like, literally, I don't think I've seen you in my Facebook feed and maybe once or twice, but it didn't matter. Right. Cause I think we have so many things in common and we have a lot of shared values. And so like eight years is just like, you know, it's like a day. So it's great to be here.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, a day in a pandemic and all that kind of stuff. Right. So.
Sarah Mueller: Exactly.
Melvin Varghese: I have a ton of questions for you, you know, but I wanted to start here. What's your story that made you want to create the Cluttering Club? I mean, which has grown into a uber successful business. What's like the backstory on all of this?
Sarah Mueller:
Yeah, you know, I've always been a very organized person, right? Like my life is organized, but it was not always decluttered. And I spent probably 10 plus years of my adult, more than 10 years of my adult life just really struggling to keep up and really frustrated, right? Because so I have four kids now. I think at the time I started declaring I had three, but it's just like, why, why if I'm already organized and I know how this is supposed to work, like why is my house always messy? And why do I always feel like I'm just absolutely exhausted? There must be something I can do about this. Right. And so like over time, I, I kind of had this aha moment of, oh, it's not an organization problem, right? I don't need to go buy more bins. I don't need to, you know, I don't just need a weekend where the kids are. you know, somewhere else so I can clean up. Like, I had plenty of that, but that wasn't the answer to the problem. The problem was that I just had more stuff than I needed, more stuff that I could process. So once I realized that and started letting go, oh my gosh, Melvin, my life got so much easier. And I have four kids, again, four kids, that's a lot of kids. And I had a home business at that point, I had a different business, and life just got easier. And I was like, oh my gosh, everybody needs to know this. This is, like, people actually don't know this. You know, so I started talking about it and, you know, when, when you're talking about it to your friends, they might be like, oh, that's great. You know, like they may or may not be interested, but when I started sharing online and I had a blog at the point, I started sharing online and people are like, oh. that's cool. Right. And they wanted to hear more. And so that's how we started. And it's just grown over time. I've just realized, okay, you know, there's, there's so much we can do again to make life easier. Like my tagline is less stuff, more life. Like this is not about just like getting rid of stuff to get rid of stuff. Like I'm not a minimalist, although I'm getting closer and closer every day, but I want people to have an easier life. I want them to have room for what matters to them. Like this is, I believe, desperately important. This is not just a nice to have, this is not just about getting cleaned up or saving a little time. No, this is about like redeeming your life and then doing the things that you actually want to do. And I feel like I have the answer to that.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, really well said. You said one of the things was that the business has grown over time. So I mean, can you give us like a glance of like, like, followers, like any of this stuff that's, that's been happening? Because I mean, I've seen you and I've tracked it. But yeah,
Sarah Mueller:
Yeah, oh my gosh, it's so crazy, isn't it? It's like, it's phenomenal. And I think, you know, maybe it seems like it's happened, you know, people may be watching, they're like, oh my gosh, you blew up overnight. But of course, that's not the truth. Right? And we know this now. We've been friends for eight years. That's a long time to work on the same thing. So I think when we started out, Basically, I was starting from zero in terms of my social media following. I had an email list. I've always loved to email my, you know, my community. I feel like it's like the one-to-one connection. So I love that. But we started out with basically zero social media in 2018. And that was when I really started focusing in on the decluttering. And we actually went viral like really fast, like once I kind of learned some techniques. We had some viral posts, but it's just grown over time. So let's say from zero and right now on Facebook, we have 187,000 followers. On Instagram, I think there's 136,000, right? And I'm not sure about YouTube, but it's just built over time. We have thousands of people in the membership and tens of thousands who participate when we do a challenge. So it's really, really like there's a demand. There is a huge need for what we're teaching. It's pretty cool.
Melvin Varghese:
How has it been for you? Well, before I even say this, like you're one of the most humble and grounded people that I've ever met, because I remember when we met eight years ago, that was one of the first impressions that I had of you, like you're, we're successful. And but you are like, you're just a nice person. And I love when good people win. What has it been like for you to see something, I mean, again, this is not overnight, but to see it grow like this, right? And how has it changed you internally?
Sarah Mueller:
Well, it's required me to, to grow. I mean, I can say, and I do believe this, this has never been about me, right? This is not about me. This is not the Sarah show, but it kind of also is, right? Like my community is looking to me to lead them. And when I'm willing to accept that, then I can grow into the leader that I feel that I want to be for this community. So that's been a little challenging, like, I would much rather, you know, be like, hey, we're all in this together. And we are. But also, like, I'm leading the ship here. And the more that I do that, the better. Because I feel like there's, again, there's just such a need. And I can't fill that need if I am not willing to say, you know, here's where we're going, here's what's going on. Here's what I want. And it just has been challenging to grow as a leader, to have a team, to give direction. Not easy, but I think really, really good work. I think it's probably the most important work that I've done. So it's been a good journey.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, really well said. I think this is one of the things of entrepreneurship. I think it was a little naive to the way that it stretches you and forces you to become even somebody maybe you had aspired to become, but I don't know, something like entrepreneurship, I feel like is such an accelerant to that growth, you know?
Sarah Mueller:
Absolutely. Yeah.
Melvin Varghese:
Okay. So as I shared, I've got a lot of questions for you and maybe we could just start here. What exactly does decluttering mean?
Sarah Mueller:
I love that question. You know, some people think it means like putting things away or moving things around. I, I have a very simple definition. It's just letting go of anything that doesn't serve you. Okay. So like, I can't look at your house or I can't look at anyone's house and say, Oh, you should declutter that. Like, I have no idea. Right. And a lot of times people don't understand that because they'll be like, Oh, you know, don't tell me to get rid of my stuff. It's not, you know, like I love my clutter. And I'm like, but then it's not clutter, is it? If it's serving you, if you want to keep it, then it's not clutter. And I would encourage you to keep it. Now, just be careful because are you sure that it's all serving you? Right? A lot of times people don't really take a look and we could dive into that, but just letting go of anything that isn't needed anymore. It doesn't mean that, you know, a lot of times people think, well, if I let this thing go, it means that it's no good. or it means that I made a mistake or whatever. It means I don't love that person, and that's not what it means at all. It's just letting go of what you don't need or what you don't want to keep in your possession.
Melvin Varghese:
Two questions there, but we'll start with this first one. How do you distinguish between what serves you versus rationalizing? Something could be clutter, but you just sort of rationalize it as it's serving me.
Sarah Mueller:
Yeah, I think it's just a question of being honest with yourself. Something might, you might decide, I'm like, do you like your reason? Why are you keeping something? This is, we dig into this a lot in our membership and our community. Like, why are you keeping that thing? Are you keeping it because you feel like you're going to collapse into a puddle of tears if you let it go? Like, okay, you know, maybe you like that reason, but maybe you don't, right? Maybe you think, okay, this can be super hard, but also, It's the right thing. Again, being honest with yourself about why you're keeping something. If you're keeping it because you love it to pieces, amazing. If you're keeping it because you don't want to make your mother-in-law mad, probably not a great choice. But again, that's not my job. So everybody needs to decide for themselves and get really clear on that.
Melvin Varghese:
One thing I hear in all of this is there has to be a lot of internal work that has to be done and the meaning we attribute to it, but even not just the meaning to the thing, but I think it's the fear of letting it go, right? Whether it's family dynamics or personal, whatever it is, right? I feel like that, I mean, correct me if I'm wrong, but it seems like that's where the real work is happening. It's not just about the thing.
Sarah Mueller:
Of course, absolutely. Right? Like, we're talking about t-shirts and coffee mugs and, you know, old pieces of paper, photos. But no, we're not. We're talking about memories. We're talking about, you know, that thing that I remember because of XYZ. It's all about emotions. It's all about the stories that we associate with the things. And that's why it's challenging, right? If you don't have a story behind something, you're like, oh, it doesn't really matter. Like, I'm not attached. Like, it can go. But there's always an emotional reason behind why we keep something or why we don't want to let it go.
Melvin Varghese:
I mean, even to drive this home, I drive a 2004 Toyota Camry, and it's going strong, like 20 years, right? And my wife recently has been like, hey, it's time we get a new car. But I'm like, it only has 123,000 miles in it. But I think when I think about it more, it's what it represents, right? That was my first call. My parents got me that when I graduated undergrad. and that car has taken me from Texas to Nashville to Philly. There's so much journeying and all of that. It's not just a car.
Sarah Mueller:
Right, and what does it mean if you were to let it go? What does that mean? Does that mean that you're too good for it? Does it mean you're no longer in that phase of life? What does it mean? You have to figure out what you want it to mean.
Melvin Varghese:
Absolutely. You said something a couple of minutes ago, which I like, correct me if I'm wrong, but I think you said something around like, I love this person. So it could also be relationships and not just stuff. Is that, is that an accurate assumption?
Sarah Mueller:
You mean like what you're letting go of or the reasons that you're.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. The, the letting go of like, could there be like friendships or some, someone in your life that like, does it just have to be items? I guess is what I'm saying.
Sarah Mueller:
Yeah, it could be all of the above, right? I mean, we could declutter our things, we can declutter our time, our commitments. I think it's all rolled up together. We might want to keep something because we're afraid of, you know, missing that thing. We might, even though that thing isn't really serving us, maybe it's like that with a relationship. You know, we love the person, but the relationship doesn't feel like it's serving us, but we're like, I don't know how to let that go. So very, very similar. And I think it's interesting because once people gain some experience with letting go of simple things, then they can actually translate that into letting go of other things. And it doesn't mean that there's anything wrong with the person. It's just maybe we're just ready to complete this and move on. It's not serving you anymore.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, I love how you distinguish that. And you're speaking to this, but I was wondering if we just go a little deeper into this. What are some of the benefits of decluttering?
Sarah Mueller:
I mean, I think you had asked me earlier, like, what are the top two or three? And I was like, oh, I don't even, I could go on for days. But I think like initially there's just like a sense of relief, right? Because I think that a lot of times you know what you want to get rid of, you know what you want to let go of, but it's just hard. So, but once you do it on the other side, there's like peace and relief. And I think that is maybe, like the biggest benefit, because again, you know you want to, you're just not ready or you don't know how. So just a little bit of freedom or a lot of freedom, really, peace and relief is a huge benefit. I mean, on the practical side, you're going to be saving money. Oh my gosh. Like we have people, first of all, they start finding money. They will literally find money in piles of paper and they'll find checks and they'll find cash, like actual dollars. They're going to stop like losing things. So you're going to be saving money because you're not losing things and having to buy them again, or you have duplicates of whatever. So you're going to save money and time. It's going to be so much easier to put your hands on things. Again, like I mentioned before, my life got easier when I started letting things go. And I kind of thought it would be the opposite. I felt like these things are helping me to be prepared for whatever comes my way, right? I got all the things, I've got the, whatever toys we may need, I would have, you know, whatever kitchen gadget is useful, but it turns out that there's like, there's, there's a point of decreasing returns, right? So if you have no toys, right, for your, let's say for your daughter, no toys in your house, probably not gonna work out so well. But if you have 5,000 toys in your house, that's probably not great either. So there's like a happy medium where it's going to work out well. For her, you're going to be able to clean them up. You'll be able to put them away. It's not going to be overwhelming. So I do feel like there's this, this tremendous lightening of what, you know, what it means to just maintain our stuff. And that's huge. And people don't realize that they are spending so much time on their stuff. They have no idea until it's gone. And then they think, oh my gosh, why do I feel so, why do I feel so light? It's because they're, you know, you have let go of that mental burden as well as this stuff.
Melvin Varghese:
Hey, I hope you're enjoying today's podcast session. Before we continue, just wanted to, again, take a moment to thank the team over at Upheal for supporting today's podcast session. So as I mentioned at the beginning, Upheal is basically AI-powered progress notes for therapists. They have a bunch of really cool stuff. So the most important thing is they actually have clinicians on their executive boards and on their staff. So there's actually therapists that are making sure all of the stuff that Upheal is doing is compliant with our licensing laws. The other cool thing is Upheal works for both in-person and telehealth sessions. So if you're doing in-person session you literally turn on the Upheal AI recorder and Upheal listens to that session and at the end of the session it's already generated case notes for you. You can pick between formats like SOAP and DAP or if it's a first session you can even do a treatment plan. It works for individual sessions for couples therapy and soon for family sessions as well. And it works for live and telehealth sessions as well. You can learn more about Upheel over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash Upheel. And they have a brand new promo code. So be sure to use the code COUCH, C-O-U-C-H to get 50% off Upheel for the first three months. This offer is only valid until October 31st, 2024. So be sure to jump in and check it out, especially if you've been struggling to manage case notes. Let's jump right back into today's session. There's a phrase that I'll use in therapy off and on, which is like, just because like something is not familiar, doesn't like because something is not familiar or because something is familiar doesn't mean it's like good for us. Absolutely. Right. And I think all of us fall into that of this is a thing that we have, or this is a way that we've interacted with somebody or whatever it is, right? But because it's comfortable and familiar, we just keep it up because at least for me, I can speak, but like, it's almost like the anxiety of not of trying to do something else. that initially overwhelms the desire to change and do something, even if rationally, I know it probably is the best choice long-term. Speaking of which, I feel like one of the things that a lot of folks struggle with when they are thinking about decluttering is this anxiety or this sense of overwhelm. So how should one go about decluttering when you have that initial feeling of overwhelm, especially?
Sarah Mueller:
Yeah, well, I think it's important to realize what you just said, right? The familiar is comfortable, even if it's not serving us. So I think realizing that it might be challenging, there might be some anxiety or fear when you start to let go. That's okay. Like that's totally normal. And it doesn't mean that anything has gone wrong. So just like noticing, oh, right, this is the time where I start to get overwhelmed. Okay, cool. Like if you know that's going to happen, then it's not going to stop you. Okay. And we really like to like take the, the tiniest baby steps possible, but like the more overwhelmed you are, the smaller your steps should be. And we really, we teach what we call the 10 minute decluttering method. Right. Anybody can do anything for 10 minutes. And then you stop, right? So you just say, I'm going to work on this, you know, this little corner or this, you know, this section of this drawer and look for what are the things that we can let go of. And then we're going to stop. We're going to walk away and we're going to do something else. And you could even make it smaller than that if you want. We, we teach what we call micro wins, right? So it's literally like, is there, is there a pen that you can put away? That's a micro win. Right. And you can, you can enjoy and appreciate that. And that will add up over time too. So that is the most important thing is just to really start small and just do it with like a ton of care and compassion for yourself. I think so many times people think they have to, they have to guilt themselves into doing the work. They have to push, they have to just go and do the whole garage in the weekend. And that just does not work out well. So we take the absolute opposite approach. Let's just dip our toe in the water and then let's keep going over time. If you did 10 minutes a day for a month, you've got 300 minutes. It's a lot of minutes and it will add up and it's much more sustainable. So that's how we like to start.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, that's a great way of approaching it. The thing I love you're especially saying in that is it's being kind to like our nervous system, right? To go from the zero to like, I don't know, spending, like you said, like a whole day cleaning out a garage, right? That just feels really taxing many levels. Whereas these little 10 minute chunks, it's almost like you're priming your nervous system and just like regulating it. I must think of it like the loving kindness kind of method, right? So
Sarah Mueller:
Yeah, absolutely. Well, I have a woman, she had her entire bedroom was packed with boxes. I mean, I think there was a little bit of room to walk, but pretty much it was packed and she literally did her bedroom 10 minutes at a time. And she got to the end and it was just, and then she became a coach, right? Because it had just worked out so well for her. So she went through a coaching program, but you know, you don't have to, you know, just push, push, push in order to have success. You can, no, this might take longer. But you know, it takes a lot longer is if you start, you push yourself, you get overwhelmed, and then you shut down and you never want to do it again like that. Then you're never going to get to the end. So yeah, I think it's imperative that people approach this with love and kindness for themselves, and then maybe also for the other people in their homes.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, yeah, absolutely. I have a really random question next for you. So I feel like a lot of therapists struggle with this, including me, but many of us love books and especially physical books. But if you're not careful, it can fill up entire rooms or entire bookshelves or whatever. What tips do you have when it comes to decluttering books?
Sarah Mueller:
But those books, it's kind of like the car, right? They were there with you. You poured so much into them. I had that with homeschool books. So I used to homeschool my kids and homeschoolers love their books. And I had a couple of teacher's manuals that I had just written in, right? And they had notes and they were beat up. And the more beat up they were, the more I loved them because it meant that I had lived with that book for months, years, right? And I had actually given away most of our homeschool books. Like, most of it had gone, but I had, like, these manuals. And we had stopped homeschooling, like, years, years before. And I had these manuals that are sitting on the, on the shelf. And it was like, you know, I couldn't donate them. Like, these were not, you know, people are like, oh, you should donate them. These were not donatable. They were just not, like, in good shape. And so I finally came to the point where I was like, you know what, I'm trying, I'm having a hard time just letting go of the fact that I'm no longer a homeschooler. But guess what? I'm no longer a homeschooler. Like that time of my life is over and it was beautiful and it was hard and like it was amazing. that's like, that's now over. And if I'm going to hold on to these, this is for me, if I'm going to hold on to these, then I feel like I'm not quite ready to move forward. And so I ended up recycling them, you know, after like a lot of thought, but I was like, what does it mean for me to let this book go? You know, and I think it meant I'm actually finally closing that chapter. And, but that's okay. Like I could be okay with that. And it could also be hard. Like both things could be true.
Melvin Varghese:
I mean, the word I kept thinking about is grief, right? There's a grief in a lot of this process, you know, of, you know, grieving that season of life, grieving kiddos getting older, grieving that they don't need you to that level of like teaching and training them. And I mean, that's the real work.
Sarah Mueller:
But you know, it's like, if we try to just hang on to those things, right? Let's imagine, you know, your kid, like, it's hard to see our kids grow up. You know, we're like, oh my gosh, I miss the time when they were so little. And so we keep things that will help us to feel like, oh, that's what it's like. And again, this is all optional. I'm not saying get rid of all your stuff. Like, don't hear me wrong, please. I am not the person that's like, get rid of all of it. But just be thoughtful in what you do keep. Because the truth is, your kids are not supposed to stay little. It's a good thing if they're growing up. It's a tragedy if they don't. And we can talk about that too, but we want our kids to grow and mature and grow up and become adults. So if we're trying to stay in the past, we're missing out on what's going on for them right now, wherever they are, whether they're 10 or 24 or 54. acknowledging that things do change, and maybe there's some grief associated with that, and that's all so normal. But if we resist that, I think then we do more harm than good. You know, if we're just trying to ignore it, like we're trying to pretend it's not what it is, that's when we have suffering. Like Byron Katie, you know, she says, when we argue with what is, we're going to lose, but only every time. So if we're trying to get back to grad school, you're just going to be suffering. And look at you, you're amazing. That's so awesome that you are not at that point in your life anymore. And also, that was an amazing time.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, so I hear a couple of things in this. So one is like being able to, like you said, hold simultaneous positions, right? Like this is an and both situation. And then the I think the other piece of it is, I don't know, the more I found myself recently, because you know, I'm this year is like 20 years since I left undergrad, right? And I was thinking a lot about that. And I was like, man, that was a cool part of life. And I wish like, I knew what I know now, like things would be okay, like all that stuff, right. But what I found myself, again, I was like talking to my therapist about this. And what I found myself is getting sometimes to a point where there was like, such a sadness, like it was almost like, mentally, I was like back there. And longing for that, but in a way that, like, I was holding on tighter to some sort of, like, idealized memory of, you know, what things were like 20 years ago or something. Yeah.
Sarah Mueller:
I think we romanticize the past, you know? We really do. We forget all the bad stuff and we're like, oh, it was so nice back then. It was so, you know, so wonderful. Yeah, it was. And it's nice now, right? In a different way.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, there were a lot more grays in all of life, right? In all seasons of life, right?
Sarah Mueller:
Yeah, absolutely.
Melvin Varghese:
So I've got like, I know we're coming right up on time. So I've got two kind of final questions for you. So one is when we were chatting via DM, you mentioned that you did this training on releasing sentimental items and you had this theory that letting these items go is often a requirement for healing. And I was wondering if you could talk a little bit more about that.
Sarah Mueller:
Yes, this is such an important topic. And again, we don't recommend that people start with the hard stuff, right? The quote unquote hard stuff, but eventually they're probably going to want to get there, right? They're going to want to get to those things. And we do work with people that maybe have lost a loved one and, you know, maybe everything is preserved for years, right? So it's not a question of time at that point, you know, and we never encourage people to rush through things. But I do think that sometimes we think, well, when I'm ready, I'm going to let that thing go, right? When I'm ready, I'm going to let whatever, right, those items go. But I also think that sometimes the letting go will then encourage the readiness, right? Like we have it backwards. We have the order backwards. And if we can let things go, maybe in a way that honors, let's say that person or that time of your life, you know, maybe you can donate that car to, you know, to something that will sell it for charity, right? Like, Oh, now all of a sudden our grief has been used for something beautiful and productive. And sometimes that can really be healing. I think a lot of times people, they feel like they didn't have any control in, you know, what went down, like how they lost that person or how that situation turned out, like it was out of their control. So they're going to compensate by controlling their stuff, right? By keeping things the same, by maintaining, right? Like that's their coping mechanism. And what I want to offer in that situation is that, you know, maybe you didn't have the control like back whenever that, that, let's say that trauma happened, you didn't have the control, but your way of exhibiting control now is by intentionally letting go. right, and saying, I am, you know, making a choice now to let this this thing go. And it doesn't mean, you know, it doesn't mean I like what happened. It doesn't mean I don't love that person. But I need to do this for myself now. And so I'm letting go on purpose in a controlled way. So that I can have some peace. Does that make sense?
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, yeah, absolutely. I think it goes back to that thing we were talking about earlier of like having compassion for yourself and realizing like, especially as you have more sentimental items, it's often not, it's a process versus just like a, like a thing you just do once, right?
Sarah Mueller: Yeah. I shared a quote on social media recently in this book by this author. Her name is Brianna West. Brianna West. And she said, when we're decluttering, we're not really letting go. We're not really letting things go. We're just accepting what's already gone. And I'm like, that quote makes me cry because I'm like, oh my gosh, it's just accepting what already is. And it's like, wow, that blows my mind. Because these things, they're just a shadow of the reality. Maybe they bring back the memories, but it's not the same. So when we accept what's already gone, now we're not arguing with reality. It's so painful to argue with reality. And I think people think if I stop arguing with it, it means I'm okay with it. It doesn't have to mean that. It just means this is what is. This is what we got. And then we can move forward. But when we're trying to get back into the past, unfortunately, it doesn't work.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. Yeah. So all said, final question I have for you is, how do you think working with a decluttering expert can supplement therapy?
Sarah Mueller:
Wow, we have so many clients. We have so many members that work with a therapist or a psychiatrist. I think it's an absolutely wonderful combination, you know, because we can work on the practical, right? So we start out very practical. And then someone can bring their decluttering work to, you know, to their therapy sessions, you know, and discuss the emotional aspects of it. So I think it really, really works very well. You know, we can just support them. And then we also have the community too. so that people can discuss what's going on, you know, so there's just like this beautiful, like back and forth. I think it works out really, really well. A lot of times what we do, you know, in our communities, in our programs, it will really be very complimentary to what people are talking about in therapy. So, uh, that's pretty cool. I, you know, love it when people are doing both, both sides of that.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. It seems like a very like holistic way to heal, um, because you're doing both the practical work as well as the emotional work and just that combo.
Sarah Mueller:
Yeah, absolutely. And sometimes, you know, you can start with the emotional work, right? You can start with just thinking through and discussions, and then you may end up, you know, changing your behavior, right? And what's going on at home, or you can go the opposite direction, right? You can start cleaning up and, you know, you just do your kitchen. And then you think, wow, I kind of feel better about myself. Like, what happened? Right? You can go either direction. And, you know, ideally you're working at it from both sides. But it's just really cool how people's opinion of themselves, like their self-worth, will grow when they start taking care of their surroundings. Like literally just doing the dishes, cleaning out the junk drawer. Like it actually has, especially, okay, here's the caveat though. You got to do it with love. You can't just clean it up, you know, because you're like embarrassed or because someone's coming over and you feel like, you know, you're in panic. That does not work. So it's this, this amazing benefit. that happens when, you know, when people start to do this work, they go, oh, my gosh, like we have one woman, she said she was having panic attacks regularly. And after a couple of months in our community, she just like they went away. She was like, what? That's cool. So it just it all goes hand in hand.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. I mean, I think it's the power of community. It's the power of doing inner work. Right. And ultimately, I think having a space and creating a space to be able to get out of our own our own heads. Right.
Sarah Mueller:
Yes, so important.
Melvin Varghese:
About how we think about it. Sarah, I'm so thankful for you. Where can we learn more about the awesome work that you're doing in the world?
Sarah Mueller:
Yeah. So we are on social everywhere at The Decluttering Club or just Decluttering Club. You can find our website at thedeclutteringclub.com. We have a free challenge. We'd love to have people come and join us, take our free challenge, you know, give it a try for themselves.
Melvin Varghese:
Sarah, thank you again and have a great rest of your day.
Sarah Mueller:
Thank you so much. It was a pleasure.
Melvin Varghese:
Hey there, I hope you enjoyed my conversation with Sarah, and especially if you are in a season where you've been thinking about decluttering various parts of your life, or you've been interested in this topic and kind of wondering how you can get started, or if you work with clients that struggle with anxiety or OCD or any of these kind of things, or they may struggle with things like hoarding, I hope that today's session is helpful for you. definitely connect with Sarah on socials or and over at our website at the declutteringclub.com. As I was thinking a lot about this conversation, one main thing that I took away is just the importance of doing the internal work And for us as clinicians, I feel like all of us think deeply about these things, and certain objects have deep meanings for us, and just the importance of thinking not just about the object, but beyond the object, and what it signifies, and what it symbolizes, and all of that, and why that work is so important. And also, if you have been like struggling with niches and thinking about this, if this is an area that you're interested in, I mean, there's a clear demand for this work. And as I mentioned, Sarah's built a very successful business from this, and especially even using our clinical skills and even being willing to see some of these folks, I think it can be such a wonderful and healing work in the world. Sarah's website again is over at the declutteringclub.com. And as she mentioned, she runs a bunch of different challenges during the course of the year to help get you started on your decluttering journey or your clients as well. Have a great rest of your day and I will talk to you soon. Bye.
Narrator: Thanks for listening to the Selling the Couch podcast. For more great content and to stay up to date, visit www.sellingthecouch.com.
Melvin Varghese: Hey there, I hope you enjoyed today's podcast session. Just wanted to let you know we have a free weekly newsletter that is trusted by over 8,300 of our colleagues. Basically, we just share the latest podcast episode, some of the things that I'm learning as an entrepreneur and as a business owner. And it's absolutely free. You can sign up over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash newsletter. Would love to have you. Have a great rest of your day. Bye.
timestamps00:00:01 – Introduction and Sponsor Message
00:00:55 – Welcome and Connection with Sarah
00:05:06 – Sarah's Journey to Decluttering
00:09:02 – Growth of The Decluttering Club
00:10:42 – Personal Growth as a Leader
00:11:09 – Defining Decluttering
00:12:25 – Distinguishing What Serves You
00:14:19 – Emotional Aspects of Decluttering
00:16:32 – Benefits of Decluttering
00:19:03 – Sponsor Message: Upheal
00:20:38 – Familiarity vs. Change
00:21:39 – Overcoming Overwhelm in Decluttering
00:25:27 – Decluttering Books
00:30:21 – Grief and Letting Go
00:34:17 – Releasing Sentimental Items for Healing
00:35:13 – Complementing Therapy with Decluttering
00:36:46 – Where to Find Sarah and The Decluttering Club
00:37:07 – Conclusion and Key Takeaways
00:39:14 – Newsletter Invitation
selling the couch podcast with melvin varghese phdWeekly interviews, strategy, and advice for building your private practice in and beyond the therapy room.
Apple podcastsYou TubeSpotify ready to launch your online course?Please check out our free online course starter kit for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This FREE 7-day email course will help you validate your course idea (so that you can create a course that has buyers).
sign up for free course starter kitready to launch your podcast?Please check out our FREE podcasting workshop for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This workshop is pre-recorded so you can watch it on a day and time that works for your schedule.
It contains a lot of practical tips that we've learned as STC has reached 1.81 million+ downloads and become a 6-figure business with podcasting as the backbone.
sign up for podcasting workshopsarah muellerCreator of The Decluttering Club (formerly known as Decluttering School or Early Bird Mom).
Sarah Mueller is a friend I’ve known for several years. She started The Decluttering Club to teach people to declutter in a way that doesn’t create burnout, lets them keep the things they love, and actually lasts for the long term.
She has grown a huge online following of nearly 200k based on the concept of decluttering. Sarah has helped hundreds of thousands of people find peace and freedom in their lives by decluttering their homes, work, and lives.
Melvin varghese phdPsychologist and Founder @ Selling The Couch
Melvin Varghese, PhD is a licensed psychologist in Philadelphia, PA. In 2015, Dr. Varghese founded Selling The Couch, a podcast to help therapists move from clinical to online income.
On the podcast, he interviews successful practitioners about how they've built their practices, social media/marketing experts, and shares lessons as he uses our clinical skills to create an online business powered by podcasting + online courses.
The podcast is one of the top Career podcasts in Apple Podcasts, has been downloaded over 1.8 million times, and is heard in over 125 countries. Mel is a successful course creator with 240+ students and $300k+ in course sales.
More Posts371: 3 Reasons I Left Psychology Behind for a Coaching Careerby Melvin Varghese | Sep 22, 2024 | Growing Your Practice, Private Practice, STC Podcast
When an addictions psychologist leaves the profession to become an executive coach and whether it's right for everyone.
370: Why I Shut Down a 10K-Member Facebook Groupby Melvin Varghese | Sep 12, 2024 | Growing Your Practice, Private Practice, STC Podcast
A behind the scenes of our decision to shut down our 10k member Facebook Group.
369: Behind The Scenes Of A Rebrandby Melvin Varghese | Sep 6, 2024 | Marketing, Private Practice, STC Podcast
This is a podcast episode graphic on Behind the Scenes of a Rebrand with Kevon Cheung.
« Older Entries The post 372: Decluttering Tips For Therapists- Sarah Mueller From The Decluttering Club appeared first on Selling The Couch | Melvin Varghese PhD.
371: 3 reasons i left psychology behind for a coaching careerWritten By Melvin Varghese PhDIn this episode of Selling the Couch, I have the pleasure of speaking with my friend, Dr. Corey Wilks. Corey is a licensed psychologist who has made the significant transition from an addictions psychologist to executive coaching.
We begin by exploring Corey's initial career goals during his time in graduate school. Originally a business management major, Corey found his passion for psychology through an unexpected encounter with a dynamic professor who changed his perspective on the field.
He shares how his journey through doctoral training led him to believe that achieving a doctorate would grant him the autonomy and freedom he desired. However, as he entered the workforce, he quickly realized that the reality of working within bureaucratic structures often stifled that autonomy.
He reflects on the disillusionment he experienced while working in integrated primary care, where he felt constrained by regulations and the limitations of insurance-based therapy. This led him to question the traditional mental health model, particularly the focus on pathology rather than wellness.
A big moment in Corey's journey occurred during the COVID-19 pandemic when he was unexpectedly let go from his job. This event forced him to confront his career path and ultimately propelled him into entrepreneurship and coaching. He emphasizes the importance of bridging the gap between psychology and coaching, noting that many therapists possess valuable skills that can translate well into the coaching realm.
Throughout our discussion, we address common misconceptions about coaching, how to actually get proper training, and the stigma that therapists may feel when considering this path. Corey shares practical advice for therapists contemplating a transition to coaching, including the need to embrace their existing skills and shift their mindset from a pathology model to a wellness model.
We also touch on the potential downsides of leaving traditional mental health for coaching, such as the loneliness that can come from working independently.
As we wrap up, Corey provides insights into the top mistakes therapists make when transitioning to coaching, emphasizing the need for effective marketing and client acquisition strategies. He also discusses how to navigate the fine line between coaching and therapy, ensuring that clients receive the appropriate support for their needs.
I'll also a drop a few articles from Corey's site that can further inspire you.
11 Lessons From The Alchemist To Help You Escape Mediocrity
3 Counterinutive Reasons To Leave Money On The Table
Most People Don't Know This Is The Real Difference Between Therapy And Coaching
Corey also has two wonderful course that I recommended.
The Intentional Life Design course will help you figure out your values and line up a life and career with those values.
And the World Class Coaching course will help you learn strategies from top personal and executive coaches to stand out, build a business around the life you want, and attract amazing opportunities.
I've personally found the Build An Intentional Life course life-changing as a psychologist who thought I'd spend an entire career at a university counseling center with a private practice on the side. It gave me permission to build STC and my private practice around the life I want as a husband, dad, and son vs. some external metric. And I'm about to dive into the World Class Coaching course.
Transcript (AI-Generated)Corey Wilks PsyD:
What success in this job, what success as a psychologist actually looks like, right? When we talk about like, you know, the highest tiers, that ultimately means becoming the director of a program, you know, behavioral health director, maybe the president of your state psychological association. And I'm like, I don't want to be the president of state psychological association because all of these conventions are people preaching to the choir.
Melvin Varghese PhD: Hello, hello. Welcome to today's session of Selling the Couch. I hope you're doing well, having an incredible day. So today's session is all about leaving psychology for coaching. Now, you might be wondering, Mel, I thought this was a private practice related podcast, but The reality is I know that a lot of us are thinking about what we want our businesses to look like. And the reality also is that a lot of colleagues are shifting out of therapy into coaching. And today we're joined by Dr. Corey Wilkes. Corey is a dear friend. He's a licensed psychologist. His website is over at coreywilkespsid.com. And we're having an open and honest conversation about this transition. Corey, much like me, went through a doctoral program, internship, training, and became licensed as a psychologist. And just a number of circumstances led him to realize that he couldn't sustain his job as a psychologist and he decided to shift into coaching. So we're going to cover a number of of different topics. One is we just really start with Corey's career goals and what that looked like in grad school and how that kind of evolved and morphed as he went into private practice. And then we really explore what does autonomy mean for Corey and how he's really tried to design his coaching business around this ability to create autonomy. We wrap up with a couple of different questions. So the first one is what are the top three mistakes that therapists make when they become coaches? This is based on Corey's own personal experience. Corey also has a course for a coaching course and how to become a coach that he's that he's developed. He went through pretty extensive training to become a coach as well. And so just some of the mistakes. And then, you know, I feel like sometimes with episodes like this, it can be about like, you know, very like a let's do this, go in and go and forth and do this. And we actually spend a good amount of time looking at like, what are the cons of actually leaving the traditional mental health and pursuing coaching? Because, again, a big part of my responsibility and role with this episode is to give like holistic perspectives on certain things so that you can make an informed decision versus like making a decision. So we'll jump right into my conversation with Dr. Corey Wilkes from coreywilkesid.com. Hey, Corey, welcome to Selling the Couch. Thanks for having me, man. Oh, my gosh. So if if you don't know, like Corey and I have gotten to be friends over the past couple of years and you know he if you're watching on YouTube he's got like contrast him and me like complete opposite sort of appearance yes all of that right but uh we really just hit it off and uh underneath the, uh, you know, MMA and all of that stuff, really like big teddy bear and just a incredibly, uh, kind and thoughtful person. Um, just to even share a little bit, like anytime we go to Texas, Corey just goes out of his way to be like, Hey, can we hang out? Can we come visit? And just like, thank you for just being you. And, uh, I'm just so grateful for your friendship, brother. And, uh, yeah, I'm really looking forward to this conversation today.
Corey Wilks PsyD: Likewise, man.
Melvin Varghese PhD: Um, that's all you got, man. After I like, hey, hey, you know, I love you.
Corey Wilks PsyD: Like that's like, and everybody who listens to this knows you're lovable and worthy of love. So I don't know what else you want me to say other than you're awesome. Thank you. There's your validation.
Melvin Varghese PhD: Um, you know, we're talking about a topic that I know a lot of folks are thinking through and navigating, um, leaving psychology for coaching and sort of navigating that. Um, you know, like me, you spend many years getting your doctoral degree and you became a licensed clinical psychologist. What was the career goal in grad school?
Corey Wilks PsyD: So actually early on, I was a business management major, um, yeah, in undergrad. And I took a couple of business classes and quickly realized that at least the way business was framed, um, with the classes I took, I was like, this is not for me. Like there's, there's no, there's no people, right? Like all of these classes are about numbers, not about people. I care about people. And so then I, you know, I went through multiple other majors. I kind of was just adrift for a minute. And then I had this like required like adult or child development course. And it was like, you know, Professor Hinton. I was like, okay, so I was expecting some like old white dude who's just like so ancient. And he has like the elbow patches and things like when he talks, you know, chalk dust just poofs out of his armpits or something like that. That was my expectation, right? And in walked this young, like 30s, like early 30s black dude from Memphis. And he walked in, he his tattoos, he had like, like sleeves, he was he had, you know, very visible tattoos. He talked like he was from Memphis. And he was like, I'm Dr. Hinton, I'm your professor. And I was like, dude, you have my attention, because you are in no way what I was expecting. And what I was expecting was super boring. And the way Keelan, because it's Keelan Hinton, the way Keelan described psychology and how, you know, basically people are like puzzles and psychology is about helping people put those pieces in the right place. So people can understand themselves better. We can understand them better and we can kind of help people heal and grow. And that really, really stuck with me. So like literally that day, I went to what, like the bursar's office or registrar's office, whichever, and changed my major in psychology because of Keelan. And we've maintained a friendship, you know, for years after that. And I got like an undergrad, master's, and then a doctorate. And that all started with Keelan's class. So I originally wanted to go into business. We didn't start, I was like, oh, I'm going to do therapy. And I think a lot of us, a lot of psychologists, especially, we go into the therapy world because we were like, oh, if I get a doctorate, I'm at the top of my discipline. I will have autonomy and freedom. And for a lot of us, we have a degree of freedom within our sessions, but there's still a lot of bureaucracy that we have to operate within, especially if you work for a company, especially if you take insurance. And I think that, especially me, but I think a lot of us in the field, kind of grew disillusioned because it was like, Oh, I thought I would have a lot more autonomy than I actually will have if I continue down this path. And there are, there are ways like private practice, you can get more autonomy. There's some other things, but I was working in rural Appalachia in integrated primary care. So I was working within like a much larger institution with a lot of regulations, a lot of bureaucracy. And I just, I didn't have the autonomy that I need as a person to really show up. Um, so then, you know, and we'll get into this, but then I later went, you know, kind of full circle back into entrepreneurship, just without the business background.
Melvin Varghese PhD: What does, um, autonomy mean for you?
Corey Wilks PsyD: So I, I talk a lot about like core value work, which I, you know, I know, you know, and my core value is freedom and you, and freedom is synonymous with autonomy for me. And it really comes down to the freedom to do more of what I love and the freedom from doing things that I just, that, you know, burn me out. So I love being able to express myself, to speak my truth and to help others sort of clarify and speak their own. That can be very difficult to do in bureaucratic structures because there's a lot of rules. There's a lot of don't rock the boat. There's a lot of you are required to do this thing in this way, in this time frame. I like being able to use my perspective to help guide somebody else. I like being able to, you know, use different modalities to, you know, whatever is going to, whatever the person in front of me needs to understand or needs to hear, I want to be able to do that. Right? I don't like having to check off very specific boxes or phrase something very specific way or all, you know, like when I would do therapy, like, oh, I can't, I have to give you a diagnosis in order for you to keep coming back. Because if you are subclinical, then insurance won't cover it. You have to, you know, you, have to have insurance paid for it. Otherwise you can't come in. So now it's like, then you get into like upcoding and downcoding and like all those ethical issues. And it's just like, that was really burning me out. In addition to like, you are a member of this program. These are the requirements for that program. And it just, it, it didn't feel aligned in how I wanted to show up and how I deeply believed that I would be most effective. So a lot of it now is autonomy of, What is most fulfilling for me? What is most intrinsically rewarding for me, both as my day-to-day life, but then also the type of work, the type of people I want to work with? What does that look like? And then now, how can I build my life and my business aligned with those things that truly matter so that I can keep freedom and autonomy, both for myself, my personal freedom and autonomy, but also facilitating the freedom and autonomy of others? What is the best path forward to do both of those?
Melvin Varghese PhD: That's a really way. That's a great way of putting it. You talked about bureaucratic structures and the struggles and the tensions that you had right on many levels, insurance, all of that. Was there one central event that made you realize like, hey, I don't know if this is the career path that I want to keep going down?
Corey Wilks PsyD: A specific thing, not necessarily so much as like, You know, we all have our own opinions about the DSM and, you know, especially in the U S you know, how, how insurance works and things. Um, one thing I realized was so, uh, two things. The first was the, this whole idea of this is a legacy institution. We don't change things. Like I remember one of the places I worked at, um, we had, you know, an EHR, right. Cause I worked in integrated primary care. So we had this electronic health record. And this is where we put all of our notes in. At the end of this, and it was like a workflow of step one, you do this, step two, you do whatever. At the very end, it defaulted to it would send out a copy of your notes to the patient, which it was like, no, you can't do that. And part of our training was you have to go in and manually click all these boxes to make sure that doesn't go out. And it had been done like this for years. And I was like, can't we just like change the default to like not do that? And they're like, no, we can't. Like all of my bosses were like, no, we can't. I was like, I'm just going to email tech support and just ask them. Like separately from all of that, I'm just going to ask them. They're like, oh, sure, that's super easy. And then they did it, like same day. And I was like, this is the kind of stuff that it just burns me up. It's just like, you never even thought to question it because you're like, this is how we do it. And I'm like, this one change saved all of us easily 15 to 20% of the time we were doing on notes, just, just from something that was easily fixable, but nobody thought to question it was things like that. Like those, those highly just, there's this legacy bureaucratic structures. Um, and then the other thing was that I didn't fully, it didn't fully sink in until after I had switched into coaching, which we can talk about too. But, um, A lot of the therapy world defines wellness as the absence of illness. But just because you're not sick doesn't mean you're healthy, right? So like, fundamentally, my role as a therapist working in the therapy world, especially with insurance, isn't to get you to human flourishing or self-actualization or, you know, these other terms you want to put to it. It is my, my actual role is to get you to be subclinical, right? My actual role is to help you no longer warrant a diagnosis of major depressive disorder, single episode mild. That is the actual role of a therapist in, in, You know, you accept insurance, all those caveats, right? Like private practice in an affluent area, you have more leeway, but fundamentally people go to therapy or psychopathology. That is, is one of the core pieces with most of most therapy with most of the country. It is for psychopathology. So then my role is to make you no longer psychopathological, which means being subclinical, but it's like, there are plenty of people who are like, okay, you no longer want a diagnosis necessarily. but you still are in no way really thriving or flourishing. But because this is the model, and unless I take private pay or you can afford private pay, we have to end therapy, this therapeutic relationship, once insurance will no longer cover you coming because you no longer have a good enough diagnosis for them to cover it. That was the thing that really, really just burned me out because like there were people like I would work on like you are awesome and now we've worked through all these things and now you find like your head is above water and we can really help you like thrive and flourish and it was like sorry my insurance won't cover that. Insurance doesn't cover self-actualization and I'm just like damn. So that was a big thing for me.
Melvin Varghese PhD: I mean, I've run into that too. Right. And then you feel like, uh, I mean, it is, it's a formula for burnout because it's like, then what do you do? You just move to the next client, same process kind of happens. And yeah, I mean, I think I followed a very similar path, right. Of what you know questioning like my role in all of it like what it, you know, like all of that right and then this larger sort of maze that you know we often have to navigate, whether you know whatever the bureaucracies right insert whatever. Was it an overnight thing for you to like decide to leave like traditional clinical work and enter coaching or was it more like a these things keep happening? I'm teetering on burnout. I got to make I got to make a leap or I got to do something else.
Corey Wilks PsyD: It was certainly multifactorial, right? So one, I had really good experiences with my practicums and with later jobs. but my internship, one, my internship here was the closest I've come to clinical depression in my adult life. It was absolutely horrific. And that's just the whole story. But basically, No, everybody hated their job largely. And it really showed. And the place actually, after I graduated, because it was APA accredited, after they're like, we're not doing this internship anymore. And everybody left, like all the supervisors left for different jobs. Like it was, it was hellacious. But that gave me a really good glimpse into like, okay, cool. I don't want my life to look like this, this specific thing. I will avoid it at all costs. And that year, was when I kind of started, I think, dabbling and let me read some some books on entrepreneurship. Let me read some books on like the craft of writing, because it's like I have all this knowledge and all this training was like. You know, I think a lot of therapists and psychologists, like we get really disgruntled with like the self-help industry, right? And when you go to a bookstore, psychology and self-help are in the same section, right? So a lot of us with like true expertise, we look at these books and like, there's just so much like snake oil here, or so much just like the most generic things that aren't actually helping people. The issue is, a lot of those fake gurus are really good at talking to a lay population. A lot of experts suck at talking to lay people or a lot of the knowledge we have. is locked behind paywalls and academic journals that are super jargony, that even most of us don't enjoy reading, or access to us is gated behind private practice paywalls and things. So it's like, well, where do lay people turn when they want to learn actual psychology? And it's like, and personal development, like true self-help kind of stuff, where do they turn? Well, they can't really turn to us unless they find us, you know, your local provider, right? Because again, state lines and jurisdictions and geography, like that's a whole separate, even with SIPAC, that's a whole separate conversation, right? Or they go to the gurus. I wanted to bridge that gap of, I have the true expertise, but also I can speak to a lay population. So I started learning because it's like, okay, now people can get access to real information. Right. So I started that process, um, during, you know, early on, like internship kind of thing. Cause it's like, I can't keep, I have to have a backup plan. I have to have a way out of this, you know, in the next five or 10 years, cause this, I cannot do this. Um, so it was, that was part of it. Then I got a job that I, go ahead.
Melvin Varghese PhD: Can I pause you there? Cause you said, um, I knew that I couldn't do this for five to 10 years. Right. I think if I'm being honest with myself like when I was on internship and postdoc I think I was so fearful of like getting a stable job right that that thought of like entrepreneurship like didn't even exist for me so what what made you even think that?
Corey Wilks PsyD: Yeah. So like I kind of referenced before, like I went into this because I really wanted to help people and I value my freedom and autonomy.
Melvin Varghese PhD: But then I values kind of thing.
Corey Wilks PsyD: Correct. And then I quickly realized, oh, what success in this job, what success as a psychologist actually looks like when we talk about, like, you know, the highest tiers that ultimately means becoming the director of a program, the behavioral health director, maybe the president of your state psychological association. And I'm like, I don't want to be the president of the State Psychological Association because all of these conventions are people preaching to the choir. Everybody in the room knows largely everything the person up top is talking about. Most of us largely are there for CEs because we have to renew our license. And yes, this is a very cynical, pessimistic view of it. That has just been my historical experience with all these things. Occasionally you'll get somebody, a new presenter, but a lot of times it's just like, these are the same things we, we, especially at the doctoral level, we all already know. Right. Um, and then like, as like, like BHP directors, like now you are, you have a, a clinical caseload and an administrative, you know, uh, schedule as well. And it's just like, you're expected to see, especially in the medical model, you're expected to see anywhere from 10 to 16 plus patients a day, And I'm just like, so I just got to like, I just got to go from one to the next to the next. I'm like, I feel like a cog in a machine. I don't feel like I am a doctoral, like a doctorate holder at the top of my, my, my expertise, you know, in my discipline where I should have one be making a lot of money and to have a lot of freedom. I'm making good money relative to my profession, but I'm not making good money relative to many other professions. Right. And that's just that really disillusioned me because I'm like, Oh, you know, in grad school, I'm like, Oh, I'm going to get a doctorate. I'm going to have all this freedom and flexibility. I'm going to be making, you know, six figures within the first couple of years. And then you also stuff. And then it's like, you get into it and it's like, no, like you can make six figures. If you do a lot of assessments, if you see an insane caseload, but largely, I mean, maybe if you become director of a good place, but I knew directors who made like 70k. And it's just like, you have a full caseload and a full admin load, like, and you're making this, right? Because you don't know the worth, the value you bring to the table, and this place isn't gonna tell you how much it is. But your physician colleague is making four to five or six times as much as you, right? And it's just like, but then we talk about parity. It was just, it was a whole thing, man. Like it's just, so those were a lot of the things that were really like adding to my own disillusionment and burnout. But the thing that really kicked off was during COVID, I had negotiated a remote position. So I was working physically at a company, and then I was actually, we were moving across state lines. And I was like, hey, I'm gonna quit because I know I can't keep working here and live somewhere else. And I'm like, well, actually, why don't you just do a remote position? Everything's the same, we'll renegotiate your contract, but then you can keep working. I was like, oh, that's awesome. two months into that new contract, they send me an email, the COO, and she was like, hey, in 30 days you're fired. Like, no explanation. And I talked to my boss, they were like, oh, your paperwork's great, everything's on time, you're seeing plenty of people, patients love you, coworkers love you, you're a model employee, but because you are exclusively remote and we are now pulling everybody back into the clinic during COVID, just a reminder, during COVID, they were like, you're fired. So I had 30 days and three paychecks worth of runway and I couldn't get another job out of the state I'm licensed in. I wasn't willing to move back. And in order to get licensed in the new state would have taken four to six months because the board only meets every other month. And they only see like three people at a time. And they were already booked up for the next two meetings, right? More bureaucracy. And I was like, I've spent 12 plus years of my life. to get a doctorate to practice therapy. And I literally can't practice therapy anymore because I don't have four to six months to wait to get my license to then wait another handful of months to get on all the boards and stuff of the licensure stuff. Like I can't wait six to eight months to be making money. Right. And again, and this was early, early SIPAC. So that wasn't really an option. And even now SIPAC doesn't have the level of flexibility that hopefully it does in the future. So I was like, I literally cannot practice therapy right now or slash anymore. So it was like, I was burnt out, but then this was like, you know, the kick out of a nest that I retrospectively needed. Cause it was like, okay, well, I guess I'm going to be an entrepreneur now. So I guess I got to figure it out. I didn't have business training. I didn't have a business degree. Um, so I actually read about coaching. Uh, the APA had an article about how coaching was a wild West, but cause like, you know, a 14 year old with a tick tock and call themselves a life coach. Like there's, there's, there's in no way regulated. But one of the things this article was saying was because it is unregulated, people with real mental health training, if we join the discipline of coaching, we can collectively elevate the quality bar for the discipline of coaching. And we really stand out because we have such deep expertise and largely everything we do in therapy, all those skillsets translate very, very well into coaching. We just have to make a couple of modifications. And one of the guys quoted in it was Dr. Jeffrey Arbach, who runs the College of Executive Coaching. And it's sort of like a four psychologist by psychologist sort of executive coaching training program. Other people with like advanced degrees also go through it, but largely it is run by a lot of like doctoral level psychologists and things. And that really gave me a lot of comfort. Cause I'm like a lot of coaching programs I looked at were super generic and like for very like just basic stuff. I'm like, I know all of those things. And honestly, I knew a lot of what we went through in the college executive coaching. It just helped me shift my lens from a pathology model to a wellness model. That was a huge thing. It really helped me with. Um, so it was great, but for a lot of us in the therapy world, coaching is a four letter word, right? Like I remember being in grad classes and we would like actively talk trash about coaching and life coaching and all these other things. And it's just like, All of that internalized stigma held me back because there was so much elitism in the program, in the discipline itself of psychology and therapy. Some earned, some very much not, because I honestly think, man, This is a very like spiky point of view. I honestly think that therapists would be, any kind of therapist, would be better served to function, to try to emulate life coaches more than medical providers. We are taught, especially nowadays, we are taught we need to be many medical providers. We need to work alongside physicians. And an integrated model is phenomenal for patients and barriers to treatment and things. The issue is, that's what psychiatrists did. And psychiatrists like, and I could be making up some of this, who knows, but so take it all with a grain of salt, look, look it up. But psychiatrists, from my understanding, historically functioned more like therapists back in the day. But over time, so they would do more therapy and prescribe, right? Because like now a lot of psychologists are wanting to get prescription privileges. They would do therapy and prescribe, but then over time it's like, well, I can do a 10, a five to 10 minute med check and do a refill and make way more money. Cause I can see five to six people at an hour and just make way more. Let me just do that. And then I can just offload the therapy bit to a counselor, a psychologist, a social worker, whatever. Right. Well now psychologists more and more are trying to be like, oh, we should get prescription privileges so we can help with this. And it's like, that's the early phase of what psychiatrists went through. And a lot of people have stigma around talking about therapy or talking about some of these other things. And it's like, nobody has stigma about having a coach, right? And I'm not saying you should just instantly call yourself a coach, but functionally like, Oh, what are coaches doing differently? than medical providers or psychiatrists, or how we are taught in psychology, that is making them feel, the perception of them making them feel so much more approachable, and there's more excitement around working with these types of people. That I think is what a lot of us in the therapy world miss out on, is the excitement people have to work with us. And I think that is a key piece of like, we're too busy, especially modern programs. We're too busy trying to play catch up with physicians to think about, well, where are we truly most valuable and what are other disciplines that though they may not have the same level of expertise, they have a higher level of success and resonance with people. How can we learn from what is working for them and modify it to our own needs?
Melvin Varghese PhD: That's such a great way of approaching it. Um, I have a couple of questions for you before we wrap up. So one is, what do you think are the top mistake? Let's even just say one. The top mistake that a therapist makes when they become coaches.
Corey Wilks PsyD: The top mistake? OK, so the biggest one I see is expecting clients to find you in the therapy world, especially if you work for any sort of like company, they just send you referrals. Right. Um, if like, you know, when I worked for medical clinic, I never had to worry about that. Like they filled my schedule. There was a team of people whose responsibility it was to advertise, to get people or, or, you know, patients were seeing their physician. They were like, Hey doc, I'm depressed. And the physician's like, oh, cool. Go see Corey. Right. Like I never had to ever worry about that. And also I was salaried. So I didn't care if I had 10 people or one person show up because my paycheck was the same. when I worked at a private practice, I remember specifically, they bought ad placement at the local grocery store. The issue was, so they spent their marketing budget on these ads. The issue was if you like, we call it a buggy, like a cart, like a shopping cart. I'm Appalachian, we call it a buggy. You know, like where like the kid sits and like the front of it. Not, not the thing where, you know, there's like full child safety flat that goes back and forth. Not where that was where like the shopper is, you know, where you would be looking. It wasn't that it was, if I'm walking towards you, it's, it was this side of, of where the kid sits. So you could see the ad from 30 feet away, but me, the shopper who is primarily looking here, I, I couldn't see it. So I'm like, no one. can read this ad. No one is looking for this ad. Also, this ad is pointless, like nobody's ever going to see it. But you just spent your marketing budget because you don't understand advertising and marketing and outreach. But they're like, Oh, we pay for ads. It's like you you threw money out the window, you'd been better off to legitimately just throw it out the window, because and then write your number on a dollar bill. So because a lot of therapists are not trained as entrepreneurs and do not think entrepreneurially, that can be a real big issue moving into coaching because you're not just a coach. You are an entrepreneur at that point, and you have to learn customer acquisition. You have to learn marketing, copywriting, advertising, and creating content, which is content marketing. You have to learn these things largely Because without that, you are purely reliant on word of mouth, which is really hard to, to create that momentum early on.
Melvin Varghese PhD: Yeah. That's such a good point. I, um, yeah, I think, especially, I think when you come from exactly what you said, either salary positions or where there's already some sort of infrastructure or system, I definitely think that's like the biggest one. Um, what would you say is the biggest con of leaving mental health for coaching in your experience?
Corey Wilks PsyD: For me personally, like I said, I worked in integrated primary care. So I was part of an interdisciplinary team. And I really enjoyed being on a team and having like, you know, shared records and just like this, this interdisciplinary like team approach to care. That was really, really fun. Coaching largely is much more solo. However, I will say, um, what I have done to kind of, uh, get some of those like needs met. Um, even though I work largely solo is collaborating with people, um, you know, on a regular basis and, and doing like short term projects with people, um, that has been really helpful, but, but it can potentially be lonely if you come from an, like an interdisciplinary model.
Melvin Varghese PhD: Got it. I'm going to ask a kind of silly question. Is there like a group supervision equivalent in coaching? Is that like a norm or is that?
Corey Wilks PsyD: So specifically when I went through the College of Executive Coaching, which it does give you, you qualify for like ICF certification if you know what that is or care what that is, it's just an extra credential. Going through their program, it qualifies you to like fill out extra paperwork to get an extra piece of paper. I didn't, because I'm like, I have a doctorate, I don't need an extra certification. But during their program, you do get supervision, specifically. Um, with a lot of less, um, less good programs. Um, probably not because they don't, I don't think they take it as seriously because again, coaching is unregulated. You don't have to have supervision. Um, but they offer it. Yes.
Melvin Varghese PhD: And then is it the norm? Like I, and it sounds like the norm is not that. the typical coach has like supervisors or, or they're going into their own group supervision where they're discussing like a coaching client or any of those.
Corey Wilks PsyD: No, no. Like everything you did in, in like grad school for therapy coaches don't do. Because again, there's no regulation, so there's no formality to it. Like, you could literally read Atomic Habits, and I'm in no way disrespecting James Clear, like, dude wrote a great book, dude knows his stuff. But I see people, they will literally like, oh, I read Atomic Habits, I'm a habits coach now. And it's like, Buddy, you ain't, but, but there, there, there's no board saying like, Hey, you don't have this credential. Hey, you haven't had X number of hours. You can't call yourself this. It's like a nutritionist versus a dietitian. You can't call yourself a dietitian because that is a regulated term. Right. As a protected term, anybody can call themselves a nutritionist. It is unregulated. Same thing with coach versus therapy.
Melvin Varghese PhD: Yeah. Corey, the last question I have for you is, what advice would you give to a therapist who is considering becoming a coach listening to our session?
Corey Wilks PsyD: One, learn to stop seeing coaching as a four-letter word. Like so much of your skill set, directly translates to coaching. Even like your diagnostic abilities can translate, even though you're not diagnosing, right? Cause you're really good at identifying patterns and figuring out like, oh, this is probably what's going on. Let me test this hypothesis with the right questions, right? Active listening, building rapport, asking questions, like all those directly translate, right? I have a whole course that goes through all this stuff of like, here's how to actually become a coach and like, here are all the skills and everything. Like I have a course that walks through all that, but that's it, right? Like, If you're a therapist, you have damn near all the skills to already be a coach that the missing pieces are moving, like shifting from a pathology or a disease model to a wellness model. And all that really means is assume the person you're working with is already pretty healthy. And then from that assumption, move forward rather than assuming all this person has clinically significant anxiety, depression, whatever. And that is what the focus is like. No, no. The focus is rarely that because that would get you into therapy territory. The focus is typically I want more out of life than what I currently have. I'm getting in my own way. I have become the bottleneck. I have some mindset or some habit issues. And I just want help with that. I want thought partnering to move forward to flourish. That is what they want. All your stuff directly applies. If you are, if what you're passionate about falls under therapy, then do therapy. Like if you really like helping people, you know, navigate like borderline, you know, traits or suicidality or schizophrenia, or if you really like assessments, um, for like disability evals, totally cool. Keep doing therapy. But if what you're passionate about doesn't directly fall under therapy, you would probably love coaching.
Melvin Varghese PhD: I mentioned that was going to be my last question. I had one more question. You said there's this balance. Sometimes you're teetering between coaching versus therapy when you see somebody and you're like, hey, this is getting into therapy territory. Like, how do you like what are the internal questions that you ask yourself to be like to, you know, to parse out?
Corey Wilks PsyD: Great question. And this is another like mini module I have in the course. Like, hey, if you're a therapist, like here's some things to consider. A big thing, one, I have in my contract that you sign up, like you agree that if I, in my own discretion, believe what you have going on is more related to therapy. You will either pause coaching or get a therapist in tandem because though I, I maintain a license, I am not doing therapy anymore. Right. Uh, so that is really important to, to have that caveat upfront. Obviously when you're doing like a discovery call, like before you actually sign somebody, you kind of suss out some of that of like, you got some other things going on that I am not trying to go into that quagmire with you right now. Um, so there's, there's like a filtering process, but the other piece too is like, you know, I've had coaching clients before where like, we're doing business coaching. But in the midst of that, maybe they're like a loved one dies or they go through a divorce. And it's like, I can't just be like, nah, we're going to talk about revenue over here. It's like, okay, let's touch on this as so far as it directly relates to why you're, you're seeing me. And let's both mutually agree on where this line is between coaching and therapy so that if we start to. come close to this line, we both agree like, okay, yeah, this is something I should just, you know, talk to my therapist about. Great. Awesome. Yes. Moving forward. Right. The one thing very quickly that we learned that I learned in grad school was like the idea of a Yavis client. Like I think it was like young, attractive, vocal, intelligent, whatever, uh, social or something. And it was like the quote unquote, like perfect client. And I remember being told you will never get a Yavis client. because that just isn't what therapy is about. That's a pipe dream. You may get one or two throughout your career, but most of your clients aren't going to be Yavis clients or Yavis patients. Coaching largely is just all Yavis. I'm not saying like they're attractive or young necessarily, but like they're all vocal. They're all intelligent. They're all very insightful. Okay. That is a huge difference. You see too, because coaching is private pay that naturally skews a lot of the demographics and the people you're going to see, right? Especially if you charge more that just they're, they're going to be a little more stable in a lot of areas. So it makes those conversations generally a lot easier. Like, Hey, remember where we said, like this line is, it seems like you're approaching it. Or a lot of times they'll just be like, I feel like we're approaching this line where like, I should just switch and just go to a therapist. Let's get back on track and talk about this over here. That is how most of those conversations have always went. Like we might touch on it a little bit of like, oh yeah, so your mood's kind of low right now, like that's super understandable. Have you thought about getting a therapist? Oh yeah, actually I already made a call this afternoon. Cool, then you can talk with that with them. So it generally hasn't, it hasn't been the issue that when we've had ethics classes in grad school, we're like, Oh my God, like, is a banana actually a banana? Or is it like, what if they have an eating disorder? Then like, if I have a banana on my desk, like, am I actually coercing them? Like, what if I, I, I had those conversations about like, is a banana really banana? And I wasn't even like a Freudian, right? It's the whole thing. Those aren't the issues you run into as a coach, largely.
Melvin Varghese PhD: uh yeah it's incredibly like helpful to hear because i think you're right like i think when you're when you don't know the tendency then is to just kind of turn it black and white right and there's definitely more nuances there uh cory appreciate you uh i'm grateful for our friendship where can we learn more about you and the work that you're doing the world
Corey Wilks PsyD: So I am Corey Wilkes Sidey everywhere, Twitter, Twitter X, whatever, LinkedIn. My website is Corey Wilkes Sidey.com. If you go to Corey Wilkes Sidey.com, you can find all my stuff, my newsletter, the courses I've created. If you're curious about any of those, everything else I'm up to, Corey Wilkes Sidey.com.
Melvin Varghese PhD: Awesome. And I've gone through, I have not done the coaching course yet, but the values-based course, um, I recommend this course to anyone because I think just in terms of like really getting clarity on your values, um, it was been, especially I think the past couple of years, as I've really thought about the direction of STC, um, that course just going through it, um, it's just been incredibly helpful. So, uh, Corey, appreciate you, man. And, uh, have a great rest of your day. Hey there, I hope you enjoyed my conversation with Corey, and especially if you are in a season where you are thinking about becoming a coach or adding a coaching component to your business. I hope that today's session has just been really helpful for you. Again, be sure to connect with Corey. Again, his website is over at coreywilksci.com. You know, I was just reflecting on this conversation and I think the one thing that I have, I took away is that decisions like this are never easy. They often have a lot of layers to it. I think one thing I've just noticed is, I think in our field, right, like there's sort of like those folks who are traditionalists are like, you know, you've got trained as this and this is the path that you need to go on. and then I think there is the other the other side of it right which is like you know I guess an extreme version is you know okay you have this training but now kind of unregulated like do what you want because anybody can hang up a shingle become a coach so I hope more than anything today's session is just giving you a little bit more of a holistic understanding of it and also giving you some resources that you may want to look into if you do want to go down the coaching route. I'm in this interesting season right of like having gone back into clinical work but then also having STC and i'm just learning like there's just a lot of things to navigate and maybe my situation is a little unique but i don't think it is because you know i've got this clinical arm and then i've got stc and we do courses and consulting and i think that's just the one thing that i would just say is like really um be up to the T when it comes to the legal and ethical stuff. So even with STC and private practice, those were like two different LLCs, two different bank accounts. I'm very clear on who I can work with in each of those domains. Again, be sure to connect with Corey over at CoreyWilkesID.com. And I hope that you enjoyed today's session. Have a great rest of your day, and I'll see you next time. Bye.
timestamps00:00:00 – Defining Success in Psychology
00:01:21 – Introduction to Coaching Transition
00:02:31 – Corey's Career Goals and Evolution
00:04:41 – Understanding Autonomy in Work
00:08:36 – Realizations About Bureaucracy
00:10:57 – The Impact of Insurance on Therapy
00:15:21 – The Catalyst for Change
00:20:01 – Disillusionment with Traditional Roles
00:22:52 – The Shift to Coaching
00:26:32 – Common Mistakes Therapists Make in Coaching
00:30:05 – Cons of Leaving Mental Health for Coaching
00:33:54 – Group Supervision in Coaching
00:35:00 – Advice for Aspiring Coaches
00:38:06 – Navigating the Coaching vs. Therapy Line
00:41:45 – Corey's Resources and Closing Thoughts
selling the couch podcast with melvin varghese phdWeekly interviews, strategy, and advice for building your private practice in and beyond the therapy room.
Apple podcastsYou TubeSpotify ready to launch your online course?Please check out our free online course starter kit for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This FREE 7-day email course will help you validate your course idea (so that you can create a course that has buyers).
sign up for free course starter kitready to launch your podcast?Please check out our FREE podcasting workshop for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This workshop is pre-recorded so you can watch it on a day and time that works for your schedule.
It contains a lot of practical tips that we've learned as STC has reached 1.81 million+ downloads and become a 6-figure business with podcasting as the backbone.
sign up for podcasting workshopCorey wilks psydPsychologist and Executive Coach @ Corey Wilks PsyD
Corey Wilks is a psychologist and executive coach in Austin, TX who's worked with founders like Ali Abdaal and with communities like David Perell's Write of Passage, Jay Clouse's Creator Science Lab, Justin Moore's Brand Deal Wizard, and Tim Stoddart's Copyblogger Academy.
Dr. WiIks helps top entrepreneurs, CEOs, founders, and creators in the world build fulfilling lives and thriving businesses aligned with their values.
Melvin varghese phdPsychologist and Founder @ Selling The Couch
Melvin Varghese, PhD is a licensed psychologist in Philadelphia, PA. In 2015, Dr. Varghese founded Selling The Couch, a podcast to help therapists move from clinical to online income.
On the podcast, he interviews successful practitioners about how they've built their practices, social media/marketing experts, and shares lessons as he uses our clinical skills to create an online business powered by podcasting + online courses.
The podcast is one of the top Career podcasts in Apple Podcasts, has been downloaded over 1.8 million times, and is heard in over 125 countries. Mel is a successful course creator with 240+ students and $300k+ in course sales.
More Posts370: Why I Shut Down a 10K-Member Facebook Groupby Melvin Varghese | Sep 12, 2024 | Growing Your Practice, Private Practice, STC Podcast
A behind the scenes of our decision to shut down our 10k member Facebook Group.
369: Behind The Scenes Of A Rebrandby Melvin Varghese | Sep 6, 2024 | Marketing, Private Practice, STC Podcast
This is a podcast episode graphic on Behind the Scenes of a Rebrand with Kevon Cheung.
356: 7 Lessons I Learned From Two 7-Figure Entrepreneursby Melvin Varghese | Aug 23, 2024 | Nuts And Bolts, Private Practice, STC Podcast
This is a podcast episode graphic of Ali Abdaal and Sahil Bloom, two online creators who have built 7-figure businesses and audiences of over 6 million followers
« Older Entries The post 371: 3 Reasons I Left Psychology Behind for a Coaching Career appeared first on Selling The Couch | Melvin Varghese PhD.
370: Why I Shut Down a 10K-Member Facebook GroupWritten By Melvin Varghese PhDIn this episode of Selling the Couch, I go deep into a significant decision that has been weighing on my mind for quite some time: the archiving of our nearly 10,000-member Facebook group.
As someone who has been deeply involved in the online community since launching the group in 2015, this was not an easy choice to make. I wanted to share my thought process behind this decision, as I believe it’s important for entrepreneurs to discuss not just their successes, but also the challenges and pivots they face.
I start by providing some background on the Facebook group, which was created in parallel with the Selling the Couch podcast. Initially, it began with a small group of friends from my graduate school days, but it quickly grew into a vibrant community. Over the years, I was even invited to join Facebook's Super Admins group (an invite-only group of the top FB groups online), which was a testament to the group's growth and engagement.
However, as I reflect on the past few years, I realized that the decision to archive the group was not just a simple act; it was a culmination of various factors that I had been considering for a long time. I outline six key reasons that influenced my decision:
Caregiving Responsibilities: Both my partner and I are entering a season where we may need to care for our aging parents. This shift in family dynamics requires me to reassess my time and energy commitments.
Redefining Success: My understanding of success has evolved (side note: if this is something you struggle with, please also check out my conversation with my friend and our colleauge, Jeanetta Garrison) .
Initially, I was drawn to the potential for max revenue and follower growth, but I’ve come to value freedom and sustainability more especially after we became parents and went through an incredibly difficult NICU experience.
Also, after hearing from several therapist FB group admins who have even bigger communities that I do and the stress and toll it takes long term, I questioned whether I truly wanted the responsibilities that come with a larger community.
Sustainable Social Media Strategy: I’ve found a rhythm with the STC podcast, YouTube, LinkedIn, and weekly email newsletter.
However, integrating the Facebook group into this flow often felt like drive-by marketing, which is not conducive to building a meaningful community.
Mental Health Considerations: Managing a large Facebook group can take a toll on one’s mental health. I shared my experiences during challenging times, such as navigating sensitive social issues, and how it impacted my emotional bandwidth.
The Concept of Enough: I’ve been reflecting on what “enough” means for me in terms of social media engagement and growth. I realized that I prefer to focus on fewer platforms where I can engage meaningfully rather than spreading myself too thin. By the way, this is a great blog post from Wil Reynolds at SEER Interactive on “Living A Life Of Enough.”
Social Media Strategy: I discuss the distinction between discovery platforms (like LinkedIn) and relationship-deepening platforms (like podcasts and email lists). I’ve found that focusing on a few key channels allows me to build deeper connections with my audience.
Ultimately, I decided to archive the Facebook group rather than delete it outright, allowing members to access past content while acknowledging that I could revisit the decision in the future if circumstances change. I express my gratitude to the community for their contributions and support over the years.
As I move forward, I invite listeners to connect with me on YouTube and LinkedIn, where I will be focusing my energy. I hope that by sharing my journey, I can encourage others to reflect on their own definitions of success and the choices they make in their entrepreneurial paths. Thank you for joining me in this conversation, and I look forward to seeing you in the next episode!
TranscriptMelvin Varghese:
Today's podcast session is supported by Upheal. So if you ask a therapist who's doing clinical work what the bane of their existence is, usually progress notes are in the top one to two. I'm not naming any names, but when I was doing clinical work, I remember I had several colleagues who would get so backed up on clinical notes. So they would end up spending their nights and weekends trying just to catch up. Honestly, who wants to do that? And this is where appeal comes in. Appeal is AI powered case notes. Now I know for many of us when we hear the word AI, where there's like a natural skepticism. And honestly, I had that skepticism as well until I got to meet with the appeal team and learn about some of the many ways that they are doing this in a way that is HIPAA compliant and also doesn't sell data to anyone and also protects our clients as well. You can learn more about Upheal and the awesome work that they're doing in the world by going to sellingthecouch.com forward slash upheal.
And upheal is spelled U-P and then H-E-A-L, all one word. And at checkout, be sure to enter the promo code COUCH25 to get 25% off your appeal plan for the first two months.
Hello, hello, welcome to today's session of Selling the Couch. I hope you're doing well, having an incredible day. So just a heads up, this episode, I wrote some outline, like a basic outline on it, but it's not highly scripted. Most of the STC podcasts are not, but this one is especially not super scripted because I just wanted to talk about this big decision we recently made, which was to shut down our nearly 10,000-person Facebook group. Archive it, actually. And I love when entrepreneurs talk about things like this, not just about the successes that they're having in business, but the pivots that they're making, or even the hard decisions that they're making.
So the intent behind this episode is to just pull back the curtain, because I know a lot of times when I hear episodes like this one, I'm really encouraged, and oftentimes I'm also encouraged to take actions that I may be considering. Or if it's something that I'm thinking about, it just gives me more of a holistic understanding of the topic. So just to kind of give you a background on this, I'm recording this in early August of 2024. I made a really hard decision, which was to archive our Facebook community. Just to give you a little bit of background on this, this Facebook community we actually launched in 2015. literally in parallel with the selling the couch podcast.
So it was right around March of 2015. And I remember in the early days of these like Facebook groups, I don't think a ton of them really existed back then. And our community grew. Well, literally in the initial stages, I invited about 30 to 40 of my friends from grad school and practicum and internship and my postdoc. And I was just kind of like, hey, guys, I'm creating this thing called the podcast. And I thought we could create a Facebook group so that we could talk about some of the conversations that we were having on the podcast just as a place to reflect and share and all of those kind of things. What I didn't expect is those 40 members would tell other colleagues and those other colleagues would tell other colleagues. And eventually, in the first several years, and this is very unexpected, but the team at Facebook had actually reached out. And I was invited to become a part of a what's called the super admins group. And so this is some of the top community like communities on Facebook. And And it was just a way to like, you know, connect with other admins to get early access to stuff that were happening and all of these kind of things. And the group grew and grew. And as of the time we archived it, it was right at just a little over 9700 members. And this decision, even though it was like one act, right, of just closing it or sending a note, letting colleagues know that we were archiving it, it was actually a decision that I had been weighing for many years, even stretching back to when the pandemic started. And I kept putting it off mainly because, I mean, it's a lot of energy and time and resources spent to create a community of that size and to maintain it. And honestly, if I'm just being completely honest, I think there's always this part of me that struggles with people-pleasing and I worried a lot about what colleagues would think if I archived that group, whether they would think I was a quitter or some way like have a negative impact on me professionally or on selling the couch or any of those kind of things. And ultimately, what I came to realize is decisions like this, I kept trying to figure out, okay, is there one reason why we should keep the group going? Or is there like one solid reason why we should archive the group?
And the reality is decisions like this are often multi-layered. They are complex. And I wanted to use today's episode just to articulate what the major factors are that went into a decision like this. I have six things for you. And just to kind of give you a heads up, I'll just kind of briefly outline them. So one is around caregiving outside of life. Two is around this question of enoughness. Three is really thinking about what is a sustainable social media posting schedule. Four is just the toll that managing a Facebook group takes on one's mental health. It's something that I think a lot of Folks when I've talked to that are admins of Facebook group talk a lot about but I don't think it's like a publicly talked about topic. Five was just realizing again what is my enough when it comes to social media. And then finally, I have a bonus thing around exactly how I think about social media, and that not all channels are created equal, and trying to just think through that. And yeah, so let's dive right in. So the very first thing that I shared with the group is, you know, Both Susan and I are entering a season where we are potentially going to be caregivers for both sets of parents, right, on some level. I think the level of responsibility will really just vary up with the season. Both of our parents are in their 70s and early 80s, and I feel like things are accelerating faster than ever. And I feel like, especially in the last year, I can just tell there's just some things that I'm just kind of reading in between the lines and being like, oh my gosh, this is not what it was like five years ago. There's things they can do and they can't do that, you know, we used to take for granted. And, you know, even just with my own situation, right, parents live in a suburb of Dallas, and I can definitely see a situation where we do spend some extended time, probably in the summers, down in Dallas.
And so essentially, we would have like two home bases, one in Dallas, and then one here in Philly, just to kind of account for this. And so even as I have built STC, at times I felt like, oh my gosh, this is such a slow build out, are you being too overanalyzing stuff? But one of the things I've just realized in the midst of this decision is I'm not making just a decision about business, right, but I'm also making a decision about sustainability and ultimately what is the role of business in my larger family life. And one of the things I've really been working on when I got licensed in 2012, from 2012 to 2015, 2016, I was working five and a half days of clinical work and between doing assessments and therapy, and that didn't include some of the case notes that had to be written. And I knew that I was willing to do that for a season, but it was not a sustainable model and one that I even wanted.
And so over the past several years, I've really been honing in and saying, like, what are the hours that I want to work? What are the days I want to work? What is like my pace and what does success look like for me and my family? And it's been just a lot of work. And I realized that the ultimate, one of the major reasons why I was asking that question, it wasn't really clear in the early stages, but it's because, again, we have aging parents and there's going to be times where we have to take them to doctor's appointments or it might be a surgical procedure or we have to make really hard decisions. and I realized that inevitably emergencies and these situations are going to come up and I just didn't want to drop like STC things and disappear for a season. When I've talked to several friends who are in seasons of caregiving, the one consistent thing that they tell me is, Mel, leave more bandwidth than you think you need. And so I've just been thinking a lot about that, especially as we enter this season. The second reason that we decided to archive the community is, you know, my goal with STC, when I first started it in 2015, I didn't have a background in business or marketing, and I kept learning a lot about online business.
And I, if I'm just being completely honest, I think I was drawn to both the freedom that online business offered, but also the revenue potential that it offered. What I didn't realize is that as businesses grow, there's inevitably more responsibilities that you have. And then at some point, you need to hire a team and manage people and all of these things. And so the question that I've often been asking myself is, do I want the successful version of this? And I thought a lot about the Facebook group, right? It's at 9,700 members. Even though our particular Facebook group has honestly been relatively drama-free, there have been times where things have kind of flared up. And I just kept thinking, man, if we keep growing this also, Like, do I really want the successful version of this? Like, you know, 20, 30, 40,000 people and all of the on the surface? Yeah, it looks like you have a large Facebook group, but all of the back behind the scenes, things that you have to navigate. I just came to realize that at least in this season, I don't think I have the bandwidth for it. The other little nuance of this is my own definition of success has changed over the past years. It went from just focusing on followers or revenue to really focusing on freedom and really being content with limited growth. Limited growth meaning growth that feels good enough for the season of life and the business that I want to build.
This actually reminds me of a conversation that Ali Abdaal and Sahil Bloom had, I would say a couple of years ago. And one of the things that I believe it was in this conversation that Ali talked about, and both of them have built some figure businesses, and Ali Abdaal is a Cambridge educated physician who became a YouTuber and went full-time on YouTube. And one of the things that Ali talked about is that it's really hard to both create a lifestyle design business and a revenue producing one, i.e. like if you're going to aim for like, you know, 1 million plus or even 500,000 plus, it's really hard to do that and optimize for full freedom. And inevitably, most entrepreneurs have to make decisions about what they want to optimize for. Are they okay with limited growth, but more time, freedom and flexibility? or are they good with maximum revenue, but it comes potentially at the impact of freedom. And I decided to just, again, partly because that first reason around caregiving that I really wanted to build something around just setting up, you know, freedom at the end of the day. Just wanted to take a moment to thank the team over at Upheal for supporting today's podcast session. Upheal is AI-powered case notes. Now, I know for many of us there's a natural skepticism around AI, but the Upheal team actually uses a third party to make sure that all of the software that they're using is HIPAA compliant, GDPR certified, and all of these different things. The very cool thing with this is, now, Upheal might make perfect sense if you're doing telehealth sessions, right? You run the Upheal software in the background and it basically captures the information during therapy sessions and then generates case notes based on how you want them, whether it's SOAP or DAP or any of those other kind of sessions. But you can also use Upheal for in-person sessions as well. You can learn more about Upheel and the awesome work they're doing in the world over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash upheel and be sure to enter the promo code couch and the number 25 all one word for 25% off your Upheel plan for the first two months. This is actually a non-advertised special so be sure to follow that link and check it out.
The third reason I just mentioned is, you know, I have found a really good and sustainable podcast cadence with podcasting, YouTube, LinkedIn, and then our email newsletter. And then we basically take the content of our audio podcast, we turn the video on, so it's on YouTube. We synthesize all of that and then put that into a blog post. I've tried a lot of times to integrate the Facebook group into the flow of this right between these channels. But what I inevitably end up doing is doing like a lot of drive by marketing, which is basically posting without like engaging or posting, but then only have it being able to engage like a day or two later. It's not really a good way to build community. And again, this is stuff that I've just sort of picked up and learned, you know, building both the Facebook group, you know, a couple of years ago, I built Twitter audience to just under 5000 followers. LinkedIn, where I'm really active on, as I record this, we're a little over 3300 followers there. And our YouTube channel is our newest channel, but we are growing. I mean, we've grown from about 100 to about 400, I think 412 as of this morning here in the past year. And so I realized that it's not that sort of drive by marketing. I talk a lot about that in podcast episodes. I see a lot of our colleagues doing this where they will try to post on multiple social media channels, but not actually meaningfully engage. Because I know I sometimes forget this, but part of social media means that there is a social component, right, that you have to engage in. So I just don't want to do the whole drive by marketing.
I actually don't think also from a like a brand perspective, I don't think it's like a great idea, because I would rather be known as somebody that is friendly and affable and engaging on social media versus somebody that's just creating content. The fourth thing that I mentioned is, you know, managing a community, a Facebook group, especially one that I feel like is really anything over a couple thousand. It is. It takes a lot of time. It takes a lot of emotional bandwidth as well. I remember just even, just to give like an example of this, I remember during like George Floyd and navigating all of that, right, just having to step into leadership in a different way, which it doesn't come naturally to me. And I was so glad and like, and, you know, just humbled to be able to do that. but also at the same time just like how I handle things like there was like a lot of pushback and I inevitably realized that all I can do is do my best and that there's always going to be folks that that push back right and that's just one example but this has happened a few times and I realized that you know managing a Facebook community managing any sort of social media channel right It is about building community. And when I have the privilege and honor to do that, I want to be a good steward of that. I don't want to take just because I built something, I don't ever want to take it for granted. And one thing I realized is, and I shared this, I said, you know, between life, STC, private practice, raising now a six year old, and caregiving, I realize I just don't have the time or the bandwidth like before to lead the community well. And it's irresponsible of me to lead a community for vanity's sake. And in other words, I can't just let this fear of either disappointing people or being like, Oh, yeah, I built a 10,000, almost 10,000 person Facebook. I mean, I can't let that be a badge of honor. Because for me, like leadership is not just about the stuff you've done in the past, right? It's about what you're doing in the moment as well. The fifth reason that I came to was, you know, when I started STC in 2015, my goal was to be everywhere when it came to social media, I heard this little thing about like social media advice, which is like to diversify. And so I tried to be everywhere and I realized, and I think part of it is just my personality. I'm an INFJ on my Myers-Briggs. I like social media, but I need it in like small bursts. And I don't have it on my phone. The only place I really access social media is on my computer, on my desktop. But otherwise, I go about my life. And I've realized that my strategy and my goal with social media has really changed. It's gone from being trying to be everywhere to now doing less but better. And the combo of basically an audio podcast, YouTube, and LinkedIn, along with our email newsletter feels really good and really feels sustained.
The email newsletter My virtual assistant is able to create, is able to craft a good chunk of it. I'm able to go in and spruce things up. YouTube and the audio podcast is very sustainable at this point because we have an editing team for both of those. And I basically record a audio podcast and now we're recording the video. And that same content is getting posted to both video and, I mean, is getting posted to both audio and YouTube. And so it's not a ton more effort in that the only difference is now I have to submit both of the projects to the various editors. But we're still, you know, we're at just overall a great cadence with it. And then LinkedIn, we started that coming on, gosh, it's going to be to two years in two months, so in November, it'll be two years. And LinkedIn, to be honest, was a platform that I never thought I would actually post on because anytime I logged into LinkedIn, I just kept seeing like people's job updates. And I'm like, okay, so I can like cheer them on and be happy for them. But to actually create content on here, and LinkedIn is significantly changing. I'll do a future episode on LinkedIn and some of the insights we've learned, but LinkedIn I'm very active on. As I record this, we post there five times a week now, and we're really growing quite fast on LinkedIn. And just to even give some numbers, I started in November of two years ago, And we have over 500,000 views of our content. And so it's just been really interesting to see the growth on LinkedIn. Yeah. And I just feel like, I don't know, it's good enough. Right. And I'm in my early forties. My goal in life is not to be social media famous. It is to, you know, expend my creative energy. It's to serve our field. It's to build a sustainable business. But it's definitely not to get social media famous because I know that celebrity comes with its own challenges, especially with regard to safety and privacy, and I'm just not sure that I want to go down that path. Most certainly I don't.
And then the final bonus thing I just wanted to share with you is more around strategy and some of the things that I'm thinking about. So I've been active with selling the couch and active on social media since 2015. And I've tried a bunch of different platforms, Twitter, Instagram, and I think we briefly tried Clubhouse, very briefly. And we also tried Meerkat, not Meerkat, the other one. This is like way back in the day, but what I've generally discovered is there are two types of social media channels. And I think this could be a really good framework for you if you're trying to figure out like what social media channel to post on, especially if you want to use to market your practice and, or if you are diversifying beyond clinical income. So you've got a podcast and you're thinking about sponsors and all of those kinds of things, You want to write a book or launch a course or any of those things. But basically there are two types of social media channels. The first one what I call are discovery platforms. So these have some sort of a built in search feature.
So for example like a Twitter or a LinkedIn or a YouTube where literally you can search for content. The benefit of discovery platforms are that people can find your content online. You could also argue blogging is a discovery platform since you can search for it on Google. The only thing is blogging takes a little bit longer to, it's more sustainable for sure, but it takes a little longer to start up, right? The second type of social media channel is what I call relationship deepening platforms. So these are basically platforms that you create content on where trust is built. So examples include an email list example. Another example is something like a podcast. You know, I get so many really nice messages from colleagues that I've never met. And they're like, you know, Mel, I feel like I know you. I feel like I know your family. I feel like I'm just like so excited for you. Just like really nice messages. And I think part of it is because of the platform, right? People are hearing me and my voice for, you know, 25, 30 minutes at a time, week after week. And I think there's something just with, like, trust and connection.
There's also some recent data that came out from ACAS Media, which is kind of an analytics company, and they found that Among all social media platforms, podcasters are the most trusted online media personalities, and then YouTubers are second as well. And so what I realize is, you know, it's really hard to be active on more than one discovery platform. active meaning like not doing the drive by marketing thing without a significant investment of time or needing to outsource it. I'm not at a point where I like one goes folks to like those people to like comment for me on my behalf. I'm not sure if I even want to go down that route. But this is something I realized that a lot of folks on discovery platforms, right, if you're, for example, active on a LinkedIn and a Twitter or an Instagram or whatever it is, right, they will either they have a hard time kind of balancing all of them, or they usually will outsource that. And so you have somebody like commenting on their behalf, And, uh, I, I realize, you know, I've got one discovery platform, which is LinkedIn. And I've got like three at this point and four, if you really count the blog, uh, relationship deepening platforms between, uh, the audio podcasts, YouTube and blogging. Sorry, I meant three. And, and I, I feel like that's a good, oh, an email list. Sorry, that is four. And I feel like that's a good cadence. So one discovery platform in LinkedIn, and then four relationship deep link platforms between an audio podcast, YouTube, email list, and Why do I keep forgetting this fourth one? But I went blogging. And yeah, that's a good cadence. And it feels like that's success. And it feels really nice for my central nervous system. And so what does this mean for the community? And what exactly did I do? So I archived the group. And so this is an option that Facebook does provide for their groups. And that practically means instead of outright deleting it, Because the reality is, yes, you know, we, I founded the group, we had a wonderful admin team that helped moderate things. And so shout out to you guys for, thank you for doing that for all of these years. And, but the reality also is the members created content on there. And so the issue that I had was I was like, you know, it's not doesn't seem fair for me to just delete a group outright because people have like questions and given insights and all of that. So we archived it, which basically means you can search through some of the old posts in the group, but you cannot actually create new posts. The other benefit of this, and I was very transparent with the group, I said, you know, if something ever changes where I feel like I have more bandwidth or anything like that, I can always unarchive the group, which means that, you know, we would be able to like restart the group back up. I don't imagine that I'm about a month, four or five weeks from closing it.
And I feel like it was, it was a really hard decision. I felt a lot of emotions, particularly leading up to it. And then about Two weeks into it, but I think once those emotions settled I felt like recently I've just been feeling like yeah, that was a beautiful season and I felt like and yet it was the right decision to to archive it So what does this practically also mean for me? I am gonna be you know active on a couple of different channels and I would love love love to connect with you there and So first of all, if you're enjoying the audio podcast, consider coming over to YouTube and subscribing as well. You can go to sellingthecouch.com forward slash YouTube or you can just look up Selling the Couch or my name on YouTube and the channel will pull up. It's under my name, Melvin Verghese PhD is the channel. Also find me on LinkedIn. I would love to connect with you there. Again, that's under my name. And that's where I will be focusing much of the energy going forward. So again, if you are a member of our Facebook group, I just sincerely appreciate you being there. You are the ones that made the group what it is. And without it, you know, I wouldn't be able to do any of these things. And so I so appreciate you. And if you are someone that's debating creating a group or just navigating it, navigating owning a group, I hope that today's episode is helpful for you. I went back and forth on this episode. I didn't want to be bashing a Facebook group or any of that. That's not the intent at all. It's more about really asking yourself, what does success look like for me? And then whatever I'm building on, whatever platform I'm building on, Do I want the successful version of what this looks like? Have a great rest of your day and I will see you next time. Bye.
Narrator: Thanks for listening to the Selling the Couch podcast. For more great content and to stay up to date, visit www.sellingthecouch.com.
Melvin Varghese: Hey there, I hope that you enjoyed today's session. Thank you again for taking the time to listen all the way through. If you are a therapist and you're specifically in a season where you're a seasoned therapist and you are wanting to move from clinical to online course income, We actually have a specific mastermind for therapists who are doing this. So this is basically a group of really kind and supportive therapists who are also wildly successful as business owners. We meet together to build and grow and scale our online courses. you can learn more about that mastermind over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash mastermind all one word sellingthecouch.com forward slash mastermind thank you so much for taking the time to listen to today's session
timestamps00:00:00 – Introduction to Upheal and Podcast Overview
00:01:35 – Announcement of Facebook Group Decision
00:02:51 – Background on the Facebook Community
00:04:47 – The Decision to Archive the Group
00:06:14 – Reason 1: Caregiving Responsibilities
00:10:32 – Reason 2: Redefining Success and Enoughness
00:13:46 – Reason 3: Sustainable Social Media Strategy
00:17:10 – Reason 4: Mental Health Toll of Community Management
00:19:16 – Reason 5: Shifting Social Media Focus
00:22:05 – Bonus: Social Media Strategy Framework
00:26:53 – Archiving the Group: Practical Steps
00:28:17 – Conclusion and Future Engagement
00:29:21 – Final Thoughts and Mastermind Invitation
selling the couch podcast with melvin varghese phdWeekly interviews, strategy, and advice for building your private practice in and beyond the therapy room.
Apple podcastsYou TubeSpotify ready to launch your online course?Please check out our free online course starter kit for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This FREE 7-day email course will help you validate your course idea (so that you can create a course that has buyers).
sign up for free course starter kitready to launch your podcast?Please check out our FREE podcasting workshop for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This workshop is pre-recorded so you can watch it on a day and time that works for your schedule.
It contains a lot of practical tips that we've learned as STC has reached 1.81 million+ downloads and become a 6-figure business with podcasting as the backbone.
sign up for podcasting workshopMelvin varghese phdPsychologist and Founder @ Selling The Couch
Melvin Varghese, PhD is a licensed psychologist in Philadelphia, PA. In 2015, Dr. Varghese founded Selling The Couch, a podcast to help therapists move from clinical to online income.
On the podcast, he interviews successful practitioners about how they've built their practices, social media/marketing experts, and shares lessons as he uses our clinical skills to create an online business powered by podcasting + online courses.
The podcast is one of the top Career podcasts in Apple Podcasts, has been downloaded over 1.8 million times, and is heard in over 125 countries. Mel is a successful course creator with 240+ students and $300k+ in course sales.
More Posts370: Why I Shut Down a 10K-Member Facebook Groupby Melvin Varghese | Sep 12, 2024 | Growing Your Practice, Private Practice, STC Podcast
A behind the scenes of our decision to shut down our 10k member Facebook Group.
369: Behind The Scenes Of A Rebrandby Melvin Varghese | Sep 6, 2024 | Marketing, Private Practice, STC Podcast
This is a podcast episode graphic on Behind the Scenes of a Rebrand with Kevon Cheung.
356: 7 Lessons I Learned From Two 7-Figure Entrepreneursby Melvin Varghese | Aug 23, 2024 | Nuts And Bolts, Private Practice, STC Podcast
This is a podcast episode graphic of Ali Abdaal and Sahil Bloom, two online creators who have built 7-figure businesses and audiences of over 6 million followers
« Older Entries The post 370: Why I Shut Down a 10K-Member Facebook Group appeared first on Selling The Couch | Melvin Varghese PhD.
369: Behind The Scenes Of A Rebrand with Kevon CheungWritten By Melvin Varghese PhD369: Behind The Scenes Of A Rebrand
In this episode of “Selling the Couch,” I have the pleasure of welcoming back my friend Kavon Xiong, the founder of Small School. Kavon previously joined us on the podcast in 2021, where he shared his insights on building in public. Today, we dive deep into the topic of rebranding, exploring the challenges and transformations that come with it.
We start by discussing Kavon's journey from his original brand, “Build in Public,” to his new venture, “Small School.” Kavon opens up about the painful process of rebranding, highlighting the emotional toll it takes when your identity is tied to a specific brand. He reflects on the time and effort he invested in establishing himself as a spokesperson for building in public, only to realize that the interest in that niche was waning. This realization prompted him to consider a broader approach, leading to the creation of Small School, which focuses on helping individuals create small courses.
Throughout our conversation, we touch on the importance of separating one's identity from their business, especially for solopreneurs. Kavon shares his thoughts on the fear of failure that often accompanies pivots and how he navigates those feelings. He emphasizes that rebranding should not be seen as a failure but rather as a natural evolution in an entrepreneur's journey.
Kavon also discusses the current landscape of online course creation, sharing his belief that educational content is becoming increasingly important for professionals across various fields. He explains that small courses can serve as a valuable tool for building trust and generating additional revenue streams, regardless of the industry.
As we wrap up, we delve into the common pitfalls that course creators face, particularly the tendency to focus too much on marketing rather than creating a meaningful learning experience. Kavon encourages listeners to think about how they can enhance the educational experience for their students, making it more engaging and interactive.
Finally, we explore the concept of “small courses” and what it means to focus on the right elements rather than overwhelming students with excessive content. Kavon shares his vision for Small School and how he aims to simplify the course creation process for aspiring educators.
This episode is packed with valuable insights for anyone considering a rebrand or looking to create an online course. Whether you're a seasoned entrepreneur or just starting out, Kavon's journey and advice will inspire you to embrace change and focus on what truly matters in your business.
For more information about Kavon and his work, visit Small School at smallschool.is. Join us for this enlightening conversation that will help you navigate the complexities of rebranding and course creation!
Timestamps 00:00:00 – Introduction and Sponsor Acknowledgment
00:01:05 – Today's Topic: Rebranding
00:01:16 – Guest Introduction: Kavon Xiong
00:02:00 – Kavon's Journey and Course Experience
00:03:38 – The Pain of Rebranding
00:05:44 – Identity and the Challenge of Change
00:09:47 – Navigating the Fear of Failure
00:10:51 – The Importance of Pivoting
00:12:38 – AI in Therapy: Upheal's Role
00:15:11 – Lessons from Past Experiences
00:17:13 – Focus on Online Courses
00:20:14 – When to Add a Course to Your Offerings
00:21:02 – Creating Engaging Learning Experiences
00:23:29 – Common Pitfalls for Course Creators
00:26:34 – Defining Small Courses
00:29:12 – Where to Find Kavon and His Work
00:30:05 – Conclusion and Key Takeaways
00:32:53 – Final Invitation to the Online Course Mastermind
TranscriptMelvin Varghese:*
Hey there, it's Melvin. I hope you're doing well, having a fantastic day. Before jumping into today's podcast session, just wanted to take a moment to thank the team over at Upheal for supporting today's podcast session. So Upheal is basically an AI-assisted platform for therapists that makes it easy to create case notes and treatment plans for your therapy sessions. It works both for telehealth as well as with in-person sessions as well. I'll tell you more about some of the interesting stuff they're doing, especially around data privacy and things like that. But for now, if you go to sellingthecouch.com forward slash upheel and use the promo code couch 25, the number two, five and couch all one word. you get 25% off of UpHeal for the first two months. That's a very special discount for STZ listeners. So we'll jump right into today's podcast session. Hello. Hello. Welcome to today's session of selling the couch. I hope you're doing well, having a fantastic day. So today's podcast is all about rebranding. So what basically happens when you set out to build a business the way, and you imagine it going a certain way, but different circumstances, whether it's changes in life, or changes in the business landscape force you to rebrand. That's what we're talking about today. I'm joined by my friend Kavon Xiong from smallschool.is. And Kavon was a previous guest on the STZ podcast a number of years ago. In fact, back in 2021, I took Kavon's build in public mastery because I was terrified to post on social media. And I just, I could be really vulnerable like in a closed Facebook community by doing it more publicly. I just felt like I didn't know how to do that well. And I just thought like going through Kavan's course would be helpful. It was a live course I learned a ton. It's informed a lot about how you know, I post on social media, particularly on LinkedIn, and even the content here on YouTube, and on the podcast that I share, just sort of leaning into vulnerability, what does that look like all of that kind of stuff, we're going to cover a number of different topics. One is Kavan's going to share kind of the behind the scenes pain and difficulty of what it takes to build and rebrand. So Kavan basically has rebranded from build in public to small school and what that has meant at a practical level, like shutting down courses, all of that kind of stuff. And then what was Kavan seeing in the market that made him make that shift? And then specifically, how is he thinking about online course creation? What is he seeing in the world of online course creation where he's like, this is something I want to teach because I believe online courses definitely have so much potential. And we wrap up with talking a lot about where he sees course creators stumbling the most. I think you're going to really enjoy this conversation. Here's my conversation with Kavan Xiong from smallschool.is. Hey Kavan, welcome back to Selling the Couch.
Kevon Cheung:
Hey Melvin, thanks for having me back. So happy to be here.
Melvin Varghese:
I'm so glad you're here as well. And we've never met in person, right? And it's amazing online relationships, right? Like we live around the halfway around the world from each other. And yet, back in 2021, I took your build in public mastery course, which was Honestly, one of my most favorite courses, and I think it gave me courage to post more authentically on social media. So one, I just wanted to publicly acknowledge you for that, for your courage to even put that out in the world. So thank you so much for that, brother. And then you are, you're one of the most real people, just as a human being, you're wonderfully kind and thoughtful. And I also love that we get to build these businesses, but also as parents, also navigating, you know, for us, this definition of success is not just revenue, right? And how do we holistically build that? And you're one of the people that I really look up to. So thank you for that. And I'm excited for our conversation.
Kevon Cheung:
Yeah, thank you for the nice intro as well. Yeah, definitely the parents part is tough. Still learning how to do it and still learning how to balance things. Talking to other parents helps.
Melvin Varghese:
Well, I've heard once you become a pair, it's like a perpetual journey, right? You just, you entered a different seasons and new challenges and all of that stuff. So yeah, absolutely. I wanted to start here, which is, you know, you built an entire brand called build in public that basically taught people how to use social media to create fans and buyers of products and services, but to do it like authentically, right? And it's how we met. I know you put so much blood, sweat and tears. I've seen your work ethic and just how thoughtful you are about stuff. Yet you recently rebranded to small school. In your newsletter, you said, I'm not going to lie. It was a painful few months. What made it so painful?
Kevon Cheung:
I mean, well, first of all, I invested a lot of time in nailing the niche building in public. It was the first topic I focused on. I thought I had a chance to become the spokesperson of it, and it did work. And then I have been running courses, meeting people like you. Things have changed, you know, after four years. And what I'm seeing right now is that when you focus on a common term like this, two things happen. One is you're able to ride it and you can rise fast, which is good. But when the trend goes away, you can also fall pretty fast. So overall, I'm just sensing the interest for this topic is getting less and less. And that prompts me to start thinking, okay, what do I do? Do I just keep grinding on this topic or do I try to expand myself? So after a lot of thinking, a lot of just imagining the future, I decided that it's time to kind of expand myself a little bit more. And to be honest, it's also the right time because four years ago, If I position myself as someone who's running a school, teaching various topics, it wouldn't make sense. No one would listen to me because I had zero credibility. But after four years, you know, there's a certain size of an audience who have been following me. So it makes sense to start broadening up. But the painful part, you know, it's kind of like your identity is getting crushed. and you need to rebuild what you're known for. I think that's the hardest part. Like for the longest time, people can just say, hey, Kavon, the building public guy. But who am I now? Like, I don't want that anymore. So to be honest, I'm still navigating because small school is about helping people creating small courses. Now we'll get into small courses later on. But when you hear the word courses, is everywhere a lot of people are talking about this so what is my new identity how can I still stand out that is really painful and to be honest I'm still slowly iterating that new identity but of course I'm not going to drop everything I'm still doing a lot of things I think you might feel the same when you are a solopreneur like single founder with no employees like full time employees, you have to do everything right marketing sales fulfillment delivery of the teaching. And then there's a big rebranding project on top. That's just painful. So much to do. So that's why I wrote it in my newsletter. Yeah.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. Thank you for articulating all that. I think, you know, a lot of times we don't talk about when these pivots happen. Sometimes it can, you know, it comes across as like, hey, here's our new name, you know, but most people don't talk about like how difficult that is. And you're right, like, especially as solopreneurs and I don't know. Like, I feel like a decent chunk of us, when we start businesses, it's sometimes really hard to tease our identity from the thing that we're building. And when the thing, when you pivot from the thing you're building, I feel like it's really natural to then, I don't know, question your identity on one level, but at least have some recalibration of your identity, right? And it sounds like you're going through that. Do you think, I don't know, this might be like an extreme question, but something I struggle with is sometimes I think very much in black and white, like if something didn't work out, like I failed. Do you struggle with that part of it? And if so, how do you navigate, like work through that? Because, you know, if you linger too long in that, that can really not be a good headspace.
Kevon Cheung:
Yeah, funny you asked that because that was the latest episode I released in my podcast. I talked about dealing with changes. I guess it's kind of scary and of course you pivot, you rebrand because the old one is no longer as relevant. So if it's going really well, why would you do that, right? But I don't see it as failure because For one, like I mentioned earlier, without that four years, without that identity, that chapter, I wouldn't be sitting here being on your podcast, chatting with you. It wouldn't be possible. So for me, it was a huge success because I was able to ride on the wave when the wave was still there. So I need to give myself some credit for that. And if things start to change, There's not much we can do. We can only find out new ways to navigate. But then a new thought came in as I was recording that episode. I thought to myself that if an entrepreneur doesn't have a pivot three, four years in the business, I think that's a failure. Because that would mean they took too long to start. They were trying to find a perfect angle to start, so then they don't have to pivot. But if you are a fast mover, you should be able to just jump right in and then be like, OK, I'm going to change later, and that's fine. So I don't know if it's true or not, but I feel like that could be it. We should prioritize in taking action over thinking.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. Just wanted to take a moment to thank the team over at Upheal for supporting today's podcast session. Upheal is AI-powered case notes. Now, I know for many of us there's a natural skepticism around AI, but the Upheal team actually uses a third party to make sure that all of the software that they're using is HIPAA compliant, GDPR certified, and all of these different things. The very cool thing with this is, now, Upheal might make perfect sense if you're doing telehealth sessions, right? You run the Upheal software in the background and it basically captures the information during therapy sessions and then generates case notes based on how you want them, whether it's SOAP or DAP or any of those other kind of sessions. But you can also use Upheal for in-person sessions as well. You can learn more about Upheel and the awesome work they're doing in the world over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash upheel and be sure to enter the promo code couch and the number 25 all one word for 25% off your Upheel plan for the first two months. This is actually a non-advertised special so be sure to follow that link and check it out. I think it's a great way to look at it. I think for me, when I started entrepreneurship, I thought it's about building one product, sticking for the long term. And I think there's definitely a part of that But I think the thing I didn't anticipate is that ability to pivot and sort of separate out, here's objectively what I'm seeing in the market. Here's what I thought was going to happen, but here's the reality. And this pivot really has nothing to do with my competence or my gut feeling three years ago on something. It's just more what the market's bearing out, right? These are new data points that I just didn't have. And I don't know, for me personally, the hardest work, and I don't think I've like fully gotten there with this, but the hardest work for me is not when there are pivots, not seeing it as I'm incompetent.
Kevon Cheung:
Totally agree with you. After being in business by myself for four years, I think my biggest mistake has been investing too much into one thing. Like you said, I thought I'm going to talk about something or run my course forever. I think that intention was great because that makes that topic something that Kavon can really put the heart in. That's a good thing. But yeah, we shouldn't expect things to last forever. Like I think previous to this chapter of my life, I was helping a founder run a kids coding school. What happened during COVID? The school was running really well, but then you need to figure out how to teach online. And then I was running another software company. Also, just right before COVID, we were focusing on real events technology. And then because of COVID, we had to figure out how to become like a virtual meeting tool. You just don't know what would happen. And I really don't see anything that can last forever anymore, especially in in the years that we're living right now. So yeah, my biggest lesson or advice to the listener is make it good, but then quickly spread it out and expand the business. Don't just put the eggs in one basket because that's what I did. And yeah, big hard lesson.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, I mean, and the thing is, like, I've seen enough, like, experts who have had way more success than I have, you know, have said, when you have a product, like focus on having one scalable product, and go all in on it, right. And so I think there's definitely wisdom in that. But there is this other side, which you're talking about, right? There's stuff you can't account for. right, as you sort of build that out, where you may have to make some harder pivots. I mean, I think I'm realizing that same thing, right? Like we had our online course mastermind as the main revenue generator during the pandemic, and it was doing fine. But then I think like as whatever we're calling this, I think, you know, we talked about it on your podcast, a rolling recession, right? Or inflation, whatever it is. It's making me realize like banking on a high ticket offer as the sole source of income, it's way too much pressure and stress. And it, yeah, there's just wisdom in strategic diversification.
Kevon Cheung:
Yeah. Those programs that you mentioned, I think, I know the few biggest one in our space online. I was looking at them when I was investing so much effort in revamping my experience in a course. But then now I kind of look back and I thought to myself like, what if they have multiple things running at the same time, but the version that I'm seeing right now is the one that is left. So we don't see the small projects next to it. Right? That is highly possible. And then of course, timing and luck can play a huge factor as well. But yeah, at the end of the day, every industry, every space, every period of time is different.
Melvin Varghese:
So… Yeah. Yeah. Absolutely. You're going all in on online courses.
Kevon Cheung:
How come? I'm a person who is always looking inside and outside when I'm deciding on a new direction. So after building in public, I looked at what I've been doing. And to be honest, I haven't been just focusing on building in public. I have products like email course engine, teaching people build a free email course as a super lead magnet. I also have like master classes that's teaching people how to build online challenges. So, when I see that I'm like, hey, I've already been teaching people around. building learning experiences. So a big part of me is just aligned with that vision and interested in that vision. So that's very important to me. I know a lot of people, when they look for a new direction, they would imagine new things and then, okay, I'm going to go down this road and then force themselves to do it. I cannot do it that way. I have to look at what I've been doing already, and then just say, okay, I'm gonna keep doing that. So I don't need to force myself. So that's me looking inside. But I think, of course, I need to evaluate the market a little bit as well. I don't think I'm like the super expert in this. But I do see personal branding, you know, audience, the voice, everyone has a voice. All this is becoming more and more important. I know we're post-COVID now, but I don't see it going away. And I definitely don't see only the people who run online business should have a voice. I see that basically, if you're like a professional, everyone is trying to build that social media image, that personal brand And I do see that if educational content like articles and short videos are not cutting it anymore because there's so much of it, what's the next thing that can build trust really fast for these professionals? And when I say professionals, it can mean someone running a training company and like a one man training company doing live facilitation. But of course they can expand that online arm of the business too, right? So I'm going in with small courses because I think if they have these small courses, they can actually use it to add a new revenue stream or expand their existing business. And it has nothing to do with online courses or info products, but just whatever business they are running. I see that as a different way to build trust with people. So again, that's just my hypothesis and gamble, but yeah, let's see what happens.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah. I mean, I mean, obviously like I'm a big proponent of online courses. We have a, you know, we have our mastermind. I have my podcasting course. And I think one thing I'm realizing is, you know, at the core, like people learn in different ways. I think there's also this real, I don't know, there's like real design. I'm nervous, like nuances, but I think by and large, I think there's this real desire for people to, learn stuff, you know, um, now the juxtaposition is, I feel like people are a lot less, a lot more busy, right. Post pandemic. Right. But yeah. So interesting to hear you talk about it. When do you think it makes sense for someone to add a course to, to kind of their offering?
Kevon Cheung:
I think because in the last few years there have been so many new creators just starting a new path, including myself actually four years ago. I think if you haven't confirmed or validated your expertise, then it's not the right time to start a course. start to create content first, make sure people are willing to listen to you. And then at a certain stage, you can package a different but awesome experience and then have that as your anchor of the business. But I think speaking of like that founder of a training company, right, if that person has tons of experience, like five, seven years running that, then of course, it would be a no brainer to develop the course, but figure out how to present that to their potential clients or like make it the obvious thing on their social profile, or have content created to that asset so that more people can see it. So, It really depends where you are in your journey, but I think the most important thing is what does it do? What does the course do for you? Are you interested in making money from the course or is it more something that bring people in and then after five days they're like, oh my god, I don't know who this guy is, but I'm falling in love with this person. That would be an amazing thing to achieve.
Melvin Varghese:
Yeah, so many good things there. I think I mean, this is like a general principle I try to follow is I don't teach anything that I haven't done successfully or at least like have enough like skin in the game where I've done it for multiple years. Right. And I think that's just like a general piece of advice I always recommend, because you know, there's an influx of information out available online now, especially with AI and all of this stuff, right? But the nuances, right, ie the lived experiences is often what's going to separate like good courses from like just average courses, right? So that's just Yeah, it's just I mean, I'm like, I love that you you honed in on that. I have two more questions for you. So the first one is, where do you see course creators stumbling the most?
Kevon Cheung:
That's actually related to what you just talked about. I think when we hear courses, what do we imagine? a few lessons, boring lessons, a few videos, and then you watch it, and then you're like, okay, I get a brain demo of what this person wants to teach. I think we can do better than that. I think most course creators don't know how to create an experience. So an experience is not just presentation in a video format or even in a text format. That's just the first step. I think there's so much more we can do in terms of like onboarding students, creating a connection. I really don't think courses have to be one way. It's so weird, like in school, in the real school, the students know the teacher and see them all the time and the teacher are there to guide them. But in our course space, most of the time the students are left alone to figure it all out. Like why is that the case? Can it be more like a real school? Can there be more guidance? And that's another thing. But also like even, so I have a small courses framework, right? Even small delights, like can you just, I know you have to teach a topic, so you have like 10 videos, but can you just add a little surprise in there? So that the student will go like, Oh, this is different. Oh, this is interesting. This is exciting. I want to finish the next five lessons. So like, I just feel like we still have a lot of room to play with the experience when it comes to learning online. So that would be exactly what the course creators today are not so good at. And hopefully I can make some contribution in this space, maybe through software, maybe through just teaching how to run good experiences. I don't know yet, but I'm going to take the first step by teaching other people these small little things.
Melvin Varghese:
Well, I mean, I will tell you, like, having gone through your building public mastery course, like, I remember looking forward to each of those gatherings, because one, I knew you would give it your all. But I think it was right, like that sort of surprise element, like, I knew it wasn't going to be straight lecture, I know, we would go into breakouts, I know, you'd have a little thing, like, you make it like fun and entertaining. I heard, you know, part of I think what becoming a good course creator you're like, most people think it's like 100% like information regurgitation, but it's like more like 50% entertainer 50% educator, right and educate like entertainer doesn't mean you got to like juggle over it like, you know, falls in the air while teaching nothing like that. But it's like weaving in your story, like doing something like you said, right? Like that surprises and delights folks. Yeah, you do an exceptional job of that. And I think, yeah, that that tip is such such a good one. The final question I had was, your new brand is small school and you emphasize the concept of a small course. What exactly is a small course?
Kevon Cheung:
Yeah, I actually spilled a little bit just now. Small doesn't mean the size of small, like you don't really need to teach a five-minute course or teach a two-people cohort. No, you don't have to do that. It means focusing on the right things, like As I mentioned, the small details actually would change the whole experience. And most people creating courses, they're more marketers, they're more like, oh, I want to fix the copywriting, I want to fix the sales strategy. more people should think about the learning experience of the students. But the other thing is also something that we talked about earlier, how we shouldn't be instantly thinking that we need to build this big thing. Because I actually struggle with this and I'm still struggling of having a big scope. Like I want to teach this one topic and then I keep adding, adding, adding more things to it. Well, partly because I want to make sure that people get what they pay for it. But weirdly, a lot of people have this mindset that in order to get people to this transformation, to this point B from point A, they need all these things. But I realized after teaching for four years, it's not true. A lot of these things, we just imagine that they need it, but it doesn't really help them. So it doesn't just apply to building the courses, but also building business. So I definitely want to instill that mindset of building small, just taking baby step to how they go about achieving their goal with small courses. Last thing, I think this is a very important one. I don't have a solution to this. You can tell that I'm leaning towards more the education side than the marketing side of things. But traditionally, when we start talking about like this educational terms, it sounds like they're coming from the traditional teachers. And it's really boring for modern entrepreneurs and creators to hear those. It's like, I don't want to learn those. I just want to sell more courses. So I think a big part is also like, how to teach this stuff but in a very simple way like just that simple like fifth grader can understand that would be a big challenge so now you get the full picture of small courses yeah small school yeah that's awesome come on i am so grateful for you uh where can we learn more about you and the work that you're doing in the world I think the obvious place is SmallSchool. SmallSchool.is is the website and I think that's a great place to start to discover all these new things that I'm doing. And social media wise, I mean, I used to be more active on Twitter slash X, but lately I'm spending more time building my podcast and my YouTube channel, which are both quite new. But you can search either Kavon or Small School, you'll find them. And Threads, I'm having quite some fun meeting new friends on Threads. So the username is very easy to remember. It's just Kavon, K-E-V-O-N. So you can find me there as well.
Melvin Varghese:
Kavon, thank you again for doing this and have a great rest of your day.
Kevon Cheung:
Thank you. Bye, Melvin. Bye.
Melvin Varghese:
Hey there, I hope you enjoyed my conversation with Kavan, and especially if you are in a season where you are rebranding your private practice or your small business, or you are thinking about adding an online course. I hope that today's session has been incredibly helpful for you. Kavan's website is again over at smallschool.is. And I was reflecting on this conversation and the one thing I just kept taking away from it was, you know, a lot of colleagues asked me like, Mel, when is the right time to launch an online course? The truth is enough of us struggle with imposter syndrome and feel like I need to only launch an online course when I do this. And yet that this keeps changing over time. So I don't know if that's always the best model. But I think one general framework is teach what you have built expertise in and you have some real world experience in. And success can look a little bit different. You know, sometimes success is financial. Like for example, With our podcasting course, I teach podcasting because I've been doing this for nine plus years now and the STZ podcast is over 1.8 million downloads, right? So I've had good success with it. I share those kind of numbers, just not if it's a flex, but just to share like, this is, you know, I've done it for this amount of time. This is, we've had some reasonable success with it. But I think that general framework is a good one. I've seen enough of our colleagues where they will say, Mel, I want to launch a course in a completely unrelated area that's unrelated to their private practice niche, to even the direction they want to go because they see an opportunity. But my whole thing is, you know, personally for me, I'm always thinking decades versus days. So if you can see yourself being there here in that space that you're thinking about creating a course for eight to 10 years, then consider it. If it's less, if it's like a, I just want to do it for a couple of years, then it may be a little bit more difficult, uh, to consider and, and, and really build out because it's also not just about the online course, but about the related products and services that you're going to offer. Have a great rest of your day and I will see you next time. Bye.
Narrator:
Hey, it's Melvin. I hope that you enjoyed today's session. Again, wanted to just send a final invite.
Melvin Varghese:
join us in our online course Mastermind, which is currently open for enrollment. If you've been thinking about creating an online course and want to do this in community alongside other therapists, the Mastermind is definitely something to check out. You can learn more about it over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash mastermind sellingthecouch.com forward slash mastermind. Have a great rest of your day.
selling the couch podcast with melvin varghese phdWeekly interviews, strategy, and advice for building your private practice in and beyond the therapy room.
Apple podcastsYou TubeSpotify ready to launch your online course?Please check out our free online course starter kit for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This FREE 7-day email course will help you validate your course idea (so that you can create a course that has buyers).
sign up for free course starter kitready to launch your podcast?Please check out our FREE podcasting workshop for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This workshop is pre-recorded so you can watch it on a day and time that works for your schedule.
It contains a lot of practical tips that we've learned as STC has reached 1.81 million+ downloads and become a 6-figure business with podcasting as the backbone.
sign up for podcasting workshopKEVIN CHEUNGKevon Cheung is the founder and head teacher at Small School. He was a previous guest on the podcast several years ago, and I’ve taken his Build in Public Mastery Course to help overcome my fears about posting on social media. I learned a lot of helpful information about creating effective posts on LinkedIn, YouTube, and the STC podcast.
Kevon’s wisdom and practical knowledge have helped me lean into vulnerability in many areas. In light of his rebranding from Public Lab to Small School, Kevon shares the pain and difficulties in business building and rebranding, why he felt the need to rebrand, and what he teaches in his online “small courses.” He also explains where he sees course creators stumbling the most.
Small School
Melvin varghese phdPsychologist and Founder @ Selling The Couch
Melvin Varghese, PhD is a licensed psychologist in Philadelphia, PA. In 2015, Dr. Varghese founded Selling The Couch, a podcast to help therapists move from clinical to online income.
On the podcast, he interviews successful practitioners about how they've built their practices, social media/marketing experts, and shares lessons as he uses our clinical skills to create an online business powered by podcasting + online courses.
The podcast is one of the top Career podcasts in Apple Podcasts, has been downloaded over 1.8 million times, and is heard in over 125 countries. Mel is a successful course creator with 240+ students and $300k+ in course sales.
More Posts370: Why I Shut Down a 10K-Member Facebook Groupby Melvin Varghese | Sep 12, 2024 | Growing Your Practice, Private Practice, STC Podcast
A behind the scenes of our decision to shut down our 10k member Facebook Group.
369: Behind The Scenes Of A Rebrandby Melvin Varghese | Sep 6, 2024 | Marketing, Private Practice, STC Podcast
This is a podcast episode graphic on Behind the Scenes of a Rebrand with Kevon Cheung.
356: 7 Lessons I Learned From Two 7-Figure Entrepreneursby Melvin Varghese | Aug 23, 2024 | Nuts And Bolts, Private Practice, STC Podcast
This is a podcast episode graphic of Ali Abdaal and Sahil Bloom, two online creators who have built 7-figure businesses and audiences of over 6 million followers
« Older Entries The post 369: Behind The Scenes Of A Rebrand appeared first on Selling The Couch | Melvin Varghese PhD.
356: 7 Lessons I Learned From Two 7-Figure EntrepreneursWritten By Melvin Varghese PhDIn today's episode, I dive into seven valuable lessons I learned from successful entrepreneurs: Ali Abdaal and Sahil Bloom.
These two online creators have built seven-figure businesses and have a massive audience (more than 3 million followers). They sat down a few months ago to do an insightful chat on life, business, relationships, and the strands that connect them.
But more than that, they have an incredible groundedness to success and growth that I respect.
The first lesson is about changing the wealth scoreboard. Instead of defining success solely based on revenue or followers, it's essential to include aspects like health, relationships, and hobbies in the definition of success.
The second lesson emphasizes setting daily non-negotiables to function at your best. Prioritizing self-care and intentional living can prevent burnout and enhance overall well-being.
The third lesson focuses on valuing friends over followers. It's something that I'm thinking a lot about as the STC podcast reaches unreal numbers (1.81 million downloads with listeners in over 100 countries as I write this). Research shows that the quality of relationships significantly impacts happiness and health in the long run.
The fourth lesson highlights the reality that more growth attracts more haters. Dealing with negativity and trolls is a common challenge for entrepreneurs, emphasizing the importance of setting boundaries and defaulting to empathy. I even found this with a few not nice reviews of the podcast (I think a few of them were straight spam accounts).
The fifth lesson discusses the nuances of sharing personal information like pictures of kids and revenue numbers online. While these can humanize a brand, caution and privacy considerations are crucial.
The sixth lesson suggests building micro-businesses within the main business to generate cash flow and free up time for creative pursuits. Finding the right balance and support is key to sustainable growth.
The seventh and final lesson underscores the value of connection over mass content. Authenticity and human connection are essential in building trust and sustainable relationships with your audience.
I think you're going to enjoy this one especially if you're thinking about what success in business looks like beyond just revenue or number of employees.
Timestamps 00:00:00 – Introduction to STC Elite Mastermind Enrollment
00:03:47 – Changing the Wealth Scoreboard
00:07:33 – Setting Daily Non-Negotiables
00:09:40 – Prioritizing Friends over Followers
00:14:16 – Dealing with Haters and Trolls
00:18:20 – Sharing Personal Content and Revenue Numbers
00:21:24 – Building Micro-Businesses for Sustainability
00:23:00 – Emphasizing Connection over Mass Content
00:27:30 – Final Invitation to Join STC Elite Mastermind
TranscriptMelvin Varghese:*
Hey there, it's Melvin. I hope you're doing well. Before we jump into today's session, just wanted to let you know that STC Elite, our mastermind for therapists creating their first online courses open for enrollment. If you've been thinking about creating an online course and have been a fan of the STC podcast and are looking to launch your online course in a community of other therapists, you can check out the mastermind over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash mastermind, or you can download our free online course starter kit. It's a seven-day email course that'll help validate your course idea. That's over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash course kit. We'll jump into today's session. Hey there, welcome to today's session of Selling the Couch. I hope you're doing well, having a fantastic day. So, you know, one of the things that as Selling the Couch continues to grow and as I grow as an entrepreneur, one of the things I've been really doing is trying to study those who are a little bit further along. And in this case a lot further along than me as an entrepreneur i believe that but. You know what i used to do is i used to just focus on the successful things they were doing how they were marketing or how they were growing or how they were selling. But maybe it's just the wisdom of age. But as I've gotten older, one of the things that I've come to realize is I actually equally want to study the things that are not working for them, or the hard lessons that they learned along the way, or the sacrifices that they're making along the way to build something really great. And it's ultimately asking this question of, are those things that I'm willing to do? And today's podcast is actually based on a podcast interview I heard a couple of months ago. It's with Ali Abdaal and Sahil Bloom. Both of these are online creators. If you haven't heard of Ali and Sahil, they both built seven-figure businesses. They also have an audience of over, I believe, six million. when I last checked in recently. And so they built both these platforms as well as these very successful businesses. And a few months ago, they sat down to do a podcast interview, basically talking about life and business. They had actually done part one of an interview, I would say about a year ago. And I listened to it, and it was one of the most insightful interviews that I had heard. And I took a lot of things away from it, and I just couldn't wait to listen to the second part of this, because they had alluded to that a second part was coming. And so in today's session what I want to do is take seven of the lessons that I picked up along the way and share some of the things that I'm thinking about and more importantly implementing both in my business as well as in my personal life. So the number one tip that they shared is to change the wealth scoreboard. So change the wealth scoreboard. So in entrepreneurship, and especially even in private practice, right, a lot of times, we base success on two metrics, either the number of clients we're seeing, or on revenue. right? And revenue, especially in the world just generally of entrepreneurship, it's kind of an indicator of credibility, reputation, and all of those kind of things. And yet at the same time, if you think about it, I know for me, when I think about it, we know people in our lives that are extremely wealthy, but they're miserable. They and miserable could be defined in all sorts of different ways. Either they work crazy hours, they struggle with some sort of addiction, there is a sense of brokenness in their relationships, they are not able to spend time with loved ones as they would like, they're not able to show up to little league games or any of those things for their kiddos on a regular basis, and One of the things that Sahil and Ali point to is basically not defining your self-worth based on your net worth. And instead what they say is change the scoreboard of success. So instead of just basing your self-worth and your belief in who you are based on a number like revenue, Or, you know, if you're a podcaster or you're building on some sort of a social platform, number of followers. Instead of that, optimize it a different way. Expand that definition. So include things like health. Do I have time for exercise? Am I getting out daily to do a hike? Things like that. Do I have time for my loving relationships? Because we, just on a personal level, we seem to be entering a season where a lot of our parents' generation, they're passing away, they're coming down with cancer and Alzheimer's and all of these kind of things. I realize more than ever that these folks that I keep saying I'm going to spend time with them, I'm going to spend time with them, they're getting older and we really don't know when our last days are and so how do we want to intentionally live our days Another thing that I've thought a lot about is just time for hobbies. I started to pick up the ukulele recently. I've done landscape photography for a long time and I've recently started to pick that back up. I took a little bit of a break when our kiddo was born and it was just hard to focus on much more. But what I've come to realize is changing this definition of success, it's really hard. And I will say I do not have this figured out at all because there are times where I struggle with, man, you know, I could launch another thing, or this is an episode for a future time, but I've been thinking about, you know, jumping back into private practice, this was always the dream. But I've been thinking a lot about like, what is the reason I want to do it? And when do I want to do it? And some of those things I'm thinking about, but What I realized is you're just going to be a lot happier playing a game that's not just based on revenue at the end of the day. So the second point that they shared is set daily non-negotiables. So I feel like as clinicians, we are probably a little bit more intentional about the pacing of our days and how we think about our days. But I also know, especially when you're doing traditional private practice, you may be seeing 15 to 25 clients in a week, right? And that stuff, the work is beautiful, and yet it takes such a toll on all of us, right? And if you're in a group practice, even as you have scaled back, right, there's inevitably, you've gone more into a CEO role where you've got a really set vision and all of these kind of things, right? So their point was basically, if you live without intention, it's a formula to exist versus living. Instead, what Sahil recommended was write a list of three to five things that you must do every day to function at your best. So for me, I started to create this list and one is I have to start my day usually with a 30 minute HIIT workout. That's like one big thing. Another thing is I have to do a daily hike as long as the weather cooperates or kiddo's not sick or something like that. These little things like that, and I realize individually they're powerful, but it's the combination of stacking all of those together that really yields the best results. And what you want to do is you want to schedule those three to five things into your day. And, you know, we know this, especially as clinicians, when we see clients in the therapy room, which is we talk a lot about self-care and we know that taking care of ourselves first allows us to love and take care of those around us. Whereas if we focus on loving and taking care of others, it can work for a season, but inevitably it's a formula for burnout or resentment or something like that. The third point that they made was friends over followers. There's a, I think it's called a Harvard study on, I'm like missing the middle word, but like the Harvard study on happiness. It's the longest running study on happiness at 75 plus years. And what they have basically done is studied generations of people. And every year, year after year, asking them these questions around what makes you happy? What have you realized? And they started this study when these individuals were, I believe in their teens, and now many of them are in their 80s and 90s. And it's a pretty interesting study. There's actually a fascinating TED talk on it that you should definitely check out from the current director of the study, who is Dr. Robert Waldinger. And in that study, they basically found that the single greatest predictor of health at age 80 is the quality of relationships that you have at age 50. Now what's really interesting, and I feel this more than ever now that I'm writing on LinkedIn, there's an interesting trick that social media plays on us. Social media makes us believe that having more followers means that we have deep relationships in real life. And that could be, that's like the furthest thing from the truth, right? Instead, what I've been really trying to do is create a list of, so I've got two lists. One, I've got a list of five just guy friends that I really want to invest in. Hey, it's Melvin. I hope that you're enjoying today's podcast session. Just wanted to also let you know that STC Elite, our mastermind for therapist course creators, is now open for enrollment. If you've been thinking about creating an online course, and specifically if 2025 is the year that you want to create your online course, definitely encourage you to check out our mastermind. It's over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash mastermind. We launched this back in 2021 and since then over 60 of our colleagues have gone through our mastermind. It includes a ton of support all the way from live teaching, live feedback from colleagues and from our team to build out and structure your online course all the way to mindset coaching, all the way to access to our video editing and graphic design team so that you don't have to hire everything separately. We've made it really super comprehensive and I think you're really going to enjoy it. Again, the link is over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash mastermind. Enrollment does wrap up at the end of August, so definitely encourage you to check it out and consider joining us. And again, we have a free email course. It's seven days. It'll help validate your course idea. I know that's the biggest struggle many of us are navigating of whether the course is actually going to make money. And we put all of this into a simple to understand email course that you can check out over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash course kit. SellingTheCouch.com forward slash Course Kit. We'll jump right back into today's session. So I make sure I review that list as part of my night routine. And I just always ask myself, did I reach out to this person? Did we grab coffee? Did we have a meal together? Did we talk to each other on the phone? Something like that. And then I have an expanded list about 13-14 folks that I do regular phone calls with. and it's such a basic thing and i usually grab those those calls on my hike so it's kind of a i get to hike and talk and it's like the most wonderful feeling in the world because you're getting like physical exercise but then your heart is fulfilled too because you're connecting with somebody on a genuine basis and because i'm doing a hike it's not like i can be distracted like on a laptop or something right i've literally got my airpods in my ear and i'm just talking to them enjoying nature and just being fully present with them and this is the key part of it you have to schedule that time to connect with them so it doesn't mean always like and i realize we're all in different seasons of life so it doesn't mean you know it can be always like a physical gathering on a regular cadence it could be as simple as like a text or a call or something like that. And again, I think the highlight or the wisdom of that is life happens, and life will just pass us by if we're not intentional with our relationships. Fourth point that they made was more growth equals more haters. Now, this is one of the hardest things I, to be honest, I was completely oblivious on this, you know, the STC podcast, as I record this right now, we just passed 1.75 million downloads of the podcast, which is unbelievable and I'm just incredibly humbled for this kind of growth. Each of you are the reason why this has happened and yet at the same time the thing I was completely oblivious to is that you're gonna statistically attract haters and trolls. There's a great Tim Ferriss article that I've shared in previous episodes all about where he basically talks about the costs of success and the costs of celebrity. And it's a cautionary article, everything from Tim Ferriss wrote For Our Work Week, For Our Body, a bunch of the Tools of Titans, a bunch of these books, but everything from like, you know, the FBI having to be called because there's like a stalker or having to put pseudonyms or aliases in when they're checking into hotels because of Like the fear of like not having privacy There's just a lot of stuff that you just don't think about and I am very much very much a small fish in You know in this sort of larger ecosystem and I realize all these numbers are relative but even for me I have definitely dealt with a handful of situations that made me pause that sort of bordered on sort of stalkerish sort of ideals idealizing kind of behavior all the way to sort of threats you know when we had to remove somebody from our program because they were causing harm to the the safety of the group and all the way to like threats of you know i'm gonna blast you out on whatever right And it's really, and there in hindsight, I think there are probably things that I could have done a different little bit differently. But it also taught me a very important lesson, which is, I think we should absolutely all share our message, right. And yet at this, the other side of this is you are probably going to attract people that are just sort of have pain in their lives. And so Saha has a few tips, and he's specifically referencing Twitter threads, because he really built his audience on Twitter. But so a couple of tips. So a thread getting a lot of quote tweets early on is an early indicator that's it's potentially being perceived as controversial. So basically, you know, quote, tweet, and most of these platforms have this, right, which is basically that they take a post that somebody takes a post they've seen, and then they add their perspective on it. usually it's a, you know, like, this is why I disagree with this or this, you know, and, and because of that, you're just going to attract some people that are, you know, continue to feel that right. So he'll mutes those conversations to prevent notifications. What I actually have done is I don't have social media on my phone, I check it on my when I'm, you know, here on my desktop. But beyond that, I'm checked out unless it's some sort of weird case scenario where I just need to check it for some reason. something like that, like waiting on a DM or something. But by and large, I really try to avoid social media and putting it on my phone. Sahil also says, you know, he realizes someone's usually hurting if they're willing to write something mean about you online. this i think is absolutely true i think one thing i've realized is i mean it's that old adage right hurting people hurt people and it doesn't mean that you should be a punching bag for the hurt you should absolutely set boundaries but i think sahil's perspective which is something that I'm still working on which is defaulting to empathy at least in your mind because realizing that the person is probably just going through something in their own lives and they may be projecting that hurt or that pain onto you and it likely in a lot of situations it probably has nothing to do with you but you just became the the object where it's where it's placed. The fifth point is this tip about posting pictures of kids and sharing like revenue numbers especially. Sahil basically says, and Ali agrees with him, but basically these are inherently not bad things. They can show your humanity, your credibility. And I would even say, especially in this world of AI, where content creation is easier than ever, people really crave the human connection, that they want to be able to see somebody like this and just to be able to talk to them and say, wow, I resonate with what they're saying. They make me feel a certain type of way. Now, here's kind of the weight. There's always trade-offs. As you probably can tell, I don't rarely, and especially on very public things like LinkedIn, I, you know, one of my things is I'm a girl dad, but I actually don't post pictures of our daughter. And the main reason is, one, like from a safety perspective. Two, for me, I feel like one of the most important things that I can do as a dad to empower my daughter is that me not post it because she has no ability to be able to say like, hey dad, like I don't want you to post this or I want you to post this. I just don't think she has the wisdom that she's at. at five years old, right? And so it's something I don't know about, like, and I'm not even gonna, like, say I have it all figured out. Like, I don't know how I'm gonna navigate it as she gets sort of older, as I continue to think about STC and all of those kind of things. And so, but I do want to default to caution. I think there's definitely wisdom, wisdom in that. Revenue numbers are another thing. I think I've In the past especially on LinkedIn in the early days when I first started this what I would say is like around late 2022 early 2023 I was posting a lot more revenue numbers and What I kind of realized is It wasn't a money thing, but it just made me feel uncomfortable on some level. It made me like, am I flaunting this? But then again, also like the safety thing. As you can tell, this point is one that I'm still navigating and struggling through. But I at least wanted to share it with you because I think it's something that's worthwhile, but it's also, I wanted to normalize that this is really hard. It's really hard when you… part of things like credibility can be impacted and helped by numbers, right? So, for example, we have our online course Mastermind, right? And it's a nice thing for our colleagues to know that I'm a course creator, that I've been one since 2015, and we've had 200 plus students, we've had 300k plus in revenue, right? Like, that when I teach this stuff, it's not something random. that I'm just like building another product because, you know, I launched a course and the course didn't do well. So now I'm going to go teach other people how to do it kind of thing, you know? Yeah. So the sixth point is build micro businesses. You know, a nightmare scenario for most entrepreneurs is they have to balance making money in their business with creating content, i.e. marketing their business with all without sort of burning out, right? And if you have a team, I think that's one option, but many people I know that are listening to these episodes are solopreneurs, and how do you sort of do that in a sustainable way? Sahil has an interesting piece of advice, which is basically to scratch your own itch. So build micro-businesses within your main business to generate cash flow, ideally with minimal involvement. So, for example, in house agency, if you have a podcast, this would free up time, this would then generate revenue, and it would allow you to focus on your creative pursuits. One of the nuances that Sahil talks about is ideally finding somebody that can manage and do this for you, so that you don't have another thing to manage or form like a partnership where you have multiple partners. I don't know anything about this stuff, but it's something that I'm thinking about, whether it does make sense. Because I think that piece of advice is really good, but I think there's some nuances, which is, you know, building anything new, I think, comes with its own stressors and time and you need capital and all of that kind of stuff. And yeah, so like, just nuances that I don't know the answer to, of course, I'll share as I kind of learn and navigate and think through more and more stuff with the STC podcast. The final thing that they mentioned is connection over mass content. So I've noticed this when I started podcasting in 2015. There was a piece of advice they would say is if you want your podcast to grow, post a whole bunch of episodes and do it very consistently and basically surge those episodes, especially at the start. and that will lead to bigger download numbers. When I started writing on LinkedIn, it was a very similar advice, except it was two-tiered. Post often and then go find bigger accounts and go engage with their content because the people that are also following those accounts, especially if you leave an insightful comment, then they will click back over to your profile, check it out, and then want to follow you. I think there is definitely wisdom in this. Again, you know, as I started on LinkedIn around 690-ish followers, and right now as I record this we're about to hit 2,800 followers, and I do this, I've done this thing for, you know, five days a week. I spend about 30 minutes interacting with accounts and commenting when, you know, people comment online, and I think it's definitely a way to grow. But again, the nuance I think of this is AI is really going to change a lot of stuff. Content is easier than ever to create. You know, even down like two weeks ago, Taplio is in the STC newsletter, I share my LinkedIn live stats. So there's a page which shows you how all of my posts are done. So if you haven't signed up for the newsletter, it's over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash newsletter, we'd love to have you. But in there, that software that I'm using is called Taplio, T-A-P-L-I-O. And one of the really interesting things I just saw that Taplio rolled out is literally you can take a YouTube video that you've recorded, paste the URL into Taplio, and it will automatically generate a carousel for you. So it uses AI to kind of summarize everything. It's pretty crazy. At And I just ran this and it literally took about four minutes to write an entire carousel post. So what that's telling me is, again, content is easier than ever now to create. And what people are going to be really leaning on is connection. So even the way when I think about posting on LinkedIn, the cadence I've generally at this point done is three times a week. And then there's a Saturday morning where I just share the latest podcast episode. But with those three posts, generally two of those are kind of a human connection side. So they're usually stuff that I'm struggling with or stuff I'm navigating or stuff that I'm learning. Something like that. And the intent is One, just to share a human side, but those posts, what I notice is those tend to do really well. Because I think, more than ever, we value connection and authenticity more than ever. And I know, even on LinkedIn, I was talking with a friend about this the other day, I've actually muted or unfollowed bigger accounts that are overly optimized with perfect copywriting skills. Because what I find is, it almost feels clickbaity and it feels like inauthentic. And the biggest thing I wanted to share, at least with that pointer I took away, is at the end of the day, people do business with people they know, like, and trust. And so you can share all the knowledge and insights that you have in the world, but if people don't see your human side, your struggles, your wins, your hard moments, I think it's really hard, I think, to build something sustainable online. So the seven points just one more time are change the wealth scoreboard. Two, set daily non-negotiables. Three, friends over followers. Four is more growth equals more haters. Five is this thought around being thoughtful about posting pictures of kiddos or sharing revenue numbers. Six is build micro-businesses. And seven is connection over mass content. Hope you enjoyed today's episode and if we're on LinkedIn, when this goes live, I would love to hear what you took away from it because there's just a wealth of stuff and I'm sure there's stuff that I'm missing as well. Hope you have a wonderful day and so appreciate you tuning in. Bye.
Narrator:
Thanks for listening to the Selling the Couch podcast. For more great content and to stay up to date, visit www.sellingthecouch.com.
Melvin Varghese:
Hey, it's Melvin. I hope that you enjoyed today's session. Again, wanted to just send a final invite to join us in our online course Mastermind, which is currently open for enrollment. If you've been thinking about creating an online course and want to do this in community alongside other therapists, the Mastermind is definitely something to check out. You can learn more about it over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash mastermind, sellingthecouch.com forward slash mastermind. Have a great rest of your day. Hey, it's Melvin. I hope that you enjoyed today's session. Again, wanted to just send a final invite to join us in our online course mastermind, which is currently open for enrollment. If you've been thinking about creating an online course and want to do this in community alongside other therapists, the mastermind is definitely something to check out. You can learn more about it over at SellingTheCouch.com forward slash mastermind. SellingTheCouch.com forward slash mastermind. Have a great rest of your day.
selling the couch podcast with melvin varghese phdWeekly interviews, strategy, and advice for building your private practice in and beyond the therapy room.
Apple podcastsYou TubeSpotify ready to launch your online course?Please check out our free online course starter kit for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This FREE 7-day email course will help you validate your course idea (so that you can create a course that has buyers).
sign up for free course starter kitready to launch your podcast?Please check out our FREE podcasting workshop for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This workshop is pre-recorded so you can watch it on a day and time that works for your schedule.
It contains a lot of practical tips that we've learned as STC has reached 1.81 million+ downloads and become a 6-figure business with podcasting as the backbone.
sign up for podcasting workshopMelvin varghese phdPsychologist and Founder @ Selling The Couch
Melvin Varghese, PhD is a licensed psychologist in Philadelphia, PA. In 2015, Dr. Varghese founded Selling The Couch, a podcast to help therapists move from clinical to online income.
On the podcast, he interviews successful practitioners about how they've built their practices, social media/marketing experts, and shares lessons as he uses our clinical skills to create an online business powered by podcasting + online courses.
The podcast is one of the top Career podcasts in Apple Podcasts, has been downloaded over 1.8 million times, and is heard in over 125 countries. Mel is a successful course creator with 240+ students and $300k+ in course sales.
More PostsStarter Podcasting Setupsby Melvin Varghese | Jul 25, 2024 | Podcasting, STC Podcast
A breakdown of the 4 most common podcasting setups.
Why Therapists Are Built For Business: My Conversation On The Heard Business School Podcastby Melvin Varghese | Jul 1, 2024 | Blog, Mel On Other Podcasts, Mindset
I believe that therapists make wonderful business owners. In this podcast, I chat with my friend, Michael Fulwiler from Heard, on the nuances of this.
353: How To Craft Awesome Welcome Series Emails To Market Your Practiceby Melvin Varghese | Jun 29, 2024 | Marketing, STC Podcast
Why don't more therapists create email sequences to bring in therapy clients? This is the question that we're exploring in today's podcast.
« Older Entries The post 356: 7 Lessons I Learned From Two 7-Figure Entrepreneurs appeared first on Selling The Couch | Melvin Varghese PhD.
365: Starter Podcasting SetupsWritten By Melvin Varghese PhDHey there, it's Melvin!
In this episode of Selling the Couch, we dive deep into the world of podcast gear setups. As a seasoned podcaster since 2015, I understand the challenges and complexities that come with choosing the right gear for your podcasting journey.
I start by sharing my own experience of initially worrying about having a pro-level setup when I first started the podcast. However, I quickly realized that a high-quality setup wasn't necessary to create engaging content. In fact, I used a simple $110 setup for the first five years of the podcast, and most listeners didn't even notice.
I then walk listeners through the four most common scenarios when it comes to podcasting gear setups:
Throughout the episode, I emphasize the importance of keeping gear simple and focusing on content quality in the early stages of podcasting. I share personal insights and tips on gear selection, setup logistics, and the humanizing effect of a basic setup for building audience connection.
Listeners are encouraged to consider their podcasting goals, budget constraints, and technical comfort level when choosing gear setups. Whether starting out or looking to upgrade, the key is to prioritize content creation and audience engagement over expensive equipment.
I wrap up the episode by highlighting the free resources available for therapists interested in starting a podcast and thanking the American Psychological Association for supporting the podcast through their PsyCareers blog.
Join me on this gear exploration journey and discover the right setup for your podcasting success! Thank you for tuning in to Selling the Couch.
TranscriptHey there, it's Melvin. Today's podcast is supported by the American Psychological Association's PsyCareers blog. If you are a psychology professional that is thinking about your next career move, definitely check out PsyCareers. It's absolutely free and there is a listing of over 400 job openings in the field of psychology and specifically for psychology professionals. It's free to set up and you can learn more over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash A-P-A. Hey there, it's Melvin. Today's podcast is supported by the American Psychological Association's Psych Careers blog. If you are a psychology professional that is thinking about your next career move, definitely check out PsyCareers. It's absolutely free and there is a listing of over 400 job openings in the field of psychology and specifically for psychology professionals. It's free to set up and you can learn more over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash A-P-A.
Melvin Varghese: Hello, hello, welcome to today's session of Selling the Couch. I hope you're doing well, having an incredible day.
Melvin Varghese So it is so freaking hard to pick gear as a podcaster, both when you're starting out as well as just various points during the journey. And this trying to figure out and pick this gear gets more complicated depending on a couple of different factors. Whether you are doing the podcast solo, whether you have a co-host, whether the guests that you are going to be interviewing on your podcast are coming in live, or are you doing it over the internet. It just adds such a different layer of complication. And today, one of the most common questions that I get when it comes to podcasting is like, Mel, what is a good setup for me? And today, I just wanted to walk you through the four most common scenarios when it comes to podcasting gear setups and based on the four most common scenarios. We actually have a buying guide that is part of our Healthcasters course that we give to all of our colleagues. So it paints these scenarios and then paints every like other possible scenario, includes all the gear recommendations. All they have to do is literally click on it. And today I actually wanted to share just most of that guide with you just because I feel like sometimes it's just good to be helpful and I've learned a ton when it comes to podcasting now having done this since 2015. So the thing I really wanted to start out with is I worried so much about gear when I first started the SDC podcast. I had in my mind that I needed this pro level setup. I needed sound blankets and $1000 plus mics and all of that kind of stuff. And if you're watching this on YouTube, like beautiful imagery like this and high quality DSLRs and all of that stuff. But when STZ first started, I had a teeny tiny budget. And literally, I used a $60 mic and a super cranky, cranky, creaky, colder, and all of these things. It costs right around $110. And that's honestly what I used for the first five years of the STZ podcast. And I kept worrying about whether people would notice, whether I would get emails being like, Mel, you really need to upgrade your sound, blah, blah, blah, right? Like all of these fears and narratives that I had in my mind. And can I just be honest with you, 99.8% of listeners didn't seem to notice and they didn't seem to really care. In fact, I used that same setup for four plus years as the STC podcast hit a million total downloads. And so before we even jump into gear recommendations, I think this was one of the struggles that I had in creating this episode. I didn't want you to hear it as now go and purchase all of this gear. It's more like, hey, you don't it's what you should actually be optimizing for at the beginning parts of your podcasting journey. And I consider like first two years beginning parts is getting to become a better storyteller, getting to become a better interviewer. And if you're doing video, like I am, just getting to be more comfortable in front of the camera, because doing this video thing does not come at all natural to me, and it's been quite a journey. So let's jump in. The first scenario, and this is really the most common scenario that most of you that are listening that are thinking about launching a podcast are going to run into, which is you are a single host for your podcast. So you host your podcast, you do solo episodes, you record those, and then you will do interview, you will interview guests over the internet. This is honestly what I have done since 2015. This is, I have not had a co-host on the SDC podcast thus far. I have not done live interviews, meaning like where the person comes, well I've done one, but the vast majority of them have been over the internet. And so the starter setup that I would recommend is, first of all the mic that I would look at is the Samsung Q2U, S-A-M-S-O-N Q2U. I actually used the Audio-Technica ATR2100 but they upgraded that mic and they like increased the price of it and the reviews on it are kind of a little bit mixed so that's why I don't recommend that one anymore and it's hard to find the previous version of it. But if you look at the Samsung Q2U, it's around $60 on Amazon. It's what's called a dynamic mic. And so a dynamic mic, without getting too technical into it, you really want to try to go with a dynamic mic, especially if you are recording in a room that's not like sound treated. So which is the vast majority of us, right? So you don't have like insulation and all of this kind of stuff. And yeah, so that's like a, that's what I would recommend. Now, these mics need to be held up onto a shock mount. And the main reason why you want a shock mount is, and you'll kind of even notice this if you're watching this on YouTube, sometimes when I talk, there's times where my mouth hits the mic. And a shock mount basically allows you to absorb some of that sound so that it doesn't get picked up in the actual recording. There's a bunch of them on Amazon. I just did a quick glance. The one that I saw that had a lot of reviews was this brand called Coolertron. microphone shock mount. So it's K-O-O-L-E-R-T-R-O-N microphone shock mount. But basically do a search of like microphone shock mount and and then you should be able to to come across this. The next kind of thing that you need is you need an on stage what's called a windscreen. And so there's a bunch of these companies that that make this. This is also known as a clown nose when it comes to when it comes to podcast recording. So this right here, if you're looking at my mic right here, this is actually, this is my Shure SM7B. Do not get this mic right when you're starting out because it's, there's just a lot more gear and technical stuff that you have to navigate. It's not worth it, even though it's a great mic and it sounds great. But this mic actually has this pop filter and that's basically this, this foam material right here. And so the main purpose of this foam filter is a couple of things. So one is generally when we talk we spit so any saliva and stuff doesn't get into the actual microphone and mess up the electronic stuff in there. That's one of the main reasons. The second reason is, at least in English, when generally when we say words that start with a P or a B, like generally we tend to make these pop pop pop pop right like that that noise that popping noise and for someone that's often listening on for example most people are listening to podcasts on while on a commute or they might be hiking and have airpods or something plugged in those p noises are really can be really distracting and can be loud and just and and you don't want to like annoy your podcast listener, right? So basically this windscreen helps to buffer against some of that sound that's coming in. The next thing that I would recommend, especially if you're starting at this setup, is what's called a pop filter. The one that I use is, you can do a quick search for the windscreens, There's a one from Onstage, it's called the Onstage Foam Windscreen. That one is like $4 or something, and it's rated really well. Onstage is also like a common brand when it comes to music kind of stuff, so it's a reputable brand. Next thing is the pop filter and you don't technically need a pop filter because the windscreen acts kind of as a pop filter as well. But I like to have a second pop filter, especially when I was doing the episodes, because I just felt like it added a different layer of filtering and it really like limited those plosives and just made the sound just a lot better. And the trade-off with putting this pop filter is it looks basically like a big circle and it goes like right in front of it and it looks a little clunky. So especially if you're doing video, it can show up kind of weird and hide some of your face. So that's the only thing just to think about. So if you are doing video, I would recommend just leaving the pop filter off, just so that you get a better visual experience. If you're doing video, for example, like you're taking your podcast and you're planning on having the audio, but also putting the video component of it on YouTube as well. The next thing that we love to do and or I would recommend is you having some sort of a microphone stand, right? So you've got your microphone. There's really two options here. There is the option of a stand, which is basically you put your microphone on, twist it on, and you've got a nice stand. The one that I recommend is by this company called Gator Frameworks, and it's called the Short Weighted Bass Microphone Stand. And the benefit of this one is it's weighted on the bottom so that it won't easily tip over whenever you have it on your desk and like at a practical level, let's say you're recording or you're talking to a guest and you're writing something down and it hits your hand, the microphone then won't tip over and now you've got a big clanking noise that comes on on the actual recording. Now the other option that you can think about is what's called a mic arm. Now this gets the weighted microphone stand I think it's around like 25 ish dollars. The other option is what is called a mic arm and That's what I am using for the STC podcast. The benefit is because I basically want to walk into my home office, plug in three things and be good to go. And with this stand, again, if you're watching on YouTube, you can see this like it's very easy to move and I can just move it enough in into the screen, out of the screen. And when I put it away, it's just kind of tucked in on the corner and everything is ready to go. Whereas with the weighted stand, you got to like likely plug the mic in, all of that kind of stuff. I wanted a very easy to set up kind of thing. And so, but I know that many of us may be recording podcast episodes, for example, from office or something like that. So a stand may make more sense than having like a proper like arm that's there. The one that I use is by a company called Rode. It's the Rode PSA-1. It's around $100 on Amazon, which is why, like, it's a little bit more expensive. And now, if you look on Amazon, you will see a bunch of, like, $20-ish mic arms. But if you look very closely at them, what you'll see is a lot of them have springs on them. and I tried a spring one and it was fine for a little bit but like if there's like one thing you're taking away try not to buy a spring my garm because what ended up happening for mine was over time it would start sagging and then the other more annoying thing was the springs would start creaking over time So then I would like get these like little noises or I would have to be super gentle and I'd be constantly worried about whether the sound of the spring was getting picked up. So that's the starter set and that can range anywhere from about $100 to $225. The big driver of course is whether you go with that Rode PSA mic arm. There's also a company, a couple of higher end companies, like I think Blue is making one that has a mic arm as well. That one looks visually like, again, this is such a small thing. This Rode PSA mic arm is fantastic. It's super stable. Like I've literally had this for four, three, four years. No issues with it. In fact, I have a second one that I use for my, when I'm just doing videos without the podcast mic, I have a second mic. And I use that one as well, and it's like no issues with it. But visually, again, if you look on YouTube, you can see like visually, it's not. Hey there, it's Melvin. I hope that you enjoyed today's podcast session. Just wanted to take a moment again to thank the team over at the American Psychological Association for supporting today's podcast session. If you're a psychology professional that is looking for your next job in psychology, definitely check out PsyCareers, the American Psychological Association services. Career Center. PsychCareers now has over 400 job postings posted specifically for psychology professionals. You can connect with leading employers and explore roles that match your skills and your professional and personal goals. You can check all of that out over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash APA sellingthecouch.com forward slash APA. Create a free account. and get started. The best looking and the blue one is kind of cool because it's like one solid arm and it just looks and it's like a matte black. So it looks pretty sweet as well. But again, it's like a minor thing from a quality perspective. This has been great and I haven't had any issues with it. Now, the second scenario is I am the host of my podcast and I'm going to interview guests in person. This format is becoming really popular with video YouTubers. So think like Joe Rogan. think like Ali Abdaal, think about anyone that is basic. Hey there, I hope that you're enjoying today's podcast session. So I've, you know, jumped back into private practice and I decided to go the private pay route. And one of the things I've been thinking a lot about is how do I tap into outer network benefits for clients that might want to use it? Now, the common sort of perspective or tip that a lot of folks say is just to provide a super bill for clients. But the reality is I feel like most clients aren't going to go take a super bill. and then call the insurance company and then deal with that whole mess of trying to communicate with the insurance companies and waiting on reimbursement and all of that kind of stuff, right? And then at some point, especially if they're keenly aware of budget and stuff like that, they're like, oh my gosh, I may not be able to afford working with this therapist and all of those kinds of things, right? This is where Thryzr comes in and the really cool thing with Thryzr is that they will actually float the clients for the sessions. So basically when you sign up for Thryzr you can automatically submit out-of-network claims for your clients. It's simply done through an app, it literally takes seconds, and Thryser takes care of all of the insurance stress. So we don't have to deal with it as clinicians, our clients don't have to deal with it, and clients just pay what they owe for actual sessions, i.e. like the difference between your rate and the reimbursement rate, in order to skip the long insurance wait. All they have to do is pay the standard 3% credit card fee. There is no monthly contracts or fees or anything like that. If you would like to try out Thrizer, You can go to sellingthecouch.com forward slash thrizer. Enter the promo code STC so that your first $2,500 in fees are waived. Again, that's over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash thrizer. And thrizer is spelled T-H-R-I-Z-E-R and enter the promo code S-T-C. Bringing guests in and they are, they've got a whole like live setup here. Now the benefit of this setup is you're seeing another person in person. It's like when you do in-person therapy versus telehealth. Telehealth gets you like 80% of there with the experience and all of that. But there's something really powerful about when our clients are actually in the same room as us. We can pick up non-verbals. We can just pick up subtleties that we may just miss on video. Visually, also, it looks great if you are planning on putting that content on YouTube. That's highly what I would recommend because honestly, if you're also going to the time, taking the time to do like a live thing, you might as well like repurpose the content strategically. But again, that gets expensive. This is will probably be another episode at some point. Let me know if you would like an episode like this, but on video setups. I don't want to get too much into that because that can get there's just a lot of a lot of more technical stuff and I feel like this one's already technical enough. Now the negative part of having a being live with somebody and you having this proper studio setup is you'll have to set up your home office or like a co-working space or if you have like own a building you may have to have a dedicated studio space something like that where it's just practically a lot better to have a setup there and then literally for you and the guests to be able to walk in and just record the episode versus like having to construct something deconstruct it and then construct it back up it just becomes more like a logistically a little bit more of a nightmare. The other issue with it is it's already hard sometimes just to coordinate like times for podcast guests. What we do for for anyone that comes on the STC podcast is I use Calendly so I will just send a Calendly link and they pick between a couple of slots that are available and they just have to show up online. So think about that plus they gotta drive to you or meet up at a location. It just adds more more complications. And then the I just wanted to like highlight and double tap this thing. I'm not going to get too much into this but you will again you'll need likely like a multi-camera setup if you are having a single host with a single person, single guest, you'll likely need almost like a three camera setup. So one for you, where the camera's looking at you, one the camera's looking at the guest, and then one where it's both of you together, right? Translation, this can get really expensive and technologically complicated very fast. So which is why honestly I haven't gone down that route of setups because I've seen some of these behind the scenes pictures of these live podcasting studios and they look fantastic and I'm sure they're getting their ROI most of these folks. But it's also like, man, I, one, I just don't have the budget for it. And then two, it just seems like there's just more things to coordinate and figure out. Now that being said, eventually I would like to do a multi-camera setup here for SDC. So we've got a single camera setup right now, but I would love where it's possibly like an angle that's coming from one side and then possibly like an overhead shot so that people, if I'm like writing something or drawing something, there's an overhead shot that I can show stuff on. Now, with this setup, it's basically the same setup, but it's going to cost around $700 to $1,000 now. So let's just say, starter setup, Samsung QTU, you'll need two of those. You need two mic holders. You need two windscreens. Pop filters, you technically need two of those, but you can leave those out because I think visually it looks a little bit better. And then you need two tabletop stands or two mic arms. Now here's where I think it gets a little bit more complicated because you'll need to figure out a way to record the conversation because it's not directly like through a computer for example. So the thing that I would recommend is using what's called the Focusrite Scarlett 2i2 and what you can do is plug in your podcasting mics into there. and then plug that into a computer and then capture the recording that way. I think that's probably the cheapest route to go. Now, once you start rolling that focus right in, you're going to need a different cable than that comes with the Samsung QTU. Well, it comes, I believe the Samsung QTU comes with two types of cables. So one is, it's what's known as an XLR USB mic. So you can plug it either into the USB slot on your computer or the XLR slot on your, or XLR slot. So XLR slot is like this thing right here. Again, if you're looking on YouTube, you'll see it. It's basically like a higher quality sound, but it's a different type of cable. I'm pretty sure the Samsung QTU comes with it as well, but as soon as you have that Focusrite in, you're going to need XLR cables because it doesn't support plugging in multiple USB cables, as far as I know. So you'll need two XLR cables, plug that into the back of the Samsung QTU, plug that into the Focusrite 2i2, do that for each of your mics, and then plug the Focusrite back into your computer, and then you can you can be sure you'll be able to hear. So all right. And then the last two scenarios, the first is I have a co-host for my podcast, my co-host and I connect over the internet, and we will interview guests over the internet. So basically, this would be like, the most common scenario would be, I mean, an example of somebody doing this would be therapy reimagined, right, with Caden with Katie and Kurt. And they do this tech as far as when I just recently had an opportunity to do that. So Kurt logged in from his house, Katie logged in from her house, I logged in from my house. And then we recorded everything over the over the internet. But Curt and Katie co host the podcast. So the benefit of this setup is you are with the you like it's just from a logistical planning perspective, like coordinating three schedules, I think it's just so much easier. And yeah, you literally just have to log in. It's great, right? Now, the negative of this setup is I feel like… Oh, the other benefit again of a co-hosted setup is if you get sick or something like that, it's just you've got a co-host there that can take over. And also the other side of this is I think there's something really nice when you connect with somebody and you have you co-host a podcast it's fun to do a project together. Now the negative parts of this are you as with most things I feel like when you're starting a podcast with a co-host it you have to there's a relationship and a connection that's being formed with the person. And so it requires nurturing and all of those kind of things. So within this sort of scenario, right, where I would do is, I'm gonna almost talk about it like a setup for each host, right, this will cost basically between 100 and 225. So you need the basically the Samsung key to you, the mic holder, the windscreen, the tabletop stand or the mic arm. And each of those mics are plugged into the computer and you are basically recording. Now there's a bunch of different ways that you can record this. I still use Zoom to record a lot of the STC conversations. I am playing around with a couple of different ones. CamLive is one that I'm playing around with as well because I use it for live streams as well. There are a couple of different other companies that allow you to do remote recording as well. So, but, I would say, for that setup, like if you have a co-host, this is probably kind of the best, best sort of scenario setup. Now the final scenario is, I have a co-host for my podcast, we get together in person to record, and we will interview our guests in person. right? So it's basically going to be like three people minimum in sort of a live scenario. This is honestly a dream setup, because everyone is in person, the connection, the opportunity to network before and after the interview, this setup can well side note on this, You can often do a setup or version of this, like at industry conferences, for example, you have a booth or you interview people in your hotel room or a space in between, like some sort of a third space that's connected to the hotel. Between sessions, I haven't done this, frankly, because the logistics of it stress me out, but I think it's a cool scenario, right? Because you can especially start to think about, like, if you have a co-host for your podcast, and even if you're doing a solo one, even doing it on the road, I think it's a it's a pretty cool, like, pretty cool, pretty cool scenario there. Now, I'll come back to this. But the negatives of this setup are there's a lot of logistics, you'll have to set, you'll have to have some sort of again, a setup like this in a co working space or a home office. That's the ideal scenario. So you're not like building and breaking down again, The one thing I've learned with the STC podcast is I used to do a lot of like building the putting the gear like I'd have a completely clear desk and then when it was like podcasting day I would plug everything back in and inevitably like something wouldn't work and I'm like what in the world so I would like spend all this time one setting it up and then the other scenario like trying to figure out what is happening here and what I realize is just more better to just keep it all plugged in and just plug in as minimal as you need it. Now again, with this sort of like three person live, you need again, lots of multi camera setups and all of that kind of stuff. Now here's the setup that I would recommend. Now this, you will notice the cost like significantly bumps up. So just a general rule that I found is the more people that you have on your podcast, whether it's a co host, or a scenario where you're doing it live, the costs will generally like exponentially go up. So even like a in this scenario, where up where you've got co hosts, where you're recording in person, where you've got guests, in even up to four guests, this scenario can run upwards of $1,900. So you've got a Samsung Q2U, which is like three or more of those, you've got a mic holder, three or more of those, You've got a foam windscreen. You've got a tabletop stand or a mic arm. What I would recommend in this scenario is the RODECaster Pro or RODECaster Pro 2. There's also a new one that just came out. I think it's called the RODECaster Pro Mini. I have the original RODECaster Pro. And again, like a little tip, I'm sure I haven't done too much experimenting or like research on the RODECaster 2 and RODECaster Mini but I'm sure they're like fantastic devices but also look at the original RODECaster Pro because it's still a really great really great machine and I've used it for four plus years now and like I haven't run into a scenario where I like I haven't I have thought like, oh, I wish I had a RODECaster 2. And at a practical level, you can often get it much cheaper because it is like an older model. So once you have that RODECaster Pro, the cool thing with the RODECaster Pro is you you don't need a separate computer. So it actually has a mini SD card that you can actually put in the back of the RODECaster Pro. So I would recommend like a 32 gigabyte one. And once you put that in, you can actually record everything directly into the RODECaster Pro. Now, in this scenario, again, because of all these mics, you'll need an XLR cable, and so just account for buying as many XLR cables as you need, as many as you have. Now the yeah so yeah that's sort of the the scenario that I would recommend. Again in this setup anytime you introduce any of these new tools like a Roadcaster Pro there's just more stuff to learn. Again I wouldn't necessarily recommend it when you're first starting out because it's just For me, looking back, one of the best decisions, and again, this was practical because I just didn't have the funds, but one of the best decisions that we made for SDC in the first three to four years was keeping it really lean and not building out this current setup. This current setup that I've had for about three years, it's cost around $5,000 and I built it up over time. It's a very nice setup, but I knew I was going to be doing YouTube videos. I knew I was going to be doing talks. teaching masterminds and all that stuff so it made perfect sense for me but it would not have made sense for me in the year one and two when I was still figuring out like what the heck I was doing with STC and all of those scenarios. If you are happen to be watching again this on YouTube I will link to a video of what my setup actually looks like if you are curious about it. And so I hope this is all incredibly helpful. And I know this was a lot of like technical conversation, but I think the main kind of takeaways from this is really think about what setup that you want. My recommendation is, especially in the early days of your podcast, try to do the interviews. If you're going to do interviews or if you have a co-host, try to just do it all over the Internet, because it just it makes things a lot less complicated. And you don't have to account for a whole bunch of different kind of scenarios. And yeah, it just becomes a lot, lot more frustrating. So and then the other thing is, again, you don't need an expensive setup to run a successful podcast. I think that's something that I, I had ideas about and even the thought of like, I had this weird thought of like, I need an expensive setup, how am I going to afford this expensive setup? And then oh my gosh, having an expensive setup was way too overwhelming. And so I would say you don't need any of it. And you can just be really thoughtful about and keep it lean, especially in the first days. And here's kind of the side benefit that I mentioned earlier that I wanted to come back to, which is there's something really powerful and humanizing when you do a very basic setup and people see your journey versus like when you start at a pro level setup people are like oh it's like you're less relatable to them and it's even something to be completely honest i struggle with currently with stc because i mean i've invested a lot of money into this setup but it looks great and visually and all of that but then i'm like man like there's a part of me i kind of miss the old days where it was like a webcam with a $60 mic. So maybe I'll go back to that all water off for some of these episodes. But yeah, just wanted to at least highlight that as well. Now if you are a therapist that's listening and you've been sitting with a podcast idea for a long time, we also have this free workshop that you can check out over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash podcasting workshop. It's called using podcasting to grow your business and it has a ton of tips and strategies that I've learned here over the last nine plus years as STC has continued to grow. We're about to hit, we just passed 1.8 million downloads, so we're getting close to the 2 million download mark, hopefully here pretty soon. Have a great rest of your day and appreciate you for tuning in. Bye.
Narrator: Thanks for listening to the selling the couch podcast for more great content. And to stay up to date, visit www.sellingthecouch.com.
Melvin Varghese: Hey there, it's Melvin. I hope that you enjoyed today's podcast session. Just wanted to take a moment again to thank the team over at the American Psychological Association for supporting today's podcast session. If you're a psychology professional that is looking for your next job in psychology, definitely check out PsyCareers, the American Psychological Association services. Career Center PsychCareers now has over 400 job postings posted specifically for psychology professionals. You can connect with leading employers and explore roles that match your skills and your professional and personal goals. You can check all of that out over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash APA, sellingthecouch.com forward slash APA. Create a free account and get started. Hey there, it's Melvin. Before we resume the rest of today's session, just wanted to take the moment to thank the team over at the American Psychological Association, specifically the PsyCareers blog, which is the APA's career center. PsyCareers has over 400 job openings, posted specifically for psychology professionals. So if you are a therapist in private practice and you are thinking about your next career move, definitely check out PsyCareers. It's absolutely free to sign up and you get access to some of the leading employers and explore roles that match your skills and goals. You can sign up and check it all out over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash APA. Again that's sellingthecouch.com forward slash APA and again it's absolutely free to sign up.
TIMESTAMPS* 00:00:00 – Introduction and Sponsorship * 00:01:15 – The Importance of Gear Selection for Podcasting * 00:04:07 – Emphasizing Storytelling and Interview Skills Over Gear * 00:14:34 – Exploring Options for Utilizing Out-of-Network Benefits * 00:17:04 – Setting Up for In-Person Interviews with Guests * 00:20:05 – Detailed Gear Setup for Co-Hosted Podcasts Over the Internet * 00:25:00 – Ideal Setup for In-Person Co-Hosted Podcasts with Guests * 00:29:02 – Reflection on the Evolution of Podcasting Gear and Setup * 00:32:29 – Sponsorship Acknowledgment and Conclusion selling the couch podcast with melvin varghese phdWeekly interviews, strategy, and advice for building your private practice in and beyond the therapy room.
Apple podcastsYou TubeSpotify ready to launch your online course?Please check out our free online course starter kit for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This FREE 7-day email course will help you validate your course idea (so that you can create a course that has buyers).
sign up for free course starter kitready to launch your podcast?Please check out our FREE podcasting workshop for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This workshop is pre-recorded so you can watch it on a day and time that works for your schedule.
It contains a lot of practical tips that we've learned as STC has reached 1.81 million+ downloads and become a 6-figure business with podcasting as the backbone.
sign up for podcasting workshopMelvin varghese phdPsychologist and Founder @ Selling The Couch
Melvin Varghese, PhD is a licensed psychologist in Philadelphia, PA. In 2015, Dr. Varghese founded Selling The Couch, a podcast to help therapists move from clinical to online income.
On the podcast, he interviews successful practitioners about how they've built their practices, social media/marketing experts, and shares lessons as he uses our clinical skills to create an online business powered by podcasting + online courses.
The podcast is one of the top Career podcasts in Apple Podcasts, has been downloaded over 1.8 million times, and is heard in over 125 countries. Mel is a successful course creator with 240+ students and $300k+ in course sales.
More PostsWhy Therapists Are Built For Business: My Conversation On The Heard Business School Podcastby Melvin Varghese | Jul 1, 2024 | Blog, Mel On Other Podcasts, Mindset
I believe that therapists make wonderful business owners. In this podcast, I chat with my friend, Michael Fulwiler from Heard, on the nuances of this.
353: How To Craft Awesome Welcome Series Emails To Market Your Practiceby Melvin Varghese | Jun 29, 2024 | Marketing, STC Podcast
Why don't more therapists create email sequences to bring in therapy clients? This is the question that we're exploring in today's podcast.
352: When An Online Course Idea Comes From Therapy Sessionsby Melvin Varghese | Jun 26, 2024 | Chats With Successful Practitioners, Growing Your Practice, Online Courses, STC Podcast
This is an excerpt from this custom blog post. Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Curabitur tincidunt mollis ante non volutpat.
« Older Entries The post Starter Podcasting Setups appeared first on Selling The Couch | Melvin Varghese PhD.
why therapists are built for business (HEARD BUSINESS SCHOOL GUEST EPISODE)Written By Recently, I had the chance to join my friend, Michael Fulwiler, as the first guest on the new Heard Business School podcast.
I talked about my journey as a psychologist doing full-time clinical work to becoming a course creator and podcaster.
We delved into the intrinsic value therapists bring to business through their focus on authenticity and relationships.
In a world of social media followers and AI, we talked about why one-to-one relationships are vital to long-term business success. We talked about and highlighted the unique perspective therapists bring to the business world.
I shared my personal story of immigrating to the US from India, struggling with depression as a high-achieving student in high school and college, and finding healing in therapy, which ultimately led me to pursue a career in psychology. We discussed the challenges I faced transitioning from clinical work to online business, including financial struggles and imposter syndrome.
We explored the evolution of Healthcasters, our podcasting community for therapists, and how it has grown into a community of over 240 therapists. In this spirit, we talked about the role of social media and how to leverage it through authentic sharing in order to build trust.
We also spent time delving into my decision to return to private practice (FYI, I'm using Heard for my bookkeeping as I've learned this is not my strength!) and my focus on working with top performers who are struggling with stress, burnout, and anxiety.
We dove into some unique opportunities that have come up around working with high-achieving parents and their children particularly those of South Asian origin including a talk on South Asian Teen Mental Health with the Southlake Foundation and a second talk with the Telegu Association Of North America, which has 100k members.
Finally, we discussed the changing landscape of therapy business post-pandemic, emphasizing the need for therapists to carefully vet services and products before recommending them to clients.
TranscriptDr. Melvin Varghese [00:00:00]:
I think for many therapists we hear the word business or marketing and we think like, it's this thing that we don't know enough about or it's about tactics or funnels or any of these things, particularly because again, most of us have not taken business or marketing classes. So we gravitate and we hear this language and we're like, okay, I guess I should do this or do that. But I actually feel like therapists are one of the best people at business because we value authenticity, relationships and all of these things. Success of a business, it all comes down to one to one relationships.
Michael Fulwiler [00:00:38]:
This is Heard Business School, where we sit down with private practice owners and industry experts to learn about the business of therapy together. I'm your host, Michael Fulweiler. Therapists wield a profound understanding of the human connection, which is a cornerstone of their healing art. But it's also the essence of a prosperous business. My guest on this episode of Heard Business School is Doctor Melvin Varghese. If you've met him or listened to his podcast selling the couch, you'll know his voice feels like a warm hug. He's kind, generous, and overall just a wonderful human being. Melvin, or as many know him, Mel, is a licensed psychologist, a dedicated father and husband, a podcaster course creator, and the founder and CEO of Selling the Couch.
Michael Fulwiler [00:01:32]:
In his private practice, he excels at helping founders of color, VC backed founders, and founder Dads to manage the anxiety, depression and burnout that often accompany business growth. During our conversation, Melvin delves into several key the intrinsic value therapists bring to business through their focus on authenticity and relationships, his journey from clinical work to creating and scaling selling the couch to over a million downloads, and the evolution of his podcasting program, Healthcasters. He also opens up about the financial struggles and imposter syndrome he faced early on, transitioning from clinical work to online business and the burnout experienced due to over diversification. It's a conversation that balances professional ambition with authenticity and the importance of providing real value to one's community. So without further ado, let's dive into my conversation with Doctor Melvin Varghese. Enjoy.
Michael Fulwiler [00:02:33]:
Melvin, welcome to the show. Thank you so much for being here.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:02:36]:
Mike, thank you. Thank you for inviting me. I'm incredibly honored to be here and excited for you guys and everything that you're doing at heard.
Michael Fulwiler [00:02:45]:
How does it feel to be on the other side of the podcast? Mike?
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:02:48]:
A little bit strange. I'm getting used to it since I am doing more guesting on podcasts, but it still feels weird. It gives me an appreciation of what a guest must go through as I think about questions or pause or any of those things.
Michael Fulwiler [00:03:02]:
Well, we have so much to cover to dig into your entrepreneurial journey as a therapist. I'm really excited for this conversation. I'd love to start at the beginning. So your parents, they immigrated with your family to the US in the eighties. What was that experience like for you, and how did it ultimately put you on a path to becoming a therapist?
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:03:26]:
Man, that's a really great question. This might be a. Maybe it's a multi episode, but I'll keep it short. Yeah. So, you know, I was born in the early eighties and my parents had the opportunity to come to the US a couple of times and they decided to stay in India, mainly because my dad is an attorney, my mom was a nurse. You know, we're in their late twenties, early thirties at that point, and had family around and careers and all of that. And basically in the late eighties, you know, the US immigration department was basically like, this is your last opportunity to get a green card if you want to come to the US. So that was one factor.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:04:06]:
And then the other factor is I have a younger brother and my parents, I think they saw something, and namely in the realm of education, that there might be more educational opportunities and career opportunities. And I translate to that almost like stability at a different level if they did immigrate. So we immigrated. I grew up in various suburbs of Dallas, so we immigrated to Texas because we had most of our family there. And English is actually my second language, so I didn't speak it at all. I mean, in fact, in second grade when we came, that whole first year, I spent in English as a second language classes, just trying to adjust what drove me ultimately to become a therapist. One thing I realized is, especially as a south asian immigrant, you know, there's often this stereotype, which is kind of true and not true, but, you know, it's basically like our career options are doctor, lawyer, engineer, or failure. Right? That's the four kind of options.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:05:09]:
And so I was very set on going into medicine to go into pediatrics because I love kids. And then I hit undergrad, went to a great liberal arts school that was a feeder for a lot of the medical schools in Texas and, and Oklahoma and all of that. Really struggled academically and went through a bout of intense depression, had very intense suicidal thoughts. And I told my parents they had the foresight to, for me to see a psychologist at that point. I was also basically went on academic probation, was going to lose like 90% of my scholarship at this liberal arts school that in 2000 was like 30 grand a year. I looked the other day and it was like 45 grand now. And I saw this psychologist, and just over the course of months, just these conversations, the depression seemed to lift, and I thought to myself, oh, my gosh, this is a career. And I also began to wonder how many people, especially immigrants of color, struggle with this aspect of it.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:06:24]:
Right. The pressure of leaving a country, of having to achieve. And what if you don't follow the prescribed path?
Michael Fulwiler [00:06:33]:
Did you major in psychology as an undergrad?
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:06:36]:
I did. I did, yeah. I initially went in pre med and was a psychology major, and then after second semester of ochem, I dropped ochem, like, halfway through my second semester, and then I just went full psychology all the way through.
Michael Fulwiler [00:06:51]:
And then did you go straight into grad school after undergrad?
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:06:55]:
Yeah, right after undergrad. I think something clicked from that second semester, sophomore year to junior to senior year. And so I was very fortunate to do well academically and then got directly into a PhD program right out of undergrad. So, yeah, so that was. That was the path.
Michael Fulwiler [00:07:13]:
Oh, wow. So you did your masters, masters, and PhD as part of the same program?
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:07:17]:
Yeah. So they call it, like, a master's in passing. So I did, like, a master's. I forgot they called it, like, a thesis, but it was like, an abbreviated thesis. And so, yeah.
Michael Fulwiler [00:07:27]:
Did you do clinical work while you were in school? Like, did you have an internship as part of your part of your PhD program?
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:07:34]:
Yeah, yeah. So, I mean, I went to a PhD program that was, you know, APA accredited. So I think even from, I want to say, second year on and possibly third year, you know, I did basically practicums throughout the rest of, like, that time. So I primarily worked in university counseling centers. I also worked at a community mental health agency where they, like, specialized in. I did assessments there. I worked at another agency that did family therapy. So.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:08:05]:
But they had, like, one way mirrors and that whole, like, all of that stuff, which was incredibly awesome from a training perspective, then. Yeah. And then eventually for internship and postdoc, I, you know, matched at bandy, and that was a kind of a joint internship and postdoc. So basically, my primary rotation was at the university counseling center, the Vanderbilt campus, and which. That was a phenomenal experience because it's one of the most stressful campuses in the nation just because of the number of high achievers, and just, I learned so much there. And then my secondary rotation was at the VA, so I worked in the polytrauma clinic. So TBIs and PTSD was private practice.
Michael Fulwiler [00:08:48]:
On your mind when you were in graduate school? Was that kind of the end goal, or were you still just exploring your options and, you know, seeing in, like, in what setting you wanted to work in?
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:08:59]:
Yeah. Private practice full time was actually never the goal. The plan was actually to become a university counseling center director and then do part time teaching and part time private practice.
Michael Fulwiler [00:09:12]:
Was there something about going into private practice full time that felt intimidating, or were there certain barriers to kind of taking that jump?
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:09:23]:
Yeah. So I think, like, even before the private practice side of it, the thing that intimidated me the most is I had never taken a business or marketing class in undergrad, high school. Like, nothing. Grad school, nothing. Again, I think part of it was, I do feel like it's my natural gifting, but I just didn't know it, you know, at the time, because I was, like, very much on this, like, pre med and then psychology track. Right. And so I think what definitely that thought that, I don't know, stuff definitely put a lot of fear in me. And even as I now go back into private practice, it doesn't feel as big now because I've done something on the couch for nine years now, but it definitely that fear of, like, what if I mess this up? What if there's some marketing or some method that I don't know about because I didn't, like, learn it? That's going to impact my ability to be successful as a business owner.
Michael Fulwiler [00:10:22]:
I'm so glad you said that. I think that's such a common experience for therapists, right? That you go to graduate school to become a therapist. You don't take a business class, and then if you want to start your own practice, now you're a business owner.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:10:38]:
Right.
Michael Fulwiler [00:10:39]:
And it is really scary, and it's really the entire thesis for this show, right. Is that most therapists don't go to business school. And so our goal with this show is really talking to folks like yourself and helping to share what you've learned over the years. You said a couple of things there that I definitely want to unpack. You mentioned you started selling the couch. So that happened around 2015. Can you talk about that? And I know we've talked about. You were sitting down, you were talking with a lot of therapists.
Michael Fulwiler [00:11:10]:
You were interviewing them. You were trying to learn as much as you can. At one point, you were like, I should be sharing this information with. With other people.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:11:18]:
Yeah. Yeah. That's the condensed version of it. So I got licensed as a psychologist. In 2012, after I finished up my postdoc, we moved to Philadelphia. My partner and I got married. We moved to Philadelphia just to be closer to family. I had zero social, like, or professional network, anything like that at all.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:11:36]:
I started in a group practice, and then I was working at a community mental health agency doing testing and assessment. And then at the group practice, I was also doing therapy and bariatric surgery. And so when I had two friends that were at that group practice, and we just connected, had, you know, notice we had a lot of common interests. We all had this desire to start a small business at some level, whether that was private practice, I mean, I think for all of us at some point was it was private practice. But we would meet at my friend Mike's apartment in Manioc, which is like this section of Philly, and we would watch a YouTube video, or we would read out of, you know, like, one of those, like, private practice books, right? Like Lingratsky's book, right? And read out of it and then, like, talk about it. And then we would go get, like, barbecue or something. You know, it's just, like a fun learn thing. And over time, I just started noticing inside of me, like, I was like, oh, I'm really interested in this, like, business stuff.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:12:40]:
I'm also interested in how we can use, like, our clinical skills beyond just doing therapy or testing. Like, what would that look like, for example, if you wrote a book or created a course or launched a podcast or something like that? And the other question, which is what you alluded to, I had this thought. I wonder if there are other therapists that would love to be in on these conversations. And this was again in 2015. Like, a lot of podcasts were like, I don't even think most people knew what a podcast was. And I reached out to some local therapists just out of the blue, and I was like, hey, my name is Melvin. I'm a licensed psychologist. I'm doing this thing called a podcast.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:13:26]:
I want to interview you because it seems like you built a successful practice or a successful business. Can we, like, talk? And so, pretty sure the first conversations were over Zoom. And one of my friends who's a sports psychologist, Corey, I remember reaching out to Cory, and he was like, to me, it felt like a celebrity because he had been, like, on, like, fox and a couple of these, like, you know, tv kind of things. He was, like, doing sports psychology and teaching and all this stuff. And he's like, why don't I just come over to your house? And I was like, oh, okay. So he comes over, and he's like, maybe we can just record the podcast there. And he later told me he had walking pneumonia that day, but he just, like, still wanted to show up. I literally took an ironing board.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:14:15]:
I put my $60 podcast mic right in the middle of this ironing board, and I told Corey, hey, I'm going to record this, but I only have one mic, so I'm just going to prompt you. So when I prompt you, you speak into the mic, and then I'll pull back, and then I'll ask the question and then prompt you. So that's how we recorded that episode.
Michael Fulwiler [00:14:37]:
That's amazing. And what a gift. You know, you could have had these conversations. You could have kept them to yourselves, to yourself, but, you know, you decided to record them and share them with other people. And it's been almost ten years now, right, that you've been doing this podcast. And I remember I was working at the Gottman Institute at the time. I started there in 2012, and, like, selling the couch. That was, like, the podcast at the time for a therapist.
Michael Fulwiler [00:15:03]:
And so you've really been doing this for a while now.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:15:06]:
Wow. I didn't know that part. I didn't even know. Wow, that's. Yeah, that's incredibly humbling. You know, the thing I've most enjoyed about it is just getting to meet amazing people. And for therapists, I mean, there's just something so empowering when we can share our own stories about the things that worked and didn't work for us. And I don't know.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:15:28]:
I'm a big believer in this. That concept of a rising tide lifts all boats, you know? And I feel like podcasting is, like, one of the best ways to do that.
Michael Fulwiler [00:15:36]:
Absolutely. So you start this podcast on an ironing board with. With one microphone. At some point, you make the decision, I'm gonna go all in on this. This is gonna be, you know, my full time thing. I'm going to leave clinical work. I'm going to build this business online. Can you talk about that process and what that was like?
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:16:00]:
Yeah, of course. Well, I call that my overnight process. That actually took five and a half years.
Michael Fulwiler [00:16:06]:
Right, your overnight success, right?
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:16:09]:
Yes, yes. So, yeah, from 2015 to just when. Right before the pandemic, actually, that march of when the pandemic started selling the couch was essentially from 2015 to about 2017. I was recording episodes basically around clinical work. So, I mean, to be completely honest, Mike, the first several months, I got up at, like, 350 in the morning to record solo episodes. And then I would take the train to Center City, Philadelphia, I'd take the 730 train, and then I would go see, like a day of clients and then come back and then, like, write up show notes or anything else I needed to tweak. And then over time, I knew in the first, like three and a half weeks, the podcast became like an Apple new and noteworthy podcast. And I was like, oh, that's so interesting.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:17:01]:
There's like a need for this in a way that I didn't imagine. And then I started thinking, like, what would this look like if it became a full time thing, right? And I didn't have sponsors or anything, so I had to figure out a way to, like, make money from it. So I launched a podcasting course for therapists because colleagues were reaching out to me, basically asking, like, how did you do this podcasting thing? I was doing one on one consults, and I was like, I gotta figure out a better way to, like, deliver this and scale it. In 2015, going to 2016, there was a nor Easter that hit the northeast. I dumped like, almost 30 inches of snow. I'm sure you remember this. I ended up having to, like, telehealth was not a thing. And even then, like, there were down power lines and all this stuff in this area.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:17:46]:
So I ended up having to cancel 22 fee for service clients, and it was about $950 in income that week, and we were saving up for the down payment on our first home, so. And I was like, oh my gosh, like, I cant build an entire business where its dependent on me or clients showing up. Like, I love the work, but from a business perspective, it just didnt seem wise. And then in 2018, our daughter was born two months early. We had gone through a year of infertility the year before, and every test and everything was perfectly normal. And then she came two months early, and I realized she was three pounds 12oz, barely the size of a football. And I realized in that moment I had to make this thing work because she ended up needing almost a year and a half of early childhood intervention due to low muscle tone in her back. So she wasn't sitting up at the age she was supposed to.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:18:47]:
And so that's what really prompted me to make this, like, a full time thing. What would it look like? And essentially what I wanted to do was I wanted clinical work, to go from clinical work being my main source of income to more scalable income sources, and then to go back into clinical work, but then pick and choose how many clients I wanted to see, what I wanted to charge all of that kind of stuff.
Michael Fulwiler [00:19:12]:
What were some of the challenges early on as you were forming and trying to build this business to be something sustainable that you could live on?
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:19:23]:
The biggest one, I think, was I had a lot of money stuff. Money stuff that I just had to work through. I think, as a person of color, I think one, as an immigrant, I literally, there were stories that I had to work through. I had a undergrad experimental psych professor who I sort of saw as like, a pseudo mentor. When I had approached them about going into psychology versus not medicine anymore, they basically said, you know, you're never going to make any money as a psychologist, and when you're 18 or 19 years old, right. It just derailed me, and I had to work through a lot of that narratives because in the back of my mind, it's like, you're going to mess it up. You're going to, you know, you're not going to make any money on any of that kind of stuff. So that was definitely a big one.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:20:10]:
I mean, we call it imposter syndrome, but, like, I feel like it's. There's so many nuances to that term. And for me, it was. I was an early career psychologist, like, interviewing people that were 15, 2025, 30 years into the field, and, like, I'm kind of starstruck while simultaneously, like, interviewing them and try to, like, keep a straight face. So I think that was definitely the other side of it. And, I mean, the final one, I think, was focus. And I actually made mistakes, which is I kept thinking, you know, if you're going to go from this, like, clinical realm to this online business, like, you have to have a large reach online. The piece I didn't understand was, it doesn't mean you go and diversify, like, yesterday, right? So I went podcasts.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:21:04]:
I created a Facebook group. I tried Twitter, LinkedIn, Pinterest, like, all simultaneously. And as a solopreneur, like, I had no help. Right? And so that was a formula for burnout. So that's something I always tell our colleagues, like, when you're starting anything new, like, year one is learning, year two is like, earning, and year three and beyond is scaling. That's a phrase from Ramit Sethi. So I want to give him credit for that. But I just thought that's such a good framework because I think a lot of therapists want to go into, like, year two mindset or year three, but we're often just at year one.
Michael Fulwiler [00:21:41]:
There's a couple points there that I think are important. I want to reiterate, you mentioned you launched the podcast, and within two weeks, it was a featured podcast on Apple Podcasts. And so Seth Godin talks about this idea of the dip where when you launch something new, there's some initial success. You haven't put in a lot of effort yet, but you're seeing good results. And then there's this dip back down. And in that dip, that's when a lot of people quit. They're like, this isn't working. But it's really about continuing to invest effort over time.
Michael Fulwiler [00:22:18]:
And this idea of compounding effort, could you talk about that a little bit and thinking about the long term versus the short term?
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:22:29]:
This is generally, I think, probably the best example is how I approach social media. And so what I'm often trying to think about is not male of 2024, but I'm really thinking of male of 2035, right. And what are the assets that I can create online where the effort right now, it's like slow moving, but because I'm going to be creating it over ten to 15 to 20 years, over time, it starts to compound. So an example of this is like podcasting, right? And we can go into other examples as well. But the thing with podcasting is like, the discoverability of podcasts. They're still, it's not all the way there, right? Because it's an audio medium. Google really likes text. And so sometimes it's really hard to figure out, like, you know, to translate that over unless you have really good show notes, transcript, those are some options, right? But the thing with podcasts is, and, you know, I would say 92, 93% of people that have ever bought something from us say, mel, I listen to your podcast.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:23:38]:
I loved hearing your voice. I felt like I trusted you. Then I joined your email list. I loved what you shared there. And then when you said you had something to offer, like I was in because I trusted you, because I had built a relationship with you, right? And so in terms of compounding assets, that's what I think about. So my biggest, my most favorite ones are podcasting YouTube. And I think blogging is probably the third one, again, because they're slow, but because they can be discovered over time and the traffic just builds up over time.
Michael Fulwiler [00:24:14]:
You said that you've heard from people that they heard you on a podcast and they trusted you, right? I think something that I appreciate about you so much is your authenticity, right? Like, the way that you show up on your podcast is the same way that you show up on social media, right? Like, social media can be so negative and toxic. And, like, we all know about the therapist Facebook groups, right? And, like, the arguments that people get in. And, like, you know, I'm such a believer in, like, you get back what you put out into the world, right? And if, like, you're putting out positive energy, like, that's what you're gonna receive in return. And I think that's, like, a great takeaway for anyone that's listening to this or watching on YouTube is. Social media can be such a great way to develop relationships. You and I met on social media, and now we've developed this great friendship. Can you talk a little bit about this idea of business really being about relationships, which is something you and I have spent a lot of time talking about?
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:25:22]:
Yeah, it's a wonderful question. I think for many therapists, we hear the word business or marketing, and we think, like, it's this thing that we don't know enough about, or it's about tactics or funnels or any of these things particularly, because, again, most of us have not taken business or marketing classes. So we gravitate and we hear this language and we're like, okay, I guess I should do this or do that. But I actually feel like therapists are one of the best people at business because we value authenticity, relationships, and all of these things. Actually, just recently, even this morning, my friend Jay Klaus had a LinkedIn post talking about how ultimately, like, success of a business, it all comes down to one to one relationships. It's something that I like I have to constantly remind myself, because, yes, you can do a podcast like this and you can sort of build at scale, I guess. But ultimately, it does come down to these one on one relationships. And this is something that I know you feel like.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:26:25]:
I feel the immense privilege, but the power that comes when you are in a position of influence, right. Because you could say something really bad about a company or about a person. I mean, there's a decent chance it could have a significant effect on that company or that person, right, because you said it, but realizing you have the power to do that and yet not doing it, because you care about the company or the person, even though you may disagree. I think that's the thing. I'm still learning, and I don't think I'm great at it, but, like, it's just something I've been thinking a lot about. But ultimately, you're right. Like, it comes down to these relationships and especially among therapists. Like, I mean, people, it's word of mouth, right? Like, people know and people tell each other.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:27:17]:
So that's the other piece I think often we have to think about is not the conversations that are happening when we're present, but the conversations happening in rooms when we're absent.
Michael Fulwiler [00:27:26]:
I totally agree. Therapists are inherently relational people. Right? Like, that's why they get into the work. And building a referral network as a therapist is all about building relationships. Building a community online is all about building relationships. I think there's a reason that you don't just sell courses, you have built communities that people can join. And I want to spend just a few minutes here talking about healthcasters, which I think is such an amazing program that you offer. Can you talk about kind of the evolution of healthcasters to, you know, people asking you, hey, can you teach me, like, how to launch a podcast? And you're having these one on one conversations to what it is today?
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:28:17]:
Yeah, of course. That was. I call this my, like, failing moment product. Right? So we just passed 240 therapists in this community.
Michael Fulwiler [00:28:27]:
Congratulations.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:28:29]:
Yeah, thank you. It's been incredible. So I've definitely. The idea was, again, what Mike, you alluded to, there were therapists in 2015 that were reaching out, asking, Mel, how are you doing this podcasting thing? And I just thought, what would it be like if we all came together and to help and support each other? Because there's stuff that I know, but there's a ton of stuff, I don't know. There's probably a ton of stuff, you know, probably stuff I can help you with. And what would that look like? Healthcares initially, and I'll share some of, like, the mistakes along the way. I was so scared to niche down into a podcasting community for therapists that I was like, okay, we're going to call it healthcasters because we want every healthcare provider that is vaguely interested in a podcast to be interested in this. So it doesn't matter if you're like an orthopedic surgeon or a therapist or a pharmacist, whatever it is, the idea was kind of there because it would be cool to build up these, like, networks, but 98% of the people that bought the course were therapists.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:29:38]:
And I, like, resisted this idea because I was like, why are more non therapists not buying this? Well, because probably in hindsight, I had a podcast that was speaking mainly to therapists, right? And there was a trust in all of that. So we initially started that as a 297 course. I had eight colleagues. We did. We ran a beta test and it was $297. I was going to do it like, a live teaching. That's definitely something I recommend if you are thinking about a course is you should do some sort of a beta round with paying students. Those eight students.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:30:12]:
When I was at the group practice, again, there were like, I think I was getting significantly like underpaid there, but I think I was getting like 40 something a session typically, right. And I just thought like 297 core sale, like that is, what is that? Six client sessions, right. And especially had, you know, eight students. I was like, oh my gosh, this is kind of crazy. The evolution of it is, you know, went from 297 to like 497. We slowly kept kind of growing. A lot of it was like word of mouth. It wasn't doing like active marketing.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:30:46]:
We had the Facebook group and, you know, definitely back then the reach of Facebook groups were amazing. So people were seeing what I was posting about, my podcasting journey, all of that. At some point I decided to turn it into a membership site because I kept hearing like, you need to have recurring income, recurring income. And it was a community model, so it kind of didn't make sense that, you know, that there was, and we were doing like regular coaching calls and all of this stuff. So fast forward to today. A little bit before, when our daughter was born, I had to take a pause from the community and the coaching calls because it was just too much to manage. So for the past like two, two and a half years, we've had actually probably a little longer than that. We've had only the course option.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:31:32]:
And recently, in the last like three months, we reopened the community and the coaching calls back up. And I am so grateful we did that because, one, it makes me want to work harder and create even a better course when I'm seeing like colleagues on these calls and being like, Melissa, like, how are you thinking about this? Like, why did you do this? Or, you know, it gives me data, but then it just makes me, when I see their faces, right, versus them just buying a course and going off, I never have those interactions. I think that's been wonderful. And so where is it evolving to? Honestly, right now I'm trying to figure that out. Do I keep it just like a one off course model, continue the, you know, the community, the coaching calls? Or does it make sense of more like a premium membership model that is focused more on building an intimate community, being able to join together, all of that kind of stuff.
Michael Fulwiler [00:32:26]:
For therapists who are thinking about starting a podcast, or maybe they've started a podcast. Is there one or maybe even two things that come up in the course? A lot, you know, whether it's like a question that folks have or there's just like, a point that you really drive, drive home for people, you know, that could be helpful to share with people who are listening.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:32:50]:
I think the one big one is, don't obsess so much about gear. In the first, like, three to four years, we used, my setup was like, $108. I was a dollar 60 mic, a mic arm that, like, creaked if I, like, just didn't, like, adjust it properly, or if I, like, hit it on accident. And I did that for the first five years when we hit a million downloads on the podcast. Beyond that, I think the first couple of years, the things that you should really be working on is one, learning to ask questions, right? And I think this is sometimes therapists forget, like, podcasts are the perfect place to practice, you know, to be a better therapist. The second thing is learning how to tell better stories online. And I feel like getting to storytelling. I feel like such a valuable skill.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:33:43]:
And that's the other, the piece that I would say, focus on. We have a free workshop as well, that you can just sign up for editing time. That's over@sellingthecountch.com. podcastingworkshop. But basically, when I do those webinars, I was like, you know what? I'm just going to try to give as much helpful information as possible. So it's 90 minutes of just tips and strategies and all this stuff we've learned along the way.
Michael Fulwiler [00:34:08]:
Yeah, I want to dig into that a little bit. I think that that is such an effective marketing strategy. And some people may think, like, why would I give away this information for free? Shouldn't I be charging? But I think it goes back to the trust that you mentioned earlier. Can you talk about the strategy and thinking behind offering these free webinars and free workshops as a way to promote the either courses or, you know, masterminds that you offer?
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:34:37]:
To be completely honest, I didn't think deeply. Like you just said at the beginning, you know, I come from, my grandparents were teachers. My dad was a law, a law school professor, and then my mom was a nurse who taught at the nursing school. So it's like I come from two generations of teachers and my parents themselves, right? We moved here for education. And so I think I love teaching. I feel like it's in my, in my veins, and I feel like there's something about when you just genuinely help someone without any sort of expectation that's just so powerful, regardless of the marketing side of it. Right. And so I just oriented that way.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:35:15]:
And also, when I came here to this country, because I didn't speak the language. I mean, I remember my cousin, like, one of the first conversations he asked me, like, do I want cheese pizza? I remember the word cheese pizza. I didn't even know what cheese was like. Cheese is not something that we eat in South India, right? It's common in north India, but we don't really eat cheese in south India. I didn't know what pizza was. And so, like. And even, like, I just said, like, this, right? And this actually in. In South India means no, and this means yes.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:35:49]:
So he just gives you a slice of pizza. That's what I want. But I had so many people in my life who believed in me and saw something before I saw it, you know? And so I think when I, like, create this stuff, it's not just, like, let me think about the product down the line. Okay? Now, I definitely think about that stuff, but I think about, you know, if they're. Somebody's gonna watch a 90 minutes webinar, like, they're taking time away from their family, or maybe they. There's, like, two client hours they could have seen, right. I want them to walk away being like, oh, my gosh, I didn't waste my time. And so that's the general orientation.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:36:24]:
My thing is I want to surprise and delight people in the content that we create.
Michael Fulwiler [00:36:28]:
If people are going to invest their time, invest their money that they've worked hard to earn.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:36:37]:
Right?
Michael Fulwiler [00:36:37]:
Like, for me, I want to give it back tenfold. Right. If someone is spending an hour listening to the show, like, I want them to walk away with a ton of value, and they're like, wow, that was so worth it.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:36:51]:
Right, right.
Michael Fulwiler [00:36:52]:
Cause it's such a gift. Like, time is a gift, right? And people. And attention is a gift, too. And if someone's investing that in you, it's almost a responsibility. Like you talked about. You alluded to this earlier. You are going back into private practice, which I wanna talk about. So can you talk about that decision and that pull back into clinical work and also, like, just how you're thinking about building your private practice intentionally?
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:37:20]:
Yeah, it's a great question. So I knew some part of me, like, always wanted to go back to clinical work, and I found myself, especially once we got away from, like, the throes of the pandemic, like, really missing the work. The other thing I realized is I looked at myself in the mirror, right? I'm an indian male psychologist living in the US. I think there has to be single digit of that, right? And the demand for mental health just generally is really high. And I just thought especially as like a psychologist of color, there's so many needs. And so the thing I was trying to figure out was like, who do I want to work with? I think the most logical was like, founders and CEO's of businesses. Because that stuff that I live and breathe, you know, with STC, I know what it's like to bootstrap. I know what it's like to build something successful.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:38:18]:
The piece that I didn't anticipate. And this is like my real full circle moment, there's been this demand of particularly, like, basically high achieving parents, raising high achieving kids, particularly of like, south asian origin. So a lot of like, high school seniors, juniors, college students, and the parents that are navigating and struggling with, you know, helping their kid who is struggling with anxiety and depression and all of these things. And that's the niche that's. I've been really surprised, and I'm still so early. I mean, I haven't honestly, like, officially my official start date is like June, but I've done two workshops in the last five weeks specifically toward this population. So first one was with a foundation in this community. There were basically two suicides of indian students in the last year and a half.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:39:13]:
And it was an incredible opportunity to talk to, you know, 67 parents showed up on a Saturday at 11:00 a.m. and I. And not a single person left at the end of the hour. I shared my own story for about 15 to 20 minutes, shared a couple of tips, and then I fielded 40 straight minutes of questions, and I just thought, oh, my gosh. And then one of the 67 members that were in that organization is part of a larger organization. It's an indian cultural organization. It's the largest and the oldest in North America. So 60,000 members.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:39:49]:
And I had the incredible opportunity about three weeks ago to do a second workshop for them. So it's. I don't know, Mike. Like, a lot of this is like, I'm trying to remember what's selling the couch. You know, we plan these things, and yet unexpected things happen. I'm trying to take that same approach to private practice. You know, I want to see honestly between just one and three clients, because right now I want to keep SDC the main thing. But I also realize there's a tremendous need and I have a tremendous passion for this intersection of high achievement and mental health because I am that kid who could have ended their life you know, but I didn't.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:40:29]:
And somehow, but I still stuff I navigate, you know? I mean, as an entrepreneur, I struggle with depression, anxiety, and how do I both bring a clinical lens to it as well as inform it through my personal experience as well?
Michael Fulwiler [00:40:44]:
How has the business side of therapy changed since pre pandemic? You know, I imagine a lot of therapists now are seeing clients online. Clients want to see therapists online. There's more software tools that are available. You know, if you want to take insurance, there's startups that help you take insurance. If you want to outsource your accounting and bookkeeping, there's companies like her that help you do that. So I'm curious, how do you think about that process of deciding, you know, services to use or software to use as you're setting up your business?
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:41:26]:
This is one of the other big reasons why I went back into private practice, because there are so many options out there. I felt like having a clinical arm to be able to test and test some of these products before I recommend them because I realized the trust is such an important thing. How do I think about each of these products and services? So one thing is I created an informal, like, roundtable of friends, colleagues that I sort of lean on if I haven't heard of a product or service, I also asked them questions like, you know, what are sort of like, what do you use and what do you not use? What do you think? Like, I try to ask those questions just to get a better idea of how to approach it.
Michael Fulwiler [00:42:09]:
So I really appreciate that. We talked months ago about herd being a sponsor of selling the couch, and ultimately, you told me, Mike, I don't use hert, so I don't know that I can recommend it. That ethical position that you have of, I don't want to endorse a product or a service that I haven't used and vetted myself. I really respect that. And now you are right, like, using, you know, heard for your book. So we're grateful for that as well.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:42:45]:
Yeah, absolutely. I mean, I think, again, it goes back to that trust. I mean, to be honest, like, I think with so much money now getting thrown into Silicon Valley and mental health startups, it's becoming so much harder for me just to rely on a board of advisors. Right. To be, because it's just, there's so many things happening, and a lot of these companies have capital, right. And that's a real thing I'm navigating, right. Because they're saying, like, hey, we want to give you five or ten or 15, or I turned down a sponsor last year that was 50,000 plus. And the reason was because I saw in our Facebook community, like, colleagues talking about, like, the experience they were having.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:43:29]:
And I was like, I can't in good conscience, like, all money's not good money, you know, and I can't, like, recommend something if it's, like, profitable to me, but then hurts, you know, hurts a colleague.
Michael Fulwiler [00:43:42]:
Well, we're getting to the end of our show, unfortunately. We have a segment that we call the footnote. And what we do is we ask you to share one key takeaway. Think about someone scribbling something in the margins of their notebook. Right. What is one thing that you'd like therapists to take away from this conversation?
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:44:08]:
I would say lean into your fears, because ultimately, when we're on our deathbeds, I think we'll regret the things that we didn't do versus the stuff we did do and didn't work out.
Michael Fulwiler [00:44:21]:
I love that. Where can folks connect with you if they're interested in learning more about healthcasters or the other services that you offer, even to potentially hire you as a therapist? One of your first two to three clients?
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:44:37]:
Yeah, absolutely. So the main website is over@sellingthecalge.com. and my private practice website is@melvinbarghesphd.com dot. Great.
Michael Fulwiler [00:44:49]:
Thank you. And we'll put that in the show notes as well. Melvin, thank you so much. This has been such an amazing conversation. I really appreciate your time today.
Dr. Melvin Varghese [00:44:57]:
Mike, thank you so much for, I'm grateful for you and thankful for our friendship.
Michael Fulwiler [00:45:03]:
Thanks for listening to this episode of Herd Business School, brought to you by Herd, the financial back office. For therapists, visit the Herd resource hub@joinherd.com. to support you in your journey as a private practice owner. And don't forget to subscribe on YouTube, Apple, Spotify, or wherever you get your podcasts. We'll see you in the next class.
ready to launch your online course?Please check out our free online course starter kit for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This FREE 7-day email course will help you validate your course idea (so that you can create a course that has buyers).
sign up for free course starter kitready to launch your podcast?Please check out our FREE podcasting workshop for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This workshop is pre-recorded so you can watch it on a day and time that works for your schedule.
It contains a lot of practical tips that we've learned as STC has reached 1.81 million+ downloads and become a 6-figure business with podcasting as the backbone.
sign up for podcasting workshopMore Posts353: How To Craft Awesome Welcome Series Emails To Market Your Practiceby Melvin Varghese | Jun 29, 2024 | Marketing, STC Podcast
This is an excerpt from this custom blog post. Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Curabitur tincidunt mollis ante non volutpat.
352: When An Online Course Idea Comes From Therapy Sessionsby Melvin Varghese | Jun 26, 2024 | Chats With Successful Practitioners, Growing Your Practice, Online Courses, STC Podcast
This is an excerpt from this custom blog post. Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Curabitur tincidunt mollis ante non volutpat.
364: Book Writing Tips They Don't Tell You with Raj Lullaby Melvin Varghese | Jun 21, 2024 | Book Writing, STC Podcast
This is an excerpt from this custom blog post. Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Curabitur tincidunt mollis ante non volutpat.
« Older Entries The post Why Therapists Are Built For Business: My Conversation On The Heard Business School Podcast appeared first on Selling The Couch | Melvin Varghese PhD.
353: How To Craft Awesome Welcome Series Emails To Market Your PracticeWritten By Melvin Varghese PhDHey there, it's Melvin. In today's podcast episode, I had the pleasure of speaking with Avivit Fisher from RedDstrategy.com about the importance of welcome series emails for therapists. We delved into the concept of email sequences, which are a series of pre-written emails sent in a specific order to engage and nurture relationships with subscribers.
Avivit shared valuable insights on why more therapists should consider creating welcome series emails, emphasizing the need to provide specific and valuable content tailored to the audience's interests. We discussed the common mistake of being too generic in email content and the importance of personalizing the messages to maintain subscriber engagement.
We explored the logistics of creating welcome series emails, including selecting topics based on analytics, repurposing existing content, and setting expectations for the number of emails in a sequence. Avivit highlighted the significance of building trust with subscribers and the potential impact of personalization on unsubscribe rates.
Additionally, we touched on the differences in creating welcome series emails for solo practitioners versus group practitioners, emphasizing the need to align content with the audience's needs and interests. Avivit shared practical tips for therapists looking to enhance their email marketing strategies, such as utilizing lead magnets and segmenting subscribers based on interests.
Towards the end of the episode, we discussed the role of email platforms like Kartra (what we use at STC) and ConvertKit (what we would recommend if you only need an email platform vs an all in one like Kartra) in managing email sequences and effectively engaging subscribers.
I also shared my personal experience with email marketing and the considerations behind potentially transitioning to ConvertKit for our main newsletter (Update from Melvin: As much as we love and recommend Convert Kit, we decided to stay with Kartra for the sake of keeping things simple).
Overall, the conversation with Avivit provided valuable insights into the world of welcome series emails for therapists, emphasizing the importance of personalized and engaging content to build lasting relationships with subscribers.
If you're a therapist looking to enhance your email marketing strategy, this episode offers practical tips and strategies to get started.
TranscriptHi there, welcome to today's session of Selling the Couch. I hope that you're doing well, having a fantastic day. So today's session is all about email sequences. Now, if you have never heard of email sequences, that's okay as well, but I imagine that you probably have heard of email sequences. The question we're really exploring is why more clinicians don't create email sequences, especially if you are a private pay clinician or if you are a therapist that's moving to more online income streams. I think an email sequence is a smart and logical call. I mentioned this on the interview, but traditionally over 90% of our sales of anything, whether it is our online course mastermind for therapists or our podcasting course for therapists, or even down to when we were doing sponsorships on the STC podcast, a lot of that came right through email. Just 10% traditionally has ever come from social media. It's something that I was surprised by, to be completely honest, and something that I wasn't exactly expecting. But it has also been very liberating to figure that out. And if you probably noticed that any time that we post on social media, there's inevitably an invitation to join our email list And part of that is because of just some hard personal experience. When we first launched STC, we had a Facebook group, and we still have our Facebook group, but this is back in 2015. Back then Facebook groups were so new, and literally if you made a post, pretty much everybody in that group could see that post. But a few years later, Meta started to basically restrict who could see those posts. So essentially not all of your followers were seeing those posts. I had started to build an email list during that time, but then I didn't really take like full advice on it. And I was like more concentrated on building this Facebook community and essentially You know, we lost the reach of it just because of some algorithm changes, even nothing that we had even done on anything like that. So I learned a hard lesson to really build on email. And today I am joined by Avavit Fisher from redstrategy.com. Avavit is a consultant, a private practice consultant that specifically works with therapists who are transitioning to private pay practices. And we're going to just cover this topic of email sequences. We start out by exploring what exactly an email sequence is. And then we get into more of the logistical nitty gritty on things, why more clinicians aren't creating it, as well as how can you repurpose existing content that you've already created into your email sequence. And a question that I often wonder about, which is, you know, how long should these email sequences be? And how do you tailor them if you are a solo practitioner or if you have a group practice and you are, as a solo practitioner, if you've, you know, working sort of with a general population, how do you create an email sequences if you have like multiple specialties or specializations? And then if you're a group practitioner, inevitably you're covering a range of different topics. So how do you create an email sequence that logistically makes sense and can be helpful to get more clients in the door? We'll get right to today's session. Here's my conversation with Avavit Fisher from redstrategy.com. Hi Avavit, welcome to Selling the Couch.Avivit Fisher: Hi Melvin, it's good to be here. Thank you for having me.Melvin Varghese: First of all, before we even jump in, I'm grateful for LinkedIn out of all places. It's enabled us to connect and it's crazy that we live in neighboring states and one of these days we will make a live get together happen. Yeah, I'm just incredibly grateful for you. Incredibly grateful for the work you're doing with therapists and excited for this conversation on email sequences in a nerdy way as well, because you know, this is stuff that I'm really into and trying to learn and get better at as well.Avivit Fisher: It's very kind of you to say all that. I really appreciate it. And I hope we do meet in person. And I've been listening to your podcast for a long time. On and off. I remember when I started your one, your podcast was one of the first places I wanted to verify my idea of working with therapists. So thank you.Melvin Varghese: You're so welcome. And thank you for listening. So when we were thinking about this episode, I think the question I posed to you was, Avi, why don't more therapists just create email sequences? It just seems like a logical thing, especially if you're doing clinical work, especially if you're doing like private pay clients, any of these things where there is like a little bit more work involved, right to get these clients, but I didn't want to start jumping right into the middle of this. Maybe we can just start with a kind of a basic understanding. So we're all on the same page. What exactly is an email sequence?Avivit Fisher: So an email sequence is part of your email marketing, which is different than emailing your clients with, with just general general updates or about any type of treatment that you would have been discussing. It's the whole purpose of email marketing is to create awareness about your private practice, educate your potential clients about how you could help them, and also create a community of sorts for yourself. So an email sequence is one of the best ways to sort of engage and nurture those relationships with your subscribers, email subscribers.Melvin Varghese: Yeah. And I love, there's a lot of really good stuff you said in here. So you said there's kind of three parts to it. There's awareness, educate, and then build a sense of community. And just so that I sort of understand when you are thinking about email sequences, is this something that is kind of free written beforehand that somebody that subscribes to your newsletter gets? Or are you thinking like an email sequence could also be correspondence that you do on some sort of a regular cadence, like, you know, with, you know, with my newsletter, we send it out weekly. So would that be an email? Like, how are you thinking about it?Avivit Fisher: So an email sequence is the way I view it, it's a group of emails. So it can be several emails pre written, And they are sent in a sequence. In other words, there's an order, there's a rhyme and reason to why they're sent in this way. That's a sequence. Weekly emails that you send out, if you have a newsletter, or just an update, that is more of an email blast. So you just send it at one time.Melvin Varghese: The reason I wanted to talk about this is because this seems like, again, something like creating like this definitely takes time and effort on the front end, but it's something that especially long-term can compound because anybody that's signing up gets this sequence of emails I think the underlying thing, and correct me if I'm wrong, is it's almost like welcoming somebody into your house, right? And you're sort of opening the door, and it's not like you're sending like a blast email, but it's more like, hey, here's the foyer, and here's my living room, and here's the dining room, sort of like that. That's the image I get, but correct me if I'm wrong.Avivit Fisher: You're not wrong. This is it. That's called a welcome email sequence. So when somebody just subscribes to your website, you need to set the expectations for them. What can they expect from you? You need to tell them a little bit about yourself. You need to make them feel welcome and make them feel that they didn't waste their time subscribing to your email. list. And that can be all done through a strategic email sequence, a welcome sequence. And that has worked well for me. And I don't know if you have any examples of that from your practice and from your business.Melvin Varghese: Yeah, I mean, so we just launched, you know, our free email course, right, for our online course, like free email course. And that's, yeah, that's basically a seven day email course. And it's a ways of, you know, a therapist that might be interested in online courses, instead of just me sending a weekly email, they get this like nice sequence of emails that, you know, helps validate their course idea. I just never, I mean, to be honest, I don't know. In the initial stages, I never even thought about it on that level. I was just like, oh, they opt in, I can email them. I never thought like, oh yeah, probably a smart idea to help build a connection and a trust and all of those things. But I suspect I'm not the only one, which is kind of my next question. I feel like, again, for like especially like private pay practices, email sequences and email marketing seems like such a good idea, but in your experience, why are more therapists not doing it?Avivit Fisher: That's a good question. And from my experience, it's just a matter of being maybe a little bit afraid of setting it up, me being a little bit afraid of this topic. That's on the one hand. On the other hand, it's not only related to therapists, this feeling, but many people, like, they don't want to bother their subscribers, they don't want to annoy them, you know, and, and that can prevent them from like, taking email marketing seriously. And, and the thing is, I was the same way when I started, like, way back when I was like, Okay, I got them on my list, and then I'm gonna send them a blast here and a blast there and maybe promote something. But In reality, when people give you their email address on your website, you need to after earn their trust a little bit. You don't want to disappoint them. You don't want to put them in a position, oh, this person just wants my email address just to sell me stuff all the time. We don't like that.Melvin Varghese: Yeah, I think that's right. Like, I think most people when they opt into emails, there is like, I feel like a reasonable level of skepticism around Oh, gosh, like, what are they going to pitch me? What are they going to sell me? This is going to be genuinely helpful. And I think one of the things that I'm constantly I'm learning is sometimes I forget as somebody creating the emails, I sometimes forget what it's like to be a user.Avivit Fisher: Right, right. So It's like, and it's an important thing to do, like to sort of observe your own behavior when you're subscribing to somebody's email. When you just learn about somebody, that's me, maybe it's similar to you. When I just learn about somebody who says things that I want to know more about, right, and I subscribe to their emails, I actually want to hear more from this person. I want to know what else you can tell me. And I'm not opposed to them pitching me at some point, but as long as they tell me more of what I need to learn. So this is the positive of the email sequences.Melvin Varghese: Yeah. And I mean, just even like home, like with STC, traditionally, I would say 90% of sales of anything have come through email, like 10% has come through social media, even we just wrapped up our mastermind launch, and 100% of the sales actually came through email. So either folks that were on our email newsletter for a number of years, or that actually went through our email course and were interested. I actually, and to be fair, I didn't do as many social media posts. But the one thing that I found, or I learned, we did like, I think, two of them this time. This is the other challenge, right? We are at the mercy of these social media algorithms, right? And as soon as you put some sort of an external link, for example, in a social media post, they're like, oh, we don't like that, because we want to keep users within our ecosystem. So they'll significantly reduce your reach. Whereas email is so powerful because theoretically, it is going to everybody's inbox. It's going to have much more of the percentage of people that are actually subscribed or have the opportunity to see it.Avivit Fisher: Right, exactly. And your list is your own assets. in a way, right? It's like it belongs to you, you know, as long as people want to remain on your list, obviously, but it belongs to you, you don't have to borrow the audience from the platform, you can just have your audience and communicate with your audience directly. So that's the beauty of, in my opinion,Melvin Varghese: Yeah, absolutely. You're not at the mercy of different things. I wanted to spend just some time actually talking about the nitty gritty of this. The first one is, how do you pick pick a topic for your sequence. So specifically, I'm thinking maybe we can even think on like the solo practitioner level on the group practitioner level. So like a solo practitioner, for example, might work with a population, right? So for example, you know, professional, like young, young professional lawyers, something like that, right? But okay, within that, they may have like little niches, right? Like lawyers who work in big laws, struggling with, I don't know, like alcoholism or something. How do you build an email sequence when you may have two or three niches or specializations? Do you build them for each of them or do you build a one common one that overlaps? I don't know if that question is clear.Avivit Fisher: No, it's a good question. Typically, when people subscribe to your email list, they are doing it in exchange for a lead magnet. Some kind of piece of valuable information. So the way, if you know what your niche is and who your ideal client is and what specific issues they're dealing with, you can create a very specific lead magnet. So let's take lawyers, for example, like, I don't know, struggle with sleep deprivation. I'm assuming it's common. right? So let's say you decide that they would really benefit from a checklist of nighttime routine of how to fall back asleep or something like this. So if you create a lead magnet like this, then it sort of gives you a start for your sequences, right? So Okay, so they learn about, you know, how to set up routines. So what is the next thing that they would want to want to learn, and then you kind of build on that. Now, if you're using an email marketing software, like, you know, Constant Contact, or MailChimp, or ConvertKit, you can tag the people that opt in to get that specific lead magnet by an interest. So you can create a tag, like for example, downloaded XYZ lead magnet. And then you understand what their interest is more or less, right? So you can then later send more targeted campaigns. But when it's the first sequence, you can just build on that lead magnet. You can just say, And you probably, you know, if you're a practice that has been working on its SEO, you probably have just a bunch of blog articles that you can just insert in those email sequence. Does that make sense?Melvin Varghese: It does make sense. I mean, and I think what I hear in that is a couple of things. So one is like, think about what a universal or maybe even helpful opt in is for the population that you're serving. The second part of this is, again, this is my gosh, I'm constantly having to learn this. And I feel like half the time I mess up, which is, I add like more work to my plate, even though there's already content created, and I can just repurpose it. So like, yeah, it doesn't have to be this heavy lift of I gotta now create an opt-in plus a bunch of content after. Maybe take a step back and say, what have you already created? And it could be, and even if you're somebody that's listening, that's not necessarily maybe active on social media or maybe doesn't blog, think about even worksheets, right, that you give to clients. Maybe, I mean, I feel like every therapist has probably created custom worksheets, right? So things like that I think could be great options as well. I've jumped back into private practice and I decided to go the private pay route. And one of the things I've been thinking a lot about is how do I tap into outer network benefits for clients that might want to use it? Now, the common sort of perspective or tip that a lot of folks say is just to provide a super bill for clients. But the reality is I feel like most clients aren't going to go take a super bill. and then call the insurance company and then deal with that whole mess of trying to communicate with the insurance companies and waiting on reimbursement and all of that kind of stuff, right? And then at some point, especially if they're keenly aware of budget and stuff like that, they're like, oh my gosh, I may not be able to afford working with this therapist and all of those kinds of things, right? This is where Thryser comes in and the really cool thing with Thryser is that they will actually float the clients for the sessions. So basically when you sign up for Thryser you can automatically submit out-of-network claims for your clients. It's simply done through an app, it literally takes seconds, and Thryser takes care of all of the insurance stress. So we don't have to deal with it as clinicians, our clients don't have to deal with it, and clients just pay what they owe for actual sessions, i.e. like the difference between your rate and the reimbursement rate, in order to skip the long insurance wait. All they have to do is pay the standard 3% credit card fee. There is no monthly contracts or fees or anything like that. If you would like to try out Thryzr, You can go to sellingthecouch.com forward slash thrizer, enter the promo code STC so that your first $2,500 in fees are waived. Again, that's over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash thrizer and thrizer is spelled T-H-R-I-Z-E-R and enter the promo code STC.Avivit Fisher: Right. It can be that. And if you don't have worksheets, maybe it's useful information about, I don't know, external organizations like nonprofits or whatnot. And they're just the important thing is to keep the subscribers interests in mind. It's not about you promoting your practice as much as you are being very useful to the subscriber. Right. So the more useful you are, they're more likely they will be opening your emails in the future. So think long term.Melvin Varghese: Yeah, it's like, I mean, as with most of this stuff online is definitely a long term play. But yeah, I don't know, like, this might be like overly simple. But one of the guiding principles I've thought about when we because, you know, we send like you, like I send a weekly email. And for a long time, I used to get so scared of like, oh, my gosh, you know, people are going to just unsubscribe from this thing, right? Especially when you have like lower numbers, you're like every one of those emails counts. Right. And but I think One of the questions that has just been a guiding thing for me is, would I want to read this? And does this genuinely take care of the person behind that email? Do they feel valued? Do they feel like they didn't waste their time? And all of those kinds of things. It sounds overly simplistic, but I think if you come from a heart of care, and remember there's a person behind the email, and then take that step back and say, would this genuinely be helpful for them? I think it's a good sort of centering thing, at least for me. I mean, anything like that, that's been helpful for you, even from like a mindset perspective, as you think about writing these emails or creating them?Avivit Fisher: Right. So for example, I'll give you an example of my welcome sequence. So for my, my subscribers are usually practitioners, for the most part, solo practitioners who are interested in starting or growing their private pay practice. So When I was sitting down and writing my welcome sequence, and it was a while ago, I revisit it sometimes, but for the most part, it's the same. And I'm thinking about, okay, so what is the most, where do they need to start? What else do they need to add to their, you know, to-do list when they're starting or building their business? So everything that I have on my welcome sequence is to make their life easier, including they offer to work with me as well, because that also makes their life easier. But when I'm coming from the place, I do come from the place of, well, if I was a private practice owner, what would I need to know? Where would I need to go? And I don't want them to go to other places. I want them to stay with me, to stay with my emails. So it's a lot of legwork, a lot of legwork ahead of time, but you do it once. That's the beauty of the sequence. You do it once, and then you just it's automated and it keeps sending out. So you don't have to repeat, like reinvent the wheel all the time.Melvin Varghese: Do you have a general framework of like how many of these emails should be in a email sequence?Avivit Fisher: I think that's like, you know, the marketing experts say that a person needs to hear at least like five to seven times from you. So I would say, you know, five emails would be good. If you don't feel like writing five, you can write four. But I think definitely between four and five emails. And you can set an expectation, you can say, in the next week, you're going to be getting emails about x, y, and z. So people know, so they know that there's an end to it as well, because you also don't want to leave them feeling like forever, you're going to be sending those emails every three days.Melvin Varghese: Yeah. Right. Like how long is this like the never ending email sequence? We want to avoid that. Again, like going back to that question where we joke about it now, but like, it's that question of does this person feel comfortable? Do they feel cared for? Right. And so even down to like, yeah, the number that you're setting and all of those things. So we talked about solo practitioners, any advice for like group practitioners? Because I feel like there's definitely a level of complexity, right? Both in the number of clinicians, as well as a lot of group practitioners, they may not like specifically niche all the time. Although I definitely know group practitioners that do. But so any like general words of advice for a group practitioner that's thinking about creating an email sequence?Avivit Fisher: Do you mean the advice regarding the content or regarding the technical content?Melvin Varghese: Because they may be seeing, for example, like, you know, 1520 different presenting concerns, right? And they're sort of built expertise from everything from, you know, social phobia to major oppressive disorder to, you know, to maybe even working with certain populations, right? Like, neuropsych testing or something, right?Avivit Fisher: Like, when you're doing so, I would say, right, so I would I would say if you have several practitioners in your practice and each one of them have their own sort of niche and it's all under the umbrella of your practice. I mean, you can have different lead magnets that go into different welcome sequences. There's one way. Another way is creating your welcome sequences, educating your subscribers about the brand of your private practice, what makes you different, what makes you stand apart from your competition. And then that becomes a little bit less about the needs of the subscriber, but it becomes more about it as a brand awareness campaign. That also is a possibility. But if you want to nurture your subscribers, then I think that having several welcome sequences by particular lead magnets would work as well. And I had it for myself for a while. I had several welcome sequences for different I have things that people were able to download on my website so for example i had people that download loaded like a worksheet about an ideal client where i had a sequence. I remember I created this sort of mini course about doing COVID about how to how to take care of yourself with marketing, with the help of marketing when doing COVID when you're over burnt out and overwhelmed. And that had its own welcome sequence. So you can you can do things like that.Melvin Varghese: Yeah, I really like that. And I like the flexibility of all of this is you can also tailor it to like seasons of life, events that are happening, like, you know, things like that. And even I was just thinking as you were sharing, if you're a group practitioner, and also honestly, as a solo practitioner, if you're gathering any sort of analytics, right, and running reports on what type of clients are coming in, right, and just a very logical thing might be to create an email opt-in slash sequence around like the top thing and just starting there and then branching out if you want to. That way you're using analytics versus just kind of taking a guess or creating a sequence maybe that you've only had like a small handful of clients versus the majority.Avivit Fisher: Right. Oh, and another thing I wanted to tell you about the fear of unsubscribers actually, those platforms email marketing platforms are pretty sophisticated. So you can attack people by the type of link they click. So you can always within your welcome sequence, give your subscribers an option to opt out of the welcome sequence, but remain on your list. So that gives them an extra sort of like Care i would say is like well if you're not interested you can just click on this link and you will stop receiving the emails from the welcome sequence and that works sometimes well with. to reduce the rate of unsubscribers. That will happen anyway, every time you send an email.Melvin Varghese: Yeah, I didn't actually know about that option. That's very cool. I have to think about how to implement that. Yeah. And I think to your point, for me, again, sometimes we forget as a user, I've been on email newsletters where I'm like, man, you guys are emailing a lot. Are they ever unsubscribe? Or that topic is not really like as much resonant for me in this season. So I'm going to unsubscribe. It's rarely honestly, like about the person, it's more of a like season of life or oh my gosh, my inbox is way too flooded. So I imagine like, I don't know at this point, like I've yeah, I've gotten much more comfortable with it. But I do remember there was a season where, you know, we'd have unsubscribes and I'd be like, oh gosh, I keep emailing, you know.Avivit Fisher: It stings. Every time you see a non-subscriber, it stings because you work so hard to attract those subscribers. So I can definitely relate.Melvin Varghese: Yeah, absolutely. And then, I mean, even to just share like the other side of this, like typically I was looking at our analytics right before we talked. So we have approximately 3,600 people on our email, typically on our main email list. So we have anywhere from three to seven unsubscribes, which is actually, I mean, when I looked at it, I was like, cause to me, I was like, my gosh, like seven people that aren't, that don't want my stuff anymore. But then statistically, if you look at it, it's such a low percentage. I'm like, oh, we're actually doing a really good job. And that was in a weird way, like liberating when I looked at what the baseline is. And yeah, so.Avivit Fisher: Yeah, it is low. And people will always like, you don't know, maybe it's somebody, somebody's in a bad mood that during that day, you know, you can never know. But, you know, as long as you're, you're attuned to what your subscribers want. And in fact, sometimes it's good to send out the survey and ask them how you can approve your emails or your newsletter. And some people will respond, some people will not. I can tell you that when I get a higher rate of unsubscribers after a certain email, I'm looking at the email itself and I'm thinking like, well, what was different about this one than the other ones? And some insights that I've had were very, very interesting. actually. So for example, one of my insights is that the minute I mentioned something personal, I have a higher rate of unsubscribers, which, yeah, which is very interesting, because everybody says like, Oh, you have to be like, very, yeah, you have to show a little bit of personality. But this is not why my subscribers subscribe to my emails, they want to learn about their business. So they don't really care. You know, how my kids day one in school.Melvin Varghese: So it's so interesting. So even I'm so glad you brought that example, because I have the exact opposite, like when we actually mentioned personal, and maybe it's because I always mentioned it, like something were happening in life from business or something, I feel like it doesn't really, like, sometimes it's lower unsubscribes, but it doesn't really move the needle like that significantly. In fact, it's interesting because I do get replies back be like, oh my gosh, thanks for the life update. So it is fascinating what people are signing up for, how their impressions of you. And yeah, it's just there's so many little nuances to it. And I think the big thing I'm taking away is there's no one size fit. And I think the best thing to do is sort of align with what's the most comfortable for you. and realize it's always this iterative process. I heard this great quote recently from Ali Abdaal that I've just been sharing it everywhere, which is, he says, when you're starting something new, first you want to get going, then you want to get good, then you want to get smart. And I think it's the same thing with email sequences. It's okay. The first step is to get going. It's not actually to get good. And I think sometimes therapists swap the others, those two out. I got to get this perfect and then I'll get going.Avivit Fisher: Right. And it's intimidating if that's how you position yourself. It's scary. And maybe that's what is keeping them from using email marketing for their practice.Melvin Varghese: Yeah, I think so. And the other side of that, I don't want to minimize it because I think underneath it, of course, there's a fear element there, but there's also, I think, a genuine desire to want to provide something that's helpful. By the same token, but then if you see it as more of like, this is a process versus like, I got to figure it all out. And I think especially clinicians, I think so many of us are wired that way because I mean, think about like training and all of these things, everything is based on a, what if you accomplish this, you get this, right? Everything down from grades to licensure to all these things. And so it is a bit of a learning to be able to do things like this. What would you say is like the top mistake that a therapist makes when it comes to doing these email sequences, besides getting started?Avivit Fisher: It's a hard question to answer, honestly, because I haven't seen many email sequences from therapists. But I would say is having them too generic, like too generic of topics, like too generic of advice, like, you know, Everybody has the five steps to quiet your anxiety at the moment or something like this. Everybody has those. These are very, very general for a big audience, and it's very difficult to grab somebody's attention. So not being specific enough to somebody's audience, because In reality, even if you build a very small email list, but this email list is engaged and they want to hear from you, you already won. You don't need a big audience.Melvin Varghese: Yeah, absolutely. And I think I, I mean, I know folks that have tens, if not hundreds of thousands of people on their email list. And I think when I look at those numbers, I'm like, you know, my like, 3600, it seems so small. But like, I think one of the things that I most appreciate is like, I do feel like we have a really engaged list. And I've been fortunately able to build a business around it. And I think it's the power of email. And it's also this realization that, yeah, you don't need a big amount of people. Like you said, it's actually about the quality of the people. If it's your ideal people, they're your super fans. It definitely changes the game and changes dynamic on things.Avivit Fisher: Yeah, absolutely.Melvin Varghese: I'm so grateful for you, grateful for our friendship. I know this is just the tip of the iceberg when it comes to email sequences. You're doing some pretty amazing stuff in the world. Where can we learn about you? I know that you're starting to work with therapists as well, doing these sequences. Please let us know how we can get in touch with you and support the good work that you're doing in the world.Avivit Fisher: Thank you so much. I really appreciate our connection as well. Thank you, LinkedIn. So with that, You can find me on LinkedIn. I'm very active there, as you said. You can find me on my website, redstrategy.com, red with two Ds. And there's actually a lot of free resources for therapists there. So you can check it out and a lot of blog posts. But also I write a weekly newsletter. called Therapy Business Brief. And you can subscribe on therapybusinessbrief.com. And it's a really fun newsletter because I curate all the latest news that are related to therapy business, to mental health industry, and also therapy business. And I add a few cents about marketing from me as well. So it's a fun read every week.Melvin Varghese: I'm a subscriber and the way that you curate just information that's happening in mental health, it's pretty amazing.Avivit Fisher: Thank you. Thank you for being a subscriber. I work very hard to create it every week.Melvin Varghese: Yeah, no, it definitely shows. And yeah, Avit, I'm so grateful for you. I appreciate our friendship. Have a great rest of your day and we'll talk soon.Avivit Fisher: Thank you. And you too.Melvin Varghese: Hi there. I hope that you enjoyed my conversation with Avivit. And especially if you have been thinking about creating an email sequence and just trying to navigate that world, I hope more than anything has just given you encouragement and sort of that next step to take that next courageous and bold step. You know, as I mentioned in the intro, email has been big for me, even as we start to slowly expand beyond just the podcast. I'm writing on LinkedIn more. We just recently launched our YouTube channel. Unofficially, we're formally launching it in 2024. But as we sort of expand into all of these mediums, I'm constantly reminded that email is still where it's at. And you will notice that a lot of our calls to actions and things like that all dive back to email. Because I do believe, as Avivit shared, it's real estate that we own. And we're not at the mercy of sort of these algorithms or these social media platforms or anything like that. So definitely encourage you, especially if you have been active on social media and you've been going back and forth about creating an email list and you've convinced yourself like, oh, it's more important to grow my followers versus my email list. would just humbly ask you to reconsider and think about the role that email could play and just also learn from my mistake of being really cautious when it comes to building on these platforms without building assets where it's basically real estate that you own, i.e. your email list. I was reflecting a lot on this conversation and the thing that I took away is don't, and I don't know how to say this, but like, I feel like all of us as clinicians, we're wickedly smart, we're accomplished. But I think because we are smart and accomplished, we also have a tendency to kind of get in our own way. And we feel like Something like an email sequence where it could literally be stuff that you've already created That it could just be repurposing of that Versus this pool. I know that I struggle with which is I got to create something brand new So I would resist I would urge you to resist that urge to create something new especially if you are right at the start again that quote from Ali which is you know get going then get good then get smart and So the first step, even for me, I realize getting going is often a multi-month or even possibly even a multi-year process. And then getting good at it is also a long-term process. If you sort of generally think in long runways, I think it can be extremely beneficial for you. Avavit is doing some pretty amazing work in the world, so definitely connect with her on LinkedIn and check out her website at redstrategy.com, especially if you are a clinician that has built a practice but would like to transition to private pay. And I know that Avavit is doing a little bit of experimenting with helping therapists also create their email sequences as well. I think that's it. Oh, and the final thing I wanted to mention is, you know, I get a lot of questions around like what email platform would I recommend? So we use Cartra and it's kind of an all-in-one platform. So it includes both email as well as like course. You can build courses in it, can build membership sites, all of that stuff. If you'd love to support the blog, that's over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash Cartra. We've used it for a number of years. I think with all of these platforms they have their own little quirks, but overall we've been really happy with Cardra. Now the thing that I am experimenting with is I just literally had a conversation with the team at ConvertKit about two weeks ago, and one of the things that we are considering is actually moving our main email newsletter to ConvertKit. So the reason is a couple of things. One is when I recommend a product, generally I like to use it and be a user of it. That way I get a more nuanced understanding of what's great about it, what's not about it, and then what's not so great about it. And ConvertKit also recently launched this thing called the Creator Network. So basically, as a therapist, inevitably there are going to be therapists, coaches, folks that are in a similar or related niche to you. And so they can actually recommend your newsletter as well. and you can get sales or get more subscribers that way. So it's a great way. I haven't seen Kartra be able to do this. And so that's the main reason that I'm actually considering, even though it could be presumably more complex, to still have Kartra as our main thing, but having our main newsletter within ConvertKit. Again, if you'd like to support the blog, that link is over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash ConvertKit. Have a wonderful rest of your day and I will see you next time. Bye.Narrator: Thanks for listening to the Selling the Couch podcast. For more great content and to stay up to date, visit www.sellingthecouch.com.Melvin Varghese: Hey there, it's Melvin. I hope that you enjoyed today's podcast session. Just wanted to take a moment again to thank the team over at the American Psychological Association for supporting today's podcast session. If you're a psychology professional that is looking for your next job in psychology, definitely check out PsyCareers, the American Psychological Association services. Career Center PsychCareers now has over 400 job postings posted specifically for psychology professionals. You can connect with leading employers and explore roles that match your skills and your professional and personal goals. You can check all of that out over at sellingthecouch.com forward slash APA sellingthecouch.com forward slash APA. Create a free account and get started.selling the couch podcast with melvin varghese phdWeekly interviews, strategy, and advice for building your private practice in and beyond the therapy room.
Apple podcastsYou TubeSpotify ready to launch your online course?Please check out our free online course starter kit for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This FREE 7-day email course will help you validate your course idea (so that you can create a course that has buyers).
sign up for free course starter kitready to launch your podcast?Please check out our FREE podcasting workshop for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This workshop is pre-recorded so you can watch it on a day and time that works for your schedule.
It contains a lot of practical tips that we've learned as STC has reached 1.81 million+ downloads and become a 6-figure business with podcasting as the backbone.
sign up for podcasting workshopAvivit FisherFounder @ RedD Strategy
REdD Strategy Marketing Consultancy provides marketing and business coaching for therapists in private practice. We work with mental health providers seeking to start and grow their practices. We train and provide services for our clients on branding, website building, copywriting, SEO, website building, and email marketing.
We help you attract and gain long-term clients and build a sustainable, revenue-producing private practice.
Melvin varghese phdPsychologist and Founder @ Selling The Couch
Melvin Varghese, PhD is a licensed psychologist in Philadelphia, PA. In 2015, Dr. Varghese founded Selling The Couch, a podcast to help therapists move from clinical to online income.
On the podcast, he interviews successful practitioners about how they've built their practices, social media/marketing experts, and shares lessons as he uses our clinical skills to create an online business powered by podcasting + online courses.
The podcast is one of the top Career podcasts in Apple Podcasts, has been downloaded over 1.8 million times, and is heard in over 125 countries. Mel is a successful course creator with 240+ students and $300k+ in course sales.
More Posts352: When An Online Course Idea Comes From Therapy Sessionsby Melvin Varghese | Jun 26, 2024 | Chats With Successful Practitioners, Growing Your Practice, Online Courses, STC Podcast
This is an excerpt from this custom blog post. Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Curabitur tincidunt mollis ante non volutpat.
364: Book Writing Tips They Don't Tell You with Raj Lullaby Melvin Varghese | Jun 21, 2024 | Book Writing, STC Podcast
This is an excerpt from this custom blog post. Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Curabitur tincidunt mollis ante non volutpat.
362: Low Risk Ways To Host Your First Retreat with Megan Gunnellby Melvin Varghese | Jun 21, 2024 | Blog, Chats With Successful Practitioners, Retreats
This is an excerpt from this custom blog post. Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Curabitur tincidunt mollis ante non volutpat.
« Older Entries The post 353: How To Craft Awesome Welcome Series Emails To Market Your Practice appeared first on Selling The Couch | Melvin Varghese PhD.
352: When An Idea For An Online Course Comes From Therapy Sessions with Linda Murphy, MEd, MA, LMHC from the relationship and divorce counseling centerWritten By Melvin Varghese PhDIntroductionLinda Murphy, a group practice owner (Relationship and Divorce Counseling Center in Tampa, Florida) has been a member of our online course Mastermind for Therapists. She had the idea to create a course for people dealing with difficult individuals, using a metaphor she calls Banana Man.
Linda realized that sharing this information beyond one-on-one therapy sessions could have a broader impact.
The Birth of Banana ManLinda’s idea for Banana Man came from her desire to help people understand their options when dealing with difficult individuals.
Her course helps people recognize that they can argue, avoid, or accept the difficult person in their life. This concept has been very well-received in her therapy sessions, leading to the development of the course.
Creating the Banana Man CourseLinda’s journey into course creation was filled with learning and adaptation. Initially, she aimed to create a course for parents going through divorce, but she started with a smaller, more manageable piece focused on dealing with difficult people. Her course, now known as “Banana Man: A Counselor's Guide on How to Let Stuff Go,” offers practical advice and uses an engaging metaphor to help participants navigate challenging relationships.
Using Visuals and VideosLinda created an animated video to complement the audio of the Banana Man story, providing a visual aid to help convey the message. By utilizing resources like graphic designers and video editors, she was able to create a compelling and engaging course. This video is available on her website, BananaManSociety.com, where users can sign up to access it.
The Importance of Community and SupportLinda emphasizes the value of community and support in the course creation journey. Being part of the mastermind group has provided her with the motivation and accountability needed to keep progressing. This support system is crucial for staying focused and achieving goals, especially when embarking on new projects like online course creation.
Marketing and AuthenticityLinda highlights the importance of marketing and being authentic. Leaning into your personality and passion is essential for creating a course that resonates with others. She also stresses the need to be comfortable with social media and finding the right platform that suits your style and audience.
Looking ForwardLinda plans to expand her course offerings, with the next course focused on co-parenting. By addressing specific challenges and providing practical solutions, she aims to continue helping individuals navigate difficult relationships. Her journey underscores the importance of staying flexible and adapting to new opportunities.
selling the couch podcast with melvin varghese phdWeekly interviews, strategy, and advice for building your private practice in and beyond the therapy room.
Apple podcastsYou TubeSpotify ready to launch your online course?Please check out our free online course starter kit for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This FREE 7-day email course will help you validate your course idea (so that you can create a course that has buyers).
sign up for free course starter kitready to launch your podcast?Please check out our FREE podcasting workshop for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This workshop is pre-recorded so you can watch it on a day and time that works for your schedule.
It contains a lot of practical tips that we've learned as STC has reached 1.81 million+ downloads and become a 6-figure business with podcasting as the backbone.
sign up for podcasting workshoplinda murphy, med, ma, lmhcGroup Practice Owner @ Relationship and Divorce Counseling Center and Course Creator @ Banana Man Society
The Relationship and Divorce Counseling Center’s founder Linda Murphy is passionate about relationship and divorce counseling. She invites clients to envision a brighter future even when circumstances appear bleak and contentious. Linda has herself experienced the heartbreak of divorce and the challenges of being a single mother. She knows how it feels to be overwhelmed and scared. Linda founded the RAD Counseling Center to help others through difficult relationship transitions by providing guidance and a roadmap for the journey.
In addition to offering counseling services, Linda also created an online course called “Banana Man: An Empowering Approach to Dealing with Difficult People Who Are Unwilling (or Unable) to Change.” She is currently turning the lessons from this course into a book.
Melvin varghese phdPsychologist and Founder @ Selling The Couch
Melvin Varghese, PhD is a licensed psychologist in Philadelphia, PA. In 2015, Dr. Varghese founded Selling The Couch, a podcast to help therapists move from clinical to online income. On the podcast, he interviews successful practitioners about how they've built their practices, social media/marketing experts, and shares lessons as he uses our clinical skills to create an online business powered by podcasting + online courses.
The podcast is one of the top Career podcasts in Apple Podcasts, has been downloaded over 1.8 million times, and is heard in over 125 countries. Mel is a successful course creator with 240+ students and $300k+ in course sales.
More Posts364: Book Writing Tips They Don't Tell You with Raj Lullaby Melvin Varghese | Jun 21, 2024 | Book Writing, STC Podcast
This is an excerpt from this custom blog post. Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Curabitur tincidunt mollis ante non volutpat.
362: Low Risk Ways To Host Your First Retreat with Megan Gunnellby Melvin Varghese | Jun 21, 2024 | Blog, Chats With Successful Practitioners, Retreats
This is an excerpt from this custom blog post. Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Curabitur tincidunt mollis ante non volutpat.
363: How To Make Money From Your Podcast Without Just Relying on Sponsors with Melvin Varghese PhDby Melvin Varghese | Apr 25, 2024 | Blog, Podcasting
This is an excerpt from this custom blog post. Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Curabitur tincidunt mollis ante non volutpat.
« Older Entries The post 352: When An Idea For An Online Course Comes From Therapy Sessions with Linda Murphy from Relationship and Divorce Counseling Center appeared first on Selling The Couch | Melvin Varghese PhD.
364: writing a book (What they don't tell you) with raj lullaWritten By Melvin Varghese PhDWriting a fiction book was unexpected.Writing a fiction book was unexpected for Raj Lulla, considering his background in various professions such as being a former pastor, a photographer, and now a co-owner of a successful web design agency. One would assume that he would write a nonfiction book related to his business. However, Raj's decision to write a fiction book was unexpected and intriguing.
Writing a fiction book allows for creativity and imagination to flow freely. It provides an opportunity to explore different worlds, characters, and storylines that may not be possible in a nonfiction book. For Raj, writing a fiction book was a way to express his creativity and storytelling abilities in a unique and unexpected way.
Additionally, writing a fiction book can be a refreshing change of pace from the more technical and business-oriented writing that Raj may be used to in his professional life. It allows him to tap into his creative side and engage with readers on a different level.
Overall, the decision to write a fiction book was unexpected for Raj, but it has opened up new possibilities and opportunities for him as an author and storyteller. It showcases his versatility and willingness to explore different genres and styles of writing, making his book, “The Caring House,” a truly unique and captivating read.
Healing through storytelling and grief.Raj shares his journey of healing through storytelling and grief. He recounts how the inspiration for his fiction book, “The Caring House,” came to him unexpectedly while listening to a podcast about grief support for children. This sparked the idea of two children who had lost their fathers to suicide meeting and potentially falling in love, leading him to explore the theme of resilience and healing in the face of tragedy.
Raj's personal experiences of loss and grief, including the tragic death of his wife's sister, multiple job changes, miscarriages, and the loss of friends, all contributed to his emotional state when he started writing the book. Through the process of writing, Raj was able to confront and process his own grief, using the characters in his story as a way to explore how people can navigate through difficult circumstances and come out on the other side.
The book served as a form of therapy for Raj, allowing him to delve into the complexities of grief and loss while also seeking to find a path towards healing and acceptance. By creating a narrative where the characters face immense challenges but ultimately find a way to be okay, Raj was able to reflect on his own journey of healing and find a sense of hope and resilience in the face of adversity.
Through his storytelling, Raj demonstrates the power of fiction as a tool for processing emotions, exploring difficult themes, and finding solace in the midst of pain. By sharing his personal experiences and weaving them into his storytelling, Raj not only creates a compelling narrative but also offers a glimpse into the transformative power of storytelling in the face of grief.
In conclusion, Raj's journey of healing through storytelling and grief highlights the cathartic and transformative nature of writing. By using his fiction book as a means of processing his own experiences of loss and grief, Raj was able to find a sense of healing and hope in the face of adversity. His story serves as a testament to the power of storytelling as a tool for personal growth, emotional healing, and resilience in the face of life's challenges.
Focus on singular purpose.Raj's advice to focus on a singular purpose when writing a book is a valuable lesson for aspiring writers, especially those in the nonfiction space. By starting with a clear purpose in mind, writers can avoid the temptation to include too many ideas or themes in their work, which can lead to a disjointed and unfocused final product. Instead, by honing in on a specific goal or message, writers can create a more cohesive and impactful book that resonates with readers.
Furthermore, Raj's analogy of Michelangelo chiseling away everything that wasn't David serves as a powerful reminder of the importance of focus and clarity in the creative process. Just as Michelangelo focused on sculpting the perfect statue, writers must focus on shaping their book to serve its intended purpose. By eliminating distractions and extraneous details, writers can create a work that is truly impactful and meaningful.
Raj's personal experience with anxiety also sheds light on the benefits of simplifying and prioritizing tasks. By asking oneself the question, “If I had to do this over again, what's the one thing I would do?” individuals can gain clarity on what truly matters and focus their energy on the most important tasks. This mindset shift can help alleviate feelings of overwhelm and anxiety, allowing individuals to approach their work with a sense of purpose and direction.
In conclusion, Raj's emphasis on focusing on a singular purpose when writing a book is a valuable lesson for writers seeking to create impactful and meaningful work. By starting with a clear purpose in mind, eliminating distractions, and prioritizing tasks, writers can create a work that is focused, cohesive, and resonant with readers. Ultimately, by honing in on a singular purpose, writers can create work that is not only personally fulfilling but also has the potential to inspire, educate, and empower others.
Consider indie publishing options carefully.Raj discusses the different options available to authors when it comes to publishing their work. They mention traditional publishing, indie publishing, and self-publishing as the three main avenues for authors to consider. The speaker also touches on the nuances of indie publishing, where authors may have to invest some of their own resources into the publishing process.
Indie publishing can be a great option for authors who want more control over their work and the publishing process. It allows authors to have a say in aspects such as cover design, marketing, and distribution. However, it also comes with its own set of challenges, such as the need for authors to take on more responsibilities and potentially invest their own money into the publishing process.
When considering indie publishing options, authors should carefully weigh the pros and cons of this route. On one hand, indie publishing can offer more creative freedom and control over the final product. Authors can make decisions that align with their vision for the book and have a more hands-on approach to the publishing process. On the other hand, indie publishing requires authors to take on more tasks and responsibilities, such as marketing and distribution, which can be time-consuming and challenging.
Authors considering indie publishing should also be prepared to invest their own resources into the process. This may include hiring professionals for services such as editing, cover design, and marketing, as well as covering the costs of printing and distribution. Authors should have a clear budget in mind and be prepared for potential financial risks associated with indie publishing.
Ultimately, indie publishing can be a rewarding option for authors who are willing to put in the time and effort to make their book a success. By carefully considering the options available and weighing the pros and cons of indie publishing, authors can make an informed decision that aligns with their goals and vision for their work. With the right approach and mindset, indie publishing can be a valuable and fulfilling experience for authors looking to share their work with the world.
Traditional publishing offers distribution advantages.Traditional publishing offers distribution advantages that can be appealing to many authors. One of the main reasons why authors may choose the traditional route is the opportunity to have their books distributed in well-known bookstores such as Barnes and Noble, as well as in airport bookshops. These physical locations provide authors with increased visibility and accessibility to a wider audience of readers who may not necessarily shop online or frequent indie bookstores.
In addition to physical distribution, traditional publishers also have established relationships with various retailers and wholesalers, which can help authors reach a broader network of bookstores and libraries. This widespread distribution can lead to increased sales and exposure for the author's work, ultimately helping them to build a larger readership and fan base.
Furthermore, traditional publishers often have dedicated marketing and publicity teams that can help promote and advertise the author's book through various channels such as media interviews, book signings, and social media campaigns. This level of support can be invaluable for authors who may not have the resources or expertise to effectively market their book on their own.
Another advantage of traditional publishing is the perceived credibility and prestige that comes with being published by a reputable publishing house. Having a traditional publisher behind your book can lend it a sense of legitimacy and quality that may attract more readers and reviewers.
Despite these advantages, it is important to note that traditional publishing also has its drawbacks. Authors often have less control over the creative process and may have to compromise on certain aspects of their work to meet the publisher's expectations. Additionally, traditional publishing can be a competitive and selective industry, with many authors facing rejection from literary agents and publishers.
In conclusion, while traditional publishing offers distribution advantages that can be beneficial for authors looking to reach a wider audience, it is important for authors to carefully weigh the pros and cons of both traditional and indie publishing before making a decision. Ultimately, the best publishing route will depend on the author's goals, preferences, and resources, and there is no one-size-fits-all approach to publishing success.
Self-publishing offers creative control.Self-publishing offers creative control to authors, allowing them to have a say in every aspect of the publishing process, from editing to cover design to distribution. This level of control can be empowering for authors who want to ensure that their vision is fully realized in their work.
One of the key benefits of self-publishing is the ability to make decisions about the design and formatting of the book. As mentioned in the podcast transcript, self-published authors have the option to work with professional graphic designers and printing houses to create a high-quality, professionally printed book. This level of customization allows authors to create a product that meets their standards and reflects their unique style and vision.
Additionally, self-publishing gives authors the freedom to choose their own distribution channels and marketing strategies. While traditional publishing offers access to established distribution networks like Barnes and Noble and airports, self-published authors can explore alternative distribution options, such as online platforms like Amazon and social media marketing. This flexibility allows authors to reach a wider audience and tailor their marketing efforts to their target demographic.
Self-publishing also offers authors the opportunity to retain more of their profits. In traditional publishing, authors typically receive a smaller percentage of royalties, as the publisher takes on the financial risk of printing and distributing the book. With self-publishing, authors can keep a larger share of the profits from book sales, which can be especially beneficial for authors who are able to successfully market and sell their books.
Overall, self-publishing offers authors the creative freedom and control to bring their vision to life in a way that traditional publishing may not always allow. By taking on the responsibilities of editing, design, distribution, and marketing, self-published authors have the opportunity to create a book that is truly their own. While self-publishing may require more effort and resources on the author's part, the potential for creative control and financial rewards can make it a rewarding option for many writers.
Self-publishing requires investment and effort.Self-publishing a book requires a significant investment of both time and money. RAJ mentions that they personally spent about $10,000 to $15,000 on publishing their book, along with eight years of their life dedicated to the project. This investment included hiring editors, designing a high-quality cover, and printing physical copies of the book. The speaker also mentioned that self-publishing can be compared to building a house, where the amount of sweat equity put into the project will ultimately determine the overall cost.
One of the key factors in self-publishing is the need for marketing and promotion. Even with traditional publishing, authors are often required to do a significant amount of heavy lifting when it comes to marketing their book. However, with self-publishing, the responsibility falls entirely on the author to promote their work and reach their target audience. This can involve creating a strong online presence, building a following on social media platforms, and engaging with potential readers through various marketing strategies.
Additionally, self-publishing authors must also consider the quality of their book and how it will be perceived by readers. While print-on-demand options offer a more cost-effective way to publish a book, the quality may not be on par with traditional bookstore prints. Authors who choose to invest in high-quality printing and design may incur additional costs but can create a more professional product that stands out in a competitive market.
Despite the challenges and expenses associated with self-publishing, there are potential rewards for authors who are willing to put in the effort. Self-publishing allows for greater creative control and the ability to bring a unique vision to life without the constraints of traditional publishing houses. Authors who successfully navigate the self-publishing process and effectively market their book have the opportunity to reach a wider audience and potentially earn a profit from their work.
In conclusion, self-publishing requires a significant investment of time, money, and effort. Authors must be prepared to take on multiple roles, from editing and design to marketing and promotion. While the path to self-publishing may be challenging, the potential for creative freedom and financial rewards can make it a worthwhile endeavor for writers who are dedicated to bringing their stories to life.
Self-publish for more control.Self-publishing offers authors more control over their work compared to traditional publishing. In the podcast transcript, the speaker discusses the challenges and limitations of traditional publishing, such as limited marketing support and lack of control over rights and distribution. By choosing to self-publish, authors can retain full control over their work, including the ability to print in different languages, distribute to other countries, revise their work, and retain their rights.
One of the main advantages of self-publishing is the creative freedom it offers to authors. They have the autonomy to make decisions about their book's content, cover design, formatting, and marketing strategies. This level of control allows authors to stay true to their vision and connect directly with their audience without the interference of a traditional publisher.
Additionally, self-publishing can be financially rewarding for authors. While traditional publishers may offer advances and royalties, self-published authors have the potential to earn higher royalties per book sold. By investing in their own marketing efforts and building a strong online presence, authors can reach a wider audience and generate more sales.
However, self-publishing is not without its challenges. Authors must be prepared to take on multiple roles, from editing and design to marketing and promotion. This requires a significant investment of time, money, and effort. Authors must be willing to educate themselves on the publishing industry, seek out professional assistance when needed, and be proactive in promoting their work.
In conclusion, self-publishing requires a significant investment of time, money, and effort. Authors must be prepared to take on multiple roles, from editing and design to marketing and promotion. While the path to self-publishing may be challenging, the potential for creative freedom and financial rewards can make it a worthwhile endeavor for writers who are dedicated to bringing their stories to life.
Start a book like a business.In the podcast transcript, the speaker emphasizes the importance of treating writing a book as a business venture. Instead of viewing it as a personal manifesto or a way to gain validation from traditional publishers, the speaker suggests starting by validating your audience and your ideas. By identifying a specific problem you can solve and building an audience around that, you can create a platform for your book.
The speaker also highlights the entrepreneurial aspects of self-publishing, such as creating a business plan, marketing plan, and branding your book as a product. They discuss the importance of thinking about the book as a product that can lead to other offerings, such as workbooks or coaching services. By approaching writing a book as starting a business, authors can set themselves up for success and potentially attract larger advances from traditional publishers.
The speaker also challenges the notion that traditional publishing is the only path to success for authors. They encourage writers to take control of their own publishing journey and utilize the tools available online to build their audience and market their books. By giving away copies of their books or setting a low price point, authors can attract readers and grow their platform.
Overall, the message of the podcast is clear: start a book like a business. By approaching writing and publishing with an entrepreneurial mindset, authors can increase their chances of success and reach a wider audience. Self-publishing may require hard work and dedication, but the potential for creative freedom and financial rewards make it a worthwhile endeavor for writers who are willing to put in the effort.
Build following online for book.One key takeaway from the podcast is the importance of building a following online for a book. The guest, Raj, emphasized the need for authors to focus on one platform and establish themselves in that space. This could be through social media, a blog, or any other online platform where they can connect with their target audience and build a community around their work.
Furthermore, Raj highlighted the value of understanding the ultimate goal of the book within the author's larger ecosystem. Whether it's to fill a practice, do speaking engagements, or offer courses, authors should consider how the book fits into their overall business strategy. By thinking about the book as part of a larger value ladder, authors can create a more sustainable income stream and leverage their book to support other offerings.
Additionally, the podcast emphasized the importance of supporting indie creators like Raj who are doing meaningful work. By supporting authors who are self-publishing and taking control of their creative process, listeners can help to amplify diverse voices and perspectives in the publishing industry.
In conclusion, building a following online for a book is essential for authors who want to reach a wider audience, increase their impact, and create a sustainable income stream. By approaching writing and publishing with an entrepreneurial mindset, authors can maximize their chances of success and create meaningful connections with their readers.
selling the couch podcast with melvin varghese phdWeekly interviews, strategy, and advice for building your private practice in and beyond the therapy room.
Apple podcastsYou TubeSpotify ready to launch your online course?Please check out our free online course starter kit for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This FREE 7-day email course will help you validate your course idea (so that you can create a course that has buyers).
sign up for free course starter kitready to launch your podcast?Please check out our FREE podcasting workshop for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This workshop is pre-recorded so you can watch it on a day and time that works for your schedule.
It contains a lot of practical tips that we've learned as STC has reached 1.81 million+ downloads and become a 6-figure business with podcasting as the backbone.
sign up for podcasting workshopraj lullaPrincipal Brand Strategist at Fruitful Design; Author of The Caring House
Raj Lulla is an Indian American author, podcaster, and brand strategist from Omaha, NE, where he lives with his wife and three children.
He spent the first ten years of his career working in non-profit before becoming a brand strategist and co-owner of Fruitful Design & Strategy.
As a brand strategist, Raj is one of about 40 creative agency leaders in the world certified in the StoryBrand framework. All of the royalties from preorder sales of his debut novel The Caring House will be donated to the grief support center for children that inspired the boo
Melvin varghese phdPsychologist and Founder @ Selling The Couch
Melvin Varghese, PhD is a licensed psychologist in Philadelphia, PA. In 2015, Dr. Varghese founded Selling The Couch, a podcast to help therapists move from clinical to online income. On the podcast, he interviews successful practitioners about how they've built their practices, social media/marketing experts, and shares lessons as he uses our clinical skills to create an online business powered by podcasting + online courses.
The podcast is one of the top Career podcasts in Apple Podcasts, has been downloaded over 1.8 million times, and is heard in over 125 countries. Mel is a successful course creator with 240+ students and $300k+ in course sales.
More Posts362: Low Risk Ways To Host Your First Retreat with Megan Gunnellby Melvin Varghese | Jun 21, 2024 | Blog, Chats With Successful Practitioners, Retreats
This is an excerpt from this custom blog post. Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Curabitur tincidunt mollis ante non volutpat.
363: How To Make Money From Your Podcast (Without Sponsors)by Melvin Varghese | May 28, 2024 | Blog, Podcasting
This is an excerpt from this custom blog post. Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Curabitur tincidunt mollis ante non volutpat.
How To Make Money From Your Podcast Without Just Relying on Sponsors with Melvin Varghese PhDby Melvin Varghese | Apr 25, 2024 | Blog, Podcasting
This is an excerpt from this custom blog post. Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Curabitur tincidunt mollis ante non volutpat.
« Older Entries The post 364: Book Writing Tips They Don’t Tell You with Raj Lulla appeared first on Selling The Couch | Melvin Varghese PhD.
362: Low Risk Ways To Host Your First Retreat with Megan GunnellWritten By Melvin Varghese PhDHosting a retreat is possible.Hosting a retreat is possible. In today's episode, Megan Gunnell shared her experiences and insights on hosting retreats. Megan, a clinical social worker by training, has been hosting retreats since 2012 and has even expanded to international retreats in countries like Costa Rica, Italy, and France.
One of the key takeaways from the podcast episode was the idea of de-risking hosting a retreat. Many therapists have fears about hosting retreats, such as logistical concerns and the fear of not filling up the retreat. Megan shared some low-risk ways to host your first retreat, including finding venues that offer fully refundable options and planning ahead to reduce risks.
One of the most important aspects of hosting a retreat is the marketing. Megan emphasized the importance of marketing a retreat effectively to ensure its success. With her experience in hosting retreats and coaching other therapists through the process, Megan shared valuable insights on how to market a retreat and attract participants.
Overall, the podcast episode highlighted that hosting a retreat is possible with the right approach and mindset. By following Megan's tips and advice, therapists can successfully host their own retreats and create meaningful experiences for their participants. Whether it's a local retreat or an international one, hosting a retreat is a rewarding opportunity for therapists to connect with their clients and create a unique therapeutic experience.
Start small, dream big.The theme of “start small, dream big” is evident throughout the podcast episode as Megan Gunnell shares her journey of starting with one-day retreats for busy working moms in her private practice, and eventually expanding to weekend retreats and international retreats in Costa Rica. Megan's story serves as a great example of how taking small, incremental steps can lead to achieving big dreams and goals.
One key takeaway from the podcast is the importance of listening to the needs and desires of the audience in front of you. By paying attention to what her clients were indirectly asking for, Megan was able to identify the demand for retreats and create a successful retreat model that catered to their needs. This highlights the importance of being attuned to the needs of clients and being open to new opportunities for growth and expansion.
Another important aspect of the podcast is the idea of not getting overwhelmed by the final product or end goal. Megan Gunnell shares how her natural default is to think about the final product, but she recognizes that taking the first small step is crucial in making progress towards her goals. This message resonates with many clinicians and entrepreneurs who may feel overwhelmed by the idea of starting a new venture or project. By focusing on taking small, manageable steps, individuals can make progress and eventually reach their big dreams.
In conclusion, the podcast episode emphasizes the importance of starting small and taking incremental steps towards achieving big dreams. Megan's journey of starting with one-day retreats and gradually expanding to international retreats serves as a testament to the power of perseverance, listening to the needs of clients, and being open to new opportunities. By following Megan's advice and mindset of starting small and dreaming big, therapists can successfully host their own retreats and create meaningful experiences for their clients.
Start small, make big impact.Starting small allows for a more manageable and realistic approach to achieving goals. It allows for a solid foundation to be built, which can then be expanded upon as success is achieved. Megan's example of starting with a one-day program at a community center and then growing to host weekend retreats and international retreats showcases how small steps can lead to significant growth and impact.
Starting small also allows for a more intimate and personal connection with clients. By hosting smaller events, therapists can create a more personalized and meaningful experience for participants. This can help build trust and loyalty among clients, leading to a stronger bond and potentially creating “super fans” who will continue to support and attend future events.
Additionally, starting small allows for a more gradual learning curve and the opportunity to refine and improve the retreat experience over time. By starting with smaller events, therapists can learn what works best for their clients, what resonates with them, and how to better cater to their needs. This iterative process of starting small and making adjustments based on feedback can ultimately lead to a more impactful and successful retreat experience.
In conclusion, the podcast episode highlights the importance of starting small and making a big impact. By taking small steps, therapists can build a solid foundation, create meaningful connections with clients, and continuously improve and grow their retreat offerings. Megan's journey serves as inspiration for therapists looking to host their own retreats, showing that with dedication, perseverance, and a willingness to start small, big dreams can be achieved.
Scalable offers lead to liberation.The podcast episode discusses the concept of scalable offers leading to liberation for therapists. The conversation delves into the traditional model of trading time for income through one-to-one work and the transformative experience of moving towards more scalable offers. The speaker reflects on their personal journey of transitioning from one-to-one work to scalable offers and the newfound awareness of the limitations of trading time for income.
One key point made in the podcast is the liberating aspect of moving away from the one-to-one model. By creating scalable offers, therapists can break free from the cycle of constantly trading time for income. This shift allows for more flexibility, autonomy, and the ability to prioritize self-care. The speaker emphasizes the importance of practicing what is preached in terms of self-care, especially in an industry where burnout is common.
The podcast also touches on the challenges that therapists face when they are solely reliant on the one-to-one model for income. The speaker discusses the mental health and resilience implications of continuously seeing one-to-one clients year after year. As therapists progress in their private practice and realize the limitations of the traditional model, it can become increasingly difficult to maintain energy and enthusiasm for the work.
In conclusion, the podcast highlights the benefits of scalable offers in providing liberation for therapists. By moving away from the one-to-one model and embracing scalable offers, therapists can experience greater freedom, flexibility, and the ability to prioritize self-care. The conversation serves as a reminder for therapists to explore alternative models of income generation and to prioritize their own well-being in order to sustain a long and fulfilling career in the field.
Plan ahead for successful retreats.The podcast also emphasizes the importance of planning ahead for successful retreats. The speaker shares her personal experience of hosting retreats and the meticulous planning and attention to detail required for a successful event. She discusses the long-term commitment involved in hosting retreats, mentioning that she plans events years in advance and has a detailed calendar to stay organized.
Furthermore, the speaker touches on the importance of outsourcing or partnering with individuals who excel in event planning and detail orientation if it is not a strength of the therapist. This highlights the need for collaboration and delegation in order to ensure a smooth and successful retreat experience for both the therapist and the participants.
The podcast also delves into the legal and financial aspects of hosting retreats, emphasizing the importance of protecting oneself and the participants through liability coverage, disclaimers, emergency contacts, and other safety measures. The speaker shares personal anecdotes of dealing with emergencies and illnesses during retreats, underscoring the need for thorough preparation and risk management.
Additionally, the speaker discusses the financial aspect of hosting retreats, highlighting the importance of setting up savings accounts or escrow accounts to hold funds until the event takes place. This ensures that the investment is protected and that the event can proceed smoothly without any financial setbacks.
In conclusion, the podcast serves as a valuable resource for therapists looking to expand their practice through hosting retreats. By emphasizing the benefits of planning ahead, collaborating with others, and prioritizing safety and financial protection, therapists can create successful and fulfilling retreat experiences for themselves and their participants.
Mitigate risk with careful planning.The transcript of the podcast highlights the importance of mitigating risks through careful planning when it comes to hosting retreats or expanding a therapy practice. Planning ahead and considering potential challenges such as cancellations, refunds, legalities, and financial investments are crucial steps in ensuring a successful and safe experience for both the therapist and participants.
One key aspect mentioned in the podcast is the importance of having a solid cancellation policy that addresses unforeseen circumstances such as pandemics, travel bans, or other emergencies. By clearly outlining the terms of cancellation and refund policies, therapists can protect themselves and their clients from financial losses and misunderstandings.
Additionally, collaborating with reputable partners, securing venues with flexible terms, and considering insurance options can help mitigate risks associated with booking deposits and uncertainties about selling out an event. By taking proactive steps to protect themselves and their clients, therapists can minimize potential liabilities and ensure a smooth and successful retreat experience.
Overall, the podcast emphasizes the importance of thorough planning, communication, and risk management in the process of hosting retreats. By addressing potential challenges and uncertainties upfront, therapists can create a safe and enjoyable experience for all involved while also safeguarding their practice and financial investments. Ultimately, careful planning and attention to detail are essential in mitigating risks and ensuring the success of retreats in the therapy field.
Start small, test audience, learn.The first step in hosting a successful retreat, as discussed in the podcast, is to start small and test the audience. This approach allows therapists to gauge interest, gather feedback, and gain valuable experience before committing to larger and more complex events. By hosting a one-day program in a small venue, therapists can assess the logistics, audience response, and overall feasibility of hosting a retreat.
Testing the audience involves reaching out to potential participants, whether they are clients, colleagues, or members of the therapist's community, to gauge interest and gather feedback on the proposed retreat. This feedback can help therapists tailor their offerings to better meet the needs and preferences of their audience, increasing the likelihood of a successful event.
Learning from the experience of hosting a small retreat is crucial for future planning and decision-making. By reflecting on what worked well, what could be improved, and any unexpected challenges that arose, therapists can refine their approach and make informed decisions for future retreats. This process of continuous learning and adaptation is essential for growth and success in the field of therapy retreats.
In addition to starting small, testing the audience, and learning from the experience, the podcast also emphasizes the importance of financial planning and risk management. By seeking venues with flexible refund policies, setting clear financial goals, and considering the size of their platform, therapists can make informed decisions about hosting retreats that align with their financial resources and audience reach.
Overall, the podcast highlights the value of a strategic and thoughtful approach to hosting therapy retreats. By starting small, testing the audience, and continuously learning and adapting, therapists can create meaningful and successful retreat experiences for their clients while also safeguarding their practice and financial investments.
Calculate expenses, buffer for profit.The host of the podcast emphasizes the importance of calculating expenses and buffering for profit when planning and hosting therapy retreats. She shares her own experience of hosting retreats internationally in Costa Rica and Italy, and the lessons she has learned along the way.
One key aspect she discusses is the need to cover all expenses associated with the retreat, including venue costs, flights, lodging, team members, and activities for guests. It is important to carefully consider all potential expenses and budget accordingly to ensure that the retreat is financially sustainable. Additionally, she mentions the importance of factoring in unexpected costs and budgeting for a buffer to cover any unforeseen expenses that may arise.
The host also emphasizes the need to calculate a generous profit margin to ensure that the retreat is not only financially viable but also profitable for the therapist. Hosting a retreat involves a significant investment of time, marketing, and planning, and it is essential to consider the opportunity cost of dedicating 10 to 12 months to organizing and promoting the retreat. By factoring in a salary for the time and effort invested, therapists can ensure that they are adequately compensated for their work.
In terms of determining a buffer percentage, the host does not provide a specific number but recommends considering all potential expenses and adding a buffer to cover any unforeseen costs. This buffer should be calculated based on the specific circumstances of the retreat, including the location, duration, and activities planned. By being proactive in budgeting and planning for contingencies, therapists can minimize financial risks and ensure that their retreats are successful and profitable ventures.
In conclusion, the podcast highlights the importance of calculating expenses, budgeting for a buffer, and ensuring a generous profit margin when planning and hosting therapy retreats. By taking a strategic and thoughtful approach to financial planning, therapists can create meaningful and successful retreat experiences for their clients while also safeguarding their practice and financial investments.
Calculate expenses, price strategically, market effectively.The podcast emphasizes the need for therapists to carefully calculate all expenses associated with hosting a therapy retreat. This includes factoring in venue costs, marketing expenses, staff salaries, and other miscellaneous costs. By adding up all expenses and dividing by the number of ideal participants, therapists can determine a breakeven cost and set a registration price that will allow them to make a profit.
Moreover, the podcast suggests budgeting for a buffer in expenses, especially when hosting larger events or at more expensive venues. By doubling the breakeven cost for the registration price, therapists can ensure that they have enough funds to cover all expenses and make a profit for themselves, their team, and their marketing efforts.
Additionally, the podcast highlights the importance of strategic marketing to fill therapy retreats. By using effective marketing strategies such as social media promotions, email campaigns, and partnerships with other professionals, therapists can attract participants and generate interest in their retreats. It is also mentioned that hosting retreats in affordable locations abroad can be a cost-effective option, as it allows therapists to access a wider range of venues and potentially lower expenses compared to hosting in the United States.
In conclusion, the podcast underscores the significance of calculating expenses, pricing strategically, and marketing effectively when planning and hosting therapy retreats. By taking a comprehensive and thoughtful approach to financial planning and marketing, therapists can create successful and profitable retreat experiences for their clients while also ensuring the sustainability of their practice.
Build retreats with clear intentions.The podcast emphasizes the importance of building retreats with clear intentions in order to create a successful and impactful experience for attendees. One of the key points made is the need for therapists to be clear on why they are building the retreat, who it is for, and what the promise or solution is that attendees will receive by participating. By understanding these key elements, therapists can effectively communicate their message and attract the right audience to their retreat.
Additionally, the podcast highlights the importance of giving oneself a long enough runway when planning a retreat. This means allowing enough time for marketing, promoting, and selling tickets to the event. Rushing the planning process can lead to difficulties in getting the retreat off the ground and may result in low attendance. By giving oneself ample time to build excitement and anticipation around the retreat, therapists can increase the chances of selling out and creating a successful event.
Furthermore, the podcast discusses the importance of listening to the audience and scaling the retreat in a gradual manner. Starting small and building up over time allows therapists to test the waters, gather feedback, and make adjustments as needed. This approach can help ensure the success and sustainability of the retreat in the long run.
Lastly, the podcast addresses the challenging situation of not hitting the breakeven number for a retreat. In such cases, therapists are advised to communicate clearly with attendees about the situation, offer refunds or alternative options, and apologize for any inconvenience. Being transparent and honest with attendees can help maintain trust and goodwill within the community.
In conclusion, building retreats with clear intentions, giving oneself enough time to plan and market effectively, listening to the audience, and handling challenges with honesty and transparency are key factors in creating successful therapy retreats. By following these guidelines, therapists can create meaningful and impactful experiences for their clients while also ensuring the success and sustainability of their practice.
Start small, plan intentionally, thrive.Starting small, planning intentionally, and thriving are essential components of building successful therapy retreats. The podcast episode highlighted the importance of taking action and getting started, even if it means starting with a small half-day or one-day retreat at a local venue. This approach allows therapists to learn and grow from their experiences, rather than waiting to perfect every detail before taking the first step.
Additionally, the podcast emphasized the significance of giving oneself enough time to plan and prepare for retreats, especially for larger international retreats, which may take 1.5 to 2 years to plan. By allowing ample time for planning, therapists can avoid unnecessary stress and ensure that the retreat meets their goals and expectations. It is important to approach the planning process with intentionality and thoughtfulness, rather than rushing through it in the final months.
Furthermore, the podcast highlighted the importance of listening to the audience and gathering feedback to improve future retreats. By reflecting on what worked well, what didn't work well, and areas for improvement, therapists can continuously enhance the quality of their retreats and create a more impactful experience for participants. This feedback loop allows therapists to adapt and grow their retreats over time, leading to greater success and satisfaction for both themselves and their clients.
Lastly, the podcast emphasized the importance of handling challenges with honesty and transparency. By acknowledging and addressing difficulties openly, therapists can build trust with their clients and demonstrate their commitment to providing a valuable and authentic experience. This approach fosters a supportive and collaborative environment at the retreat, where participants feel heard and understood.
In conclusion, building retreats with clear intentions, giving oneself enough time to plan and market effectively, listening to the audience, and handling challenges with honesty and transparency are key factors in creating successful therapy retreats. By following these guidelines, therapists can create meaningful and impactful experiences for their clients while also ensuring the success and sustainability of their practice.
selling the couch podcast with melvin varghese phdWeekly interviews, strategy, and advice for building your private practice in and beyond the therapy room.
Apple podcastsYou TubeSpotify ready to launch your online course?Please check out our free online course starter kit for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This FREE 7-day email course will help you validate your course idea (so that you can create a course that has buyers).
sign up for free course starter kitready to launch your podcast?Please check out our FREE podcasting workshop for therapists (and therapists turned coaches and consultants).
This workshop is pre-recorded so you can watch it on a day and time that works for your schedule.
It contains a lot of practical tips that we've learned as STC has reached 1.81 million+ downloads and become a 6-figure business with podcasting as the backbone.
sign up for podcasting workshopMelvin varghese phdPsychologist and Founder @ Selling The Couch
Melvin Varghese, PhD is a licensed psychologist in Philadelphia, PA. In 2015, Dr. Varghese founded Selling The Couch, a podcast to help therapists move from clinical to online income. On the podcast, he interviews successful practitioners about how they've built their practices, social media/marketing experts, and shares lessons as he uses our clinical skills to create an online business powered by podcasting + online courses.
The podcast is one of the top Career podcasts in Apple Podcasts, has been downloaded over 1.8 million times, and is heard in over 125 countries. Mel is a successful course creator with 240+ students and $300k+ in course sales.
More PostsHow To Make Money From Your Podcast (Without Sponsors)by Melvin Varghese | May 28, 2024 | Blog
This is an excerpt from this custom blog post. Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Curabitur tincidunt mollis ante non volutpat.
Session 262: Improving Your Private Practice Website with Daniel Favaby Melvin Varghese | Jan 14, 2021 | HOME, Blog, Chats With Successful Practitioners, COVID19a, Growing Your Practice, Podcastold
Like many of you, I’m looking forward to a different 2021, but I am grateful for what we’ve learned about ourselves, our businesses, and our resilience. Today’s topic is more relevant than ever, as we all want to learn more about improving our private practice website. Join us to learn more!
Adapting New Ways of Doing Things in Private Practice Because of Difficult Circumstances with Roseann Capanna-Hodge, Ed.D, LPC, BCN, LLCby Melvin Varghese | Jan 7, 2021 | HOME, Blog, Chats With Successful Practitioners, COVID19a, Growing Your Practice, Podcastold
I’m hoping 2021 will be a new year of great experiences and opportunities after what we went through in 2020. Today’s show covers one specific way that clinicians have had to adapt to new ways of doing things because of difficult circumstances. Join us to learn more.
« Older Entries The post Low Risk Ways To Host Your First Retreat with Megan Gunnell appeared first on Selling The Couch | Melvin Varghese PhD.
How To Make Money From Your Podcast (Without Sponsors)Written By melvin varghesePodcast sponsorship is often seen as the “golden goose” of podcasting.
We started working with sponsors on STC a few years ago, and they have generated over $95k to this point.
However, I’ve learned that relying solely on sponsorships is not the wisest stance because your success rides the ebbs and flows of another company’s marketing budget.
I’m very grateful for the sponsors who have worked with us, but I don’t want to depend on them for the main source of income for STC.
Today, I’m sharing how you can make money from your podcast without having to depend on securing sponsors down the road.
Join me for a closer look!
You’ll Learn:
Watch Our Free Podcasting Workshop (Learn How To Use Podcasting To Grow Your Business)###### Mel, Sign Me Up
About MeMore PostsTop 10 PESI Courses For Private Practitionersby Melvin Varghese | Jul 9, 2020 | Articles
Hi friends! Below, you'll find a list of the top 10 PESI courses that private practitioners typically take. PESI is a site that I've used regularly...
Session 243: Blogging As A Way To Build Your Practice And Reach Your Ideal Clients with Lauran Hahn, LMHCby Melvin Varghese | Jun 4, 2020 | HOME, Blog, Chats With Successful Practitioners, COVID19a, Growing Your Practice, Podcastold
We are tackling another topic relevant to the pandemic crisis. This particular time is a good chance to think about private practice in different ways than ever before. If you’ve ever considered blogging as a way to build your practice and expand your reach to your ideal clients, then this is the show for you.
4: Tips on Building a Private Pay Practice (Keri Nola)by Melvin Varghese | Mar 17, 2015 | HOME, Podcastold
Hey there! Welcome to Session 4 of the Selling the Couch podcast.
Can you build a private pay therapy private practice in this day and age?
That is the question my guest, Keri Nola, and I explore in this session of the Selling the Couch podcast.
We explore the steps to make this happen, discuss how to help clients who want to use out of network benefits, and ways to setup so you can increase fees as demand grows.
This is definitely a good episode if you're wanting to start a private pay practice. Check it out!
Show Notes The post How To Make Money From Your Podcast (Without Sponsors) appeared first on Selling The Couch | Melvin Varghese PhD.
[smart_track_player url="https://traffic.libsyn.com/secure/sellingthecouch/STC_262_Daniel_Fava_Edited.mp3" title="Improving Your Private Practice Website" background="default" ]
Like many of you, I’m looking forward to a different 2021, but I am grateful for what we’ve learned about ourselves, our businesses, and our resilience. Today’s topic is more relevant than ever, as we all want to learn more about improving our private practice website. Join us to learn more!
The post Session 262: Improving Your Private Practice Website with Daniel Fava appeared first on Selling the Couch.
[smart_track_player url="https://traffic.libsyn.com/secure/sellingthecouch/STC_261_Roseann_Capanna-Hodge_Edited.mp3" title="Adapting New Ways of Doing Things in Private Practice Because of Difficult Circumstances with Roseann Capanna-Hodge" background="default" ]
I’m hoping 2021 will be a new year of great experiences and opportunities after what we went through in 2020. Today’s show covers one specific way that clinicians have had to adapt to new ways of doing things because of difficult circumstances. Join us to learn more.
The post Session 261: Adapting New Ways of Doing Things in Private Practice Because of Difficult Circumstances with Roseann Capanna-Hodge, Ed.D, LPC, BCN, LLC appeared first on Selling the Couch.
[smart_track_player url="https://traffic.libsyn.com/secure/sellingthecouch/STC_260_Tori_Press_Edited.mp3" title="Following Your Heart And Finding Compassion For Yourself With Tori Press" background="default" ]
Today’s show wraps up this season of new episodes for 2020. STC will feature replays of our most popular episodes through November and December. I’ll be taking some extra time for self-care and family activities during the holiday months, along with putting together exciting new shows for 2021. This show keeps with that theme of following your heart and finding compassion for yourself. Join us!
The post Session 260: Following Your Heart And Finding Compassion For Yourself With Tori Press appeared first on Selling the Couch.
[smart_track_player url="https://traffic.libsyn.com/secure/sellingthecouch/STC_259_Melvin_Varghese_Edited.mp3" title="How I create Live Streaming Content With 30 Minutes of Prep" background="default" ]
This is the follow-up to last week’s podcast about creating a professional livestream. We’ve already covered the gear you’ll need, so today’s show focuses on creating the content for your livestream. Join me for Part 2!
The post Session 259: How I create Live Streaming Content With 30 Minutes of Prep: Melvin Varghese, Ph.D. appeared first on Selling the Couch.
[smart_track_player url="https://traffic.libsyn.com/secure/sellingthecouch/STC_258_Melvin_Varghese_Edited.mp3" title="Tips on Creating a Professional Livestream" background="default" ]
Today’s show is the first of a two-part series about livestreaming. I jumped somewhat hesitantly into this world a few months ago, and surprisingly, I’ve enjoyed this new outlet. Join me as I share what I’ve learned about livestreaming.
The post Session 258: Tips on Creating a Professional Livestream, Melvin Varghese, Ph.D. appeared first on Selling the Couch.
[smart_track_player url="https://traffic.libsyn.com/secure/sellingthecouch/STC_257_Connor_McClenahan_Edited.mp3" title="The Concept of Coworking Spaces And If They Meet The Needs of Clinicians" background="default" ]
How can the concept of coworking spaces apply to the world of therapy? Can a coworking space sufficiently meet the needs of clinicians? We’re exploring this topic in today’s show. Join us to learn more.
The post Session 257: The Concept of Coworking Spaces And If They Meet The Needs of Clinicians with Connor McClenahan, PsyD appeared first on Selling the Couch.
[smart_track_player url="https://traffic.libsyn.com/secure/sellingthecouch/STC_256_Michael_Spencer_Edited.mp3" title="Emotional And Professional Aspects For Clinicians to Consider Around Money" background="default" ]
Today’s show covers a topic we’ve talked about before, but there are many aspects for a clinician to consider around money. The topic carries many nuances and emotional ties, so we need to have continuing conversations about how we feel and think about money.
The post Session 256: Emotional And Professional Aspects For Clinicians to Consider Around Money with Michael Spencer, MS appeared first on Selling the Couch.
[smart_track_player url="https://traffic.libsyn.com/secure/sellingthecouch/STC_255_Elizabeth_Cush_Edited.mp3" title="Doing Our Own Work in Therapy To Be Effective as Business Owners And Good People in The World" background="default" ]
Today’s show focuses on the importance of doing our own work in therapy to be effective as business owners and good people in the world. In light of all the difficulties in navigating 2020, this topic has been extremely relevant, and I’ve seen firsthand the value of therapy in my own life. Join us to learn more.
The post Session 255: Doing Our Own Work in Therapy To Be Effective as Business Owners And Good People in The World with Elizabeth Cush, LCPC appeared first on Selling the Couch.
[smart_track_player url="https://traffic.libsyn.com/secure/sellingthecouch/STC_254_Sonya_Lott_Edited.mp3" title="Expert Wisdom on Complicated Grief and How To Deal with It" background="default" ]
With all that’s going on in the world around us, dealing with grief in various forms and degrees has become extremely relevant. Additionally, we all know people who are hurting through the loss of a loved one, so wisdom from an expert is timely and helpful. Besides, it’s always fun to have a good friend on the podcast! Join us!
The post Session 254: A Niche In Complicated Grief with Sonya Lott, PhD appeared first on Selling the Couch.
[smart_track_player url="https://traffic.libsyn.com/secure/sellingthecouch/STC_253_Laura_Vaillancourt_Edited.mp3" title="Getting Ready For Unexpected Situations And Dealing With Them in Private Practice with Laura Vaillancourt" background="default" ]
Today’s show is an interesting conversation about how unexpected things can happen, even in the world of private practice. You just never know what the future may hold!
Laura Vaillancourt previously appeared on STC to discuss her group private practice that focused on the elderly and their caregivers. Since that time, she was approached by a corporate company about selling her practice. It’s something she never imagined, but the offer came at the perfect time for Laura.
The post Session 253: Getting Ready For Unexpected Situations And Dealing With Them in Private Practice with Laura Vaillancourt, LMHC, GMHS appeared first on Selling the Couch.